No matching fragments found in this document.
[Plaintext beta, 26 September 1999]
TO THE READER:
Scientology is a religious philosophy containing pastoral
counseling procedures intended to assist an individual to gain
greater knowledge of self. The Mission of the Church of Scientology
is a simple one-to help the individual achieve greater self-confidence
and personal integrity, thereby enabling him to really trust and
respect himself and his fellow man. The attainment of the benefits
and goals of Scientology requires each individual's positive
participation, as only through his own efforts can he achieve these.
This is part of the religious literature and works of the Founder
of Scientology, L. Ron Hubbard. It is presented to the reader as part
of the record of his personal research into Life, and should be
construed only as a written report of such research and not as a
statement of claims made by the Church or the author.
Scientology and its sub-study, Dianetics, as practiced by the
Church, address only the spiritual side of Man. Although the
Church, as are all churches, is free to engage in spiritual healing, it
does not, as its primary goal is increased knowledge and personal
integrity for all. For this reason, the Church does not wish to accept
individuals who desire treatment of physical illness or insanity, but
refers these to qualified specialists in other organizations who deal
in these matters.
The Hubbard Electrometer is a religious artifact used in the
Church confessional. It, in itself, does nothing, and is used by
Ministers only, to assist parishioners in locating areas of spiritual
distress or travail.
We hope the reading of this book is only the first stage of a
personal voyage of discovery into the positive and effective religion
of Scientology.
THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Church of Scientology
This book belongs to _____
Date _____
The Organization Executive Course
AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF SCIENTOLOGY POLICY
by
L. Ron Hubbard
FOUNDER OF DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
5
PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION
Published by the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF CALIFORNIA
PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION
2723 West Temple Street
Los Angeles
California 90026
U.S.A.
The Church of Scientology is a Non-Profit Organization.
Dianetics(R) and Scientology(R) are Registered Names.
Copyright (c) 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974
1950, 1951, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959
1960, 1961, 1962, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Scientology is an Applied Religious Philosophy
No part of this book may be reproduced
without permission of the copyright owner.
First U.S. Printing 1974
Second US. Printing 1976
Complete Set ISBN 0-88404-033-X
Volume 5 ISBN 0-88404-030-5
The E-Meter is not intended or effective for the
diagnosis, treatment or prevention of any disease.
Dianetics and Scientology are the trademarks of L. Ron
Hubbard in respect of his published works.
Printed in the United States of America by Kingsport Press, Inc.
CONTENTS
QUALIFICATIONS
DIVISION 5
(CORRECTION DIVISION)
Part 1
FORM, PURPOSES, IDEAL SCENES,
PRODUCTS AND STATISTICS
31 July 1965 Purposes of the Qualifications Division 1
30 Sept. 1965 Statistics for Divisions (excerpt: Qual Division 5) 2
Circa 1965 Qualifications Division 5 Org Board Outline 3
20 Nov. 1965 The Promotional Actions of an Organization (excerpt:
Qual Division 5) 4
15 Dec. 1965 Additions to "The Promotional Actions of an
Organization" see - 4
2 Nov. 1967 Qualifications Division, Departments of Examinations,
Review and Certifications and Awards 5
2 Nov. 1967 Chaplain's Section (excerpt) 7
14 Mar. 1968 Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
(reissued 9 May 1969) 86
17 June 1968 ARC Break Registrars and Auditors (corrects
2 Nov. 1967) 7
29 Oct. 1968 Stat for Class VIII C/S Qual 7
29 Mar. 1970 Qual Stats Revised (amends 30 Sept. 1965) (excerpt) 8
3 June 1970 Orders to Divisions for Immediate Compliance
(excerpt: Division V) 9
17 June 1970 OIC Change - Cable Change (cancels 29 Mar. 1970,
amends 30 Sept. 1965) (excerpt) 10
15 July 1970 Reorganization of the Correction Division 11
8 Aug. 1970 Reorganization of the Correction Division (amends
15 July 1970) 14
22 Sept. 1970 Ideal Scenes and Statistics for Correction
Division Five 18
5 Feb. 1971 Org Gross Divisional Statistics Revised (excerpt:
Qual Division 5) (amends 30 Sept. 1965, 17 June
1970 & 22 Sept. 1970) 22
7 Feb. 1971 FEBC Org Board Division 5 23
2 Aug. 1971 Additional Qual Stat 28
14 Aug. 1971 Div V Mini Qual Org Board (revised 5 Sept.
1971 & 19 Nov. 1971) 29
2 Oct. 1971 Divisional Summary for Division V - Correction
Division 30
7 Dec. 1971 Correction Division - Purposes, Ideal Scenes,
Products, Statistics (cancels 22 Sept. 1970, 15
July 1970 & 8 Aug. 1970) 35
5 Feb. 1972 Div V Mini Qual Org Board (revision of 14 Aug.
1971 & 19 Nov. 1971) 42
16 Feb. 1972 The Purpose of the Department of Personnel
Enhancement 210
Part 2
KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING
7 Feb. 1965 Keeping Scientology Working (reissued 15 June
1970, 28 Jan. 1973 43
14 Feb. 1965 Safeguarding Technology (reissued 7 June 1967) 48
7 June 1967 Safeguarding Technology (reissue of 14 Feb. 1965) 48
31 May 1968 Scientology Technology 49
21 Nov. 1968 Senior Policy 49
20 May 1969 Keeping Dianetics Working in an Area (HCOB) 50
30 May 1970 Cutatives 52
15 June 1970 Keeping Scientology Working (reissue of 7 Feb.
1965) see - 43
17 June 1970 Technical Degrades 54
26 Oct. 1971 Tech Downgrades 56
Part 3
6 Aug. 1965 Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58
1 Feb. 1966 HGC Cure - Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63
1 Feb. 1966 Staff Auditor and Supervisor Procurement 65
10 Feb. 1966 Tech Recovery 66
7 Mar. 1966 HGC Cure (Continued) 69
7 Mar. 1966 Star Rates on Tech and Qual Staff 70
8 Mar. 1966 High Crime 71
21 July 1966 Tech vs Qual 82
28 Dec. 1967 Qual Senior Datum 73
2 Mar. 1968 Qual See Must Be Clear (modifies 15 Sept. 1967) 74
13 Mar. 1968 Statistics 75
9 Dec. 1968 Qual Has No Backlog (LRH ED 61 INT issued as 75
HCO PL 4 Oct. '70)
15 Nov. 1969 Rights and Duties 76
4 Oct. 1970 Qual Has No Backlog (originally issued as LRH ED
61 INT, 9 Dec. '68) 75
v
Part 4
19 Apr. 1965 Training and Processing Regulations Technical Discipline
- Students' Questions Vol. 1 - 388, Vol. 4 - 65
28 Apr. 1965 Technical Personnel Vol. 4 - 67
27 May 1965 Processing Vol. 4 - 570
1 July 1965 Ethics Chits Vol. 4 - 69
1 July 1965 Comm Cycle Additives Vol. 1 - 426
7 July 1965 Releases, Policy on Vol. 4 - 71
11 July 1965 Assignment of Tech Personnel (amends &
cancels 5 July 1965) Vol. 4 - 70
12 July 1965 Release Policies - Starting the Pc Vol. 4 - 572
19 July 1965 Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4 - 574
28 Dec. 1965 E-Meters Allowed Vol. 4 - 77
10 Feb. 1966 Bonuses for Service Delivery Vol. 3 - 204
9 May 1966 Bonuses Adjusted (correction to
10 Feb. 1966) Vol. 3 - 206
17 Oct. 1966 Bonuses Vol. 3 - 209
21 Nov. 1966 Addendum to HCO PL of 17 October
1966, "Bonuses" Vol. 3 - 211
20 Sept. 1967 Confidential Data Vol. 4 - 90
5 Feb. 1969 Press Policy - Code of a Scientologist Vol. 0 - 25
Part 5
THE AUDITOR'S CODE
20 Nov. 1950 Instruction Protocol - Official
(reissued 2 Sept. 1970) Vol. 4 - 108
14 Oct. 1968 The Auditor's Code AD 18 Vol. 4 - 111
2 Nov. 1968 Auditor's Code - Add to Pol Ltr
14 October AD 18 see Vol. 4 - 112
5 May 1969 Auditor's Code and Dianetics Vol. 4 - 234
2 Sept. 1970 Instruction Protocol - Official
(reissue of 20 Nov. 1950) Vol. 4 - 108
Part 6
FAST FLOW
Application of the Fast Flow System of Management to
Training, Processing, Examinations, Certification and Awards
29 Mar. 1965 Administration - Flows and Expansion - The Fast
Flow System 78
4 May 1965 Release Award - Saint Hill 80
9 July 1965 Qual Goofs (excerpt) 81
21 July 1966 Tech vs Qual 82
6 Aug. 1966 Declare, Multiple 83
9 Jan. 1968 Cancellation of HCO Policy Letter of 12 Sept. 1967
and HCO Policy Letter of 13 Sept. 1967 154
11 Jan. 1968 Speed of Service (ED 805 INT) 84
6 Feb. 1968 Organization - The Flaw 79
7 Feb. 1968 Fast Flow and Ethics 84
24 Feb. 1968 Fast Flow for SHSBC Students' Preclears (amends
30 Dec. 1966) 85
11 Mar. 1968 False Attestation 85
14 Mar. 1968 Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
Fast Flow (reissued 8 May 1968) 86
8 May 1968 Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
Fast Flow (reissue of 14 Mar. 1968) 86
15 May 1968 Additions to HCO PL 14 March 1968, reissued 8 May 1968,
"Policies Governing the Qualifications Division" 91
1 Aug. 1968 Cancel Attestation on UK and US SHSBC (LRH ED
29 WW) 92
7 Sept. 1968 Review Complete - Pc Attestations 92
13 Dec. 1968 Cancellation 93
17 Jan. 1969 Pc Attestations 93
20 Jan. 1969 A Vital Target - Trained Auditor Programme
(LRH ED 81 INT) Vol. 4 - 93
28 Jan. 1969 Addition to HCO Policy Letter of 14 March 1968 Policies
Governing the Qualifications Division - Fast Flow 94
8 May 1969 Fast Flow by Attestation Vol. 4 - 237
22 July 1969 Fast Flow Training (cancels 28 Jan. 1969) 94
3 Sept. 1969 Attestation Reinstated (LRH ED 82 INT issued as
a Policy Letter) 95
6 Apr. 1970 Scientology Release Attestation Form 96
10 May 1970 Single Declare (cancels 6 Aug. 1966) 98
21 May 1970 Fast Flow Grades Cancelled (LRH ED 103 INT) 99
23 May 1970 Cancellation of Policies Governing the
Qualifications Division - Fast Flow 101
25 June 1970 Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities
Gained & Inabilities Lost (revised & reissued 17
July 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159
Note: A study of this Division should include POLICIES ON "SOURCES OF
TROUBLE", Volume 1, pages 510 - 529.
vi
DEPARTMENT 13
DEPARTMENT OF VALIDITY
(A study of this Department should include the section in Volume 4
entitled CLASS AND GRADE PROGRAMME, pages 360 - 403,
and the section in this Volume entitled FAST FLOW, pages 78 - 101.)
QUAL I & I
(See also INVOICING, Volume 3, pages 255 - 270, and
ROUTING - RECEPTION, Volume 1, pages 61 - 75.)
28 Apr. 1965 Routing (excerpt) 141
10 July 1965 Lines and Terminals - Routing Vol. 0 -113
20 Oct. 1967 The Lines of the Qualifications Division
The Interview Invoice Section 102
14 Dec. 1971 The Lines of the Correction Division - Qual Interview
and Invoice Lines and Routings (amends 20 Nov. 1967)106
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Student Lines 107
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Preclear Lines 109
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Staff Service Lines 111
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Technical Lines 112
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Interview and Invoice Officer Lines -
Administration 113
Tech and Qual
LINES AND ROUTING
24 Apr. 1965 Review 341
28 Apr. 1965 Power Processes 343
4 July 1965 Pc Routing - Review Code 346
12 July 1965 Release Policies -
Starting the Pc Vol. 2 - 326, Vol. 4 - 572
19 July 1965 Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4 - 574
30 July 1965 Preclear Routing to Ethics Vol. 1 - 427, Vol. 4 - 606
5 Aug. 1965 Release Check Outs 143
6 Aug. 1965 Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58
9 Aug. 1965 Release Check Outs (addendum to 5 Aug. 1965) 145
24 Aug. 1965 Pcs Released Routing Vol. 4 - 606
24 Sept. 1965 Free Release Check Vol. 2 - 275
14 Oct. 1965 Potential Trouble Source Routing 348
30 Dec. 1965 PTS Auditing and Routing Vol. 1 - 439, Vol. 4 - 578
21 July 1966 Tech vs Qual 82
22 Sept. 1967 Routing Form Attestations Vol. 1 - 62
5 Mar. 1971 The Fantastic New HGC Line (HCOB) Vol. 4 - 581
6 Mar. 1971 Line Design - HGC Lines, An Example Vol. 4 - 585
EXAMINER
27 Nov. 1959 Purpose - HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 114
31 July 1965 Department of Examinations - Purpose (excerpt) 114
26 Oct. 1971 Tech Downgrades 56
STUDENT EXAMINER
(Includes HCO Board of Review data. Course curriculum information
is fully covered in Volume 4 under Department of Training.)
12 Dec. 1950 Certification Board - Duties and Responsibilities 115
1 Oct. 1958 HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 116
25 Nov. 1958 HCO Board of Review - Function and Practice 117
28 Feb. 1959 HCO Board of Review Duties 119
24 Apr. 1959 Final HPA Exam - HCO Board of Review 121
18 May 1960 Certifications 174
11 Oct. 1960 Case Assessments for Students 123
23 Nov. 1960 Reality Test for Students see - 128
22 Feb. 1961 Permanent Staff Exam 124
7 Apr. 1961 Examinations of Academy Students to be done
by D of P 126
19 Sept. 1961 Reality Test for Students (cancels 23 Nov. 1960) 128
20 Sept. 1961 Training Policy 128
2 Nov. 1961 Allowed Processes from Courses 129
2 Nov. 1961 Training Quality (reissued 3 Mar. 1967) 129
3 Jan. 1962 Upgrading of Auditors Vol. 4 - 308
7 Jan. 1962 HCO Board of Review - Class II Awards 130
22 Jan. 1962 Crash Programme Vol. 4 - 26
21 May 1962 Tape Examinations Vol. 4 - 158
31 July 1962 Oral Examination for HPA/HCA 131
vii
2 Oct. 1962 Termination & Classification Vol. 4 - 415
12 Oct. 1962 HPA/HCA Written Examination Vol. 4 - 334
13 Feb. 1963 Academy Taught Processes Vol. 4 - 339
14 Feb. 1963 How to Examine - Theory Examinations Vol. 4 - 163
5 Sept. 1964 Examinations 131
16 Sept. 1964 Terminations Vol. 4 - 447
31 Dec. 1964 Certificates 187
16 Mar. 1965 Further Material on Study - Examinations see - 133
2 Apr. 1965 Star - Rate Checkouts for Process
(modifies 27 Feb. 1965) Vol 4 - 453
9 Apr. 1965 Correction to Policy Letters on
Certification and Awards 191
12 Apr. 1965 Classification Pass Marks 131
16 Apr. 1965 Drills, Allowed Vol. 4 - 188
13 May 1965 SHSBC Unit - Graduation Vol. 4 - 457
16 May 1965 Academy Courses - General Remarks -
Zero Courses - HRS Vol. 4 - 347
17 May 1965 Academy Processing Vol. 4 - 224
23 Aug. 1965 Classification at Upper Levels -
Temporary Measure Vol. 4 - 392
14 Oct. 1965 Course Pattern (amends 27 Feb. 1965) Vol. 4 - 464
19 Oct. 1965 Release Declarations Vol. 4 - 597
10 Feb. 1966 Check Sheets, Course Vol. 4 - 466
29 June 1966 Keep Academy Check Sheets Up - to - Date 132
12 Oct. 1966 Examinations Vol. 4 - 198
1 Feb. 1967 Student Auditing of Preclears (replaces
29 Oct. 1965) 132
3 Mar. 1967 Training Quality (reissue of 2 Nov. 1961) 129
13 Sept. 1967 Further Material on Study - Examinations
(reissue of 16 Mar. 1965) 133
22 Sept. 1967 Solo Auditing Folders 135
19 Oct. 1968 Course Completion - Student Indicators Vol. 4 - 202
2 Dec. 1968 Examinations 135
13 Jan. 1969 Standard Examinations 136
5 May 1969 Dianetic Course Examinations 137
24 June 1969 Dianetics - Pre - Auditing Examination 138
21 May 1970 Fast Flow Grades Cancelled (LRH ED 103 INT) 99
8 June 1970 Student Auditing Vol. 4 - 227
21 Nov. 1971 Scientology Courses Examination Policy
(addition to 8 Mar. 1966) 139
PC EXAMINER
(See also FAST FLOW, pages 78 - 101.)
2 Apr. 1965 Meter Checks 140
28 Apr. 1965 Routing (excerpt) 141
4 July 1965 Pc Routing - Review Code 346
9 July 1865 Qual Goofs 142
12 July 1865 Release Policies - Starting the Pc Vol. 4 - 572
19 July 1965 Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4 - 574
26 July 1965 Release Declaration Restrictions - Healing
Amendments 193
5 Aug. 1965 Release Check Outs 143
6 Aug. 1965 Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58
7 Aug. 1965 Floating Needle on Former Releases 145
9 Aug. 1965 Release Check Outs (addendum to 5 Aug. 1965) 145
12 Oct. 1965 Release Declarations 146
22 Oct. 1965 Requirements for Student Classification 146
7 Nov. 1966 Clear Check-outs in Continental Orgs 147
6 Sept. 1967 Clear Check Outs see - 148
13 Sept. 1967 Clear Check Outs (amends 6 Sept. 1967) 148
15 Sept. 1967 Release and Clear Check Outs 149
15 Sept. 1967 Examiner Bonuses 151
25 Sept. 1967 Grades Above Clear 153
8 Oct. 1967 Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks (HCOB) 153
8 Nov. 1967 Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks Cancellation
of HCO Policy Letter of 12 Sept. 1967 and
HCO Policy Letter of 13 Sept. 1967 154
2 Mar. 1968 Qual Sec Must Be Clear (modifies 15 Sept. 1967) 74
18 Sept. 1968 Examiner's Form see - 163
30 Sept. 1968 Examiner's Form (Revised) see - 163
13 Oct. 1968 Examiner 155
11 Dec. 1968 Examiner (addendum to 13 Oct. 1968) 155
9 May 1969 Examiner's Form (30 Sept. 1968 revised) see - 163
13 May 1969 Cramming Section - Service to Trained Auditors 307
26 Jan. 1970 Examiner and Floating Needle (revises 13 Oct.
'68 & 11 Dec. '68) 156
26 Jan. 1970 Examiner's Form (replaces & revises 9
May 1969) see - 163
28 Mar. 1970 R6EW and Clear (cancels & replaces 28 Jan. 1970) 157
6 Apr. 1970 Scientology Release Attestation Form 96
11 Apr. 1970 Review Complete? 158
10 May. 1970 Single Declare (cancels 6 Aug. 1966) 98
viii
21 May 1970 Fast Flow Grades Cancelled (LRH ED 103 INT) 99
30 May 1970 Cutatives 52
25 June 1970 Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities Gained
and Inabilities Lost (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) see - 159
17 July 1970 Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities
Gained & Inabilities Lost (revision & reissue
of 25 June 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159
8 Sept. 1970 Examiner's 24 Hour Rule 161
13 Jan. 1971 Exam 24 Hour Rule (additional information) 162
8 Mar. 1971 Examiner's Form (replaces & revises 9 May
1969 & 26 Jan. 1970) 163
CERTS AND AWARDS
(A Study of this section should include the
CLASS AND GRADE PROGRAMME, Volume 4, pages 360 - 403.)
27 Nov. 1959 HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 164
31 July 1965 The Department of Certifications and Awards -
Purpose (excerpt) 164
12 Dec. 1950 Certification Board - Duties and Responsibilities 115
7 Nov. 1955 Hubbard Communications Office (Operational Bulletin)165
20 Mar. 1957 Staff Certificate Display 165
28 Apr. 1957 HCO Board of Review - Goal 165
19 Aug. 1957 Release All Certificates... 166
2 Sept. 1957 Field Certificates 166
19 Nov. 1957 HCO - Final Authority on Certificates (HCOB) 166
28 Mar. 1958 Only Organization Offices can Certify Clears (HCOB) 167
30 June 1958 Procedure for Certifying Clears (HCOB)
(revision of HCOB 28 May 1958) 168
30 June 1958 Clear Bracelet Procedure (revision of 25 Feb. 1958) 169
17 Nov. 1958 Clear Bracelets (HCOB) 170
25 Nov. 1958 HCO Board of Review - Function and Practice 117
28 Feb. 1959 HCO Board of Review Duties 119
20 Mar. 1959 Certificates Handling 170
29 July 1959 Sending Certificates by Mail 171
31 Aug. 1959 Certifications 171
27 Nov. 1959 HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 164
31 Dec. 1959 Routing of Certificates for Sterling Areas 172
22 Feb. 1960 HPA Qualifications 172
25 Apr. 1960 Important Certification Change 173
29 Apr. 1960 Certification Change 173
18 May 1960 Certifications 174
23 May 1960 Cancellation of Certificates Vol. 1 - 366
7 July 1960 Training Applicants Vol. 2 - 318, Vol. 4 - 132
11 Oct. 1960 Case Assessments for Students 123
12 Feb. 1961 Certificates and Awards - Revised List 175
16 May 1961 HPA/HCA Requirement 176
14 Nov. 1961 Stabilization of Clears 176
21 Nov. 1961 Training Course Requirements Vol. 4 - 306
30 July 1962 Certification and Validation Requirements Vol. 4 - 326
13 Sept. 1962 Certificate Application Form 177
28 Sept. 1962 Saint Hill Briefing Course Terminations Vol. 4 - 414
19 Oct. 1962 Preparation of HPA/HCA Certificates 179
4 Dec. 1962 R2 - 12 Validation 179
9 July 1963 HPA/HCA Certificate Check Sheet Vol. 4 - 342
12 Aug. 1963 Certificates and Awards 180
8 Oct. 1963 New Saint Hill Certificates and Course
Changes Vol. 4 - 434
26 Nov. 1963 Certificate and Classification Changes -
Everyone Classified Vol. 4 - 360
11 Dec. 1963 Classification for Everyone (amends 26 Nov.
1963) Vol. 4 - 364
5 Feb. 1964 Founding Scientologist Certificate Vol. 2 - 264
21 Feb. 1964 Issuing of Certificates 183
16 June 1964 Personnel Records - Admin Certs (modifies 12 Aug.
1963) 184
1 July 1964 Certification and Classification 186
18 Sept. 1964 Final Classification on Termination from
Saint Hill Vol. 4 - 447
23 Sept. 1964 Policies: Dissemination and
Programmes Vol. 2 - 41, Vol. 4 - 40
13 Nov. 1964 Provisional Class VI Classification
(cancels 18 Sept. 1964) Vol. 4 - 448
31 Dec. 1964 Certificates 187
5 Mar. 1965 Certificates and Awards - New Status of
Honorary Awards 188
7 Apr. 1965 Book Auditor 190
9 Apr. 1965 Correction to Policy Letters on Certification
and Awards 191
21 Apr. 1965 Basic Certificates - Uncertified Personnel 192
28 Apr. 1965 Power Processes 343
17 June 1965 Scientology Pins (amends & cancels
12 Apr. 1965) Vol. 2 - 381
26 July 1965 Release Declaration Restrictions - Healing
Amendments 193
17 Aug. 1965 Certification of Franchise Students 193
ix
23 Aug. 1965 Crediting of Auditor in Release Log Book 194
27 Oct. 1965 Grade Award Insignia 194
13 Nov. 1965 Release Pins 195
13 Dec. 1965 Numbering of Certificates 196
17 Jan. 1966 Unclassed Certificates - HAS, HBA, HQS 197
14 Feb. 1966 Doctor Title Abolished Vol. 2 - 119
1 Aug. 1966 Sign Ups and Discounts 198
16 Aug. 1966 Release Grades 199
13 Sept. 1967 Clear Check Outs (amends 6 Sept. 1967) 148
7 Sept. 1968 Review Complete - Pc Attestations 92
20 Jan. 1969 Classification see - 200
13 Feb. 1969 Ethics Protection Conditions Blue Star,
Green Star, Gold Star Vol. 0 - 248, Vol. 1 - 492
11 July 1969 Dianetics Auditing Completion Certificate 199
7 Sept. 1969 Classification (20 Jan. 1969 amended & reissued) 200
18 Nov. 1969 Dianetics - Right to Audit 201
18 Nov. 1969 Dianetics - Right to Teach 202
6 Apr. 1970 Scientology Release Attestation Form 96
25 Apr. 1970 Guarantee of Service Delivery 203
8 June 1970 Student Auditing Vol. 4 - 227
17 July 1970 Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities Gained
& Inabilities Lost (revision & reissue of 25 June
1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159
13 Jan. 1971 Attestation at Certs & Awards 204
6 Nov. 1971 Interneships Line - Up - Auditor Interneships 326
MEMBERSHIPS
(See also MEMBERSHIPS, Volume 3, pages
143, 150, 151, 157, 165, 245 - 254 and 258.)
6 Apr. 1957 Membership Handling (excerpt) (HCOB) 205
3 May 1960 Keeping Memberships in Force 206
28 July 1960 International Membership Privileges Vol. 2 - 195
5 June 1962 Permanent Staff Privilege 206
5 July 1963 Sales of Lifetime Memberships or Shares 207
21 Apr. 1965 Membership - Attestations 207
1 Sept. 1965 Current Policy - Franchise Vol. 3 - 253
1 Sept. 1965 Membership Policies 208
10 Dec. 1965 Membership Billing (Sec ED 147 INT) 209
15 Dec. 1965 Additions to "The Promotional Actions of an see - 205
Organization"
1 Aug. 1966 Sign Ups and Discounts 198
1 Aug. 1966 Refund Addition - Membership Refunds Vol. 3 - 347
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Student Lines - Membership Handling 108
DEPARTMENT 14
DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
(A study of this Department should include HATS, Volume 0, pages
63 - 77, and Volume 1, pages 153 - 159; DEV-T, Volume 0, pages
119 - 152; PROGRAMMING, PLANNING AND TARGETS, Volume 0, pages
303 - 335; and the PERSONNEL, DATA and ORG SERIES in the 1970
and 1971 Year Books.)
7 Dec. 1971 Purpose, Ideal Scene, Product, Statistic
Department of Personnel Enhancement 36
16 Feb. 1972 The Purpose of the Department of Personnel
Enhancement 210
AUDITING OF STAFF
11 Apr. 1957 Intensives for Staff see - 212
16 May 1957 Intensives for Staff 212
11 June 1957 Staff Intensives; (Assoc Sec Directive) 212
9 July 1958 Staff Clearing (HCOB) 213
27 Oct. 1958 Staff Member Processing 213
2 July 1959 Staff Auditing Requirement Vol. 0 - 120
22 July 1959 Processing of Staff Members 213
7 June 1960 Staff Auditing 213
3 Aug. 1960 Security of Persons Leaving Staffs 353
7 Nov. 1960 HCO Area Secretary Hat Addition Vol. 1 - 31
21 Dec. 1960 Staff Clearing - New Policy 214
22 Mar. 1961 Staff Members Ordered to Processing 215
9 Apr. 1961 Staff Intensives (modified) 216
3 Oct. 1961 Auditing Schedules 217
6 Oct. 1961 Staff Clearing 218
27 Dec. 1961 Sec Checks on Staff 356
x
27 Dec. 1961 Processing D of P 356
22 Jan. 1962 Crash Programme Vol. 4 - 26
17 May 1962 Staff Staff Auditor's Hat 219
10 Sept. 1962 Staff Clearing Program 221
12 Sept. 1962 Goal Processing - Importance of 224
30 Apr. 1963 The Saint Hill Staff Co-Audit 225
17 June 1963 Staff Clearing Program (amends 10 Sept. 1962) 226
22 Aug. 1963 ARC Break Assessments on Staff 228
4 Dec. 1963 Org Staff W/H Checks 228
13 Dec. 1963 Co-Audit 229
21 Feb. 1964 Staff Regulations - Auditing Versus Job Vol. 0 - 43
19 Mar. 1964 Staff Regulations - Staff Intensives 230
10 Aug. 1964 Good Workers Vol. 0 - 44
8 Apr. 1965 HCO, Org Executive and Divisional Secretaries,
Justice on, and Auditing of Vol. 1 - 565
23 Apr. 1965 Clarification - Auditing of Org Executives Vol. 1 - 566
29 Apr. 1965 Bonuses 231
13 Jan. 1966 Regulations for Auditing of Staff and Students 233
20 July 1970 Cases and Morale of Staff 234
STAFF TRAINING OFFICER
(See also sections on HATS, Volume 0, pages 63 - 77,
and Volume 1, pages 153 - 159.)
21 Sept. 1969 Staff Training Officer 237
2 May 1957 Qualifications of a Permanent Staff Member see - 239
3 June 1957 Qualifications of a Permanent Staff Member
(Assoc Sec Directive) 239
5 Sept. 1957 Validation of Staff 240
10 Mar. 1959 Permanent Staff Members 240
18 Jan. 1960 Qualifications of Permanent Staff Members 241
2 June 1960 Requirements for Staff Posts 241
26 Nov. 1960 Permanent Staff Member Requirements 242
13 Feb. 1961 Permanent Staff Requirement Changes (modifies
26 Nov. 1960) 243
17 Feb. 1961 Staff Post Qualifications
Permanent Executives to be Approved see - 244
22 Feb. 1961 Permanent Staff Exam 124
26 Feb. 1961 Qualification of Executives 243
28 Mar. 1961 Personnel Policies - Staff Post Qualifications
Permanent Executives to be Approved (modifies
17 Feb. 1961) 244
22 July 1961 Executives' Pay 247
23 Oct. 1961 Pay of Executives (modifies 22 July 1961) 247
23 Jan. 1962 Permanent Executives (amends 17 Feb. 1961) 247
21 May 1962 Permanent Staff 248
5 June 1962 Permanent Staff Privilege 248
12 Aug. 1963 Certificates and Awards 180
16 June 1964 Personnel Records - Admin Certs (modifies 12
Aug. 1963) 184
16 Apr. 1965 Drills, Allowed Vol. 4 - 188
21 Apr. 1965 Basic Certificates - Uncertified Personnel 192
4 Jan. 1966 Personnel Staff Status 249
29 Apr. 1966 Policy Check Outs and E-Meter 252
20 July 1966 Staff Status see - 253
22 Aug. 1966 Addendum to HCO Pol Ltr of 20 July 1966
"Staff Status" 254
21 Mar. 1967 Org Exec Course Vol. 0 - 3
19 May. 1969 Staff Status (20 July 1966 amended) 253
5 Jan. 1969 Staff Status Two (modifies 4 Jan. 1966) 255
21 Sept. 1969 Staff Training Officer 237
2 Aug. 1971 Study Time 256
13 Jan. 1972 Inter - Dependent Hatting and Programming Functions 276
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING
22 Jan. 1972 Personnel Programming 258
23 Oct. 1971 Personnel Programming Rules (HCOB) 259
23 Oct. 1971 Personnel Programming Technology (HCOB) 262
23 Oct. 1971 Personnel Programming White Form (HCOB) 264
23 Oct. 1971 Master Personnel Programming Tally Sheet (HCOB) 268
23 Oct. 1971 Personnel Programmer Ethics Intervention
Rights (HCOB) 272
23 Oct. 1971 Individual Staff Study Orders (HCOB) 273
13 Jan. 1972 Tips on Personnel Programming (HCOB) 274
13 Jan. 1972 Inter - Dependent Hatting and Programming Functions 276
14 Jan. 1972 Management Cycle (24 June 1970 revised) 277
14 Jan. 1972 The "OK To Be A - - " System 278
xi
CHAPLAIN
The Church of Scientology Creed 280
20 Mar. 1957 Ministerial Ordination 281
3 May 1957 Ministerial Qualifications see - 281
15 Aug. 1957 Ministerial Qualifications (supersedes 3
May 1957) see - 281
12 June 1958 Ministerial Qualifications (second revision) 281
29 Oct. 1962 Religion 282
12 Aug. 1963 Certificates and Awards - Ministerial Awards
and Insignia 182
2 Aug. 1965 Chaplain 283
19 Jan. 1966 Chaplain, Transfer of 283
5 Aug 1966 Chaplain's Court - Civil Hearings 284
15 Nov. 1966 Routing of Chaplain's Court Orders 286
22 Sept. 1967 Ministerial Qualifications (reissue of 12 June
1958) see - 281
2 Nov. 1967 Chaplain's Section (excerpt) 287
2 Sept. 1968 Chaplain 287
12 Feb. 1969 Religion 288
6 Mar. 1969 Scientology is a Religion 289
4 Apr. 1969 Scientology Marriage Ceremonies 291
24 Apr. 1969 A Scientology Church Register 291
26 Jan. 1970 Scientology Prayer 292
16 Apr. 1970 Morale 293
20 July 1970 Cases and Morale of Staff 234
27 Oct. 1970 A Book: "The Background to the Religion of
Scientology and Ceremonies of the Church of
Scientology of California WW" 294
12 Apr. 1971 Ordination Ceremony 295
4 June 1971 Prayer Day Ordination Ceremony 296
MEDICAL OFFICER
3 Oct. 1970 Medicine and Dianetics 298
3 Oct. 1970 The Role of the Medical Officer 300
11 Oct. 1970 Medical Officer's Code 303
DEPARTMENT 15
DEPARTMENT OF CORRECTION
ORG LIBRARY - STAFF LIBRARIAN
2 Oct. 1971 Divisional Summary for Division V - Correction
Division (FDD 18 Qual Int) - Staff Librarian 32
7 Dec. 1971 Purpose, Ideal Scene, Product, Statistic - Staff
Librarian 38
CRAMMING
(A study of this section should include COURSE SUPERVISION,
Volume 4, pages 141 - 218.)
10 Nov. 1965 The Cramming Section 305
6 Oct. 1966 Cramming - Students Who Flunk Classification
for a Level 306
13 May 1969 Cramming Section - Service to Trained Auditors 307
INTERNESHIPS
28 Aug. 1959 BScn Interneships 308
16 May 1961 HPA/HCA Requirement 176
29 May 1962 Interne Hat - What is Expected of Internes 309
29 June 1962 Staff and Interne Auditors 311
1 Feb. 1966 HGC Cure - Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63
1 Feb. 1966 Staff Auditor and Supervisor Procurement 65
7 Mar. 1966 HGC Cure (Continued) 69
8 Mar. 1966 High Crime 71
11 Sept. 1967 Interne Training Programme 312
27 Aug. 1968 Sea Org Internes 315
13 Nov. 1969 Interneships and Case Supervisors 316
18 Apr. 1970 Correction to HCO P/L 13 November 1969 see - 316
20 July 1970 Internships and Case Supervisors (amends
13 Nov. '69 & 18 Apr. '70) 317
22 July 1970 Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech 319
17 Feb. 1971 Class VII 320
19 July 1971 Internes (HCOB) 322
24 Aug. 1971 Interne Checksheets - Okays to Audit 324
6 Nov. 1971 Selling Internships (amends 20 July 1970) 325
6 Nov. 1971 Interneships Line - Up - Auditor Interneships 326
6 Nov. 1971 Case Supervisor Interneships 328
6 Nov. 1971 HGC Auditors and HGC Auditors in Training 329
8 Nov. 1971 Interneships - Electronic Attestation Form see - 330
18 Feb. 1972 Interneships - Electronic Attestation Form
(revises 8 Nov. 1971) 330
22 Feb. 1972 Interneship Errors Found 332
xii
TRAINING OF TECH STAFF
13 Mar. 1961 Staff Auditor Training Vol. 1 - 114
2 Apr. 1961 Staff Auditor Training - Sequence of Study 334
5 Jan. 1962 Examination for HGC Auditors 336
21 Sept. 1965 Auditor Estimation Test 337
1 Feb. 1966 HGC Cure - Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63
7 Mar. 1966 Star Rates on Tech and Qual Staff 70
8 Mar. 1966 High Crime 71
12 Jan. 1969 Auditors and Training 340
2 Aug. 1971 Study Time 256
REVIEW
24 Apr. 1965 Review 341
28 Apr. 1965 Power Processes 343
29 Apr. 1965 Ethics - Review (correction to 24 Apr. 1965)
(excerpt) 345
4 July 1965 Pc Routing - Review Code 346
9 July 1965 Qual Goofs - Review Holds (excerpt) 347
12 July 1965 Release Policies - Starting
the Pc Vol. 2 - 326, Vol. 4 - 572
19 July 1965 Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4 - 574
30 July 1965 Preclear Routing to Ethics Vol. 1 - 427, Vol. 4 - 606
6 Aug. 1965 Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58
9 Aug. 1965 Release Check Outs (addendum to 5 Aug. 1965) 145
14 Oct. 1965 Potential Trouble Source Routing 348
30 Dec. 1965 PTS Auditing and Routing Vol. 1 - 439, Vol. 4 - 578
1 Feb. 1966 HGC Cure - Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63
21 July 1966 Tech vs Qual 82
28 Dec. 1967 Qual Senior Datum 73
7 Sept 1968 Review Complete - Pc Attestations 92
9 Dec. 1968 Qual Has No Backlog (LRH ED 61 INT issued
as HCO PL 4 Oct. 1970) 75
17 Jan. 1969 Pc Attestations 93
11 Apr. 1970 Review Complete? 158
21 May 1970 Fast Flow Grades Cancelled (LRH ED 103 INT) 99
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Preclear Lines 109
ARC BREAK PROGRAMME
16 Sept. 1957 HGC Policy Vol. 4 - 498
6 June 1962 ARC Break Clean - up Programme 349
1 Sept. 1967 ARC Break Cleanup Programme (excerpt from
ED 473 WW 842 SH) 350
15 Sept. 1967 Release and Clear Check Outs 149
17 June 1968 ARC Break Registrars and Auditors (corrects
2 Nov. 1967) 350
20 Jan. 1969 ARC Break Program 351
23 Feb. 1970 Ethics - Quality of Service Vol. 1 - 506, Vol. 4 - 100
9 Aug. 1971 ARC Break Program (cancels 20 Jan. 1969) 352
14 Dec. 1971 Qual Preclear Lines 109
Appendix
3 Aug. 1960 Security of Persons Leaving Staffs 353
13 Dec. 1960 Security Checks 353
28 Jan. 1961 New Security Rules 354
25 Mar. 1961 Security Rules (cancels 28 Jan. 1961) 355
27 Dec. 1961 Sec Checks on Staff 356
27 Dec. 1961 Processing D of P 356
17 Jan. 1962 Responsibility Again (reissued 7 June 1967) 357
22 Jan. 1962 Security Checks 358
27 Feb. 1962 Clean Hands Clearance Check 358
30 Oct. 1962 Security Risks Infiltration 359
19 Mar. 1968 Staff Status (20 July 1966 amended) 254
26 Aug. 1968 Security Checks Abolished 360
30 July 1970 The Tech and Ethics of Confessionals 361
15 Nov. 1970 Confessionals 364
Note: The materials in this volume are listed mainly in order
of appearance. Additionally, some policies are listed in more
than one section (with page numbers in italics), as they deal
with more than one area of operation. Relevant policies from
other OEC volumes are also listed, with volume and page numbers
in italics. A complete date order index appears in the back of
the book, starting on page 366.
The GREEN FORM and other technical forms not included in the
OEC Volumes are found in the technical materials of the levels
where they specifically apply.
xiii
YOUR POST
A post in a Scientology Organization isn't a job. It's a trust
and a crusade.
We're freemen and women-probably the last free men and women on
Earth. Remember, we'll have to come back to Earth some day no
matter what "happens" to us.
If we don't do a good job now we may never get another chance.
Yes, I'm sure that's the way it is.
So we have an organization, we have a field we must support, we
have a chance.
That's more than we had last time night's curtain began to fall on
freedom.
So we're using that chance.
An organization such as ours is our best chance to get the most
done. So we're doing it!
L. RON HUBBARD
xiv
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 JULY 1965
Remimeo
All Qual Hats
Qual Division
(Star-Rated on all check-outs)
PURPOSES OF THE QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
The Qualifications Division is Division Number 5 of the
Organization.
This Division is headed by the Qualifications Secretary.
It consists of three departments.
The Department of Examinations, Department Number 13, is headed
by the Director of Examinations.
The Department of Review, Department Number 14, is headed by the
Director of Review.
The Department of Certifications and Awards, Department Number
15, is headed by the Director of Certifications.
The Departments have various sections and units.
THE QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
The prime purpose of the Qualifications Division is:
"TO ENSURE THE RESULTS OF SCIENTOLOGY, CORRECT THEM WHEN NEEDFUL
AND ATTEST TO THEM WHEN ATTAINED."
The activities of the Division are covered by the prime purpose
of the Division and all rules, regulations, policies and routes
relating to that Division are for the purpose of assisting it to
carry out its purpose and no order, rule, regulation, policy or
route may swerve it or its Departments, Sections or Units or its
executives or personnel from carrying out the purposes outlined
herein.
DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS
The prime purpose of the Department of Examinations and all its
sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON ENSURE THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE
ORGANIZATION ARE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT, THAT STUDENTS AND
PRECLEARS ARE WITHOUT FLAW FOR THEIR SKILL OR STATE WHEN PASSED AND
THAT ANY TECHNICAL DEFICIENCY OF ORG PERSONNEL IS REPORTED AND
HANDLED SO THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE ORGANIZATION CONTINUE
TO BE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT."
IT MUST BE KEPT IN MIND THAT THE PRODUCT OF THE ORGANIZATION IS
NOT SCIENTOLOGISTS, BUT CONDITIONS CHANGED BY SCIENTOLOGY.
THEREFORE THE ABILITY OF THE AUDITOR TO CHANGE CONDITIONS IN,
PRECLEARS AND THE ABILITY OF THE PRECLEAR OR CLEAR TO CHANGE
CONDITIONS ALONG THE DYNAMICS ARE THE ONLY CONCERN OF THE
DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes relating
to this department were intended to assist it and expedite the
carrying out of its purpose. Therefore no order, rule, regulation,
policy or route may be interpreted to swerve the Department of
Examinations from its prime purpose, which is paramount in all its
activities. Its policies and routes exist to carry out its prime
purpose and for no other reason.
The integrity of Scientology and its hope for beings in this
Universe are entrusted to the Department of Examinations.
THE DEPARTMENT OF REVIEW
The prime purpose of the Department of Review and all its
sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON CORRECT ANY NON-OPTIMUM RESULT OF THE ORGANIZATION
AND ALSO TO ADVISE WAYS AND MEANS BASED ON ACTUAL EXPERIENCE IN THE
DEPARTMENT TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST ANY CONTINUED POOR RESULT FROM ANY
TECHNICAL PERSONNEL OR THE FUNCTION OF THE ORGANIZATION."
The Department of Review must take over any non-optimum product
of the organization, whether a technical project, an activity, a
student or a preclear and bring about an attainment of the expected
result regardless of obstacles.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes relating to
this department were intended to assist it and expedite the
carrying out of its purpose. Therefore no order, rule, regulation,
policy or route may be used to swerve the Department of Review from
its prime purpose of ensuring that the results of Scientology are
excellent and consistent.
THE DEPARTMENT OF CERTIFICATIONS AND AWARDS
The Department of Certifications and Awards has the prime
purpose in all its functions:
"TO HELP RON ISSUE AND RECORD VALID ATTESTATIONS OF SKILL, STATE
AND MERIT HONESTLY DESERVED, ATTAINED OR EARNED BY BEINGS,
ACTIVITIES OR AREAS."
The validity of issue and decrying any false issue are the
concerns of the Department of Certifications and Awards.
The Department is fully within its rights to recommend issue
when it is unjustly denied or to refuse issue when it is obviously
riot in keeping with its prime purpose.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes were
intended to assist it and expedite the carrying out of its purpose.
Therefore no order, rule, regulation, policy or route may deny the
personnel of the Department the right to carry out its prime
purpose as above.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 SEPTEMBER 1965
Remimeo [Excerpt]
Advisory Councils
Advisory Committees
STATISTICS FOR DIVISIONS
Qual Division 5 -
Cash Collected by reason of the Division
for the week.
This division's certs and grades and awards are all really the
Tech Division's work. But we early found that a Qual Division's
various services were paid for when good and not when bad. So this
division's gross statistic is how much cash was paid-not later
collected, for Qual Division services.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Excerpted from HCO P/L 30 September 1965, Statistics for
Divisions. A complete copy of this P/L in in Volume 1, page 328. It
was later amended by HCO P/Ls 29 March 1970, Tech and Qual Stats
Revised, page 8; 17 June 1970 Issue II, OIC Change-Cable Change,
page 10; 5 February 1971 Issue V, Org Gross Divisional Statistics
Revised, page 22; and 5 February 1971 Issue 111, FEBC Executive
Director Org GDSes, in the 1971 Year Book.]
2
[chart]
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION 5
TECHNICAL DIVISION 4 1 DISTRIBUTION DIVISION
QUALIFICATIONS SECRETARY
III
TECHNICAL SECRETARY QUALIFICATIONS SEC SEC. DISTRIBUTION SECRET
I I
TECHNICAL SEC. SEC. DISTRIBUTION SEC. 8
I RESULT CORRECTION ABILITY I
ACTIVITY PRODUCTION Department 13 Department 14 Department 15
PURPOSES CLEARING
Department 11 Department 12 Department 16 Department 17
DEPARTMENT OF DEPARTMENT OF DEPARTMENT OF
DEPARTMENT OF DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS REVIEW CERTIFICATION
DEPARTMENT OF DEPARTMENT OF
TRAINING PROCESSING & AWARDS PUBLIC CLEARING
INFORMATION
Director of Director of Director of Director of Director of
Director of Director of
Training Processing Examinations Review Certification Public
Clearing
& Awards Information
Copyright (c) 1965, 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THE PROMOTIONAL ACTIONS OF
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION 5
(From HCO PL 20 November 1965, The Promotional Actions
of an
Organization, with the additions 81a and 85a from HCO
PL 15
December 1965 and HCO PL 4 February 1966. These are
given complete for all divisions in
Basic Staff Volume 0, starting on page 84.)
72. QUALIFICATIONS SECRETARY -. Co-ordinates and gets done the
promotional functions of Division 5.
73. DEPARTMENT 13 (Dept of Examinations) - Makes sure no untrained
student or unsolved case gets past.
74. Finds the real errors in any failures (no student or pc ever
gets upset if the actual error is spotted-they only get upset when
a wrong error is found).
75. Refuses to get so concentrated on "validating people" that
errors are overlooked for this backfires also.
76. Routes those passed quickly to Certs and Awards and those
failed quickly to Review and routes any Ethics matters discovered
promptly to Ethics.
77. DEPARTMENT 14 (Dept of Review) - Quickly repairs any flat ball
bearings turned out by the Tech Division so they will be no discredit
to org.
78. Gives brilliant standard isolation of any errors in students or
pcs-discovers them with ease.
79. Repairs thoroughly.
80. Makes a continual effort to get failed cases in the field or
ARC Broken Scientologists in for a Review.
81. Sends to Ethics all Ethics matters discovered. Cultivates an
aura of effortless competence.
81 a. Review makes the dissatisfied satisfied with the Org by
remedying all tech misses.
82. DEPARTMENT 15 (Dept of Certs and Awards) - Issues credentials
that will be seen around-pins that people will wear, certificates
they will hang up, cards they will show.
83. Never issues anything falsely as it will be hidden or
discredited.
84. Issues literature to all new releases and other completions
that tells them what they have attained and what next to do and
encourages them to do it.
85. Heavily promotes auditors outside the org to bring in their pcs
for examination and Release declarations.
85 a. Pushes along the Free Membership programme and makes sure
Accounts sends a bill for the next year's Membership the moment the
six months expires AND IS ITS STATISTIC.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1967
Remimeo
HCO Exec Sec Hat
Org Exec Sec Hat
Qual Sec Hat
Dept of Exams Hats
Dept of Review Hats
Dept of C & A Hats
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION, DEPARTMENTS OF
EXAMINATIONS, REVIEW AND CERTIFICATIONS AND AWARDS
All Organization Boards are to be posted in accordance with the
following line-up which complies with HCO Policy Letter of February
28, 1966 entitled, "Danger Condition Data, Why Organizations Stay
Small":
DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS
Director of Examinations
QUAL INTERVIEW & INVOICE SECTION
Qual Interview & Invoice In-charge
Qual Invoice Clerk
Qual Routing Clerk
Qual Folder Clerk
Qual Invoice Routing Clerk
Qual Page
STUDENT EXAMINATIONS SECTION
Student Examinations In-charge
Certification Examiner
Classification Examiner
Examination Marker
Practical Demonstrations Examiner
PC EXAMINATIONS SECTION
Pc Examinations In-charge
HGC Pc Examiners
Student Pc Examiners
CLEAR CHECKING SECTION
Clear Checker
OT CHECKING SECTION
OT Checker
DEPARTMENT OF REVIEW
Director of Review
CASE SECTION
Chief Case Officer
CASE OFFICER UNIT
Case Officers
CASE REVIEW UNIT I
Leading Review Auditor Unit I
Review Auditors
5
CASE REVIEW UNIT 2
Leading Review Auditor Unit 2
Review Auditors
CRAMMING SECTION
Chief Cramming Officer
Cramming Officers
STAFF SECTION
Staff Section Officer
STAFF TRAINING UNIT
Chief Staff Training Officer
Staff Training Officers
STAFF REVIEW UNIT
Chief Staff Review Officer
Staff Review Officers
Org Exec Course
Org Exec Course Supervisor
Org Exec Course Administrator
INTERN TRAINING SECTION
Intern Training Officer
ORG REVIEW & CORRECTION SECTION
Org Review and Correction
DEPARTMENT OF CERTS AND AWARDS
Director of Certs & Awards
INVOICE SECTION
Invoice Clerk
LOGGING SECTION
Logging Clerk
CERTIFICATE & AWARDS PREPARATION SECTION
Certificate & Awards Preparation Clerk
CERTIFICATE & AWARDS STOCK SECTION
Certificate & Awards Stock Clerk
MEMBERSHIP SECTION
Membership In-charge
Membership Index Card Clerk
Membership Card Preparation Clerk
Membership Card Issuance Clerk
Memberships Promotion Clerk
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd
Copyright 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
6
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1967
[Excerpt]
CHAPLAIN'S SECTION
Chaplain
Chaplain's Court Arbiter
Chaplain's Court Clerk
Chaplain's Court Files Clerk
Sunday Services Promotion Clerk
Chaplain's Sunday Services Assistant
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd
Copyright 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 2 November 1967, Distribution
Division, Departments Of Public information, Clearing and Success.
A complete copy is in Volume 6, page 9.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1968
Issue II
(Corrects HCO PL 2 November 1967 Dissem Division and
HCO PL 2 November 1967 Qualifications Division)
Remimeo
ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS
ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS ARE RELOCATED IN QUAL
TO WORK AS A TEAM.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:js.rd
Copyright (c) 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1968
Remimeo
STAT FOR CLASS VIII C/S QUAL IS NUMBER NAMES IN CF.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
7
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MARCH 1970
[Excerpt]
Remimeo
QUAL STATS REVISED
(Amends HCO P/Ls 30 Sept 65 "Statistics for
Divisions", 22 Sept 69 "HGC Statistic" and 27 Apr 67 "Tech
Division Statistic" and 31 Mar 69 "OIC Report Forms")
Qual statistics are hereby revised as follows:
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
Qual See:
1. GI divided by total number on staff.
2. Total number of creditable success stories received less
total number of poor success stories received.
Dir Exams:
1. Total number of pcs completed on a grade, intensive or
review action with very good indicators.
2. Total number of outnesses reported.
Dir Review:
1. Total number of auditors who have an "OK to Audit" and total
number of Supervisors who have an "OK to supervise" who are
actually auditing and supervising.
2. Total number of students or pcs corrected who paid in full,
plus staff corrected with VGIs.
Qual CIS: Total number of active auditors on staff.
Dir C & A: Total number of certs issued.
Cramming Officer: Total number of students completed less total
number of students back to Cramming on the same level of training.
Staff Training Officer: Total number of hours attended by staff
on staff training divided by the total number on staff.
Qual Consultant: Total number of students routed back on course.
Note that these statistics stress the inter-dependence of Tech
and Qual with the
rest of the org and reflect the actual production in terms of
result.
It may not be realized that the Qual statistic "GI divided by
total number on
Staff" is in fact an industrial statistic which accurately shows
the value of each staff member.
Judy Ziff
D/CS-5
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Excerpt (c) from HCO P/L of 29 March 1970, Tech and Qual Stats
Revised, a complete copy of which is to in the 1970 Year Book. It
was later cancelled by HCO P/L 17 June 1970 Issue II, OIC
Change-Cable Change, page 10.]
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE FROM L. RON HUBBARD
LRH ED 107 INT
[Excerpt)
3 June 1970
To: Class IV Orgs and Saint Hills for ACTION. AOs for Info.
From: Ron
Subject: ORDERS TO DIVISIONS FOR IMMEDIATE COMPLIANCE [ORDERS TO
DIVISION V-Excerpted]
Reference: LRH ED 104 INT Auditing Sales and Delivery Pgm No.
1,
LRH ED 106 INT What Was Wrong
DIVISION V
1. The purpose of Division V is to CORRECT malfunctions in the
org. Realize that the whole org has moved into Div V and squashed
it. Begin a program of unloading functions.
2. Shift the CIS to Div IV. There is no Div V CIS. The Review
Auditor does his own C/Sing on cases he repairs.
3. Refuse to do any major actions on cases. Repair them so they
will now run and shift them back to Div IV.
4. Get in DECLARE discipline at the Examiners. Refuse to declare
more than one grade at a time. Get the pc to state the ability he
has attained, not "I'm Level 0 now" but the exact wording of that
grade. Refuse flatly to pass any pc run only on one process for a
grade as disclosed by folder inspection. Get the earliest Examiner
discipline in. Folder, meter, pc statement as to the exact end
phenomena of the Grade. Student by examination and meter check for
false completion.
5. Refuse to back down when anyone in Tech starts yelling you're
invalidating their gains or repute. That's how all this decline
started-an invalidation of Qual opinion by the Tech See at SH 1965.
Wiped out Qual. Five years later the subject was gone over the
whole world and having to be put back.
6. Provide helpful service to students and pcs. Make them feel
especially safe in Qual.
7. Really repair students with your interest, 2 way comm and
learning drills (they'll be coming out in HCO B again shortly).
8. Really repair pcs using assessed lists like the GF, L1B, L4A,
ruds, etc so they're flying.
9. Take credit from Tech for every auditing hour (or part
thereof costs an hour) you spend on a pc Take all pc repair from
hours pc has bought. Only if he has run out of Tech hours and needs
repair do you charge him. Try to get him to buy a new package of
hours as soon as possible-but of course a pc needing repair isn't
likely to buy more until repaired.
10. Get in your Staff Training Officer (who in small orgs can
also be Cramming) and begin to push the staff through Staff Status
I and 11 and III and OEC so the org form will be held and thus keep
the org from being in a continual correction status.
11. Get your Certs and Awards requiring all certs to be signed
by the HCO Area See (or HCO ES) before they are valid. Get the
signed cert routed back for presentation by the Registrar to the pc
or student.
12. Give me a great big hand getting this Auditing Sales and
Service Pgm No. I IN so that it stays in and totally assume the
function of org correction for which Qual was designed. Qual was
meant to do Product Correction and Org Correction. It got so bad
Qual became the Product Division not the Product Correction
Division. So help me out by getting the org to be a service org
producing pcs run on all grade processes for each grade and
auditors who know they use what they learn.
[seal]
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dz.rd
9
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1970
Remimeo Issue II
All Orgs, [Excerpt]
Scn and URGENT
so OIC CHANGE - CABLE CHANGE
(Effective for the week beginning 24 July 1970 and ending for
first report 30 July 1970 and continuing thereafter.)
(Cancels HCO PL 29 Mar 70, Tech and Qual Stats.)
(Amends HCO PL 30 Sept 65, Statistics for Divisions.)
Qual Stars are revised as follows:
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
Qual See and GDS:
1. The amount of money paid for student training into the org
for a certificate course. (All solo excepted.)
2. The number of creditable success stories turned in less 2
points for every no-story and less 2 more points for every ethics
action taken on a student, pc or staff member.
Dir Exams:
1. I point for every non F/N Examiner Report. (It being
understood that an Examining Report is done after every session.)
2. 10 points for every uncertain or flunked student. (It being
understood that
students are given meter checks by Examiner and spot Exams for
every theory or practical completion.)
Note: Each of the 2 Examiner stats loses 100 points for each
proven instance of evaluation, invalidation of students or pcs by
expression or statement by the Examiner, instances of penalty to be
decided by Qual See, Div 6 See and a third member agreed upon by
the two.
Dir Review:
1. Errors discovered and corrected in pcs' folders, I point for
each plus 10 points for each student completed with VGls.
2. Number of falsely signed off items on Div IV checksheets
corrected in Cramming.
Cramming Officer:
See No. 2 Dir Review.
Staff Training Officer:
1. GI divided by the number of people.
2. Course completions by staff members.
Qual Consultant:
1. Number of staff, students and pcs spotted in the org during
week with BIs.
2. Number of BIs routed or handled.
No Qual C/S Stat as there now isn't one.
Review Auditor:
1. Errors discovered and corrected in pcs' folders, I point for
each.
2. 10 points for each pc completed with VGls.
Dir C & A:
1. Number of classifications rejected by reason of inadequate
case gain or false representations.
2. Number of awards refused by reason of inadequate hours or
abilities for the level not attained.
It will be noted that these statistics reflect the original
design of Tech and Qual
and do not favor "Quickie Grades" for pcs, inabilities in
auditors, unpaid staffs or an ARC Broken field.
Accuracy in compiling these stats, posting them weekly where
they can be seen
and managing on the basis of these is a survival factor in an org.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.ka.rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 17 June 1970, Issue 11, OIC
Change-Cable Change. A complete copy is in Volume 1, page 359.]
[Amended by HCO P/Ls 5 February 1971 Issue V, Org Gross
Divisional Statistics Revised, page 22, and 5 February 1971 Issue
III, FEBC Executive Director Org GDSes, in the 1971 Year Book.]
10
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 JULY 1970
Remimeo Issue II
EC Hats
Qual Div Hats
REORGANIZATION OF THE CORRECTION DIVISION
(TO BE USED AT ONCE ON ORG BDS.
SUBJECT TO MODIFICATION WITH EXPERIENCE.)
The three departments of Correction Div V are reorganized as given
on the following Org Board. AWARENESS LEVELS: Dept 13 - ENHANCEMENT
Dept 14 - CORRECTION Dept 15 - VALIDITY DIVISION FIVE CORRECTION
DIVISION 8 Qualification Secretary M Dept 13
DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
6 Director of Personnel Enhancement
M PERSONNEL OBSER VA TION SECTION
M Status Unit:
Inspects staff for out-points in duty performance or any needful
Training and case cycles. Collects data from Examiner, Personnel
I/C, Org Seniors, Ethics files, Ethics Officer, Medical Officer,
Chaplain, Course Supervisor, Course Admin, Hats Officer, STO,
Personal Folder, Case Supervisor and
Org Council.
Reports data to Data Analysis Unit.
B Data Analysis Unit:
Applies Data Series HCO P/Ls to find personnel needing improvement.
Sends names and data to Reports Unit.
P Reports Unit:
Gets any further data necessary.
Sends CSW to Staff Programming Section.
B STAFF PROGRAMMING SECTION
M Hubbard Consultant Unit:
Does Consultation on current status.
Relays data to Programming Unit or Dept 15.
B Programming Unit:
Reviews folder. Locates personnel's needs on Management Chart.
Targets
out program of Processing and Training for increased value to
themselves
and the Org.
P Routing Unit:
Routes personnel to first step on Program.
Posts personnel names on Personnel Enhancement Board.
P STAFF TRAINING AND STAFF AUDITING SECTION
M Staff Training Officer:
Training, Admin and Inspection Unit.
11
Keeps all Admin for the section. Keeps attendance up on training
cycles and programs. Inspects and 8c's all training cycles in the
Org and gives checkouts. Liaises closely with Personnel Bureau and
keeps them informed of increased staff member value.
B Staff Training Unit:
(Has a separate unit for all classes of staff enhancement cycles:
OEC, Interneship, etc.) Sees personnel successfully through staff
enhancement cycles.
P Staff Auditing Unit:
Collects staff folders from Tech Services. Gets staff folders CSed
by the Tech CS. Staff Staff Auditors audit staff.
B Dept 14
DEPARTMENT OF ORGANIZATION CORRECTION
0 Director of Organization Correction
M ORGANIZA TION SITUA TION RECOGNITION SECTION
M Org Perception Unit:
Knows the correct ideal scenes related to purpose and time of all
parts of the entire Org. Collects data of GI and all Org GDSes and
departmental statistics, post hats, packs of divisional duties and
descriptions of Org lines, etc.
B Org Data Analysis Unit:
Surveys for out-points the collected data of the existing Org scene
and sub-scenes.
P Org Situation Analysis Unit:
Knows the statistics that should exist. Produces summaries of
situations regarding the Org form and sends to Org Correction
Section.
B ORG CORRECTION SECTION
M Org Inspection Unit:
Inspects situations more closely. Calls Boards of Investigation to
go over GDSes that are down. Finds out WHY a departure from an
ideal scene, what changed and isolates the change. Establishes the
hat material missing, which divisional duties are not being done,
which hats are not being worn and details of Org lines which do not
flow, etc. Looks for the basic Org Outnesses.
B Org Correction Unit:
Establishes the need to handle situations. Elvaluates resources
available and capability. Looks into the Reality of Hat write ups
and corrects to Ideal Scene. Expansion of Data in Hats. Passes
correction data to Correction Program Unit.
P Correction Program Unit:
Writes up programs which correct, undo harmful changes and revert
to the ideal scenes Uses a gradient solution.
P OR G IDEAL SCENE A TTAINMENT SECTION
M Org Prediction Unit:
Ensures that all the functions of the Org are taking place. (Each
Production Unit of the Org is represented in this Unit.) Settles
practical aspects of correction programs.
12 B Org Reestablishment Unit:
Gets situations handled by implementation of the correction
programs. Gets hats re-written, packs of Divisional Duties, etc
formed, Org lines straight and flowing and changes reverted so that
production increases by statistics.
P Org Correction Verification Unit:
Sees that every sub-ideal scene and the ideal scene is returned to,
or attained, and is verified by production statistics. Successful
and unsuccessful Org correction actions are written up and made
known to seniors.
P Dept 15
DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL CORRECTION
0 Director of Technical Correction
M EXAMINA TIONS SECTION
M Examiner Unit:
Inspects the product and verifies that results have been attained.
B Consultant and Medical Officer Unit:
Uses two way comm to establish what needs correcting. Inspects
Medical and hygiene aspect of product. Arranges or administers
Medical Care.
P Routing Unit:
Routes the product back to its Production Unit, or on to Correction
Section or Certs and Awards Section.
B PRODUCT CORRECTION SECTION
M Logging Unit:
Logs all products coming in for correction and corrected products
going out.
B Product Correction Unit:
(Each production unit is represented in this unit: i.e. Pc
Correction - Review Unit. Student Correction - Cramming Unit.)
Corrects products of production units.
P Admin Unit:
Keeps materials and records of correction actions. Has a Bull Pen
where all unresolving data is kept for final resolution.
P CER IS AND A WARDS SECTION
M Completion Logging Unit:
Logs all products that have been completed.
B Certs and Awards Unit:
Attests as to skill, state and merit of product.
P Admin Unit:
Keeps stocks of certificates and symbols.
LRH:JF:sb.ka.rd D/CS-5
Copyright (c) 1970 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Amended by HCO P/L 8 August 1970 Issue 111, Reorganization of the
Correction Division, page 14. Cancelled by HCO P/L 7 December 1971
Issue IV, Correction Division-Purposes, Ideal Scenes, Products,
Statistics, page 35.1
13
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 AUGUST 1970
Issue III
Remimeo
EC Hats (Amends HCO Policy Letter 15 July '70.
Qual Div Hats Various Div V functions are added.)
REORGANIZATION OF THE CORRECTION DIVISION
(TO BE USED AT ONCE ON ORG BOARDS.
SUBJECT TO MODIFICATION WITH EXPERIENCE.)
The three departments of Correction Div V are reorganized as given
on the following Org Board.
AWARENESS LEVELS:
Dept 13 - ENHANCEMENT
Dept 14 - CORRECTION
Dept 15 - VALIDITY
DIVISION FIVE
CORRECTION DIVISION
0 Qualification Secretary
M Dept 13
DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
0 Director of Personnel Enhancement
M PERSONNEL OBSERVATION SECTION
M Status Unit:
Inspects staff for out-points in duty performance or any needful
Training and case cycles. Collects data from Examiner, Personnel
I/C, Org Seniors, Ethics files, Ethics Officer, Medical Officer,
Chaplain, Course Supervisor, Course Admin, Hats Officer, STO,
Personal Folder, Case Supervisor and Org Councils. Reports data to
Data Analysis Unit.
B Data Analysis Unit:
Applies Data Series HCO P/Ls to find personnel needing improvement.
Sends names and data to Reports Unit.
P Reports Unit:
Gets any further data necessary. Sends CSW to Staff Programming
Section.
B MEDICAL-HYGIENE SECTION
M Inspections Unit:
Does daily inspections, liaises with Inspections and Reports.
Reports to Orders of the Day and appropriate terminals to handle
outnesses.
14 B Medical-Hygiene Unit:
Administers Medical care. Acts to improve Health and Hygiene of
staff. Arranges professional medical care as needed. Keeps supplies
for normal and emergency use.
P Completions Unit:
Keeps all reports, logs, inventories, records and files in present
time.
B STAFF PROGRAMMING SECTION
M Hubbard Consultant Unit:
Does Consultation on current status. Relays data to Programming
Unit or Dept 15.
B Programming Unit:
Reviews folder. Locates personnel's needs on Management Chart.
Targets out program of Processing and Training for increased value
to themselves and the Org.
P Routing Unit:
Routes personnel to first step on Program. Posts personnel names on
Personnel Enhancement Board.
P STAFF TRAINING AND STAFF AUDITING SECTION
M Staff Technical Services Unit:
Keeps all Staff Student and Case Folder Admin. Keeps up-to-date the
Staff Auditing Scheduling Board and the Staff Student Progress
Board. Rounds up pcs for Staff Staff Auditors. Liaises closely with
Personnel Bureau and keeps them informed of increased staff member
value.
B Staff Training Unit:
Staff Training Officer sees that staff do train, keeps attendance
up and gives checkouts. In Scn and SO Orgs there is a separate unit
for all staff enhancement cycles: Org Exec Course Supervisor runs
OEC. C/S Internship Supervisor runs C/S Internship, etc. Sees
personnel successfully through staff enhancement cycles.
P Staff Auditing Unit:
Gets Folder Summaries and Folder Error Summaries of Staff Case
folders done and C/Sed. Staff Case Supervisor C/Ses staff folders
in a large org, otherwise done by Staff Staff Auditors, C/S Interns
or Tech C/S. Staff Staff Auditors audit staff.
15 B Dept 14
DEPARTMENT OF ORGANIZATION CORRECTION
a Director of Organization Correction
M ORGANIZATION SITUATION RECOGNITION SECTION
M Org Perception Unit:
Knows the correct ideal scenes related to purpose and time of all
parts of the entire Org. Collects data of GI and all Org GDSes and
departmental statistics, post hats, packs of divisional duties and
descriptions of Org lines, etc.
B Org Data Analysis Unit:
Surveys for out-points the collected data of the existing Org scene
and sub-scenes.
P Org Situation Analysis Unit:
Knows the statistics that should exist. Produces summaries of
situations regarding the Org form and sends to Org Correction
Section.
B OR G CORRECTION SECTION
M Org Inspection Unit:
Inspects situations more closely. Calls Boards of Investigation to
go over GDSes that are down. Finds out WHY a departure from an
ideal scene, what changed and isolates the change. Establishes the
hat material missing, which divisional duties are not being done,
which hats are not being worn and details of Org lines which do not
flow, etc. Looks for the basic Org Outnesses.
B Org Correction Unit:
Establishes the need to handle situations. Evaluates resources
available and capability. Looks into the Reality of Hat write ups
and corrects to Ideal Scene. Expansion of data in Hats. Passes
correction data to Correction Program Unit.
P Correction Program Unit:
Writes up programs which correct, undo harmful changes and revert
to the ideal scenes. Uses a gradient solution.
P ORG IDEAL SCENE A TTAINMENT SECTION
M Org Prediction Unit:
Ensures that all the functions of the Org are taking place. (Each
Production Unit of the Org is represented in this Unit.) Settles
practical aspects of correction programs.
B Org Reestablishment Unit:
Gets situations handled by implementation of the correction
programs. Gets Hats re-written, packs of Divisional Duties, etc
formed, Org lines straight and flowing and changes reverted so that
production increases by statistics.
P Org Correction Verification Unit:
Sees that every sub-ideal scene and the ideal scene is returned to,
or attained, and is verified by production statistics. Successful
and unsuccessful Org correction actions are written up and made
known to seniors.
16
P Dept 15
DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCT VALIDITY
0 Director of Product Validity
M EXAMINA TIONS SECTION
M Examiner Unit:
Inspects. the product and verifies that results have been attained.
B Consultant, Medical Liaison Officer and
ARC Break Registrar Unit:
Uses 2-way comm to establish what needs correcting. Liaises with
the Medical Officer for staff and with Medical Practitioners for
staff and public as necessary. ARC Break Registrar programs the
recovery of and signs up ARC broken Dianeticists and Scientologists
from the field for the ARC Break Auditor to handle.
P Routing Unit:
Routes the product back to its Production Unit, or on to Correction
Section or Certs and Awards Section.
B PRODUCT CORRECTION SECTION
M Logging Unit:
Logs all products coming in for correction and corrected products
going out.
B Product Correction Unit:
(Each Production Unit is represented in this Unit: i.e. Pc
CorrectionReview Unit, which has Review Auditors. Student
Correction-Cramming Unit, run by the Cramming Officer.) Corrects
products of production units. ARC Break Auditor handles ARC breaks,
pulls overts, and gets in Life Ruds.
P Admin Unit:
Keeps materials and records of correction actions. Has a Bull Pen
where all unresolving data is kept for final resolution.
P CER IS AND AWARDS SECTION
M Completion Logging Unit:
Logs all products that have been completed.
B Certs and Awards Unit:
Attests as to skill, state and merit of product.
P Admin Unit:
Keeps stocks of certificates and symbols.
D/CS-5
LRH:JF:rr.rd for
Copyright (c) 1970 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Cancelled by HCO P/L 7 December 1971 Issue IV,
page 35.1
17
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1970
Issue II
Remimeo
IDEAL SCENES AND STATISTICS
FOR CORRECTION DIVISION FIVE
THE IDEAL SCENE OF QUAL (Correction Division Five) and the
QUALIFICATIONS SECRETARY
To see that any departures from the Ideal Scene of the Org, its
staff and quality of results and products are detected and quickly
corrected.
STATISTIC: Number of Div V correction cycles successfully completed.
---------------
Calculated: For Org corrections, one point for every Org
situation recognised, written up as a fully targeted correction
program and then all targets having been completed with the
situation handled and the Ideal Scene established.
For Product Validity corrections, one point for every successful
completion of a correction program which was written in target form
to correct an auditor, case supervisor, pc, pre OT, supervisor,
student, staff member or any other non-optimum Org product and
which resulted in increased ability.
Dept 13 DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
Ideal Scene: An Org in which all its personnel are specialists
on their posts having attained their abilities through auditing,
tech and other training and who can improve conditions across the
dynamics.
Statistic: GI -number on staff.
Staff Case Supervisor
Ideal Scene: All staff being successfully audited to increased
abilities in handling others and their own lines and mest.
Statistic: 1. Percentage of staff who are in good case condition
measured by the last Examiner Reports and cancelled by any adverse
Exam report. (Calculated as per HCO Pol Ltr 20 Jul '70 [Technical]
Cases and Morale of Staff: The number of folders in Staff Case
Category No. I as a percentage of the number on staff.)
2. Number of staff cases C/Sed.
PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT SECTION
Personnel Enhancement Officer
Ideal Scene: Correctly establishes situations with regard to Org
Personnel and establishes correct Personnel Enhancement Programs
which result in optimum abilities for each Org personnel to operate
across the dynamics. Sees that these abilities are attained by
having staff folders available and training and auditing materials
complete and Enhancement, Progress and scheduling boards in present
time.
Statistic: 1. Number of study points, based on Flag authorised
point system, achieved by staff as students following written and
agreed upon Staff Enhancement Programs.
2. Number of Well Done and Very Well Done hours audited on staff
cases as a result of staff members following written and agreed
upon Staff Enhancement Programs.
is Medical Officer
Ideal Scene: All staff well and healthy and hygienic with the
overall standard of health continuously increasing.
Statistic: 1. Percentage of staff well from medical ills (i.e.
not on medical lines AND not on out personal hygiene lines).
2. Number of sick staff now well and routed off Medical Officer
lines plus number of out personal hygiene cycles handled to Medical
Officer's satisfaction.
STAFF TRAINING SECTION
Staff Training Officer
Ideal Scene: All staff being Tech and Admin trained making good
progress and attaining specialist abilities.
Statistic: 1. Total number of staff student study points based
on Flag authorised point system, less 1,000 for every staff member
not on course for the week.
2. Course completions by staff members.
STAFF AUDITING SECTION
Leading Staff Staff Auditors and Staff Staff Auditors
Ideal Scene: All staff cases kept flying and being successfully
and frequently audited to increased abilities and maintained high
morale.
Statistic: Number of hours of Well Done and Very Well Done
auditing sessions. (If no C/S the Staff Staff Auditors share the
Staff C/S percentile stat.)
Dept 14 DEPARTMENT OF ORGANIZATION CORRECTION
Director of Organization Correction
Ideal Scene: An Org that is effectively and causatively managed
on statistics and which is rapidly corrected where departures from
its Ideal Scenes and Sub-Ideal Scenes occur. An Org where correct
hats are worn, Org lines are fast and smooth and all Divisional
materials are available to individual staff members. An Org where
policy is known and used, with Org rudiments in and Departmental
checklists complete. An Org that does not produce nonoptimum
products and with all statistics which are based on Ideal Scenes on
an uptrend. An Org where conditions for others and its personnel
are improved.
Statistic: Sum of points of each Unit, Section, Departmental,
Divisional and Org conditions assigned on stats calculated on:
Non-existence = -3, Danger = -2, Emergency = - 1, Normal = + 1,
Affluence = +2, Power = +3.
ORGANIZATION SITUATION RECOGNITION SECTION
Organization Situation Recognition Officer
Ideal Scene: Correctly analysed major departures from the
Organization Ideal Scene which are quickly acted upon to the
completion of the correction cycle.
Statistic: Sum of points of each Unit, Section, Departmental,
Divisional and Org conditions assigned on stats calculated on:
Non-existence = -3, Danger = -2, Emergency = -1, Normal = +1,
Affluence = +2, Power = +3, PLUS one for every Org outness reported
to the Org Correction Section and acted upon with a correction
action which has resulted in an increased stat.
19
ORGANIZATION CORRECTION SECTION
Organization Correction Officer
Ideal Scene: Correctly programs the correction of an Org
Situation so that it quickly reverts to the Org Ideal Scene through
implementation of the Correction Program.
Statistic: Sum of points of each Unit, Section, Departmental,
Divisional and Org conditions assigned on stats calculated on:
Non-existence = -3, Danger = -2, Emergency = -1, Normal = + 1,
Affluence = +2, Power = +3, PLUS one for every effective corrective
action taken which has resulted in an increased stat.
ORGANIZATIONAL IDEAL SCENE ATTAINMENT SECTION
Organization Ideal Scene Attainment Officer
Ideal Scene: An Org with all statistics based on Ideal Scenes on
a rising trend and correction cycles swiftly handled. An Org with
great community potential and Area Control.
Statistic: Sum of points of each Unit, Section, Departmental,
Divisional and Org conditions assigned on stats calculated on:
Non-existence = -3, Danger = -2, Emergency = -1, Normal = +1,
Affluence = +2, Power = +3, MINUS one for every 5% of all the
Departmental Admin Checklists not complete.
Dept 15 DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCT VALIDITY
Director of Product Validity
Ideal Scene: An Org whose products are flawless and where the
technology of Optimum Survival is known and used and is forced to
be viewed where it is not known and used. Nonoptimum products of
the Org rapidly and successfully corrected and none allowed to
leave which are not optimum with no flaws missed.
Statistic: Number of Dept 15 correction cycles successfully
completed. Calculated by one point for every successful completion
of a correction program which was written in target form to correct
an auditor, case supervisor, pc, pre OT, supervisor, student or
staff member and which resulted in increased ability for that
person MINUS 100 for every correction cycle ordered by a senior Org
Qual to handle a non-optimum product which was allowed to leave the
Org.
EXAMINATIONS SECTION
Examiner
Ideal Scene: Distant location of bad indicators and product
flaws.
Statistic: Number of students and pcs examined PLUS one point
for every person with bad indicators routed, (BI's include every
non F/N Examiner Report, it being understood that an Examiner
Report is done after every session) PLUS ten points for every
uncertain or flunked student. (It being understood that students
are given meter checks by Examiner and spot Exams for every theory
or practical completion.)
Note: The Examiner stat loses 100 points for each proven
instance of evaluation, invalidation of students or pcs by
expression or statement by the Examiner, instances of penalty to be
decided by Qual See, Div 6 See and a third member agreed upon by
the two.
ARC Break Registrar
Ideal Scene: Spots and recovers ARC Broken Dianeticists and
Scientologists from the field.
20 Statistic: Number of ARC Broken and/or blown
Dianeticists and Scientologists contacted and put back on Org lines
during the week.
CORRECTION SECTION
Review Consultant
Ideal Scene: Staff, students and pcs having difficulty swiftly
handled.
Statistic: Number of staff, students and pcs who are having
difficulty, interviewed and handled.
Cramming Supervisor
Ideal Scene: Swift handling of technical misses in student's
knowledge.
Statistic: 1, Number of falsely signed off items on Div IV and Dept
13 checksheets corrected in Cramming.
2. Ten points for every student completed with VGI's.
Leading Review Auditor and Review Auditors
Ideal Scene: Swift handling of bogged cases and correction of
goofing auditors and C/Ses.
Statistic: 1, Errors discovered and corrected in pcs, folders, one
point for each.
2. Ten points for each pc completed with VGI's.
ARC Break Auditor
Ideal Scene: Swiftly handled ARC Broken cases.
Statistic: Number of previously ARC Broken and blown pcs, and
students handled successfully in the week.
CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS SECTION
Certificates and Awards Officer
Ideal Scene: Validates flawless products while getting any
non-optimum product of the Org corrected.
Statistic: 1. Number of classifications rejected by reason of
inadequate case gain or false representations.
2. Number of awards refused by reason of inadequate hours or
abilities for
the level not attained.
D/CS- 5
for
LRH:JF:sb.ka.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1970 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Amended by HCO P/Ls 5 February 1971 Issue V, Org Gross Divisional
Statistics Revised, page 22, and 5 February 1971 Issue II1, FEBC
Executive Director Org GDSes, in the 1971 'Year Book. Cancelled by
HCO P/L 7 December 1971 issue IV, Correction Division-Purposes,
Ideal Scene$, Products, Statistics, page 35.)
21
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 FEBRUARY 1971
Issue V
[Excerpt]
Remimeo
OIC WW
CLOs
EC: Hat
HAS Hat
OIC Hat
ORG GROSS DIVISIONAL STATISTICS
REVISED
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr 30 Sept 65 - Stats for Divisions,
HCO PL 17
June 70 - OIC Change, Cable Change, HCO PL 22 Sept 70
- Ideal
Scenes & Stats for Correction Div 5, Page 1, GDS for
Div 5 only.)
QUAL DIVISION 5
1 . The total amount of money paid for student training into the
org for a Certificate Course (all Solo excepted).
2. The total number of creditable success stories turned in, less
the number of people not passing Key Questions, and less 2 for any
Ethics action taken on a student, preclear or staff member for the
week.
3. Gross Income divided by number of persons on staff for the week.
HCO Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:HE:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
[Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 5 February 1971, Issue V, Org
Gross Divisional Statistics Revised. A complete copy covering all
divisions is in the 1971 Volume.]
22
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1971
Issue VI
Limited Non-Remimeo FEBC Exec Dir Only
FEBC ORG BOARD DIVISION 5
DEPARTMENT 13
ENHANCEMENT
DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
Director of Personnel Enhancement
Staff Case Supervisor
STAFF ROUTING AND SERVICES SECTION
Staff Routing and Servicing Officer
Staff Routing Unit
Staff Routing I/C
Pages
Staff Services Unit
Staff Servicing I/C
Staff Logging and Books Clerk
Staff Materials Supply Clerk
Staff Location Clerk
Staff Assignment Clerk
PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT SECTION
Personnel Enhancement Chief
Personnel Inspection Unit
Personnel Inspector
Personnel Consultant Unit
Personnel Consultant
Personnel Analysis Unit
Personnel Analysing Officer
Personnel Programming Unit
Personnel Programming Officer
Health and Hygiene Unit (AOs and SHs only)
Medical Officer
Inspections Sub-Unit
Hygiene Inspector
Records, Reports, Inventories Sub-Unit
Records, Reports, Inventories I/C
Medical Liaising Sub-Unit
Medical Liaising Officer
23
Appointments to Shore I/C
Medical Accompanying I/C
Visiting I/C
Clinic Sub-Unit
Clinic Officer
Medications I/C
First Aid I/C
Transportation I/C
Visiting I/C
Advisement to C/S and Examiner I/C
STAFF HA TTING COLLEGE SECTION
Dean of Staff Hatting College
Staff Hatting College Unit
Staff Training Officer
Specialist Training Unit
Specialist Training Officer
STAFF STAFF AUDITING SECTION
Leading Staff Auditor
Unit A Staff Staff Auditing
Unit A Leading Staff Staff Auditor
Unit A Staff Staff Auditors
Unit B Staff Staff Auditing
Unit B Leading Staff Staff Auditor
Unit B Staff Staff Auditors
PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT MATERIAL,
EQUIPMENT AND MAINTENANCE SECTION
Personnel Enhancement Material, Equipment and
Maintenance Officer
Staff Library Unit
Staff Librarian
Staff Training Equipment Unit
Training Equipment Supply I/C
Training Equipment Maintenance Clerk
A VALUABLE FINAL PRODUCT OF THE DEPARTMENT AND THE
ORG:
EFFECTIVE AND WELL TRAINED ORG STAFF MEMBERS
DEPARTMENT 14
CORRECTION
DEPARTMENT OF ORGANIZATION CORRECTION
Director of Organization Correction
ORGANIZATION INSPECTION SECTION
Organization Chief Inspector
Stat Inspection Unit
Stat Inspector
24
Org Inspection Unit
Org Inspector
Org Product Inspection Unit
Org Product Inspector
Data Collection Unit
Data Collection I/C
Data Collection Filing Clerk
ORGANIZATION SITUATION RECOGNITION SECTION
Organization Situation Recognition Officer
Statistic Analysis Unit
Statistic Analyser
Data Analysis Unit
Data Analyser
Extreme Conditions Unit
Extreme Conditions Evaluator
Data Evaluation Unit
Data Evaluator
PROGRAMMING SECTION
Planning and Programming Officer
Planning Unit
Planning I/C
Programming Unit
Programming I/C
ORGANIZATION CORRECTION SECTION
Organization Correction Officer
Program Briefing Unit
Program Briefer
Program Expediting Unit
Program Expeditor
Program Reports Posting Clerk
ORGANIZATION IDEAL SCENE ATTAINMENT SECTION
Organization Ideal Scene Attainment Officer
Program Debriefing Unit
Program Debriefer
Ideal Scene Verification Unit
Ideal Scene Verifier
Program Files Unit
Program Filing Clerk
PRODUCT: MORE EFFICIENTLY PRODUCED ORG VALUABLE
FINAL PRODUCTS
25
DEPARTMENT15
VALIDITY
DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCT VALIDITY
Director of Product Validity
QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE SECTION
Interviewing and Invoicing Officer
Qual Invoicing Unit
Qual Invoicing I/C
Qual Routing Unit
Qual Routing [/C
Pages
Qual Folder Unit
Qual Folders I/C
Qual Consultant Unit
Qual Consultant
Chaplain Unit
Chaplain (Dept 18 Liaison)
EXAMINA TIONS SECTION
Chief Examiner
Student Examinations Unit
Student Examining Officer
Student Examiner
Certificate Examiner
Classification Examiner
Examinations Marker
Practical Demonstration Marker
Pc Examinations Unit
Pc Examining Officer
HGC Pc Examiner
Staff Examiner
Student Pc Examiner
Upper Levels Examiner (St Hills and AOs only)
Product Examinations Unit
Product Examinations Officer
Product Examiner
RE VIEW SECTION
Review Chief
Review Auditing Unit
Leading HGC Review Auditor
HGC Review Auditors
Leading Staff Review Auditor
Staff Review Auditors
Leading Student Pc Review Auditor
Student Pc Review Auditors
Cramming Unit
Chief Cramming Officer
26
Leading Student Cramming Officer
Student Cramming Officers
Leading Staff Cramming Officer
Staff Cramming Officers
Medical Liaising Unit (Orgs Only)
Medical Officer
Hygiene Inspections Sub-Unit
Hygiene Inspector
First Aid and Assists Sub-Unit
First Aid I/C
Assists I/C
Medical Liaising Sub-Unit
Medical Liaising I/C
Advisement to C/S and Exams I/C
Medical Accompaniment I/C
Medical Reports Records and Inventory Sub-Unit
Medical Reports Records and Inventories I/C
Medical Unit Filing Clerk
ARC BREAK REPAIR SECTION
ARC Break Repairing Chief
ARC Break Repairing Registration Unit
ARC Break Repairing Registrar
ARC Break Repairing Auditing Unit
ARC Break Repairing Leading Auditor
ARC Break Repairing Auditors
ARC Break Surveying Unit
ARC Break Surveyor
CERTS AND A WARDS SECTION
Certifying and Awarding Chief
Invoicing Unit
Invoicing I/C
Logging Unit
Logging I/C
Certificate and Awards Preparation Unit
C&A Preparing I/C
Certificate and A wards Stock Unit
C&A Stocks I/C
Certificate and A wards Filing Unit
C&A Filing Clerk
PRODUCTS: CORRECTED ORG PRODUCTS
A VALUABLE FINAL PRODUCT OF THE DEPARTMENT AND THE
ORG:
EARNED CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS
LRH:JR:nt.bh.rd SO Training & Services Aide
Copyright(c) 1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Amended by HCO P/L 17 February 1971 Issue II1, as it applies to
AOs and Saint Hills only, in the 1971 Year Book.]
27 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1971
Issue II
Remimeo
OIC WW
CLOs
HAS Hat
OIC Hat
ADDITIONAL QUAL STAT
The statistic for the Word Clearer in Qual is:
NUMBER OF WORD CLEARING COMPLETIONS FOR THE WEEK.
A word Clearing Completion is defined as: A Method No. I End
Phenomena FIN on all subjects on the list including added subjects,
done in sessions with in Ruds and carrying an F/N VGIs at Examiner
with Success Story.
A/Qual Sec FAO
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH: JvS: sb.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
[The Div V Mini Qual Org Board on opposite page has been twice
revised.
The original 14 August 1971 issue listed under CRAMMING SECTION
in Dept 14 the following: Staff Members, C/Ses, Auditors, Course
Supervisors, Staff Training Officer, Staff Processing Officer, Qual
Interne Supervisor and Chaplain,
The first revision of 5 September 1971 shifted the Chaplain and
Staff Training Officer to Dept 13 and added a Staff C/S; deleted
Auditors, Course Supervisors and Staff Processing Officer; added
Staff Librarian and Staff Information Officer; and created an
Interne Section, with a Qual Interne Supervisor in Dept 14.
The next revision (shown opposite) added the stars showing which
posts must be manned; indicated that Staff C/S is held from above
by the Qual Sec; specified the minimum Word Clearing Auditors as
two; and combined the posts of Interne Supervisor and Cramming
Officer, deleting their appropriate section names,
Dept 15 remained the same throughout.]
28 > DIV V MINI QUAL ORG BOARD
CORRECTION DIVISION
0
00
QUAL SEC
M (c) QUAL SEC for Org Admin
ENHANCEMENT VALIDITY
0
DEPARTMENT 13 DEPARTMENT 14 DEPARTMENT 15
IV
0
DEPT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT DEPT OF CORRECTION DEPT OF VALIDITY
>
PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT DIRECTOR CORRECTION DIRECTOR VALIDITY DIRECTOR
<
Staff C/S
(Held by Goal Sec) ORG LIBRARY
Staff Training Officer CIO 0
Staff Librarian QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE r, 0
0 >
Staff Information Center
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING SECTION
> 0
Policy
Personnel Programmer
Tech (.1 (40
EXAMINER
CLEARING SECTION Tapes
0
Packs
2 Word Clearing Auditors
>
Purpose Clearing Auditors
Qual Clearing Page Intern Supervisor/ CERTS AND AWARDS
Cramming Officer
Chaplain
Medical Officer
Posts which must be manned.
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH BLUE ON GREY
FLAG DIVISIONAL DIRECTIVE
Issued from Flag to all Qual Divisions
FDD 18 QUAL INT 2 October 1971
To: Qual Sees
All Qua] Staff
From: Qual Aide
Subject:
DIVISIONAL SUMMARY FOR DIVISION V
CORRECTION DIVISION
(Cancels FDD I DIV 5 FEBC ORGS
28 March, 1971)
There is a new Mini Qual Correction Division Org Board, issued
in HCO PL 14 August 71, revised 5 Sept 71. It is called a Mini Qual
because it is essentially simplified in construction and can be
manned and operated by a comparatively small dedicated group of
staff, as an initial establishing action.
The primary function and purpose of the Qual Correction Division
is the FINDING OF LOST TECHNOLOGY. Qual is also the custodian of
Knowledge-the books, materials and tapes, plus the meaning
contained in these materials.
The most essential commodity of an org is KNOWLEDGE. Knowledge
gets lost through misunderstood words. Qual finds and restores lost
technology to full use through its word clearing, cramming and
personnel programming actions, plus the full utilization of the
Qual Org Library. This is keeping Scientology working.
The Qual See must see that knowledge is not lost and is salvaged
where it was lost (alter-ised or misused) and thus ensure that the
quality and delivery of org products keeps rising and boom the org.
The Qual See must have a Deputy Qual See who takes care of all
admin functions in the division and for the org regarding Qual-i.e.
FP, Ad Council. This leaves the Qual See free, free and able to put
his full attention on running the division and ensuring that its
products are being well produced.
DEPT 13: DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
AWARENESS LEVEL: ENHANCEMENT
The Dept of Personnel Enhancement is run by the Director of
Personnel Enhancement. Dept 13 is basically for the org itself. HCO
establishes the org but it is primarily Dept 13 which makes it
functional- which makes it run.
The Valuable Final Product of Dept 13 and the Org is: EFFECTIVE
AND WELL TRAINED ORG STAFF MEMBERS.
A Staff Case Supervisor is posted in Dept 13. He may or may not
have Auditors in Dept 13. This depends on what is the most workable
system in the org. It is, however, the responsibility of the Qual
See, Dir Personnel Enhancement and the Staff Case Supervisor to see
that staff do get audited and that they are properly C/Sed and
programmed. It is forbidden for staff to have "bit and piece"
auditing. Staff auditing must also be scheduled in intensives. Put
a pc label on them and crash them through to a completion every
time.
The Staff Training Officer has the responsibility for seeing
that staff personnel programme training actions are done. It is
found by test that staff study runs best in the Academy, even part
time. Standard tech courses have their own Supervisor and STO
should see that an Admin Supervisor is appointed to run staff admin
training periods. Staff study can be staggered to say, three study
periods per day, if needed. The important thing is that staff do
get and complete study cycles.
30
The Personnel Programmer, through his programming actions, can
markedly raise the production and morale of the entire staff and
org. The expansion of the org is dependent upon intelligent, well
executed personnel programming.
He interviews each staff member personally and programmes him to
a point of real win on his current post. He never programmes a
person off his post.
The Personnel Programmer should have a working knowledge of tech
and programming of pcs-anything in auditing has a comparable action
in the field of programming.
He compiles a programme which will really put each staff member
there on his post. He works towards creating a whole org of post
specialists and uses word clearing liberally. He may have to repair
past losses on earlier posts and does what is necessary to ensure
that staff members do win on their posts, thus increasing the
product quality and delivery of the org.
The Personnel Programmer does word clearing method 2 and also
utilizes the Qual Word Clearing Word Clearers in all his
programmes.
Dianetics and Scientology books are included in all
programmes-these being essential Knowledge necessary to causative
living and working, and which contain the basic data and truths of
this universe. The Personnel Programmer should set a personal goal
to have all staff read all Dianetics and Scientology books by L.
Ron Hubbard.
After each staff member is programmed, they are sent to the
Registrar to sign up for the first course. It is essential to get
this done because it is found that 60% of programmed staff can get
lost if not so handled. They are signed up for each action on a no
charge invoice.
When the Personnel Programmer does his job well, the staff and
org will be expanding and product quality rising sharply. The org
repute in the area will rise. Word of mouth will increase. The
org's publics will be happier and taking more services. The
integrity of the org will be raised. Staff morale and production
will be shooting up and up.
The Personnel Programmer liaises with the org Personnel Control
Officer to ensure that all new staff joining the org are sent to
him for programming immediately on joining staff.
The Qual Clearing Section, under the Qual Clearing Officer is
primarily for staff use.
This section, with its Word Clearers and Post Purpose Clearers,
has the vital new technology of word clearing, which enables Study
Data to be fully applied.
Word Clearing is the main tool in the org to keep Scientology
working and prevent technology or policy from getting lost or
misused or altered.
The public is going to want Word Clearing and the Qual See is
warned that when the public traffic gets to the stage that staff
Word Clearing is severely reduced or stalled, that public word
clearing should be moved to the Hubbard Guidance Centre in Dept 12.
However, Qual remains the czar of word clearing and retains all
case supervision and training of Word Clearing. Note: There is no
credit allowed on public Word Clearing.
The Qual See must ensure that word clearing always remains in
Qual.
All staff must be word cleared on all misunderstoods in past
subjects (Method 1), then word cleared on their prime post duties
and technology (Method 2) and finally Post Purpose Cleared.
Word Clearing plays a vital role in the safeguarding of
technology and Knowledge and this function must NEVER be allowed to
pass out of Qual's hands.
The post of Chaplain is needed in an org because there must be
someone who can handle neglected public or staff. There must be
someone they can turn to. The Chaplain handles persons who are in
trouble or who have been neglected and fallen off the right lines.
He must handle and get them back on the right lines.
31
The Medical Officer is responsible for the health, proper
diagnosis, treatment and fast recovery of any sick staff member,
student or preclear, ensuring that Dianetic auditing and Assists
are fully utilized to speed recovery. He learns and applies basic
first aid and provides the necessary liaison between the Case
Supervisor and the Medical Doctor.
All in all, Dept 13 is a versatile Department, with very
powerful tools to use to bring the org and its staff to a higher
and higher operating level and become more and more EFFECTIVE AND
WELL TRAINED ORG STAFF MEMBERS. The Qual Sec and Dir Pers
Enhancement statistic of Gross Income divided by number on staff is
a very accurate index of the progress and effectiveness of all Dept
13 personnel.
DEPT 14: DEPARTMENT OF CORRECTION
AWARENESS LEVEL: CORRECTION
Qual is essentially an exporter of Knowledge and Qual has an
exciting new addition to its ranks-the Org Library in Dept 14.
Under the Staff Librarian, the Org Library ideally contains 2
copies of everything that has ever been issued-books, tapes,
policies, technology, packs, manuals on all org machines, various
dictionaries of all sizes, in English and other languages, plus
speciality books on various subjects which may need to be used in
Word Clearing. One set is a Master Copy and has a large red stripe
and a red Master Copy, Do Not Remove stamp on it. Master copies are
never removed from the library area. The other copies are numbered
and may be signed out to staff, as in any library. The Librarian
may refuse to sign out books to any staff member who does not
promptly return materials or who loses them. There should also be a
quiet area in Qual where staff can come and read.
We're in the business of Knowledge and Qual is where it's
concentrated in the org.
The Library is a Technical Information Centre. There is also a
Staff Information Officer, who is an expert on where to find what
in the Library. Staff may come to the Staff Information Officer for
assistance.
The Staff Librarian does standard Librarian logging duties and
sees that the Org Library is kept in good condition, safeguarded
and used.
The Org Library must be situated very close to Cramming and the
Word Clearers.
The Interne Section has an Interneship Supervisor and org
Internes get their Okays to Audit in this Section regardless of
earlier training, prior to auditing in the Hubbard Guidance Centre.
The final OK to Audit is given after an apprenticeship in the HGC
by the Case Supervisor, when the Auditor has proven his competence
and standard application in a particular level.
The Interneship system is the only known way to make course
graduates into flubless Auditors. Volume auditing is the keynote of
an Interneship.
The Interne Supervisor can arrange to have all Field Auditors
and Franchise Auditors invited in to get their Okays to Audit in
the org. It is a commendable for a field auditor to get an OK to
Audit in his nearest org. This will also open the door to getting
tech in more in the field, bringing Auditors in for Cramming, etc.
The responsibility for the safeguarding of Knowledge and ensuring
its full correct use extends beyond the borders of the org and
extends throughout the entire org field.
Cramming is an essential part of the Interne programme and plays
a major role in its ultimate success.
It takes many hundreds of hours of actual auditing application,
assisted by expert case supervision and instant cramming for the
slightest flub or non-standard application to make a real flubless
professional Auditor at any level. He also pulls in and crams
Course Supervisors and Case Supervisors.
The Cramming Officer uses the Library to augment the complete
HCO Bulletin packs already in use in Cramming to ensure that
Knowledge is known, duplicated and applied.
32
The Cramming Officer uses full study technology, word clearing,
the learning drill, training drills and auditing procedure drills
to locate "whys" and handle misunderstoods and any inability to
apply standard technology. He knows that auditing is not flubless
if the student or auditor:
(a) Doesn't know the technology - this could be so simple as the
person never read the HCO Bulletin. So the Cramming Officer ensures
that all new Bulletins are word cleared, star rated, clay demoed by
all Supervisors, Auditors and Case Supervisors prior to
application.
(b) Hasn't drilled on it - this is totally handled by the new
drills for each auditing action and handles additionally the
problem of "confusion in handling a sequence of motions". All new
procedures must also be drilled.
(c) Has misunderstoods on it - totally handled by word clearing
method 2. Any questions, strange or funny considerations about tech
and the Auditor is word cleared on the material.
The Cramming Officer has, as his basic task, the finding of lost
Knowledge and restoring it to full use.
PRODUCT: CORRECT ORG PRODUCTS.
VALUABLE FINAL PRODUCT OF THE DIVISION AND THE ORG:
EXPORTED KNOWLEDGE.
DEPT 15: DEPARTMENT OF VALIDITY
AWARENESS LEVEL: VALIDITY
The Director of Validity retains the standard Qual functions of
Qualifications Interview and Invoice, Examinations, Certifications
and Awards and ARC Break Auditor.
The validity of the org's valuable final products and products
is confirmed in Dept 15. The quality of delivery and the, true
attainment of abilities to change conditions is the main vital
concern of Dept 15 personnel.
Qualifications Interview and Invoice Officer ensures that all
persons are smoothly routed in and out of Qual and are correctly
invoiced for org services. Qual I and I collects and invoices money
for Word Clearing and Cramming. No credit is extended for public
Word Clearing.
The Student Examiner examines each student on the materials of
the course just completed and must ensure that Knowledge and the
ability to apply the data is attained.
The Preclear Examiner silently examines each preclear and the
folder, and verifies that all processes or steps of a rundown have
been done, and that the person has attained the full end phenomena
before sending to Certs and Awards for Declare? The Preclear
Examiner's observations are valuable to the Case Supervisor and he
usually becomes one of the most trusted and valued persons in an
org.
The integrity of Scientology and the hope for beings in this
Universe is entrusted to the Examinations Section.
The Certifications and Awards Officer provides the final step
towards achievement and validation of a Certificate well earned.
Certs and Awards logs all achievement carefully and issues Certs
and Awards which Scientologists and Dianeticists alike will be
proud to display.
He must never issue a certificate or award to anyone who has not
earned it and must refer all sour or bad indicators on completing
persons to the Director of Validity and the Qual Sec for
investigation and handling.
A good product will always have very good indicators.
33
Certs and Awards also issues Membership Cards and pushes the
Scientology Membership programme along heavily.
No-one may chit or attack any Qual Staff member who is acting to
safeguard technology and knowledge, and preserve the quality of the
products and integrity of the organization.
The final function in Qual is the ARC Break Auditor. This is an
old Qual function and cannot be dropped or shifted. As per the
original ARC Break Program, the ARC Break Auditor delivers a free
ARC Break session (usually handling ARC Breaks and cleaning up
overts) on persons who are ARC Broken with some real or imagined
person, in, or formerly in, the org. These persons are then routed
to the Registrar for sign-up for their next paid service. The ARC
Break Auditor can also be utilized to get in ARC Broken students
and preclears and liaises with the ARC Break Registrar in Div 2 to
get this done.
VALUABLE FINAL PRODUCT OF THE DEPT AND THE ORG:
EARNED CER TS AND A WARDS
There is one other new function which is recognized and that is:
Qual has PR value. Qual staff are opinion leaders in the org. What
they say has weight.
The Qual See and Qual staff can use propaganda to push standard
org actions.
For example: "I don't see why the (c) of P doesn't hire more
Auditors" or an OOD item, "A meeting was held in Dept 13 and it was
agreed that the (c) of P and HAS should hire more Auditors and then
we can see the staff gets more auditing," or "Staff should be
hatted, or do more study, or get mote auditing," or "There ought to
be a special staff Admin Supervisor in Dept I 11." The stats go up
and the Qual See says, "Well, that's pretty good, but what about
all the paid up undelivered service?" "Deliver, deliver, deliver."
"Quality, quality, quality."
It is up to Qual to keep these points mentioned. It may not be
the right Why but staff remember it.
Remember, what Qual personnel say counts-push LRH Knowledge,
Policies and orders and the org will catch on. Qual pushes basic
actions which should be done.
Ron states, "This is the best Qual I've ever seen. This Qual
will be so popular, no-one would think of reducing or scanting it.
It's hung on the solid anchor of Dept 13-Word Clearing. It will
build up org viability."
Qual sees that the quality of delivery is great and gets up
morale through increasing production, by using Word Clearing,
programming and cramming, and thus increasing Knowledge, and
keeping Scientology Working. This generates a new higher speed of
particle flow-and the germ which starts it all is Qual-the
Correction Division.
[seal]
Judy Ziff
Qual Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.rd
34
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 DECEMBER 1971
Remimeo Issue IV
Qual See
Qual Staff Hats
CORRECTION DIVISION
PURPOSES, IDEAL SCENES, PRODUCTS,
STATISTICS
(Cancels HCO P/L 22 Sept 70 "Ideal Scenes & Stats",
HCO P/L 15 July 70 "Reorganization of the Correction
Div" and HCO P/L 8 Aug 70 "Reorganization of the
Correction Div" Amendment)
PURPOSE OF THE CORRECTION DIVISION
To find and restore lost tech and safeguard Knowledge; to ensure
the technical honesty and results of Scientology and Dianetics,
correct them when needful and attest to them when attained.
Person Responsible.,
Qualifications Secretary D/Qual See for Admin
IDEAL SCENE:
Fully hatted and manned Qual Division, well organized and
drilled in its functions, which provides full word clearing
facilities and excellent service to staff, resulting in effective
and well trained staff. Top Library service, real Interne training
penetrating swift Cramming, resulting in well corrected org
products and exported knowledge. Smooth routing of students, staff
and pcs, thorough examination and valid certification and
classification of all the org's publics. The whole atmosphere in
Qual should exude effortless competence, and utilizing the full
technology of Dianetics and Scientology, make it known and used
correctly. This is keeping Scientology working.
Valuable Final Products:
A. Effective and well trained staff members. B. Exported Knowledge.
C. Earned Certs and Awards.
Statistics:
A. GI divided by number on staff. B. Money paid for training.
C. Total number of creditable success stories turned in, less
the number of people not passing Key questions, and less 2 for any
Ethics action taken on a student, preclear or staff member for the
week.
QUAL ESTABLISHMENT OFFICER
Purpose:
To help LRH to more firmly establish whatever and whoever
already exists in the Correction Division.
Ideal Scene:
Establishes the Division by providing the terminals, lines,
spaces and material for the whole Correction Division, so that it
can and does correct Auditors, staff, supervisors, C/Ses and
students and public effectively, deliver word clearing, programme
staff and ensure the technical honesty of the org.
Product:
Well functioning Qual Div and staff who produce products of
their post in quantity, quality and with viability.
Statistic:
Total number of rising Qual stats for the week.
35
SENIOR OR G CIS
Purpose:
To help LRH ensure that the results of Scientology are obtained.
Ideal Scene:
Posted directly under the Qual See, provides a senior C/S spur
line from Tech Div, debugs any bogged cases. Sees any and all Red
Tag folders daily, is a needed senior terminal to Org C/S in Dept
12. Sees that Tech Div C/Ses and Auditors are fully and adequately
crammed for all auditing, C/Sing and programming flubs. Post held
by the Qual See when there is no separate Senior C/S on post. Wears
Flub Catch report line for lower orgs.
Statistic:
1. Total number of Cramming cycles ordered and completed for the
week.
2. Total number of cases debugged and now running well.
DEPT 13 DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT AWARENESS LEVEL:
ENHANCEMENT Person Responsible:
Director of Personnel Enhancement Purpose:
To ensure that all staff make excellent case and training
progress and become true team contributors with increased value to
themselves and the Organization.
Ideal Scene:
Provides top case supervision, seeing that all staff are audited
regularly in intensives. Ensures co-ordination and execution of
staff training progresses optimumly, through expert personnel
programming. Staff Training Officer maintaining and controlling
training lines and cycles, full use of word clearing and study
technology, thus increasing org efficiency and staff ability. Gives
Chaplain and MO assistance to staff and public as needed, ensuring
that all persons handled are properly returned to the right lines.
It is individual handling all the way to a win in the Dept of
Personnel Enhancement.
Valuable Final Product:
Effective and well trained staff members.
Statistic:
GI divided by No. on Staff.
STAFF CASE SUPERVISOR
Purpose:
To push all staff cases to the highest possible level, achieving
real gains with lots of flubless auditing.
Ideal Scene:
Expert, thorough case supervision, case programming and handling
of each staff case to stable wins and routine progress up the
Gradation Chart. Demanding high quality, flubless auditing from all
staff staff Auditors and handling all tech departures with cramming
and word clearing.
Product:
Wins of staff pcs and auditors.
Statistic:
Percentage of F/N at Examiner.
STAFF TRAINING OFFICER
Purpose:
To help LRH train individual staff members and applicants from
his own and other orgs in Ethics, Tech and Admin.
36 Ideal Scene:
Keeping track of staff, guiding them through their courses,
giving them checkouts, expediting their training, seeing that their
personnel records in Dept I are factual as to training and
assisting them in every way to get training and to be trained
rapidly with the end product that orgs have no untrained staff.
Product:
Trained staff.
Statistic:
I . Total number of staff study points. 2. Total number of staff
completions.
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMER
Purpose:
To help LRH to expertly programme each staff member to a point
of real success on his own post, to operate well as a member of the
group and attain higher and higher levels of skill, knowledge and
ability, through full use of the technology of Scientology and
Dianetics.
Ideal Scene:
Interviews and obtains data from all staff, then programmes them
on the meter, in a gradient of wins, to be fully on post,
developing its skills and know-how, and channelling staff into
higher achievements through full utilization of all study
technology.
Product:
I . Completed staff programmes. 2. The wins of staff members.
Statistic:
Total number of completed programme steps or cycles.
WORD CLEARING SECTION
Person responsible:
Word Clearing (c) of P
Purpose:
To help LRH clear away misunderstoods and barriers to learning
and ensure that Knowledge is never lost.
Ideal Scene:
A well organized and line drilled word clearing Section with a
minimum of two word clearers, their own word clearing C/S, and
Page, handling misunderstoods on past related subjects, current
studies or duties and clearing barriers to clear understanding of
post purposes, thus ensuring flubless tech and admin quality,
soaring org viability and full application of Dianetics and
Scientology for the greatest good of the greatest number of
dynamics-ultimate survival.
Product:
Successful staff and students.
Statistics:
Total number of hours of WD word clearing. Total number of WC
completions.
CHAPLAIN
Purpose:
To help LRH to provide succor for the needy and direct them to
their next correct step.
37 Ideal Scene:
The Chaplain cares for those who have been neglected or fallen
off lines, visits the sick, handles civil disputes and wrongs
between individual Scientologists and Dianeticists and generally
sees that justice is done. The Chaplain also advises the Dir
Personnel Enhancement or the Cramming Officer of needed correction
cycles on staff. Product:
Well handled public or staff personal upsets. Statistic:
Number of people routed back on the right line.
MEDICAL OFFICER Purpose:
To provide good basic medical service, fast handling of any
non-optimum physical condition, and bring about the good health of
the org staff and its public.
Ideal Scene:
The MO is well versed in first aid, understands basic body
functions and their remedy, liaises with the Medical Doctor for
needed tests, correct diagnosis and treatment, never ceases to use
Assists and request Dianetic auditing for the sick; keeps the Case
Supervisors well informed on all persons on MO lines, never
neglects a sick person, and sees that they get the right treatment
and get well fast.
Product:
A healthy staff and public. Statistic:
Total number of medical cycles handled.
DEPT 14 DEPARTMENT OF CORRECTION
AWARENESS LEVEL: CORRECTION Person Responsible:
Director of Correction Purpose:
To help LRH ensure that all Scientology and Dianetics Knowledge
is freely available, fully used and promptly corrected when
mis-applied, thus ensuring the technical honesty of the
organization,
Ideal Scene:
An org library full of all Scientology and Dianetics materials
and tapes, reference books and dictionaries of all kinds, well
tabulated and cross-referenced, which is used by the org staff and
students. A textbook Interneship in which Auditors become flubless
professionals through volume auditing, daily study and practical
training. A Cramming finding whys for student and auditor flubs and
alertly ensuring that materials are known, cleared of
misunderstoods and drilled to confident certainty.
Product:
Corrected org products. Valuable Final Product:
Exported Knowledge. Statistics:
I . No. of items studied or used in the org library.
2. Total number of WD hours of auditing by org Internes.
3. Total number of correction actions done in Cramming.
STAFF LIBRARIAN
Purpose:
To help LRH provide a full library of all Scientology and
Dianetics Knowledge for org staff reference and use. To safeguard
this Knowledge and ensure it never gets lost or removed.
38 Ideal Scene:
All Scientology and Dianetics Knowledge and reference materials
and dictionaries fully available, indexed and easily found, for org
staff use and reference, plus the supply of information on where
data is to be found. Sees the materials are correctly stored and
safeguarded, with Master Copies clearly marked in Red and never
allowed to leave the Library area; also has a library reading area
where Knowledge can be studied in the Library.
Product:
Exported Knowledge.
Statistic:
Number of items of Knowledge read or studied.
INTERNE SUPER VISOR
Purpose:
To help LRH make real flubless professional Auditors through
volume auditing, fast correction of flubs and daily precision
training.
Ideal Scene:
Runs a tight on policy course which concentrates on a fast route
to actual volume auditing, knowing that volume auditing with
instant correction is the way to make flubless auditors. Puts all
Internes and HGC Auditors through the OKay to Audit system and
pushes them through to full OKay to Audit on each level.
Continually pushes up the standard to higher and higher levels of
standardness.
Product:
Flubless Auditors.
Statistic:
Total number of well done hours of auditing by all the org's
Internes and HGC Auditors who do not have full HGC OKays to Audit
on any level.
CRAMMING OFFICER
Purpose:
To help LRH to isolate and correct real causes for staff and
student mis-application of technology or policy and see that the
correct data is known, cleared of misunderstoods and drilled to
confident certainty, thus ensuring the technical honesty of the
organization.
Ideal Scene:
Competently isolates real causes for flubs in policy and tech,
ensuring all data in a specific area is studied and that basics are
known and applied. Uses word clearing and full study tech and
drills to perfect application of all students, auditors and staff.
Checks out all auditors and tech staff on all new HCO Bulletins and
technical Policy Letters within 24 hours of receipt and drills
auditors on any new procedure before issuing an OKay to audit.
Checks out auditors and C/Ses on needed cramming cycles. Protects
and safeguards knowledges and uses every skill to ensure lost
technology is restored and that the integrity and honesty of
Scientology and Dianetics are maintained. In a larger org, would
have a separate Cramming Officer for tech and admin.
Product:
Corrected org products.
Statistic:
Total number of correction actions done in Cramming.
DEPT 15 DEPARTMENT OF VALIDITY
AWARENESS LEVEL: VALIDITY
Person Responsible:
Director of Validity
39
Purpose:
To help LRH ensure the technical honesty and results of the
Organization.
Ideal Scene:
Fast smooth routing of all publics in and out of Qual, expert pc
and student examinations, which pass correctly earned Gradation and
Classification and detect and pass for correction all flubbed
products. Immediate supply of all earned Certs and Awards, catches
any dropped balls, permanently logs all achievements carefully.
Fast handling of any ARC broken pcs and routing back onto org
lines.
Valuable Final Product:
Earned Certs and Awards.
Statistic:
Total number of re-signups for the week.
QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE OFFICER
Purpose:
To help LRH correctly route all publics into, within and out of
Qual smoothly and efficiently.
Ideal Scene:
Logs in and invoices out all paying publics, collects all monies
due, reports all non-paying persons as non-handled fast to Dir
Validity, logs all staff in and out, invoicing contracted staff at
no charge and collecting from non-contracted staff.
Product:
Well and properly routed publics.
Statistic:
Total amount of money collected for the week, by reason of
Memberships and payment for Qual services.
EXAMINER
Purpose:
To help LRH ensure that the technical results of the
Organization are excellent and consistent, that students and
preclears are without flaw for their skill or state when passed and
that any technical deficiency of org personnel is reported and
handled so that the technical results of the organization continue
to be excellent and consistent.
It must be kept in mind that the product of the organization is
not Scientologists, but conditions changed by Scientology.
Therefore the ability of the auditor to change conditions in
preclears and the ability of the preclear or clear to change
conditions along the dynamics are the only concern of the
Examiners. The integrity of Scientology and its hope for beings in
this Universe are entrusted to the Examiners.
PC EXAMINER IDEAL SCENE:
Examines all the org's pcs expertly and accurately, catches all
flubs, by inspecting all folders sent for Declare? before calling
the pc ensuring that the process or rundown was run and full EP
attained, and reports all technical deficiencies and ensures these
are handled.
Product:
Earned Certificates and achievements.
Statistic:
I . Total number of pcs examined.
2. Total number of flubbed products picked up and routed for
handling, if accompanied by a Cramming order to the person or
persons responsible for the technical flub.
40 STUDENT EXAMINER IDEAL SCENE:
Gives thorough written and practical exams which detect all
flubbed products and routes these to Cramming, and passes all who
know and can apply the data for full Certification or
Classification.
Product:
Students who can and do apply the data learned.
Statistic:
I . Total number of students examined.
2. Total number of flubbed products picked up and routed to
Cramming.
CER TS AND AWARDS OFFICER
Purpose:
To help LRH issue and record valid attestations of skill, state
and merit, honestly deserved, attained and earned, by Beings,
activities or areas.
Ideal Scene:
Maintains excellent hard cover log books which list (a) all
personal attainments, including the name of the Auditor for each
Grade, and (b) category list of all course completions. Prepares
handsome certificates the org's publics will be proud to display,
in advance and supplies these when attained for Registrar
presentation. Observes for any flubbed products and ensures these
are corrected. Issues all the org's Certificates and awards,
including Membership Cards. Issues preclears and students with data
about their next step as a routine action.
Valuable Final Product:
Earned Certs and Awards.
Statistic:
I . Total number of certs and awards issued.
2. Total number of flubbed products picked up and reported.
ARC BREAK AUDITOR
Purpose:
To help LRH competently handle any and all ARC broken persons
and get these back on lines.
Ideal Scene:
Liaises with the ARC Break Reg in Div 2 and competently and
quickly handles all ARC Broken persons, gets these back on org
lines; writes letters, gets FESed folders of ARC broken persons
from the Tech Div and gets each handled by locating and indicating
the correct by-passed charge.
Product:
Well handled ARC broken persons, who are no longer ARC broken,
and sign up for their next service.
Statistic:
Total number of ARC broken persons handled who sign up for their
next service.
Judy Ziff
Qual Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:JZ:ne.rd Founder
Copyright (c) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
41
DIV V MINI QUAL ORG BOARD
CORRECTION DIVISION
0 0 0
QUAL SEC
(c) QUAL SEC for Org Admin
VALIDITY CORRECTION
DEPARTMENT 13 DEPARTMENT 14 DEPARTMENT 15 0
0
DEPT OF VALIDITY DEPT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT DEPT OF CORRECTION
>
VALIDITY DIRECTOR PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT DIRECTOR CORRECTION DIRECTOR
< 0
.
Staff C/S
(Held by Sec) ORG LIBRARY
Staff Training Officer 0 1
QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE Staff Librarian MO
>
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING SECTION Staff Information Center t,
0
>
Personnel Programmer Policy
Tech
EXAMINER
CLEARING SECTION Tapes
Packs
2 Word Clearing Auditors
Purpose Clearing Auditors
Qual Clearing Page
C-~ * Intern Supervisor/
Cramming Officer
Chaplain
Medical Officer
I Posts must be manned.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1965
REISSUED 15 JUNE 1970
Remimeo
Sthil Students (Reissued 28.1.73 to correct word on p. 47,
Assn/Org See Hat Para 2. [Change in this type style-D
HCO Sec Hat
Case Sup Hat
Ds of P Hat
Ds of T Hat
Staff Member Hat
Franchise
(issued May 1965)
Note: Neglect of this Pol Ltr has caused great hardship on
staffs, has cost countless millions and made it necessary in 1970
to engage in an all out International effort to restore basic
Scientology over the world. Within 5 years after the issue of this
PL with me off the lines, violation had almost destroyed orgs.
"Quickie grades" entered in and denied gain to tens of thousands of
cases. Therefore actions which neglect or violate this Policy
Letter are HIGH CRIMES resulting in Comm Evs on ADMINISTRATORS and
EXECUTIVES. It is not "entirely a tech matter" as its neglect
destroys orgs and caused a 2 year slump. IT IS THE BUSINESS OF
EVERY STAFF MEMBER to enforce it.
ALL LEVELS
KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING
HCO See or Communicator Hat Check
on all personnel and new personnel
as taken on.
We have some time since passed the point of achieving uniformly
workable technology.
The only thing now is getting the technology applied.
If you can't get the technology applied then you can't deliver
what's promised. It's as simple as that. If you can get the
technology applied, you can deliver what's promised.
The only thing you can be upbraided for by students or pcs is
"no results". Trouble spots occur only where there are "no
results". Attacks from governments or monopolies occur only where
there are "no results" or "bad results".
Therefore the road before Scientology is clear and its ultimate
success is assured if the technology is applied.
So it is the task of the Assn or Org See, the HCO See, the Case
Supervisor, the (c) of P, the (c) of T and all staff members to get
the correct technology applied.
Getting the correct technology applied consists of:
One: Having the correct technology.
Two: Knowing the technology.
Three: Knowing it is correct.
Four: Teaching correctly the correct technology.
Five: Applying the technology.
Six: Seeing that the technology is correctly applied.
Seven: Hammering out of existence incorrect technology.
Eight: Knocking out incorrect applications.
43
Nine: Closing the door on any possibility of incorrect technology.
Ten: Closing the door on incorrect application.
One above has been done.
Two has been achieved by many.
Three is achieved by the individual applying the correct technology
in a proper manner and observing that it works that way.
Four is being done daily successfully in most parts of the world.
Five is consistently accomplished daily.
Six is achieved by instructors and supervisors consistently,
Seven is done by a few but is a weak point.
Eight is not worked on hard enough.
Nine is impeded by the "reasonable" attitude of the not quite
bright.
Ten is seldom done with enough ferocity.
Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten are the only places Scientology can bog
down in any area.
The reasons for this are not hard to find. (a) A weak certainty
that it works in Three above can lead to weakness in Seven, Eight,
Nine and Ten. (b) Further, the not-too-bright have a bad point on
the button Self-Importance. (c) The lower the IQ, the more the
individual is shut off from the fruits of observation. (c) The
service facs of people make them defend themselves against anything
they confront good or bad and seek to make it wrong. (e) The bank
seeks to knock out the good and perpetuate the bad.
Thus, we as Scientologists and as an organization must be very
alert to Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
In all the years I have been engaged in research I have kept my
comm lines wide open for research data. I once had the idea that a
group could evolve truth. A third of a Century has thoroughly
disabused me of that idea. Willing as I was to accept suggestions
and data, only a handful of suggestions (less than twenty) had long
run value and none were major or basic; and when I did accept major
or basic suggestions and used them, we went astray and I repented
and eventually had to "eat crow".
On the other hand there have been thousands and thousands of
suggestions and writings which, if accepted and acted upon, would
have resulted in the complete destruction of all our work as well
as the sanity of pcs. So I know what a group of people will do and
how insane they will go in accepting unworkable "technology". By
actual record the percentages are about twenty to 100,000 that a
group of human beings will dream up bad technology to destroy good
technology. As we could have gotten along without suggestions,
then, we had better steel ourselves to continue to do so now that
we have made it. This point will, of course, be attacked as
"unpopular", "egotistical" and "undemocratic". It very well may be.
But it is also a survival point. And I don't see that popular
measures, self-abnegation and democracy have done anything for Man
but push him further into the mud. Currently, popularity endorses
degraded novels, self-abnegation has filled the South East Asian
jungles with stone idols and corpses, and democracy has given us
inflation and income tax.
Our technology has not been discovered by a group. True, if the
group had not supported me in many ways I could not have discovered
it either. But it remains that if in its formative stages it was
not discovered by a group, then group efforts, one can safely
assume, will not add to it or successfully alter it in the future.
I can only say this now that it is done. There remains, of course,
group tabulation or co-ordination of what has been done, which will
be valuable-only so long as it does not seek to alter basic
principles and successful applications.
The contributions that were worth while in this period of
forming the technology were help in the form of friendship, of
defence, of organization, of dissemination, of application, of
advices on results and of finance. These were great contributions
and
44
were, and are, appreciated. Many thousands contributed in this
way and made us what we are. Discovery contribution was not however
part of the broad picture.
We will not speculate here on why this was so or how I came to
rise above the bank. We are dealing only in facts and the above is
a fact-the group left to its own devices would not have evolved
Scientology but with wild dramatization of the bank called "new
ideas" would have wiped it out. Supporting this is the fact that
Man has never before evolved workable mental technology and
emphasizing it is the vicious technology he did evolve-psychiatry,
psychology, surgery, shock treatment, whips, duress, punishment,
etc, ad infinitum.
So realize that we have climbed out of the mud by whatever good
luck and good sense, and refuse to sink back into it again. See
that Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten above are ruthlessly followed and
we will never be stopped. Relax them, get reasonable about it and
we will perish.
So far, while keeping myself in complete communication with all
suggestions, I have not failed on Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten in
areas I could supervise closely. But it's not good enough for just
myself and a few others to work at this.
Whenever this control as per Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten has been
relaxed the whole organizational area has failed. Witness
Elizabeth, N.J., Wichita, the early organizations and groups. They
crashed only because I no longer did Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
Then, when they were all messed up, you saw the obvious "reasons"
for failure. But ahead of that they ceased to deliver and that
involved them in other reasons.
The common denominator of a group is the reactive bank. Thetans
without banks have different responses. They only have their banks
in common. They agree then only on bank principles. Person to
person the bank is identical. So constructive ideas are individual
and seldom get broad agreement in a human group. An individual must
rise above an avid craving for agreement from a humanoid group to
get anything decent done. The bank-agreement has been what has made
Earth a Hell-and if you were looking for Hell and found Earth, it
would certainly serve. War, famine, agony and disease has been the
lot of Man. Right now the great governments of Earth have developed
the means of frying every Man, Woman and Child on the planet. That
is Bank. That is the result of Collective Thought Agreement. The
decent, pleasant things on this planet come from individual actions
and ideas that have somehow gotten by the Group Idea. For that
matter, look how we ourselves are attacked by "public opinion"
media. Yet there is no more ethical group on this planet than
ourselves.
Thus each one of us can rise above the domination of the bank
and then, as a group of freed beings, achieve freedom and reason.
It is only the aberrated group, the mob, that is destructive.
When you don't do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten actively, you are
working for the Bank dominated mob. For it will surely, surely (a)
introduce incorrect technology and swear by it, (b) apply
technology as incorrectly as possible, (c) open the door to any
destructive idea, and (c) encourage incorrect application.
It's the Bank that says the group is all and the individual
nothing. It's the Bank that says we must fail.
So just don't play that game. Do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten and
you will knock out of your road all the future thorns.
Here's an actual example in which a senior executive had to
interfere because of a pc spin: A Case Supervisor told Instructor A
to have Auditor B run Process X on Preclear C. Auditor B afterwards
told Instructor A that "it-didn't work". Instructor A was weak on
Three above and didn't really believe in Seven, Eight, Nine and
Ten. So Instructor A told the Case Supervisor "Process X didn't
work on Preclear C". Now this strikes directly at each of One to
Six above in Preclear C, Auditor B, Instructor A and the Case
Supervisor. It opens the door to the introduction of "new
technology" and to failure.
What happened here? Instructor A didn't jump down Auditor B's
throat, that's all that happened. This is what he should have done:
Grabbed the Auditor's report and looked it over. When a higher
executive on this case did so she found what the Case Supervisor
and the rest missed: that Process X increased Preclear C's TA to 25
TA divisions for the session but that near session end Auditor B
Qed and Aed with a
45
cognition and abandoned Process X while it still gave high TA
and went off running one of Auditor B's own manufacture, which
nearly spun Preclear C. Auditor B's IQ on examination turned out to
be about 75. Instructor A was found to have huge ideas of how you
must never invalidate anyone, even a lunatic. The Case Supervisor
was found to be "too busy with admin to have any time for actual
cases".
All right, there's an all too typical example. The Instructor
should have done Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. This would have begun
this way. Auditor B: "That process X didn't work." Instructor A:
"What exactly did you do wrong?" Instant attack. "Where's your
auditor's report for the session? Good. Look here, you were getting
a lot of TA when you stopped Process X. What did you do?" Then the
Pc wouldn't have come close to a spin and all four of these would
have retained certainty.
In a year, I had four instances in one small group where the
correct process recommended was reported not to have worked. But on
review found that each one had (a) increased the TA, (b) had been
abandoned, and (c) had been falsely reported as unworkable. Also,
despite this abuse, in each of these four cases the recommended,
correct process cracked the case. Yet they were reported as not
having worked!
Similar examples exist in instruction and these are all the more
deadly as every time instruction in correct technology is flubbed,
then the resulting error, uncorrected in the auditor, is
perpetuated on every pc that auditor audits thereafter. So Seven,
Eight, Nine and Ten are even more important in a course than in
supervision of cases.
Here's an example: A rave recommendation is given a graduating
student "because he gets more TA on pcs than any other student on
the course!" Figures of 435 TA divisions a session are reported.
"Of course his model session is poor but it's just a knack he has"
is also included in the recommendation. A careful review is
undertaken because nobody at levels 0 to IV is going to get that
much TA on pcs. It is found that this student was never taught to
read an EMeter TA dial! And no instructor observed his handling of
a meter and it was not discovered that he "overcompensated"
nervously, swinging the TA 2 or 3 divisions beyond where it needed
to go to place the needle at "set". So everyone was about to throw
away standard processes and model session because this one student
"got such remarkable TA". They only read the reports and listened
to the brags and never looked at this student. The pcs in actual
fact were making slightly less than average gain, impeded by a
rough model session and misworded processes. Thus, what was making
the pcs win (actual Scientology) was hidden under a lot of
departures and errors.
I recall one student who was squirreling on an Academy course
and running a lot of off-beat whole track on other students after
course hours. The academy students were in a state of
electrification on all these new experiences and weren't quickly
brought under control and the student himself never was given the
works on Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten so they stuck. Subsequently,
this student prevented another squirrel from being straightened out
and his wife died of cancer resulting from physical abuse. A hard,
tough instructor at that moment could have salvaged two squirrels
and saved the life of a girl. But no, students had a right to do
whatever they pleased.
Squirreling (going off into weird practices or altering
Scientology) only comes about from noncomprehension. Usually the
non-comprehension is not of Scientology but some earlier contact
with an off-beat humanoid practice which in its turn was not
understood.
When people can't get results from what they think is standard
practice, they can be counted upon to squirrel to some degree. The
most trouble in the past two years came from orgs where an
executive in each could not assimilate straight Scientology. Under
instruction in Scientology they were unable to define terms or
demonstrate examples of principles. And the orgs where they were
got into plenty of trouble. And worse, it could not be straightened
out easily because neither one of these people could or would
duplicate instructions. Hence, a debacle resulted in two places,
directly traced to failures of instruction earlier. So proper
instruction is vital. The (c) of T and his Instructors and all
Scientology Instructors must be merciless in getting Four, Seven,
Eight, Nine and Ten into effective action. That one student, dumb
and impossible though he may seem and of no use to anyone, may yet
some day be the cause of untold upset because nobody was interested
enough to make sure Scientology got home to him.
With what we know now, there is no student we enrol who cannot
be properly trained. As an instructor, one should be very alert to
slow progress and should turn the
46
sluggards inside out personally. No system will do it, only you
or me with our sleeves rolled up can crack the back of bad
studenting and we can only do it on an individual student, never on
a whole class only. He's slow = something is awful wrong. Take fast
action to correct it. Don't wait until next week. By then he's got
other messes stuck to him. If you can't graduate them with their
good sense appealed to and wisdom shining, graduate them in such a
state of shock they'll have nightmares if they contemplate
squirreling. Then experience will gradually bring about Three in
them and they'll know better than to chase butterflies when they
should be auditing.
When somebody enrols, consider he or she has joined up for the
duration of the universe-never permit an "open-minded" approach. If
they're going to quit let them quit fast. If they enrolled, they're
aboard, and if they're aboard, they're here on the same terms as
the rest of us-win or die in the attempt. Never let them be
half-mirlded. about being Scientologists. The finest organizations
in history have been tough, dedicated organizations. Not one
namby-pamby bunch of panty-waist dilettantes have ever made
anything. It's a tough universe. The social veneer makes it seem
mild. But only the tigers survive-and even they have a hard time.
We'll survive because we are tough and are dedicated. When we do
instruct somebody properly he becomes more and more tiger. When we
instruct half-mindedly and are afraid to offend, soared to enforce,
we don't make students into good Scientologists and that lets
everybody down. When Mrs. Pattycake comes to us to be taught, turn
that wandering doubt in her eye into a fixed, dedicated glare and
she'll win and we'll all win. Humour her and we all die a little.
The proper instruction attitude is, "You're here so you're a
Scientologist. Now we're going to make you into an expert auditor
no matter what happens. We'd rather have you dead than incapable. "
Fit that into the economics of the situation and lack of
adequate time and you see the cross we have to bear.
But we won't have to bear it forever. The bigger we get the more
economics and time we will have to do our job. And the only things
which can prevent us from getting that big fast are areas in from
One to Ten. Keep those in mind and we'll be able to grow. Fast. And
as we grow our shackles will be less and less. Failing to keep One
to Ten, will make us grow less.
So the ogre which might eat us up is not the government or the
High Priests. It's our possible failure to retain and practise our
technology.
An Instructor or Supervisor or Executive must challenge with
ferocity instances of "unworkability". They must uncover what did
happen, what was run and what was done or not done.
If you have One and Two, you can only acquire Three for all by
making sure of all the rest.
We're not playing some minor game in Scientology. It isn't cute
or something to do for lack of something better.
The whole agonized future of this planet, every Man, Woman and
Child on it, and your own destiny for the next endless trillions of
years depend on what you do here and now with and in Scientology.
This is a deadly serious activity. And if we miss getting out of
the trap now, we may never again have another chance.
Remember, this is our first chance to do so in all the endless
trillions of years of the past. Don't muff it now because it seems
unpleasant or unsocial to do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
Do them and we'll win.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jw.rr.nt.ka.mes.rd Copyright (c) 1965, 1970, 1973 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
47
I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1965
(Reissued on 7 June 1967, with the word
Remimeo "instructor" replaced by "supervisor")
All Hats
BPI
SAFEGUARDING TECHNOLOGY
For some years we have had a word "squirrelling". It means
altering Scientology, off-beat practices. It is a bad thing. I have
found a way to explain why.
Scientology is a workable system. This does not mean it is the
best possible system or a perfect system. Remember and use that
definition. Scientology is a workable system.
In fifty thousand years of history on this planet alone, Man
never evolved a workable system. It is doubtful if, in foreseeable
history, he will ever evolve another.
Man is caught in a huge and complex labyrinth. To get out of it
requires that he follow the closely taped path of Scientology.
Scientology will take him out of the labyrinth. But only if he
follows the exact markings in the tunnels.
It has taken me a third of a century in this lifetime to tape
this route out.
It has been proven that efforts by Man to find different routes
came to nothing. It is also a clear fact that the route called
Scientology does lead out of the labyrinth. Therefore it is a
workable system, a route that can be travelled.
What would you think of a guide who, because his party said it
was dark and the road rough and who said another tunnel looked
better, abandoned the route he knew would lead out and led his
party to a lost nowhere in the dark. You'd think he was a pretty
wishy-washy guide.
What would you think of a supervisor who let a student depart
from procedure the supervisor knew worked. You'd think he was a
pretty wishy-washy supervisor.
What would happen in a labyrinth if the guide let some girl stop
in a pretty canyon and left her there forever to contemplate the
rocks? You'd think he was a pretty heartless guide. You'd expect
him to say at least, "Miss, those rocks may be pretty, but the road
out doesn't go that way."
All right, how about an auditor who abandons the procedure which
will make his preclear eventually clear just because the preclear
had a cognition?
People have following the route mixed up with "the right to have
their own ideas". Anyone is certainly entitled to have opinions and
ideas and cognitions-so long as these do not bar the route out for
self and others.
Scientology is a workable system. It white tapes the road out of
the labyrinth. If there were no white tapes marking the right
tunnels, Man would just go on wandering around and around the way
he has for eons, darting off on wrong roads, going in circles,
ending up in the sticky dark, alone.
Scientology, exactly and correctly followed, takes the person up
and out of the mess.
So when you see somebody having a ball getting everyone to take
peyote because it restimulates prenatals, know he is pulling people
off the route. Realize he is squirrelling. He isn't following the
route.
Scientology is a new thing-it is a road out. There has not been
one. Not all the salesmanship- in the world can make a bad route a
proper route. And an awful lot of bad routes are being sold. Their
end product is further slavery, more darkness, more misery.
48 Scientology is the only workable system Man has. It
has already taken people toward higher IQ, better lives and all
that. No other system has. So realize that it has no competitor.
Scientology is a workable system. It has the route taped. The
search is done. Now the route only needs to be walked.
So put the feet of students and preclears on that route. Don't let
them off of it no matter how fascinating the side roads seem to
them. And move them on up and out.
Squirrelling is today destructive of a workable system.
Don't let your party down. By whatever means, keep them on the
route. And they'll be free. If you don't, they won't.
LRH:jw.jp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965, 1967 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 MAY 1968
(Reissued from Flag Order 900)
Remimeo
SCIENTOLOGY TECHNOLOGY
There is one Tech and that is Standard Tech.
Unfortunately there is other Tech around. This other Tech is a
Liability. Other Tech is defined as any tech which is not standard
Tech.
Let's start punching this hard.
LRH:sb.js.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1968 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1968
Remimeo
SENIOR POLICY
We always deliver what we promise.
LRH:ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1968 founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
49
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 MAY 1969
Remimeo
Dian Checksheet
KEEPING DIANETICS WORKING IN AN AREA
In that any Dianetics Course, starting out, has only its Course
Supervisor trained, the problems of what is used for Case
Supervision and Cramming Supervisor in Qual will arise.
Here more than any other points, alteration can enter.
Altering, doing something else, is a sufficiently serious
problem to destroy a Course and all the benefits of Dianetics in a
whole area.
Early on, during the development of the Standard Dianetics
Course, we were suddenly getting case failures. These were traced
by Case Supervision to wild variations from Standard Dianetic
procedure. These variations were traced to an examiner who during
student checkouts was giving "advice". As soon as this was handled,
case gains immediately resumed.
Over the many years of Dianetic use, I think we must have seen
all possible variations of auditing. "New" phenomena were often
discovered and used and
0
eventually the whole subject wandered off into never-never land
and ceased to produce uniform results.
What has happened here in Standard Dianetics is that the exact
actions that produce results on all cases have been isolated and
used as THE procedure.
The procedure is a thin narrow walk way through a huge field of
potential alterations.
THERE ARE NO DIFFERENT CASES.
Built in to the Standard Dianetic procedure are the remedies.
For instance early Dianetics was plagued by several problems:
I . Lack of visio-an inability to see pictures. This was solved
by getting date and duration.
2. Perception shut off. Not required in total now to produce
results. Sonic, ability to hear the sound in pictures, is not
needed at all. Impression is sufficient.
3. Somatic shut off. Not now required to be solved but its
source (drugs and alcohol) have been discovered.
4. Rough sessions. Solved by TRs.
5. Lack of auditor judgement in diagnosis. Solved by the
E-Meter.
In these years of research I have been able to wrap up these and
other things.
There have been more cases run on Dianetics than could easily be
counted. So the research data is very broad. This is no new
subject. It has been close to 39 years under research.
Thus what you are told on the Standard Dianetics
Course is the essence of all this
50
work and experience. There are no unsolved problems, there is
only varied application where there should not be.
The whole object of the course is to train people to get good
RESULTS, and train people to give a course that results in GOOD
AUDITORS. That's the whole thing.
We could also teach over 50,000,000 words about things that
don't get results or train auditors.
The essence of a brilliant subject is a simple subject.
Therefore anything that varies the data of a Standard Dianetics
Course can send it out into unworkability.
I've seen auditors also use "peyote" (a drug), C02 and drugs "t
o help auditing". I've seen many different meter types used. I've
looked over a thousand different ways to run a session. And I've
seen all these things fail.
The four points of greatest potential failure are
I . A Course Supervisor who interprets data and alters it in
order to satisfy some student's offbeat quest.
2. An Examiner who throws curves into data by means of
invalidating the right data.
3. A Case Supervisor who does not simply and only put the
auditor back onto the main line and who seeks to "solve" cases by
altering data.
4. An Auditor who, not knowing his data in the first place,
alters the data and, because in an altered form he fails, starts
off on a wilder alteration of data and fails harder.
Under Supervisor comes the course and cramming supervisor both.
So you see, that to get real Standard Dianetic results going in
an area you have to be very alert to hold the exact data line as
contained in the HCOBs.
Where you begin to find case failures, look to I to 4 above and
to student failure to just simply study and drill.
For the first time you have an exact subject in the field of the
"humanities". These "humanities" for all man's history have been a
mass of superstition, bad logic, propaganda, authority and
brutality. An exact humanity is so new that it has a bit of a hard
time. All the errors and prejudices start to "blow off" when truth
enters in.
Just be sure you don't lose the subject with the confusion.
Cope, make do, hold the line and you'll have a successful
Dianetic area. It's worth working toward, worth achieving.
You have only one big stable datum.
IF IT ISN'T WORKING IT IS BEING VARIED.
To get it working again, find who and what is varying it and get
back on the main line.
LRH:an.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1969 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
51
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 MAY 1970
Remimeo
L44PORTANT
CUTATIVES
In the period up to 1966 we were plagued by an occasional
obsessiveness to ADD to any process or policy. Additives made
things unworkable.
After 1966 when I left the post of Executive Director WW, a new
condition set hi. Checksheets, processes, intensives, grades began
to be CUT DOWN.
This we can dub a CUTATIVE impulse to coin a word.
So persuasive were its advocates that even I was persuaded to
agree to some points of it so you need not feel bad if you were
gulled into buying the idea of shortening things in order to
produce a quicker result.
No one really saw where the trend was going.
In 1970 a survey I have just completed has shown that this
effort was so complete that the following had been broadly
accomplished:
A. Training no longer included enough Scientology materials to
make an effective Scientology auditor in many places.
B. Grades had been shortened from 50 hours 0 to IV to 2 1/2
minutes.
C. The End Phenomena of grades and processes were discarded.
The end result has been:
I . Few skilled auditors.
2. Shrunken and struggling Scn orgs.
3. A field that is disappointed in results-for they think they
have had grades and haven't.
4. People coming into Advanced Orgs to be cleared who have NO
lower grades actually run and so they can't make any upper grades.
In effect Scientology was thrown away. From total workability it
was cut down to occasional result.
I saw the first impulse of this in an executive long since
dismissed from Saint Hill as a constant overt no-case gain case who
agitated constantly to remove tapes from the Saint Hill Course. As
90% of the data on the SHSBC is on tape I merely thought he had
gone over to the enemy and ignored him. Some others, however, had
the same idea and started labeling basic books and bulletins "Mere
Background Data" or saying "We don't use that now" or "That's old
and you only look at it for interest". Thus the laws of listing and
other phenomena were thrown away.
Recently I found the reason Case Supervisors failed is that they
just don't know "The Original Thesis" and "Evolution of a Science"
or "Scn 8-80" or "Scn 8-8008". WHEN I DEMANDED THEY STUDY THESE
BOOKS THEY BECAME CAPABLE OF HANDLING CASES. They did not know what
they were handling-the mind-and so
52 how could they be sensible in ordering what was to
be run on a case?
Back in 1950 we used to have a small bunch of goony birds,
ex-psychologists, ex-lunatics. They were constantly demanding a 2
second action that totally cleared someone. Behind this was an
inability to concentrate attention or even to work. These were
people striving for total effect instantly. Yet they couldn't run
with reality on any process heavier than "How are you?" and they
never saw a wall-they saw a mock up of it!
So the impulse of DO IT ALL NOW NOW that destroyed any sanity of
psychiatry is always around.
A student with a one item checksheet who does it in one minute
is the ideal course to such.
A preclear run for 21/2 minutes to total top grades becomes an
ideal auditing session to such.
Such things just aren't real. And such unreality got into the
lines too hard and is being escorted right back out right now.
The following policies are in full force and are to be backed up
fully.
1. Course checksheets may not be cut, edited or reduced after a
fully approved checksheet is issued for use on any course.
2. No grade may be awarded for which all processes of that grade
have not been run and where the end phenomena of that grade is not
attested to singly and fully by the preclear before an examiner.
3. Anyone found relegating basic materials to unimportance, by
reason of age or volume is to lose his post and certificates.
4. Any statistic claimed which is achieved by downgrading
materials or grades or falsely pretending an end phenomena has been
achieved for pcs, or skill by auditors shall result in the
dismissal of the division head presenting it.
5. No suppressive person with a fat ethics file and no case gain
may hold any executive position in a Scientology org.
If you in any org or franchise are having any field or financial
trouble you need not look further than errors pointed out in this
Policy Letter.
"Dianetic Triples" awarded after 11/2 hours of processing,
"multiple declares" after 10 minutes from 0 to IV, using
checksheets from which all basic material has been cut, the failure
to realize gains and abilities and success have to be worked for to
be true, are at the bottom of any trouble any org or franchise is
having.
Beginning with the Pol Ltr of 10 May 1970 a more honest era has
began.
Scramble around and put it right.
Deliver Scientology not a Cutative.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:dz.nt.ka.aap Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
53
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1970
Remimeo
Applies to all URGENT AND
SHs and
Academies L44PORTANT
HGCs
Franchises
TECHNICAL DEGRADES
(This PL and HCO PL Feb 7,1965 must
be made part of every study pack as the
first items and must be listed on
checksheets.)
Any checksheet in use or in stock which carries on it any
degrading statement must be destroyed and issued without qualifying
statements.
Example: Level 0 to IV Checksheets SH carry "A. Background
Material-This section is included as an historical background, but
has much interest and value to the student. Most of the processes
are no longer used, having been replaced by more modern technology.
The student is only required to read this material and ensure he
leaves no misunderstood." This heading covers such vital things as
TRs, Op Pro by Dup! The statement is a falsehood.
These checksheets were not approved by myself, all the material
of the Academy and SH courses IS in use.
Such actions as this gave us "Quickie Grades", ARC Broke the
field and downgraded the Academy and SH Courses.
A condition of TREASON or cancellation of certificates or
dismissal and a full investigation of the background of any person
found guilty, will be activated in the case of anyone committing
the following HIGH CRIMES.
I . Abbreviating an official Course in Dianetics and Scientology
so as to lose the full theory processes and effectiveness of the
subjects.
2. Adding comments to checksheets or instructions labelling any
material "background" or "not used now" or "old" or any similar
action which will result in the student not knowing, using, and
applying the data in which he is being trained.
3. Employing after I Sept 1970 any checksheet for any course not
authorized by myself and the SO Organizing Bureau Flag.
4. Failing to strike from any checksheet remaining in use
meanwhile any such comments as "historical", "background", "not
used", "old", etc. or VERBALLY STATING IT TO STUDENTS.
5. Permitting a pc to attest to more than one grade at a time on
the pc's own determinism without hint or evaluation.
6. Running only one process for a grade between 0 to IV.
7. Failing to use all processes for a level.
8. Boasting as to speed of delivery in a session, such as "I put
in Grade Zero in 3 minutes." Etc.
54
9. Shortening time of application of auditing for financial or
labor saving considerations.
10. Acting in any way calculated to lose the technology of
Dianetics and Scientology to use or impede its use or shorten its
materials or its application.
REASON: The effort to get students through courses and get pcs,
processed in orgs was considered best handled by reducing materials
or deleting processes from grades. The pressure exerted to speed up
student completions and auditing completions was mistakenly
answered by just not delivering.
The correct way to speed up a student's progress is by using 2
way comm and applying the study materials to students.
The best way to really handle pcs is to ensure they make each
level fully before going on to the next and repairing them when
they do not.
The puzzle of the decline of the entire Scientology network in
the late 60S is entirely answered by the actions taken to shorten
time in study and in processing by deleting materials and actions.
Reinstituting full use and delivery of Dianetics and Scientology
is the answer to any recovery.
The product of an org is well taught students and thoroughly
audited pcs. When the product vanishes, so does the org. The orgs;
must survive for the sake of this planet.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
55
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO, POLICY LETTER OF 26 OCTOBER 1971
Remimeo
(c) of P Hat
Tech Sec Hat
Qual Sec Hat
Registrar Hat
TECH DOWNGRADES
A constant alertness must be maintained in the Tech and Qual
Divisions and especially by a C/S and (c) of P for technical
downgrades.
To people who have no personal reality on the results of
processing it is especially easy to be "reasonable" about no
results.
The public is not result conscious. This is proven by a century
of botched up psychiatry and psychology. At no time in that century
has a government or a society recognized or demanded results. The
evidence that this is a fact is very plain. Psychiatry and
psychology have never achieved a positive lasting result of any
benefit but on the contrary downgrade, injure and kill. Yet they
are still functioning as professions.
Now this seems to be an invitation or justification for an org
not to try for any results.
But the truth is that the public is with you just so long as
results are achieved. As soon as they aren't achieved, areas become
upset.
And as for psychiatry and psychology, they are functioning but
resultless, are in serious trouble and are despised.
So there is no tradition of or any general belief in results in
the society or its governments.
Thus an org can become sloppy as there is no visible demand for
results. There is only an invisible hope. And a definite reaction
when they don't occur.
We CAN and DO achieve results beyond anyone's hopes.
So long as we continue to do this our area control will expand.
When we don't it will contract.
In view of the above lack of demand, it is up to us to hold up
our own standards. Quality is a matter we must give constant
attention.
We must produce:
I . Students who CAN audit.
2. Pcs who HAVE ACHIEVED gains in auditing.
A very high-handed attitude, based on truth, is what is required
of us.
Example: Pc has had triple grades but can't talk.
All right, so we don't let him go.
We say, "We're sorry but you must redo your grade zero."
We get a Folder Error Summary, repair it, really set him up, get
him through a Comm Course and redo zero with further processes.
Example: The OCA graph of a pc "completing" his Dianetics is all
below the line-unacceptable.
We don't kid ourselves, pay a completion bonus to the
auditor and let the pc go.
56
We say, "Sorry. You haven't made it. This takes more auditing."
Example: A student "graduates" from the Academy yet doesn't
audit.
We call him back, find out why, word clear him, drill him,
demand he interne.
AS LONG AS A STUDENT OR PC THINKS HIS FAILURE TO MAKE IT IS ALL
RIGHT WITH YOU, YOU WILL HAVE A BAD REPUTE IN HIS AREA. PRIVATELY
HE WILL THINK THE SUBJECT DOESN'T WORK AND THAT YOU ARE FRAUDS.
The moment you say to somebody who hasn't made it, "You have not
met our standards" truth and respect go in.
Reversely, the moment you say to somebody who has made it that
he has, the truth of your skill is apparent to him.
To tell people that haven't made it that they have is to
establish a lie and earn contempt.
To tell people they haven't made it WHEN THEY HAVE is to get
back hostility and a bad repute.
THE GRADE CHART
When the pc has honestly achieved the auditing skills or pc
grades of the Gradation Chart you are satisfied.
If the pc hasn't, you are not satisfied.
This technical honesty is your winning card.
Even if he buys no more training or auditing he will respect you
and have confidence in you.
LOTS OF AUDITING
Real gains for pcs are attained with lots of auditing closely
spaced as in intensives.
Failure to receive enough auditing is the primary
reason for case failures.
LOTS OF COACHING
The real gains of a student come from lots of coaching, lots of
tough unswerving demands that he know his business.
CONCLUSION
You don't just sit back and say "We did all we could so we'll
let it go."
You deal in truth. Students or pcs, make it or they don't.
Whichever way it is, you say so.
You demand they do make it.
Never permit a downgrade of a training or processing result.
Even if the person buys no more auditing you still tell him.
Get off the dishonest false Public Relations morals of this
planet.
Just be honest about results.
You will be startled how well it works and how right it is.
LRH:sb.rd
Copyright (c) 1971 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
57
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 AUGUST AD 15
Remimeo
All Qual Hats
All Staff Auditor Hats
Tech Executives
Ethics
HCO See
Div 7 QUALIFICATIONS TECHNICAL ACTIONS
THIS IS A STAR RATED TECHNICAL
HAT FOR EXAMINERS, REVIEW AUDITORS AND
QUAL EXECUTIVES AND IS THE STANDARD
GUIDE FOR THEIR TECHNICAL ACTIONS
All cases that come to the Qual Division are unusual.
The solution to ALL cases that come to the Qual Division is to
do the USUAL.
If you don't hold on to that datum hard, all the "unusual" cases
will soon have Review doing the unusual. And the only salvation for
any Qual situation is to do the USUAL.
Don't go into a dispersal because of the unusual nature of the
Review cases. If they were standard they would not be in Review.
But Review has a standard procedure. It is an Always, invariable
standard procedure. Don't audit the case, audit the procedure. If
you do so YOU WILL NEVER MISS. You will only miss if you get
wrapped up in how unusual it all is.
Today Case Supervision and Review actions are all very, very
standard. And very, very workable. You only get in a mess with a
case when you don't use standard actions.
It took more than a third of a century to find the keys to all
cases. None is going to repeat all that research in the 20 minutes
given to handle a case, so the best solution is to do what's known.
FORMER RELEASE CHECK
When someone buys a Former Release Rehabilitation, he first goes
to Review to get a check. This must be a perfunctory check. If you
audit the pc you may float a needle on the check. The Review
auditor merely puts the pc who wants a Former Release check on a
meter and asks: "Have you been Released earlier?" If it reads,
THAT'S the end of the check. One says "Yes you evidently were," and
adds, "Go to the Registrar and get a Former Release
Rehabilitation." If it doesn't read it doesn't mean, not Former
Release. THE PC MAY BE ARC BROKEN, and the meter of an ARC Broken
pc may not read for the auditor. In fact an inexperienced auditor
sometimes calls an ARC Broken needle a "floating needle" merely
because it doesn't react to the auditor. So if the meter doesn't
react on the question of was the pc a Former Release, all you do in
Review is say "There may be ARC Breaks around Former Release. It
therefore doesn't read right now. It may read if the ARC Breaks are
picked up," and sends the pc to the Registrar for Rehabilitation
just the same.
In short two things can happen in a Former Release check. It
reads. It doesn't read. In both cases send the pc to the Registrar
for a Former Release Rehabilitation.
So that action is real simple.
What the pc says and does has nothing to do with it. Say what
you have to to get the pc to the Registrar, but encourage no Itsa
or you'll be tied up for an hour or two, working for nothing.
If the pc has already been to the Registrar and bought a Former
Release Rehabilitation then after the above check send the pc to
the HGC Admin.
That's all there is to it. You do anything else and you'll goof
up everything. Start to audit the pc, invite the pc to Itsa, start
picking up times or ARC Breaks and you've had it. You'll be wearing
the HGC hat and costing the org money and slowing your own lines.
58
Believe me, do just the above and NO MORE on a "Former Release
Check" in Review.
Don't get all wound up in the guy's case. They're ALL different
and unusual. That's no reason why a Former Release Check should be
unusual.
Get it?
CASE SUPERVISOR CHECK
When the Case Supervisor sends a pc already in the HGC to Review
there is only ONE standard action:
Form 26 June 1965 is done like an assessment, fast, no excessive
Itsa.
Further, it's done NOW. The Case Supervisor wants it right away.
NEVER have a "backlog" of Reviews on Case Supervisor request for
Review.
Pc comes in, gets the Form done BANG. Right now. Takes 10-15
minutes. No more than that.
One puts down under recommendations what has been found on the
assessment. "Pick up Cleaned Cleans" or "Auditor's Comm Cycle out,
do ARC Break List I Auditing by List." Whatever you found you
recommend it be done. Former Release gave a big read and BD. All
right, put "Do Former Release Rehab," as the recommendation.
When the Case Supervisor asks for a Review of the case one ONLY
does the form and does it only as an assessment. One does not
handle any part of that form on a Case Supervisor request. And one
does it straightaway. A Review "Backlog" is a disgrace. One day
wait is too many. It's done at once. Why? Because it only takes a
few minutes.
Do the form, send the pc to the Examiner and the Examiner
returns the pc a t once to the HGC or at once sends to Ethics if a
Roller Coaster is found or no case change.
Honest, it's too easy.
If it takes anyone longer than that then it's because an
assessment isn't being done. The form is being used for auditing!
When all that's needed is an assessment.
REVIEW TO REPAIR
When a pc is to be handled or finished off by Review, we now
have a different matter.
The Review Auditor sees "Review to Handle" on the slip or
"Review to complete case".
This is his signal to do Form 26 June 1965 AS AN AUDITING
ACTION.
Same form, different use. One now doesn't assess with the Form.
One Audits with the Form.
This means one cleans it all tip, section by section as one goes
along.
ARC Break reads. Find out if it's a session ARC Break or a
process ARC Break, and do the appropriate list, find it (or them)
and indicate the By-Passed Charge (don't audit it by list).
If it's an environment ARC Break adapt List I to the
environment. Locate and indicate the, ByPassed Charge.
DON'T go on with ARC Break reading when Review is handling the
pc. Clean it up.
Clean everything else up.
Polish Lip the entire form 26 June 65 and leave it all beaming.
Now do what's indicated with the case such as Former Release
Rehab or flatten unflat processes.
If the case turns out on the Form to be an Ethics type, have the
Examiner send to Ethics and don't do anything else after finding
the pc is an Ethics type. No Case Gain in the past = SP. Roller
Coaster = PTS. Leave it to Ethics to find out why. When (and
59
if) the pc gets a clean "bill of health" from Ethics (has
disconnected or whatever) Review can get the pc back again and
finish up the incomplete actions outlined in this section.
In short, in "Review to handle" one handles the whole case and
finishes it off.
The same form (Form 26 June 1965) can be used in two different
ways: as an assessment and as an auditing list of things to handle.
STUDENT ASSISTS
On a student assist the Review auditor uses Form 26 June 65 as
an assessment form and handles what is found on the form. The
Review auditor does not fail to do the form and also does not fail
to handle what was found during assessment after it is done. Note,
one assesses, then handles what was found. He doesn't audit the
whole form. And also Review doesn't complete the case as a case.
It's just an assist.
Public assists are done the same way in Review.
DECLARE? FOR RELEASE
When the Examiner does not declare a pc and does not send the pc
to Certs and Awards, he sends the pc to Review. (He can also,
instead, send the pc to Ethics.)
When the Examiner sends a Declare? to Review, instead of
Declaring, the Review Auditor does Form 26 June 65 as an
assessment, locates the trouble and after the assessment is done
handles what was found or indicates it's an Ethics matter.
in either case (audits or sends to Ethics) the Review Auditor
hands the pc back to the Examiner. The Examiner may now send the pc
to Certs and Awards to get the Release award, or to Ethics to
handle the indicated Ethics matter (usually PTS situation).
But the Examiner must not send the pc back to the HGC after the
Case Supervisor has said Declare? (except when the Declare? is for
an earlier stage than the pc is being audited for). If anything
else has to be done, Review does it.
BASIS OF QUAL ACTIONS
You see Qual Div handles the flat ball bearings that didn't roll
on the assembly line of the HGC. Qual is wholly in the flat ball
bearing business. The HGC and Academy are wholly in the assembly
line business, dealing in fairly round ball bearings.
So when the HGC or Academy has said that's it (either, "We can't
handle" or "Declare?" or "graduate") it's now up to Qual. If the pc
or student is not a Release or not well skilled or the pc doesn't
think he or she is a Release or the student feels he can't make it,
then it's all up to Review.
Qual's tools for the student are the Assist and Cramming Section
and for the pc are
I . 26 June 65 Form
2. Any standard process or auditing action.
3. HCO B 30 June 65 and any other Former Release Rehabilitation
HCO B.
HGC USES OF QUAL TOOLS
The HGC also uses these same tools. The Case Supervisor commonly
orders one of his or her auditors to do 26 June 1965 form.
On Power Processing and Former Release Rehab, an HGC Intensive
on a pc always starts with:
1. The old pc assessment form from Dianetic days (if not already
done and in hand
on the pc).
2. 116 June 65 Form (if the pc has ever been audited before).
It cuts down the clutter and keeps auditors calmer and makes
assignment easier when the HGC uses the Qua] tools routinely and
only squawks when baffled. Qual takes over on a pc if the HGC has
really goofed or has mis-Declared?
60
The HGC assembly line considers all pcs, a bit dented and runs
an assembly line on the basis of "some dents in ball bearings must
be handled in the HGC". When the ball bearing just won't roll at
all in the HGC, the Case Supervisor throws in the chips and says
"To Review to Handle." If the Case Supervisor wants a check on his
auditor, he says "To Review for check." And the HGC gets the pc
back.
Students and public wanting assists are sent straight to Review
by the Registrar, by-passing the HGC as this is bit and piece
auditing.
THE EIGHT BIG RULES
Qual (and the HGC) are not exempt from handling the Eight Big
Rules of auditing:
1. A pc must never be audited while ARC Broken. (Assessment of a
list is not auditing unless one is Auditing by List meaning
cleaning up each line, not looking for the thing on the List.)
2. A pc will make no case progress while suffering from a
Present Time Problem which fixes his attention on the environment.
3. A pc with withholds will be critical, natter or blow and is
out of comm.
4. A pc will worsen after auditing if connected to a Suppressive
Person (and only worsens when so connected).
5. A pc who makes no case gains is Suppressive (and can only be
handled by Power Processes and a Class VII Auditor).
6. Auditing a pc past a state of Release on the processes of
that stage can make the pc's tone arm rise and bar further case
gain even at upper stages of Release. (If you don't rehabilitate at
least in part a 1st Stage, Release that was overrun, you won't get
results at the 2nd Stage or any higher stage. If you don't rehab an
overrun on 2nd Stage you won't get results on Third Stage, etc.
Also, a pc who went I st Stage on R6EW won't run on 2nd Stage until
the I st Stage is found. In some cases the pc won't now run on 2nd
Stage if he went 4th Stage, by-passing the lot. In short you can't
by-pass free needles.)
7. A pc whose needle doesn't react to the auditor even at TA 2
or 3 may be ARC Broken, not Released.
8. An auditor's fractured Comm Cycle, unseen additives, lack of
skill on a meter, attitude or false report can make a standard
process not seem to work, and only these may make one work toward
unusual solutions and get unreal about standard tech.
There are other rules. They are important but not as important
as each of the EIGHT BIG RULES.
Therefore, the. only unusual solution you ever have to take in
auditing is to straighten up one of the Eight Big Rules when it's
out on the pc It is rare but can happen. Example: Pc's ARC Break is
too bad to get a read on any of the lower lines of Form 26 June 65.
Obviously, then, to assess Form 26 June 65 at all on a few cases
you have to locate and indicate the ByPassed Charge.
In checking a free needle, finding it doesn't respond at all,
one has to know by looking at the pc whether the pc is Keyed Out or
ARC Broken. The only other bug here is "Dead Thetan" wherein the
old "Stage 4" needle so called has never responded to anyone (this
is obvious as the pc never got any TA in auditing either).
A pc can have such a withhold that he just chops the auditor or
the course or the org, It's always a withhold that makes him chop
or blow. Don't be reasonable about it-it's a technical fact.
If an auditor really knows his Eight Big Rules, he can work then
very easily with a form and know what he is looking at. The eight
are on Form 26 June 65, too, you know. Only Rule 7 may prevent a
straightforward assessment, as the ARC Break may have to be handled
before one can get on down the list with reads.
COMMON MISTAKE
The Common Mistake of Review is to mistake a PTP or Withhold for
an ARC Break.
61
This is easy to do. Supervisors are prone to say "Pc ARC Broken"
when a pc looks nattery or gloomy.
Review, although it takes no instructions on tech from Tech, can
get mixed up on this too, prompted by the Supervisor's error or the
pc's own statement. SPs commonly
start a Review session with "I'm ARC Broken when, fact is the SP
has
a big withhold or PTP.
REPORTS
When a Review Auditor or an Examiner finds a tech mess like
alter-is or the fractured comm cycle of an HGC auditor, they MUST
report it to Qual See who MUST send in an Ethics chit on it. The
chit is written by the Examiner or the Review Auditor and sent to
Qual See for forwarding to Ethics.
ONLY in this way will Examiners or Review ever hold onto their
own activities. If they don't chit gross auditing errors found in
pcs or in auditing instructions then their whole larger purpose is
defeated. Qua] is the technical cop. Handle flat ball bearings,
yes. But also proof up the Tech Division against having so many by
reporting its goofs.
This applies to any student received also. Qual, getting a
student or pc who has then to be sent to Ethics MUST chit to Ethics
whoever overlooked it in Tech. When Qual finds a student who is SP
or PTS who has been on course a while, Qual must chit the student's
Course Supervisor for a big goof in having the student on course at
all. Similarly, Qual chits an auditor whose pc, sent to Review,
turns out to be PTS or SP. The Academy or HGC must have gone stupid
to be auditing or training such a student or pc. For they bring
total chaos to the assembly line. Supervisors and auditors who
don't send pcs, who are PTS or SP to Ethics deserve Psychiatric
Awards. For they are wrecking the org by continuing to train or
process such a person. So that's Qual's hat, too.
When Ethics won't handle a Roller Coaster or an SP and pushes
the being back into the Org Qual must cable or despatch the Office
of LRH Saint Hill. We have the tech on PTS and SP. We mustn't train
or audit them until the condition is handled properly in Ethics
(and even then we train and process them with a cynical squint in
the left eye, alert for further messes from them.)
SUMMARY
The technical activities of Qual are all standard, all laid out
neatly. There are no unusual solutions if one does the usual as
above.
No need to get in a panic about a case. Do the usual. If THAT
doesn't work, it was done in an unusual way, wasn't it?
Qual can win all the way.
Just do the usual Qual actions on the standard Qual internal
routing lines, and UP goes tech standards and results.
And that's what we want, don't we?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Note: Correction has been made per HCOB 21 Sept AD15, in above
section entitled REPORTS, paragraph 3, second sentence, changing
the last word Qual to Tech.]
62
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1966
Gen Non-Remimeo Issue III
Applies to
Saint Hill HGC CURE
Info other orgs INTERNE TRAINING AND STAFF AUDITORS
(Results from Comm Ev I Feb 66 and my
studies of situation)
Interne and staff auditor and course supervisor training and the
training of Tech Division executives and any and all staff training
of whatever kind is transferred herewith to the Qualifications
Division Department of Review. (This does not include staff members
taking standard courses in the Tech Div at night.)
The severe drop in the Tech Division's HGC completion statistics
which began on 17 Nov 65 and reached bottom 14 Doc 65 and which did
not properly recover had only one large change connected with it:
HGC Interne training was transferred from the Qual Division to the
Tech Division.
Mending a statistic fall consists of locating the change that
preceded it and undoing that change.
This has been done in this Policy Letter by returning Interne
training and staff auditor training back to Qual.
The Committee of Evidence of I Feb 66 revealed that the then
Director of Processing did not believe it possible to alter or
change a statistic, that one could only explain and justify one. It
is possible also that the feeling that one could not change a case
was forced on staff auditors at that time. On this possibility,
anyone taking charge of interne and staff auditor training should
stress the truth that an auditor can change cases and can change
them as fast as his auditing is smooth and by-the-book. An auditor
gets completions in exact ratio to the letter perfectness of his
auditing and his adherence to the exact technology we now have in
Scientology.
The Qual See need not necessarily change Interne Supervisors or
times of training unless he sees fit. It is pointed out that he is
held responsible for the quality of HGC auditor performance and
technical knowledge and how he achieves this is up to him.
The Director of Processing is held responsible for the amount of
auditing time put in on pcs. Should results not occur by reason of
poor auditor performance on the advice of the Case Supervisor he
should order the auditor to Qual. And if the results are not
forthcoming by reason of non-compliance with the Case Supervisor's
orders he should order the auditor to Ethics for a hearing.
If an auditor auditing in and for the HGC receives an order from
the (c) of P or the Case Supervisor that is non-standard or is an
extra-ordinary solution he must file a job endangerment chit with
Ethics at once and may not execute the instruction.
The principal duties of the (c) of P are to get auditors putting
in auditing time and getting lots of pcs done and interview pcs, to
check flatness or unflatness of processes. Checking must be done
with a minimum of waiting time by the auditor and pc The (c) of P
does not check out release grade attainments as this is done by the
Qual Examiner and any double examination (by both (c) of P and Qual
Examiner) must be held to a minimum.
The (c) of P also musters his auditors before the morning
session and before the afternoon session and hands out folders at
these times with a minimum of session time loss.
The Case Supervisor does the folders. The Case Supervisor does
not interview cases but runs them by the book and folder. When a
Case Supervisor interviews cases or discusses them with the (c) of
P or auditor it has been found that only then do errors creep in
and hold up progress. Therefore the Case Supervisor and (c) of P
must not occupy the same office.
The Case Supervisor may not take technical orders from the (c)
of P. The Case Supervisor is under the Tech See, not the (c) of P.
The (c) of P looks after staff auditors and Internes as Org
personnel and is their immediate superior.
The (c) of P is responsible for staff auditor procurement
without absolving HCO's personnel officer from it.
63
That auditors are on the job on time and are putting in their
session time and their conduct and their actions as staff members
are all in the province of the (c) of P.
The Qual Div's Dir Rev may remove an auditor from the active
processing list if he believes that auditor is not sufficiently
trained but if so must either take action to further train or
inform the Qual See the auditor may not be permitted to audit, the
Qual See informing the HCO Area See to transfer the person or
dismiss. Before the (c) of P can assign an auditor to audit he must
have an ok chit from Dir Rev.
The Leading Auditor idea may be preserved or discarded at the
discretion of the (c) of P.
The (c) of P assigns auditors to specific cases. This is done by
Tech Services in actual fact but only after consultation with or
approval of the (c) of P.
The Case Supervisor may order a staff auditor to review for
clumsiness or to Ethics for noncompliance but must do so through
the (c) of P on whose actual authority it is done.
The daily summary of results by the HGC is compiled by the Case
Supervisor and promptly posted on a public board. Auditors sent to
Ethics or Review and pcs, sent to Ethics or Review are noted by
name on this board.
TABLE OF RESPONSIBILITY
FOR HGC STAFF AUDITORS AND INTERNES
Org Exec See - Full responsibility for quantity and quality of
service.
Qual See - Training arrangements for all Tech Personnel and
Internes.
Satisfied pcs,
Dir Exams - Authority to Declare.
Dir Rev - OK to Audit chits, repair of goofs. Actual training.
Satisfied pcs.
Dir Certs & Awards - Declares pc awards.
Chaplain - Port of refuge for pcs and auditors when all else fails.
Tech See - Completion Statistic of the Tech Div, Executive Personnel
appointments, general adherence to plan and design.
(c) of P - Staff Auditors and Internes as Staff Members, pc auditor
assignment, auditing quarters state of and assignment,
Ethics and Review routing authority, auditor procurement,
pc procurement, checkouts for flatness of processes, head
of Dept.
Case Supervisor - All Case Folders, results on cases, indicating
auditors and
pcs to Review or Ethics or Declare, posting results,
adherence to proper technology.
HCO Area See - Taking effective action on down graphs that don't
recover
at once.
Ethics Officer - All Ethics actions referred or found necessary.
Personnel Officer - Staff Auditor Procurement.
Dir Registration - New Internes.
I wish to point out that these were more or less the
arrangements which existed prior to the slump in November, and
which were in force when I was Case Supervisor.
1, as Exec Dir SH, hold the Org Exec See SH and through her the
Tech See SH and Qual See SH responsible for seeing that these
orders and arrangements are carried out exactly for only these will
cure the HGC slump. Arid they will cure it only if exactly
performed.
Note: This instance of a slumped statistic brings to view a
curious phenomenon I noted while studying it. Apparently there is a
natural law that "where interdependence does not exist, a slump may
occur". This applies to life, but it apparently is vital to an org.
Where a function of an org does not have lines across two or more
portions of an org, the function may slump.
In this case the action of auditing and responsibility for
results as earlier organized crossed Tech, Qual and HCO, 3
divisions. When Interne and staff auditor training was dropped into
Tech along with the auditing also the tension went out of the line
and the statistic slumped.
64
If this law is so, then any function of an org that is not
dependent on 2 or more portions of the org may slump. And on
checking up I have found that only those functions at Saint Hill
which do not have lines into two or more divisions are already
slumped.
Thus a possible principle of organization exists-that a line, to
function, must cross divisions. A staff member, being a terminal
must not cross divisions. But lines of functions must.
This is only a comment but is curious enough to be remarked.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1966
Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div
STAFF AUDITOR AND SUPERVISOR PROCUREMENT
The Director of Processing is responsible for procuring
qualified staff auditors, regardless of any action by Dept 1, Div
1.
This has always been the case and always will be.
The Director of Training is responsible for procuring Academy or
College Supervisors regardless of any action by Dept I Div 1.
Neither of these policies absolves Dept I Div I from the
procurement of staff Auditors and Supervisors.
QUAL DIV TRAINS STAFF
The Qualifications Division trains staff Auditors, Internes,
Supervisors, Ds of T, Ds of P and Tech Secs.
No other division than Qualifications may train staff.
Note: A recent slump in Tech statistics at Saint Hill followed
at once in a shift of training of Internes from Qual to Tech
Divisions.
Note: A slump in HGC completions was traced to the Tech Sec and
D of P taking no interest or action in procuring HGC Auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
65
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 FEBRUARY 1966
Remimeo Issue II
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Ethics Hats
TECH RECOVERY
My study of a Noy 1965 plummeting HGC Completion statistic
indicates certain policies are necessary in all HGCs and Qual
Divisions.
The following errors were found:
I . The HGC ceased to look for former release grades to
rehabilitate and ignored opportunities to do so on the basis that
"outer orgs have rehabbed them all already". This came out in the
Comm Ev held on a (c) of P of that period. Of course, if the HGC
failed to rehab earlier grades (or earlier life overruns) it could
achieve no later grades or Grade V. This alone would have ended
completions promptly on all grades and wiped out the graph.
2. Invalidation of the appearance of a free needle and
invalidating any auditor who "thought he saw one". This wiped out
all release attainments and made for total overrun of all pcs of
all grades. This error existed for 15 years so it is not surprising
that it act back in again.
3. Whenever an overrun occurred, "rehabilitation of it" was done
by running different new processes instead of standard rehab
routine as in HCOBs, i.e. Doing ARC Break, PTPs, Rudiments,
anything but a real rehab of that process that was overrun.
4. Abandonment of standard tech in favour of unusual solutions.
This is always present when a collapse of Tech occurs.
5. One SP was found in the middle of all this but after his
departure the statistic did not recover so one can assume another
SP was in the middle of it still or that the HGC remained PTS and
didn't separate from the SP found because he was so convincing, so
reasonable and so persuasive as to why a Tech statistic must remain
down.
It is interesting that (1) above-ceasing to rehab lower
grades-would be absolutely fatal to any upper grades. Therefore
this becomes policy:
NO UPPER GRADE OF RELEASE MAY BE BEGUN NEWLY ON A PC UNTIL ALL
LOWER GRADES ARE FULLY REHABBED TO FREE NEEDLE. THIS APPLIES TO ALL
GRADES 0 TO VII.
Regarding (2)- Invalidation of what a free needle is-and thus
running past all free needles, let it be noted that this is an
Auditor's Code Break-continuing a process that has ceased to
produce change and is therefore a crime. This was wrong too long to
be allowed to go wrong again. Thus we get the policy:
AN AUDITOR WHO HAS BEEN FOUND TO HAVE OVERRUN A FREE NEEDLE ON A
PRECLEAR MUST BE GIVEN AN ETHICS CHIT; AND IF THE ACTION IS SEVERAL
TIMES REPEATED, ETHICS MUST ORDER A FULL REVIEW OF THE AUDITOR'S
CASE INCLUDING AN EYESIGHT TEST AND CONDUCT A THOROUGH ETHICS
INVESTIGATION AND HEARING.
Note that a Mark V Meter run with too high a sensitivity does
not give a marked change when a needle floats. Thus sensitivity
must be reduced in ordinary running and increased only to get in
rudiments. Then a free needle becomes more visible. A Mark V
cranked up to 128 sensitivity looks like a floating needle all the
time at a casual glance on most pcs. Sensitivity 5 is ample.
Also, meters go out of 5,000 ohm calibration and don't read on
the M and F "Clear" reads and change of electrodes can change M and
F "Clear" reads.
A free needle, if a process is overrun vanishes with just one
extra command so an auditor must be alert.
Please also note that this has been part of the Auditor's Code
for ages-running past a flat point of a process has been forbidden
since the first formulations of the Auditor's Code.
66
Regarding (3)- Rehabilitation by using other processes-the HCOBs
on rehabs are very explicit. To run another process would clobber
the pc. Thus we get the policy:
REHABILITATIONS MUST BE DONE BY REHABILITATING THE PC ONLY ON
THE PROCESS OVERRUN AND ONLY BY STANDARD HCOBS ON REHAB PROCEDURE.
Re (4)-Unusual solutions-we get the policy:
ANY AUDITOR ACCEPTING AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION WITHOUT FILING A JOB
ENDANGERMENT CHIT OR FOUND USING AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION MUST BE
CHARGED WITH A CRIME AND GIVEN AN ETHICS HEARING. FAILING TO REPORT
AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION ADVISED OR USED IS ALSO SO HANDLED. AN UNUSUAL
SOLUTION IS ONE EVOLVED TO REMEDY AN ABUSE OF EXISTING TECHNOLOGY.
On (5)-Statistic failing to recover after an SP is spotted in a
department gives us the 2 policies:
WHENEVER AN SP IS DISCOVERED AND DECLARED IN AN ORGANIZATION ALL
HIS ASSOCIATES IN THAT PORTION OF THE ORG MUST BE CHECKED OUT FOR
OR GIVEN AN S & D.
and
WHEN AN SP IS DISCOVERED IN AN ORGANIZATION, IS DISMISSED OR
REMOVED AND THE STATISTIC DOES NOT RECOVER, ANOTHER SP MUST BE
LOOKED FOR.
It is noted that the general condition of the Completion
Statistic of Dee 65 to Jan 66 could be attributed to the above
gross errors.
It is now certain that (1) Rehabilitation of earlier grades, (2)
Free Needle and (3) Rehabilitation by standard practice are primary
targets in our technology for anyone seeking to mess it up and that
unwitting tampering with these three things and lack of HCO
Enforcement on them will reduce HGC statistics and prevent their
recovery.
Of course one could also go mad in the opposite direction-(1)
rehabilitate earlier grades endlessly on a pc regardless of how
many times a free needle had been obtained, (2) call any loosening
up of a needle a free needle and (3) refuse to even 2-way comm with
a pc under repair for overrun for fear it violates standard
procedure for rehab.
The middle course is the correct course in this case. Relax and
just be very sure the pc has been properly rehabbed to free needle
on each grade up to the one one is going to start by demanding the
awards of release that were granted and if these weren't ever
awarded, then do the rehabs necessary grade by grade. The only
sticky point in this is that if a pc had ever been run on a higher
grade without rehab of a lower, one must rehab "from the top down"
at times, tackling the highest overrun first, but nevertheless
doing all of them that were by-passed eventually.
The way to recognize a free needle is watch for one. When it
happens you will see one. Then you will never afterwards wonder.
The free needles available on a case can all be swallowed up by a
failure to rehab all grades ever by-passed or overrun. If no free
needles show up on a case at all then partially rehab any grade
available for rehab back and forth until one has one of them go
free needle and then get a free needle on the remainder. Life can
also be an overrun and a pc never audited will respond to a rehab
of "something overdone". This doesn't mean the pc went release
before Scientology-it means that purpose overrun then jams-rehab of
life situations of overrun consists of hitting the purpose that was
overrun and when this is hit, the pc goes release in PT and was not
a release in the past. An example is an overrun located in 20 AD
when the person, alert to Christianity decided to be good, made it
and then overran it for 1945 years. When the purpose was found (to
be good) and dated and the overrun spotted the needle went free.
Rough auditing, bad TRs, "letting the pc Itsa", etc can swallow up
free needles. Also a totally ARC Broke meter that won't read at all
with bad indicators all over the place won't record a read, looks
sometimes like a floating needle, the difference being the pc has
total bad indicators-sour, mean, sad, etc. A free needle occurs
most often after a big cognition and the unskilled auditor looks at
the pc who is being bright and interesting and just doesn't see the
needle float, asks more questions and overruns, and the free needle
vanisheswhen a pc is cogniting, look at the meter not the pc. And
the instant the TA starts up and the needle goes sticky suspect an
overrun and check.
67
As for doing something else rather than Standard Procedure for
rehab, plain ignorance can cause it. The auditor's desire to help
the pc if unaccompanied by solid tech background leads to wild
efforts, new processes and anything but cool standard procedure,
When the person checking out pcs is also the case supervisor,
unusual solutions creep in. The most errors I've seen made by a
Case Supervisor were made after he had seen the pc or talked with
the auditor. Cases have to be run by report only and auditors have
to be supervised and their sessions listened to by somebody else
besides the Case Supervisor. Tech is Tech. There is such a thing as
Standard Tech. Pc wild tales and hollow eyes and auditor hobby
horses have to be kept off Case Supervisor lines. So there must be
a person who checks out pcs and supervises auditors and their
auditing performance but who never opens his or her face to suggest
instructions about the pc and only writes down that the auditor is
rough or the process is flat or the process is overrun. The Case
Supervisor lives in an Ivory tower. Sounds strange but unless it's
done that way, wild departures from Standard Rehab Procedure and
from Standard Tech in general will occur. Hell, all psychiatry went
down that drain-the desperate patient, the desperate measures.
Squirrelling stems from the Case Supervisor being the auditor
supervisor and the pc interviewer. Oil, water, being in two
divisions, Commies and Fascists, dogs and cats won't mix. Neither
will the personal contacter of auditors and pcs and the Case
Supervisor ever successfully stay crossed. The individual
practitioner breaks down only because he does both auditing and
Case Supervision. Auditing is an organization action which is why
today we have Field Staff Members and HGCs.
Additional notes of things discovered in the investigation of
the plummeted statistic on Completions were:
I . Auditors rabbiting out of uncertainty and so stumbling past
End Phenomena and floating needles,
2. Case Supervisor getting auditors to ask leading questions on
Pr Pr 2-"Ask the pc if he is interested in Medical Practices".
3. (c) of P: "Find out what the needle is floating on".
4. Case Supervisor: Told auditor that a floating needle was not
the End Phenomenon of a Process in which "the TA had to be run
out".
5. Lack of knowledge and understanding of the Technology and not
knowing the difference between such things as Anaten, Secondaries
and Engrams by Case Supervisor, (c) of P, and so confusing
auditors.
Of course the one thing one can't technically overcome is an SP
keeping an area messed up. His case doesn't improve because of his
intentions and overts and fear of people getting better or being
bigger than he. When an SP dominates an area, only Ethics actions
can handle.
The primary indicator of the presence of an SP in an org is a
plummeting statistic immediately after he starts handling a portion
of it.
Indifferent leadership, even inaction can't drive a statistic
down. Only active suppression can.
So watch the statistics and don't get reasonable when they fall.
Either outside the org suppression has been brought down on that
portion of the org, making it PTS or there is an SP there. The
final answer is what happened just before the statistic fell. If a
new appointment was made and it fell, unappoint it fast. If nothing
cures the down statistic find the SP or handle the PTS situation
because one or the other are there.
Completions stayed down for 15 years. Then we found auditors
never noticed free needles. Now for Heaven's sakes, 15 years was
enough. Don't repeat the error!
It does work you know.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
68
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MARCH 1966
Remimeo
All Scn Staff
Tech & Qual
HGC CURE (Continued)
Long after I thought the final findings were all in in the
Nov-Dec 65 HGC Completion Slump, another really gross HGC error
showed up.
Training of HGC auditors was shifted from Qual to Tech Div just
before the fantastic down curve. This change was known and caused a
heavy investigation of the HGC.
But this datum was not disclosed until later:
STAR-RATED CHECK OUTS ON INTERNES AND AUDITORS DESPITE EXPLICIT
INSTRUCTIONS WERE DROPPED THE MOMENT THE TRANSFER FROM QUAL TO TECH
OCCURRED.
The newer auditors began to audit with no real data.
Thus we find the SP discovered in that investigation had
discovered a thorough way to depress a statistic-you didn't require
check outs on processes.
This gives us another vital datum
IF YOU DO NOT REQUIRE HGC AUDITORS AND INTERNES TO CHECK OUT
STAR-RATED ON THEIR MATERIALS BEFORE THEY AUDIT HGC PCS THE
COMPLETION STATISTIC WILL GO TO ZERO. It did at once.
I think lack of this one datum has been holding back all the
statistics in any org that has not recovered.
Lack of star-rates on staff auditors and internes has been found
to crash an HGC and deliver no service.
Remedy it at once on all staff auditors, internes and
supervisors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
69
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MARCH 1966
Issue II
Remimeo
All Tech &
Qual Hats
Students
Solo Audit Course Tech & Qual
Interne Course
Clearing Course URGENT
STAR RATES ON TECH AND QUAL STAFF
Effective on Receipt
ETHICS NOTE ALL ORGS - It is a High Crime not to have this Policy
continually in effect after I June 66 as it has been found to
suppress orgs when not kept in effect and to crash HGCs.
All HCO Bs and Tech Info and Advices of the following courses are
STAR RATED and the student may not begin to audit until they have
all been passed with Star-Rated type check outs with no comm lag.
INTERNE COURSE (Power Process and
HGC Staff Auditors)
CLEARING COURSE (but not the platens)
All vital data required for auditing at Level VI must be checked
out, Star-Rated on the following Course:
SOLO AUDIT COURSE
All HGC and Qual Auditors and Internes must pass in all Scientology
Orgs star-rated all HCO Bs directly concerned with all the Level
Processes they will use on pcs, Rehabs, S & (c) and various Review
actions and the Pol Ltrs governing the HGC and Review and any
relation to Ethics before being permitted to audit an HGC pc in any
HGC anywhere or to audit in Review.
Note: The above data applies to all orgs when they teach the listed
courses and applies to all HGCs at once.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
70
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1966
Remimeo
Exec Sees Hats Exec - HCO - Tech - Qual
ES Comm Qual Hat Ethics
HCO Sec Hat
Dir I & R Hat
Ethics Hat URGENT
Tech & Qual Hats
LRH Comm Hat
HIGH CRIME
Effective I June 1966
In any instance of a heavily falling statistic in Tech or Qual
or a chronically low statistic in Tech or Qual in an org or in any
org which has chronically low statistics in all divisions:
The Ethics Officer must look for this policy violation which is
the highest crime in Tech and Qual:
TOLERATING THE ABSENCE OF, OR NOT INSISTING UPON STAR-RATED
CHECK OUTS ON ALL PROCESSES AND THEIR IMMEDIATE TECHNOLOGY AND ON
RELEVANT POLICY LETTERS ON HGC INTERNES OR STAFF AUDITORS IN THE
TECH DIV OR STAFF AUDITORS OR INTERNES IN THE QUAL DIV FOR THE
LEVELS AND ACTIONS THEY WILL USE BEFORE PERMITTING THEM TO AUDIT
ORG PCS AND ON SUPERVISORS IN TECH AND QUAL WHO INSTRUCT OR EXAMINE
OR FAILING TO INSIST UPON THIS POLICY OR PREVENTING THIS POLICY
FROM GOING INTO EFFECT OR MINIMIZING THE CHECK OUTS OR LISTS.
If an Ethics Officer or any person in HCO Dept 3 discovers this
high crime to exist he must report it at once to the HCO Area
Secretary.
The HCO Area Secretary must at once order a thorough
investigation into any and all persons who might have instigated
this high crime and report the matter to the HCO Exec Sec.
The HCO Exec Sec must then convene a Committee of Evidence with
the persons accused as interested parties and must locate amongst
them the suppressive or suppressives by the "reasonableness" of
their defence, state of case and other signs.
The Committee of Evidence must declare the located S.P.
suppressive by HCO Ethics Order and dismiss.
If any Ethics Officer, Director of I & R or HCO Area Secretary
fails to obtain co-operation by superiors in carrying out this
Policy Letter quickly then he or she must inform the LRH
Communicator.
The LRH Communicator must then cable full particulars to
Worldwide.
The Worldwide AdCouncil must then carry out this policy letter
expeditiously and at any cost.
If the HCO personnel making this discovery cannot obtain action
in any other way he or she must go outside the org and cable LRH
Comm WW and his actions and costs in so cabling will be reimbursed
on claim to WW and his post will be fully protected.
71
If the AdCouncil WW suspects this policy not to be in full force
in any org despite assurances an HCO WW personnel must be sent to
that org to investigate and may be deputized to remove either or
both Exec Sees of that org by Comm Ev on the spot or at WW.
It has been discovered that failure to check out, Star Rated,
the Tech and Qual HCO Bs applying to levels being audited or taught
or examined and their processes and the data used in Review and
relevant policy on those using the material in orgs results in a
crashed Division 4 completion statistic, crashed income and low
statistics throughout and a failing org and was the reason through
1965 for struggling orgs-the public would not pay more for service
than it was worth to them and with this policy out, the service was
not worth very much.
It has been found that a suppressive person will discourage this
check out policy as one of his first actions.
This policy applies whether an auditor has been trained or not
with star-rated check outs. Staff and Review auditor and Supervisor
are special technical status grades and one cannot consider this
double training.
"Star-Rated" means = 100 percent letter perfect in knowing and
understanding, demonstrating and being able to repeat back the
material with no comm lag.
Org Exec See Communicator for Qual WW is the final authority for
any check sheets on this matter and is responsible for preparing
and standardizing them from time to time. But the lack of a check
sheet from ES Comm Qual WW does not set aside any provision or
penalty of this policy letter.
This policy letter is issued in the complete knowledge that the
absence of this policy in full effect is the primary reason for
orgs not growing and is based on actual experience.
The only higher crime I could think of would be to pretend to
have an org but have no technical personnel on staff in Tech or
Qual. That is suppressive also and will crash an org. Handle it
similarly to the above.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden
Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Added to by HCO P/L 21 November 1971, Scientology Courses
Examination Policy, Volume 5-page 139, which made it firm policy
that anyone examining a student for certification on any
Scientology Course, including Admin, must have first star-rated
related Policies, HCO Bs or other issues before writing or grading
exams.]
[Note: In the original issue of this Policy Letter the words
"THE ABSENCE OF" in the first line of the 3rd paragraph were
omitted. However, in a poster issued by Flag in 1971 quoting this
capitalized paragraph of the "High Crime" P/L, these words were
included, and accordingly have been added in this printing. - Ed.]
72
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 DECEMBER 1967
Remimeo
Star Rated on All Qual
Personnel and on Exec
Secs and Secs
QUAL SENIOR DATUM
The Senior datum of Qual is that:
QUAL NEVER NEVER NEVER TAKES THE ORDER OR DIRECTION OF ANY OTHER
DIVISION OR STAFF MEMBER ON WHAT TO DO TECHNICALLY WITH A STUDENT
OR PC.
Qual only really comes into action when other divisions and
staff of other divisions have failed. So if they knew what to do
the person would not be turning up in Qual for tech remedies. So if
Qual takes their orders of what to do it will also fail.
This datum originated at SH when Qual, in a collapse, was found
to be obediently doing what Div 4 and Dept 3 ordered on students
and pcs. It was getting no results. I analyzed the situation and
over a period of a couple of weeks worked on it. The result was the
above datum and the GREEN FORM.
Qual always does its own analysis and its own internal routings
independent of other directions. It can use any process ever
released and a Review auditor must be able to do them.
The GREEN FORM must be added to from time to time as new
difficulties are found due to advancing technology or new errors
developed by poor training.
A student sent by Tech See for Cramming may be routed instead by
Qual to case repair if that is what is needed.
The keynote of Qual is CORRECTION. This of course applicable to
diagnosis as well.
NO OTHER DIVISION MAY CHIT QUAL FOR REFUSING TO OBEY THEIR
DIRECTIONS REGARDING WHAT TO DO WITH STUDENTS OR PCs.
Other divisions are assembly lines. Qual is an individual
approach. Qual's Review only gets flat ball bearings-which could
not or would not roll on the assembly line of Div 4.
People can't be sent to Qual for "disagreements checks" "see
checks" or other stated actions as these are an attempted diagnosis
and will normally be found to be the wrong process.
Qua] is the students' and pcs' friend. A last refuge when other
doors close.
AND cases must leave Qual and students must leave Qual WITH THE
WHOLE THING HANDLED in a way that will STAY HANDLED. Qual has no
Qual Div for the Qual Div. When it goes irresponsible and lets an
unhandled case or student out, then that person HAS NO PLACE TO
TURN.
I know how bad a failed Qual case can be because when I'm in an
org, having no part of the org to go to (unless the Chaplain) they
come to me. I usually find (a) that
73
some imaginary rule has stopped the person's progress or policy
has been used to stop or (b) that Qual was obedient to some other
division and (c) always that Qual has either not been approached or
has failed when it was.
So the senior datum of Qual is important,
There is another datum in Qual that is very important. And that is:
NO AUDITOR MAY BE EMPLOYED IN QUAL WHO CANNOT SUCCESSFULLY LIST AND
ASSESS FLAWLESSLY WITHOUT ANY ERRORS.
All you have to do to wreck Qual is put an auditor in it who is
not letter perfect in ALL the tech of listing and assessing. (Some
isolated summary is not enough-all the original tapes and all the
original HCOBs must be studied to make an auditor able in listing
and assessing. It is the weakest applied point in our tech-too many
can't or don't learn how to do it. But a Qual auditor MUST be a
shark on it.)
One can say that the health of an org depends on Qual finally
handling. The key processes which keep an org healthy are new (67)
style Remedy A, Remedy B and S & Ds and the GREEN FORM. These are
listing and assessing or assessing processes. Thus the vital tech
is listing and assessing. So Qual auditors have to be carefully
trained to do these perfectly.
At this writing Qual is being streamlined into a new fast flow
pattern. This policy still applies and in 2068 will still apply and
in 200068 as well.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.cden Copyright (c) 1967 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 MARCH 1968
(Modifies P/L 15 Sept 1967)
Remimeo
QUAL SEC MUST BE CLEAR
The policy that the Examiner must be clear is modified to Qual
See must be a clear.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:js.rd Copyright (c) 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
74
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MARCH 1968
Remimeo
All Execs IMPORTANT
STATISTICS
A prediction of a collapse of gross income can be made on the
following graph pattern
Tech Qual Future
Completions Income Gross
Income
Evaluation
Invalidation
Bad Listing)
of PCs
Students &
ff
Tech Staff in the Qual Div.
Where Evaluation, Invalidation and Bad Listing of PCs, students and
tech staff pulled in for Review are present in the Qual Div, the
completions of Tech are reduced and given forceful collectives, the
Qual Stat soars. This inhibits buying of future levels and the
public, seeing no fast changes stays away.
A high Qual Income Stat is an alert to a collapse of gross income
and has already happened in some Orgs.
LRH:jc.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1968 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 OCTOBER 1970
Remimeo
QUAL HAS NO BACKLOG
(Originally issued as LRH ED 61 INT, 9 Dec'68)
Stable Datum - Quals never have backlogs ever never.
Even if all hands have to audit. Backlogs kill the whole flow line.
A I hour wait is a backlog. People waiting for days or weeks is of
course unthinkable and subject to Comm Ev on a Qual See for being
unable to recruit or train Qual staff or cope with traffic
irregularities of flow.
Qual, as in Tech, is there to DELIVER SERVICE not to choke flow
lines.
LRH:sb.ka.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1970 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
75
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF IS NOVEMBER 1969
Issue II
Remimeo
Cl VIII Checksheet
Dianetics Checksheet
Qual Sec Hat
Tech See Hat
C/S Hat
RIGHTS AND DUTIES
The following Rights and Duties are to be posted in the staff
area of every Qual Division and Tech Division, where they will be
frequently seen by auditors and technical personnel.
They are to be printed green on white in letters at least I inch
high, each on a separate card (4 total).
AN AUDITOR HAS THE DUTY:
TO KNOW AND ABIDE BY THE AUDITOR'S CODE
TO APPLY TECH EXACTLY AS PER HCOBS AND LRH TAPES
TO BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE FOLDER OF ANY PC HE
AUDITS
TO FOLLOW C/S INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY IN SESSION
TO REFUSE TO AUDIT AN INCORRECT C/S
TO AUDIT ONLY THOSE MATERIALS ON WHICH HE HAS BEEN CHECKED
OUT STARRATE
TO BE FAMILIAR WITH AND APPLY ALL NEW TECHNICAL MATERIALS
UP TO HIS CLASS LEVEL
AN AUDITOR HAS THE RIGHT:
NOT TO AUDIT A PRECLEAR HE DOES NOT WISH TO AUDIT
NOT TO AUDIT MORE THAN 5 HOURS PER DAY, 6 DAYS PER WEEK
TO REFUSE A C/S HE KNOWS TO BE INCORRECT
TO ASK TO BE REFERRED TO THE HCOB COVERING A CIS HE IS
UNCERTAIN OF OR FEELS IS INCORRECT
NOT TO BE PUNISHED FOR QUERYING A C/S WHETHER CORRECT OR
NOT
TO HAVE PCS, AUDITING ROOMS, AND MATERIALS MADE AVAILABLE
TO HIM BY TECH SERVICES
76
· CASE SUPERVISOR HAS THE DUTY:
TO REFUSE TO DISCUSS A CASE WITH EITHER THE AUDITOR OR THE PC
TO REFRAIN FROM DISCUSSING OR MENTIONING DATA FROM PC FOLDERS
SOCIALLY
TO CORRECT HIS AUDITORS' APPLICATION OF TECH POSITIVELY, WITHOUT
INVALIDATION
TO ORDER THE AUDITOR TO CRAMMING OR RETRAINING FOR ANY FLUNKED
SESSION
TO MAINTAIN A STANDARD OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
TO CIS ALL FOLDERS DELIVERED TO HIM DAILY
· CASE SUPERVISOR HAS THE RIGHT:
TO HAVE HIS OWN OFFICE
TO HOLD NO OTHER POST
NEVER TO RUSH HIS OWN CIS ACTIONS
TO ACCEPT NO TECHNICAL ORDERS OR ADVICES OTHER THAN FROM LRH
TO DEMAND A HIGH ADMINISTRATIVE STANDARD OF THOSE WHO WORK ON
HIS LINES
TO DEMAND THAT PCS DO NOT DISCUSS THEIR OWN CASES OR OTHERWISE
VIOLATE PC RULES
TO ISSUE AND GET COMPLIANCE ON ANY ORDERS NECESSARY TO THE
PERFORMANCE OF HIS DUTY AND TECHNICAL RESULTS
Lt. Nate Jessup, Chairman
Ens. Janet Guilford, Secretary W/O Bob Guilford, Member Qual
Board of Investigation for
L RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:NJ:JG:BG:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
77
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MARCH 1965
Issue II
Gen Non-Remimeo
ADMINISTRATION
FLOWS AND EXPANSION
THE FAST FLOW SYSTEM
We have introduced many new principles in administration in
recent policy letters. Here is one which if left out would cause
mystery.
This is the principle of traffic flows we now use. It is called
the FAST FLOW SYSTEM OF MANAGEMENT.
A being controlling a traffic or activity flow should let the
flow run until it is to be reinforced or indicates a turbulence
will occur and only then inspects the part of the flow that is to
be reinforced or is becoming enturbulated and inspects and acts on
only that one flow.
This principle would operate on a committee of 3 in this
fashion: the committee does not act as a body. Each member acts
individually in three spheres of influence (three types of flow).
There is no committee (collective) action until one of the three
members wants concurrence from the other two on greatly reinforcing
a flow or until the other two, by observation, see the third is
going adrift. Only in these cases does the committee act as a
Committee. In other words all 3 members go about their work
independently until there is a change in one of their three spheres
and then they act. Otherwise the flows of orders and actions are
independent. Not doing it like this is why Committees have gotten
the reputation of being unable and a waste of time.
To do this one, of course, needs another principle: that of
Indicators.
An Indicator is something that signals an approaching change
rather than finding the change is already present and confirmed.
We get this from auditing. An auditor audits so long as things
go evenly. He knows when they will begin to deteriorate or change
by an Indicator. He acts on seeing the indicator. He doesn't wait
until the collapse or total change of the pc occurs and then look
it over and act, The pc could be run into the ground or a good
process that was bettering the case could be neglected if an
auditor could not PREDICT from indicators how it was going before
it was gone.
In supervising a number of sections or departments, it would
work this way:
The person in charge does not examine every action or decision
on the lines. If all despatches of all the activities went through
his or her one pair of hands the volume would be too great and
would jam. The executive's "plate" would be too full and this would
halt any expansion of the activities as the executive would feel
overworked, yet in actual fact would be getting nothing much done.
The flows which needed watching would be buried in a huge volume of
flows that did not need watching.
Instead, the principle of flows tells us that the executive
should have statistical INDICATORS such as OIC charts on every part
of the activity each week and should act only on the basis of the
charts' behaviors.
If a chart went down the Executive would not wait for that area
to collapse before inspecting it. At a dip point the executive
should go over all the plans and traffic and despatches of the area
dipping down and unearth the real reason why it did dip. If the
matter needs minor remedy, it should be corrected. If then the
graph still dipped down, the executive would not only be advised of
it by the OIC Indicators but would know, having inspected earlier,
what had to be done on a more drastic scale to get the graph going
up again.
The OIC system must be used and all data plotted and circulated
to the Executives in an org before this system will work.
If the OIC system is put into effect fully the executive can
then (and only then) let go the comm lines and let the traffic
flow.
78
He then only needs to:
I Keep alert for and correct Dev-T (off-line, off-policy,
off-origin and noncompliance);
2. Keep an eye on the weekly OIC charts;
3. Find from OIC the upward trends and inspect and find out
what's working so well it can be reported;
4. Be alert to any down dip and inspect the activity itself and
correct the matter; and
5. Spend most of his time getting his own job done (since
executives do have jobs besides supervision).
The one thing he mustn't do is "get reasonable" about dips or
zooms and not act to really check the decline or to reinforce the
rise:
(a) Thinking one does know when he has not gotten it inspected
closely;
(b) Not believing the graph and Indicators; and
(c) Not acting, are the fatal errors.
Doing I to 5 tells us who's an executive and doing (a), (b) and
(c) tells us who shouldn't be an executive.
If this system is in effect the org can't help but boom.
We will call this the FAST FLOW SYSTEM OF MANAGEMENT.
It is a very precise art. It's like auditing. One predicts the
slumps and reinforces the tendency to boom.
It can't miss. If it's done completely.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [LRH NOTE: Study this. Shows why of OIC
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 FEBRUARY 1968
Remimeo
ORGANIZATION - THE FLAW
I looked for a long time for any flaw in the idea of
organization. It does have a flaw.
The basic flaw in organization is INSPECTION BEFORE THE FACT.
That means inspection before anything bad has happened.
Violations are so harmful they destroyed every great
civilization -the Roman, the British, the lot. For every flow is
slowed or stopped.
The prosperity of any organization is directly proportional to
the speed of its particles-goods, people, papers.
World trade, world shipping, world prosperity is dying only
because of the cumulative effect of inspection before the fact.
Passports, customs, safety regulations, general government
interference before anything bad has occurred add up to a
SUPPRESSIVE SOCIETY and therefore, soon enough, a dead one.
Penalty after the fact has occurred disciplines the criminals
and does not pull down the majority to criminal level.
Scientology organizations must never lose sight of the reason
organizations have
decayed.
LRH:adv.rd
Copyright (c) 1968 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
79
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Gen Non Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 MAY 1965
HATS:
Tech See
(c) of P
(c) of T
Staff Auditors RELEASE AWARD
Qual Sec
Dir Exam SAINT HILL
Dir Rev
CC Officer
Dir Certs
Where a Staff Auditor in Review or Sthil HGC brings a pc to
Release, the following procedure and routing must be followed:
The Staff Auditor brings the folder and pc to the (c) of P or,
if in Review the Case Cracking Section Officer.
The (c) of P or CC Officer verifies from the folder and Staff
Auditor that the processes ordered have produced the exact result
required of them.
The (c) of P or CC Officer sends the folder to the safeguarded
and locked Case Files in Archives and a chit to the Tech See who
passes it to the Qual Sec. A copy of the chit, stating that the pc
has been brought to a state of Release and that the processes used
have been precisely applied and produced the exact required result,
is given the pc.
The pc presents the chit to Examinations.
Examinations looks at the pc and unless bad indicators are
plainly in view, passes the pc on to Certifications.
If the pc looks or sounds bad, Examinations diverts the pc to
Review and calls the Tech Sec and Qual Sec on an urgent basis so
that the matter can be taken up and sends the attestation to
Ethics.
If the pc's good indicators are obvious Examinations does not do
more than log the pc's passage, and initials the pc's chit and
directs the pc to Certifications. (See HCO Pol Ltr Fast Flow System
of Management.)
DECISIONS
The Staff Auditor's termination of auditing depends entirely on
the attainment of the exact phenomena required of the final
process. When this is achieved, the session is terminated and the
pc is routed as above. Meter phenomena will be there but is not
required in the decision.
(c) of P or CC Officer: The (c) of P's or CC Officer's decision
is based on examination of the Auditor's reports and any personal
comment by the Staff Auditor. If these show the processes produced
the exact required reaction, the pc is given a chit and sent to
Examinations. If not as expected, the whole matter is reported to
the executive's division secretary and Ethics is sent for urgently
as there is a lie or alter-is somewhere: (the processes are that
exact).
Examinations: Does pc have good indicators in a casual
inspection, and does pc have a chit. If yes, pc goes to
Certification. If no, pc goes to Review and Tech and Qual Sees are
given a report and Ethics is sent for as there is a false
attestation.
Certification: Does pc have a chit signed by the (c) of P or CC
Officer and initialled by Examinations. If yes, Certifications
issues the award. If no, the matter is referred to the Qual See and
Ethics is called.
CERTIFICATIONS
On the pc's arrival in Certifications, Certifications
(a) Receives chit signed by (c) of P or CC Officer and verifies
that it is initialled by Examinations and that this is the pc's
right name (identification can be required).
(b) Enters the pc's name and address and the date in the Release
Book and initials it.
80
(c) Gives the pc a copy of HCO Info Letter of 4 May 1965.
(c) Makes out an Invoice for a Release pin, no charge.
(e) Issues the pc a Scientology Release pin.
(f) Initials and files the chit.
(g) Sends a copy of the Invoice to the Auditor.
(h) Sends a copy of the Invoice to the Qual See who
puts it in weekly report
forwards to Inspection and Reports for OIC at the
weekly reporting time.
This ends the matter for the org.
Grade certs and all other certs and awards are handled on more
or less the same routing where awarded in an org, but most are of
course based on a thorough Examination by Examinations.
The above fast flow method for Release, recording and awarding
is possible mainly because of the character of the processes which
make the good indicators or the bad indicators completely
unmistakable. Further, the number of Releases (Keyed out Clears of
yesteryear) now being made in the Saint Hill HGC and Case Cracking
Section are becoming too numerous to admit of a slower procedure of
award.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:mh.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Cancelled by HCO Policy Letter of 23 May 1970 in this section.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1965
[Excerpt]
Gen Non Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div
QUAL GOOFS
The Examiner in Dept of Examinations can goof on examining pcs,
sent for declare release by not abiding by policy of his role in
this.
The Examiner just looks at the pc He does not examine the folder
or put & on a meter. That's all been done. He just looks at the pc
Pc seems bright, then he passes; pc gloomy, he sends to Review.
The point is contained in the Fast Flow System. You don't check
lines until there's something wrong with them. You don't try to
find things wrong as the first action.
The Examiner must have a reality on other hats and not try to
wear them all.
An Examiner can ARC Break a new release or rehabilitated release
all to pieces before the person is so declared, by being nosey and
suspicious. The pc is enroute to Certs and Awards. The Examiner
stop is just a glance for a Release of any kind. It operates like a
refusal to ack if the Examiner goes nosey at this point.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [A complete copy of this Policy Letter appears
on page 142.1
81
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 JULY 1966
Remimeo
TECH vs QUAL
The general rule is laid down that, except for Declaration of
Grade, Certificate or Class, Tech shall attempt to handle all it
can on all cases and students and only when Tech personnel consider
it hopeless (or the student or pc is ready for Declare, Cert or
Grade) shall the student or pc be sent to Qual.
"Review flat" is not now to be considered mandatory. The pc
previously has been sent to the (c) of P and then to Qual to verify
that a flat point has been reached. This routing is ended. If the
auditor or Case Supervisor, either one, wants a check for the
flatness of a process, only then is the pc sent to the (c) of P
(not to Qual also). If the flatness indicates a grade has been
attained the usual action is just send from auditor to examiner in
Qual.
To routinely and always send a pc for a flatness of process
check is actually a violation of the Fast Flow Management System.
It checks things which may be all right.
Review, when it finds a rehab incomplete, should quickly route
the pc back to Tech. As a general rule, only when Tech is utterly
at a loss does Review take over and audit the pc.
The Case Supervisor should keep and post HGC auditor
"statistics" announcing goofs and wins. The Case Supervisor must
require a retrain of an HGC auditor whenever a pc winds up being
audited in Review. I always send the auditor to Interne Training
for retrain whenever I have to send a pc to Review.
Processing today is very simple but very exact, The data is all
there. That's the only data. Don't add any. Just do what the HCOBs
say. There are no exceptional cases.
HGC auditors who over-run just don't know what a free needle is.
They should ask a Clear to hold the cans so they can see one.
When you check for flatness on a process gone to free needle you
may overrun it. For the auditor, the (c) of P and the Examiner and
Review to check, each one, for flatness, will goof up a flat point
every time.
For the Case Supervisor to neglect ordering retraining of his
auditors when he finds pcs not doing well is a gave omission.
For Tech not to carry on trying and limply turn all bits and
pieces over to Qual is to train Tech into weakness.
Two rules:
In Tech, when all else fails, then hand it over to Review.
In any difficulty, when all else fails, do what Ron says.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r.eden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
82
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 AUGUST 1966
Gen No Non-Remimeo
Full Dist SH Only
Applies to SH Only
DECLARE, MULTIPLE
At Saint Hill HGC only, where rehabilitation is the main action
below Grade V, the principle of multiple declare will be adopted
for all grades below V whether released or rehabilitated.
This means that a pc may be run by an HGC auditor, with the
supervision of the Case Supervisor and Director of Processing, up
to and including Grade IV without sending the pc to Qual for
declare.
When the HGC pc has attained Grade IV, the pc is then routed to
the Qual Examiner who passes (or flunks the pc) for Grades 0 to IV.
Certs and Awards will print and issue a combination 0-IV Release
Certificate and issue that when the pc arrives at Certs and Awards
for multiple declare.
The pc may be given a slip by the auditor denoting the
attainment of each lower grade or rehab of it, not as a cert but as
an acknowledgement. The pc can then turn this into the Examiner
when up for multiple declare.
Those pcs, who are audited for just one grade at a time (such as
staff pcs or student pcs) are declared for each grade in the usual
fashion as they are not receiving continuous auditing.
When a multiple declare has been awarded the pc is then, if so
signed up, taken through the Power Processes and is declared at
Grade V.
Grade VA is also separately declared.
Pcs who cannot be straightened out by Tech are of course sent to
Qual as usual.
No cross checking is done on the pc by the (c) of P or Qual for
these lower grades as they are each one attained. This is up to the
auditor.
Lines remain otherwise unchanged.
In a 25 hour auditing week, an HGC SH auditor is expected to get
a minimum of 8 completions.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:pq.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 10 May 1970, Urgent-Important-Single Declare,
page 98.]
83
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE
ED 805 INT 11 January 1968
(Originally issued
as Flag Order 340)
SPEED OF SERVICE
In the matter of courses and students SPEED of service
is of vital importance.
The prosperity of a business is directly proportional to the speed
of flow of its particles (despatches, cables, goods, messengers,
students, customers, agents, etc).
To prosper, service must be as close to instant as possible.
Anything which stops or delays the flows of a business or delays or
puts a customer or product on WAIT is an enemy of that business.
Good management carefully isolates all stops on its flow lines and
eradicates them to increase speed of flows.
. Speed of service is of comparable magnitude to quality of service
and where exaggerated ideas of quality exist they must become
secondary to speed.
Only then can a business prosper.
[seal] , "",
0 L . 0 0 L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
8
.............
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1968
Remimeo
ETHICS
FAST FLOW AND ETHICS
It is an actual fact by actual test that SOFT ETHICS IN COMBINATION
WITH FAST FLOW GRADE AND CLASS ATTESTATION WILL COLLAPSE AN ORG.
If false attestations are not met with savage ethics actions an
area becomes filled up with people who have the overt of false
attestation and whose natter kills sign ups.
It is sometimes easier for a pc to falsely attest than to face
his own bank. To escape, he falsely attests. If ethics action for
such false attestation is soft, it encourages him to falsely attest
as there is no real penalty. Where ethics action is savage, it is
easier for him to face his bank and so he actually makes it.
Only about 4 or 5% will falsely attest in the face of heavy
ethics. This is no reason to hold up 95 or 96 people every hundred.
Savage ethics such as a Condition of Liability enforced prevents
the number from getting any larger than 4 or 5%.
So don't go soft on ethics penalty for false attestations.
LRH:adv.jp.cden.rd
Copyright(c) 1968 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
84
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1968
Gen Non-Remimeo SHSBC Students SH Tech & Qual Staff SH Foundation
FAST FLOW FOR SHSBC STUDENTS' PRECLEARS
Amends HCO Pol. Letter 30 Dec. 1966
1. The supreme policy being: RAPIDITY OF PARTICLE. FLOW ALONE
DETERMINES POWER, it is imperative that the preclear, once the
completion is reached, immediately continues the routing on lines
and finishes the cycle he is on.
2. Therefore, any stops put forward by the insistence that a
SHSBC Student's preclear should wait until the evening or even the
week-end for the Declaration of his grade or grades on foundation
lines, instead of day lines is a violation of the Fast Flow System
and constitutes use of policy to stop a flow.
3. Therefore in future preclears are to be put on lines for
declaration of a grade or grades without any delay on lines
whatsoever.
Blanka Annakin - Public Exec See SH
Edie Hoyseth - Qual See SH
Bene Neal - HCO Area See SH
Monica Quirino - HCO Exec See SH
Herbie Parkhouse - Org Exec See SH
Ken Urquhart - LRH Comm SH
Anne Tampion - D/HCO Exec See WW
Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW
Tony Dunleavy - Public Exec See WW
Ken Delderfield - LRH Comm WW
Joan McNocher - Dep Guardian WW
LRH:jc.rd Mary Sue Hubbard - The Guardian WW
Copyright 1968 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I MARCH 1968
Remimeo
FALSE ATTESTATION
For persons who have been found guilty at any time of a FALSE
ATTESTATION - thereafter an attestation will never be accepted by
anyone. There will only be an
examination.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jc.kd Founder
Copyright (c) 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
85
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 MARCH 1968
(Re-issued 8 May 1968)
Remimeo
POLICIES GOVERNING THE QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
FAST FLOW
QUAL SEC - ORDERS
1. Get the Org Board changed immediately to read:
Dept 13 C &A
Dept 14 Review
Dept 15 Exams
Just change the depts, not the awareness levels.
2. If not available in the office, get within two (2) hours:
a. for Exams:
(1) one card file-metal preferably
(2) 1000 cards for it-3" x 5" approx.
b. for C & A:
(1) 1 legal size file cabinet
(2) 500 legal size folders
(3) Hedger or log book
c. for Qual:
(1) get a stencil made immediately of each of the attached
routing forms and have 100 run off each.
3. You no longer have an I & I Officer-re-assign to auditing if
trained or to cover or help another Qual post.
4. Stars:
Dept 13 C & A - awards given.
Dept 14 Review - cash collected, and No. of completions.
Dept 15 Exams - No. persons put back on lines.
5. Staff policy checkouts are done by attestation. Specific
orders given to get star rate checkouts are done by Cramming
Officer. A specific staff training schedule should be set up to
train staff evenings. This to cover Staff Status check sheets and
Org Exec Course. Out tech auditors get corrected in Cramming.
6. No staff training or staff review officer: troublesome staff
go to Ethics. After their Ethics is in, stats up, then if they
still need it they get a review at own expense. No disagreement
checks. Instead get Ethics. Anyone sent for a disagreement check
for natter, etc gets Ethics. If no trouble but wants a disagreement
check, he gets a green form and disagreement process if necessary.
No one tells Qual what to do and an Org is not a Clinic for staff
members.
7. See the attached hats, forms, and outlines of Qual.
8. See that Academy gives R factor sheets to Students (will be
published soon).
9. Make it go right.
QUAL DIV AO
Fast Flow is obtained by removing all unnecessary actions.
For example, a routing form has a section for accounts on it, to
pay for Review.
However, pc paid for an hour in advance and didn't go over the
hour-cross out the
86
accounts section and send him to the next point. Example: a guy
comes from accounts going to C & A-the form has I & I on it-this is
unnecessary, cross it out. He goes straight to C & A. So you have
to evaluate whether or not the step is necessary to the action at
hand.
Qual never has a line up of PCs. You audit them fast. You may
have to grab your C & A and send him to audit-the Qual See then
covers his post. You may have to grab other staff. You may have to
audit all night. Regardless, you keep the flow going. IF you are
absolutely overwhelmed with PCs, and all available Auditors are
auditing, send those waiting off to play in the grass, eat, see a
movie, anything, but don't just keep them sitting there. May be
Distribution has some mail to go out, etc. If you're sure it'll be
a short wait, keep one or two nearby. Bodies sitting around are
just solidifying beings. Don't let it happen. But don't misfigure
and send them all out of reach so none can be gotten when you have
an auditor free.
You also push preference. All PCs pay for Qual in Advance if
possible at all. Deposit fifty pounds at accounts toward Reviews.
Pay for an hour at least. Pay for a day's Cramming in advance.
And you don't accept this: Joe is nattery on his post and has
disagreements, give him a disagreements check. Send this boy to
Ethics. After he's been behaving and doing well he can have a
Review if it's still necessary. Don't validate this jazz. Beat him
on the head instead. And you never accept orders from anyone
else-not in Qual.
Bill needs an S & D-well all you know is someone thinks he needs
an S & D-you do your Green Form with a yawn and find out what's
really going on.
QUAL SEC HAT
1. Purpose is to co-ordinate your three departments, remove all
inspections before the fact, keep the flow up, and maintain Qual as
the corrector of flat ball bearings.
2. If your Rev Dept runs out of auditors you can send your Dept
heads to audit and
you cover their post. 1
3. Your Dir Rev can call other Staff to help audit-like idle HGC
auditors, etc. See FO 340 "Speed of Service".
4. Your stat is cash collected and No. of completions (Le. Rev
& Cramming),
5. You assign department conditions quickly by stats.
6. You know the functions and purposes of every hat under you.
7. Attached are the hats of your 3 depts, your new routing
forms, and a write up on Qual in general.
8. Routing forms-the terminal sending tells the router where to
go with it.
9. Do a folder inspection each day and get your auditors' tech
corrected all the time in Cramming-you instantly assign conditions
for out tech.
10. See that memberships are removed from Qual-it is not
correction -it is a dissem function.
N.B. If Qual's stat going way up and Tech's is going down,
evaluation and invalidation is likely occurring at C & A and Qual
is not putting tech in and may well be getting up stats by having
to do each Rev PC 2 or 3 times instead of handling him correctly
the first time.
DEPT 13 C & A HAT
Handles all completions, gives certs, sells bracelets.
Stat - awards given.
87
1. Keeps a log of all people who come through, recording date,
what they completed, who attested that they completed.
Log:
DATE NAME AWARD ATTESTED
6 Jan 68 Joe Jones end Rev B. Bates & J.J.
6 Jan 68 John Johns Grd. 0 B. Bates & J.J.
6 Jan 68 Bill Bomes HCOB 2 Jan 67 B.B.
6 Jan 68 Mary Jab HRS theory D. Domb & M.J.
Keeps PCs and students in same log.
Clears in another log. OT grades in separate logs.
2. Receives a person : patter:
a. Sends accounts invoice to Rev (if Rev PC or Cramm student).
b. Gets attestation in duplicate.
C. Files one copy in C & A fide.
(c) Staples a copy on the form-behind it-the routing form.
e. Fills in the log book with date, NAME AS THEY WANT IT ON THEIR
CERT and who attested. f. Issues Cert as fast as possible.
(1) Follows usual lines to get cert signed and issued-all
attestations are accepted by HCO etc-no further inspection.
(2) Only issues Cert if accounts Paid on the action.
3. Sends the person on to the Dir of Success or wherever
indicated on the form.
4. The PC or student signs an attestation slip that he has
completed, or can apply the data or has attained the grade. All
attestations must be action attestations. Never one like "I've read
the data and know it". Only, "I can apply (c) & A data to a PC", is
acceptable for an attestation.
5. When the attestation is signed C & A files a copy in the
person's file and staples a copy to the routing form.
6. C & A invoices that he has attested and staples a copy to the
routing form. The attestation is written on the invoice by the Dir
C & A (that's what 4 and 5 above are about). You don't have
separate people doing this-no I & I etc-if it takes a long time
someone has added something.
If the routing form has an actual attestation on it-have him
sign it-in this case you note on a chit that it's been signed, pc
or student's name, what it was for, and the BR number. Then file
the chit in his file.
e.g. Jones, Bill 25/1/68
signed BR 36 for
HCA Cert Course
Joe Baines
C&A
Naturally if you have made up attestation forms, you would not
do an invoice. You can use 2 pieces of paper and a carbon instead
of invoice. One invoice goes to C & A file (5 above), and one is
stapled to the back of the routing form -no more folders full of
loose invoices-and make sure accounts staples invoices to forms
where form says to. No paperclips.
7. C & A keeps a carbon and a piece of paper behind the log
page-end of day it is sent to Exams.
8. This system obviously does away with ALL examinations-only
attestations are used.
9. If the PC is not sure of the grade, GIs in, feels it's
something, send him to the Examiner for a Minus Scale assessment
and/or to find out if it's some other grade (HCO B 27 Sept 1965).
88
If it's not that, Exams sends to Review for correction. If
Review finds tech goofs the auditor will then get assigned a
Condition depending on the severity of the goof.
If it is a minus scale or another grade, Exams returns to C & A
to so attest and then back to the HGC.
10. Students bring their PCs in to C & A at the end of each
release for attestation.
11. File all chits right away. Never leave until end of day.
Your filing cabinet and stack of new folders is to be placed at
your elbow where you can just reach over and file immediately.
Always complete cycles of action.
DEPT 14 - REVIEW - CORRECTS PEOPLE
Stat - cash collected.
1. Receives PC and does standard Green Form-picks up each thing
as it reads.
2. Ethics says do an S & D-Rev does a Green Form and finds it's
a missed w/h-no S & (c) done. NO ONE TELLS QUAL WHAT TO DO-HCO says
do a see check, Qual does a Green Form. Get the idea-NO ONE TELLS
QUAL WHAT TO DO! NO ONE!! EVER! EVER!! EVER!!!
3. Review then sends him on when done.
4. If the guy has been sent to Review by Exams, is in Liability
for False Attestation, Review's standard action is-Green Form,
List-7, S & (c) type "W", "S", S & (c) Type "U", Rem A, Rem B-in
that order. He gets them all-EVERY TIME-NO EXCEPTIONS. If he gets a
FN on one S & (c) though, cease doing S & Ds.
Then he goes to Accounts, pays for that and goes to Cramming
where he gets-all the EM Drills star rate checked out, the Comm
Course drills star rated, DMSMH & The Dian Course HCOB star rated,
the CC materials star rated, and anything else Cramm cares to add
(this is for a CC student-you'd change the CC material for someone
else and perhaps the L-7); never change the order.
The S & Ds in this case are done at regular Review rates.
To Ethics after the S & Ds to disconnect naturally (unless ended
on a FN and he's not been declared PTS). See the long routing form
for the section where a guy comes out of Review headed for
Ethics-in this case though, C & A would do all steps.
5. Such a person came from Exams where his folder was gone over,
his out tech chitted, and where he was sent to Ethics, then Rev.
Ethics has him for 5 mins and that is ALL-no long lines outside
Ethics either. Before he gets to Review his Ethics Order should be
coming off the presses-it must be fast-a week old Ethics order,
even one a couple hours old, may be too late-he could be up scale a
few conditions by then. Speed is what counts. One student here went
from Liability to Clear in about 48 hours.
6. Cramming:
a. is TOUGH,
b. is the only place in the OR G where star rate check outs are
done,
C. if Ethics has someone confused about Conditions, he goes to
Cramming (by
the way, Ethics should have a stack of Conditions policies to
hand people), (c) staff gets Crammed at staff rates if they need
it. No special sections for staff.
N.B. on S & Lis: If Qual finds he needs S & (c) just use the
provision in the Rev Routing Form. If ends on FN no need to see
Ethics. If item found send to Ethics for disconnection. However, if
Ethics sent him for S & (c) and Qual found he did need one and so
gave one, he goes back to Ethics whether ended with FN or an item
so that PTS order can be cancelled.
7. Dir Rev constantly checks Rev folders for out tech-daily-and
sees that it gets corrected immediately in Cramming.
89 DEPT 15 EXAMS
Handles those who have goofed.
Stat - No. people put back on lines.
I - He's like a second Ethics Officer. You don't want to wind up
in his hands.
2. He keeps a card file of names. The Reg sends him a list of
names each day of everyone who signed up for something and what it
was-the Reg does this simply by placing a carbon and a piece of
paper behind the log page-end of day it's sent to Exams.
3. The daily list from C & A and from the Reg is recorded in
the card file.
E.g. of a card: Blow, Joe
signed for: Grd 0 2 Jan '68 (done 5 Jan)
Liability 3 Jan
Rev (done 4 Jan)
Grd 1 6 Jan (done 6 Jan)
Follow this form exactly, anything completed goes in
parenthesis.
N.B. This PC you'll therefore note is not yet in Normal
Operation and hasn't signed for Grd 2.
4. About 5 pm each day, Exams goes to Tech and goes through
their files to find who hasn't sent in their auditing slips-doesn't
apply to outer orgs. Each person he finds he sends a Summons
to-failure to report to an examiner results in an assignment of the
Condition of DOUBT.
5. When he appears the Examiner goes through his folder-out tech
is chitted, the PC sent to Ethics right then, then to Accounts,
then to Review-you do only ONE copy of the chit-it goes with the
folder-you don't want CC and OT chits floating around and in comm
baskets.
You don't care how long Exams hangs the guy up in Review-Exams
says he gets Level "0" star rated, that's it, he gets it. If he got
to the Examiner, then that's it-he gets the works.
6. If business is slow, Exams starts picking up the PCs who
checked the "POOR" box on their slips and sends them a Summons -
doesn't apply to outer orgs.
7. Exams gleans its card file often, looking for who finished
something and then didn't take the next step. Looking for who
signed for, but never finished. These all get Summonses.
Once in a blue moon Exams gets someone who is okay-Exams just
lots them go-but this situation is rare.
Supervisors send students to Exams who clean cleans on
themselves, have lousy indicators, want Cramming, want a written
exam to prove they know it (indicates uncertainty, so something is
out). Supers watch for these things.
As soon as a Condition formula has been applied and effected,
the PC, student, or staff member applies for an upgrade to whomever
assigned the condition. Naturally, if Review actions are
incomplete, he couldn't be in Normal Operation as not all is
corrected yet.
Supers' guide is, is the student learning and becoming certain
of his data, not his time on course-there no longer are any time
limits for courses.
Supers see these things. They do not inspect before the fact.
They watch. indicators. If a student bogs down he goes to the
Examiner who probably sends to Review and Cramming (probably needs
Rem A & B, perhaps an S & (c) & Cramming). Super attests on check
sheet that the check sheet is complete and up to date when the
student gets it.
8. If Qual's stats are down, Exams isn't doing its job.
9. Exams is after the dirt. Who falsely attested? Who said he
could do and then botched it up? Exams is an inspector AFTER the
fact of something going wrong.
Qual NEVER inspects before the fact of something going wrong.
90
Exams looks for the student who got his CC materials but who has
yet to attest that he can apply them-send him a Summons-probably
needs an S & (c) or Cramming or Rem A & B, or all of these. Exams
sends to Review to determine for sure on the S & D-but this one is
paid for, $100, even though done in Review.
10. Exams can issue a Summons to anyone found off the Road-like
dead files.
Qual's job is to get tech in fast-fast correction and
thorough-and complete. 11. See the C & A hat re PCs who come to you
for minus scales, etc.
12. PCs or students all confused about conditions-send to Cramming.
13. Get co-ordinated with the ARC Break Reg so that you aren't
issuing summonses to those people. However, if she gets no
response, she sends you the folder and you issue a Summons.
Lt. Fred Payer
FP:adv.je.rd Sea Org
Copyright (c) 1968 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 13 December 1968, page 93; added to by HCO
P/L 28 January 1969, page 94; and also cancelled by HCO P/L 23 May
1970, page 101. See also 6 April 1970 Issue II, page 96.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 MAY 1968
Remimeo
(Additions to HCO Policy Letter of 14 March 1968
reissued 8 May 1968, "Policies Governing the
Qualifications Division")
Refer Page 87, point 4, Qual Sec Hat.
As per ED 935 INT, the GDS Qual Stat is dual stat- . Gross Income
of the Org divided by the number of persons on staff. 2. Cash
collected by reason of the Division and No. of Completions.
Refer Page 88, point 9, C & A Hat.
HCO Bulletin 2nd January 1967 "Examiner's Safeguard" is to be
used as well. This is in the case of pc not being sure of the
grade, GIs in, feels it's something, send him to the Examiner for a
Minus Scale Assessment and/or to find out if it's some other grade
(HCO B 27th Sept 1965).
HCO B "Examiner's Safeguard" should be brought to the attention
of students on Level 0, HRS Checksheet.
Note that S & Ds are now part of the Level IV HAA as per l4th
Mar 68 HCO Pol Ltr.
Refer Page 89, point 6, Dept Review.
On LRH instructions the Staff Training Officer is to be
reinstated immediately. Staff members required to attest on Policy
should be required to demonstrate, not just attest. It is a must
for people who have a history of false attestation. On the
Interneship and SHSBC checkouts as per HCO Policy Ltr 4 Oct 67
"Theory Checkout Data" using twin system and clay table
demonstrations on HCO Bulletins marked star rated is to be
employed.
Allan Ferguson Org Exec See WW
Ken Delderfiald LRH Comm WW
Joan McNocher Dep/Guardian WW
LRH:js.rd Mary Sue Hubbard
Copyright (c) 1968 The Guardian WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 23 May 1970, page 101.1 Founder
91
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE FROM L. RON HUBBARD
LRH ED 29 WW 16 SH I EU I US I August 1968
CANCEL ATTESTATION ON UK AND US SHSBC AND REVERT TO EXAMINA
TION. LIKEWISE ON ALL ACADEMY STUDENTS IN UK. GET IN TRS AND
EXACT GRADE PROCESS. RETRAIN ALL WHO FLUB OR GET ETHICS
RECORDS PRIOR TO THIS DATE. YOUR PROGRAM: GET AUDITORS GET
RESULTS GET UP STATS. LOVE RON,
[seal]
............. L. RON
HUBBARD
Founder
(c)
01082R [Cancelled by LRH ED 82 INT and HCO P/L 3 September 1969,
page 95.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 SEPTEMBER 1968
Remimeo
REVIEW COMPLETE
PC ATTESTATIONS
The following sign is to be placed up in every auditing room and
every Qual in the world
IF YOU FEEL YOUR REVIEW IS COMPLETE YOU MAY GO TO CERTS & AWARDS
AND ATTEST THAT IT IS AND ATTAIN AUTHORITY TO GO BACK ON COURSE OR
TO THE HGC.
It is illegal for an auditor to tell a PC to attest. It comes under
the heading of evaluation.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:mps.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
92
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1968
Remimeo
CANCELLATION
HCO Policy Letter of 14 March 1968, Policies Governing the
Qualifications Division is hereby cancelled as it violates the
purpose of the Qualifications Division which is:
TO ENSURE THE RESULTS OF SCIENTOLOGY, CORRECT THEM WHEN
NECESSARY AND ATTEST TO THEM WHEN ATTAINED.
Qual is to revert to its original org board formation prior to
the issuance of the above Policy Letter, in other words:
Dept 13 Exams - contains I & I Officer Dept 14 Review - includes
Staff Review Officer and Staff Training Officer Dept 15 Certs &
Awards - contains memberships.
All routing forms are to be changed as necessary.
Philip Quirino
Tech & Qual Aide
LRH:PQ:Idm.ei.rd for
Copyright (c) 1968 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Cancelled by HCO Policy Letter of 23 may 1970
in this section.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo
PC ATTESTATIONS
(Covers pcs and pre-OTs)
Although the right of a preclear to attest completion may not be
denied him, it is still ultimately the Case Supervisor who says
whether or not the case is complete.
This appertains QUAL DIV pcs and pre-OTs.
It was found conclusively that no matter how good and radiant
and great the pc feels, and how fantastic the indicators are even
at the examiner's desk, the pc will come to grief when out tech has
occurred.
A large number of pcs and pre-OTs attested complete whilst the
Case Supervisor detected out tech in their sessioning. As they had
been audited by Class VIIIs with excellent TRs, good indicators and
meter phenomena were in, and remained in, on some cases for several
days even, but sooner or later the case was found in Ethics or
medical or post trouble, or a combination of all of these.
So let him attest complete all he wants, but the CIS decides,
And this is done solely on what he sees in the folder. NOTHING ELSE
unless he requires additional data for which lines exist.
Tech is far too deadly in its accuracy to let any pc out of Qual
whilst knowing there is out tech on the case.
This is not invalidation of pcs, as releasing them from Qual
with technical outness constitutes the validation of a lie.
Auditing is too precise and accepts only the STANDARD in
application and result.
Lt. O.J. Roos
LRH:OJR:Idm.ei.rd Flag C/S
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
93
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo
Addition to HCO Policy Letter of 14 March, 1968
POLICIES GOVERNING THE QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION-FAST
FLOW
As attestation is now back in, Students are not required to be
checked out by another person on star-rated materials. They do
however, have to attest that they know these materials in every
detail. It is safe however to get someone to work with you on it to
be sure you do know it.
The following statement is to be added to the forms that are
already filled out at each level:
"I also attest that I have studied all the star-rated materials
for this level and I know them in every detail."
This does not apply to Class VIII materials or Power Processes.
Irene Dunleavy
LRH:ID:sdp.ei.cden CS-5
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/Ls 22 July 1969, Past Flow Training, below,
23 May 1970, Cancellation of Policies Governing the Qualifications
Division-Fast Flow, page 101, and 29 July 1972 Issue II, Fast Flow
in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1969
(Cancels HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JAN 1969)
Remimeo
FAST FLOW TRAINING
Although Academy and Briefing Courses are taught on a fast flow
basis with no examinations, students must apply HCO P/L 26 Aug 65,
"SCIENTOLOGY TRAINING TWIN CHECKOUTS" on all star-rated materials
of their level.
W/O Ira Chaleff
LRH:IC:nt.ei.cden.rd Chief Officer AO INT
Copyright (~) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue II, Past Flow
in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
94
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 SEPTEMBER 1969
Remimeo (LRH ED 82 INT - 20 January 1969
Qual Sec Hat Issued as a Policy Letter)
Tech Sec Hat
Dept 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15 Hats
C/S Hats ATTESTATION REINSTATED
ATTESTATION OF ALL CLASSES (EXCEPT VIII) AND GRADES IS
REESTABLISHED.
ED 29WW 16SH 1EU 1US which cancelled attestation on SHSBC and
any ED cancelling attestation is revoked.
HCO Pol Ltr 14 March 68 FAST FLOW and HCO Pol Ltr 29 Mar 65,
Issue II, HCO Pol Ltrs 6 Feb 68 and 7 Feb 68 and HCO Pol Ltr 24 Feb
68 are returned to force in all courses, Academies, and SHSBC (but
not Class VIII).
A programme which placed Class VIIIs in every org to safeguard
tech has now been completed and Class VIlIs are graduating
regularly from Advanced Orgs. This will keep tech in and effective.
A few auditing errors which came out of FAST FLOW made it
necessary to safeguard tech application. This has now been done
fully and completely.
FAST FLOW means the student attests his theory or practical
class when he believes he has covered the materials and can do it.
There is no. examination.
The student's own attestation is accepted and he is certified.
If he has made a false attestation it shows up in his auditing.
However, he will not now be ordered to retrain if he errs in his
auditing. He will be fined as an Ethics matter. The fine will be
proportionate to the cost of the auditing done incorrectly.
This is effective at once.
HCO Pol Ltr 14 Mar 68 must be gotten in in Qual Divisions over
the world.
With SO VIIIs on the job over the world tech will be
safeguarded. With the Class VIII Course now being given in Advanced
Orgs, any defects can be remedied.
Only about 8% of those trained made it slow for the 92%.
Thus the speed of training is now fully up to the student.
It has also been found that examinations serve as invalidation
and that only invalidation knocks an auditor off his stride.
I am sorry for any inconvenience or slow this temporary
suspension of Fast Flow may have brought about. The first release
of the new non-examination system was a test. It was withdrawn and
any holes in it patched up.
Fast Flow on training as well as auditing is now fully and
permanently released. It was not suspended on grades or auditing.
It is now restored to training.
Class VIII was a great break through in auditing. It pushed
results to 100%. With Class VIIIs around the simplicity and
directness of auditing is in full view and results will be higher
than ever before.
Note: This does not alter HCO Pol Ltr 5 May 1969, Issue II,
Dianetic Course Examinations.
Re-issue from LRH ED 82 INT
Proposed by Leif Windle, D/Policy Safeguard Chief WW
and Zena Herring, Policy Safeguard Chief AF
Approved by Kevin Kember, A/Policy Safeguard Chief WW
for Jane Kember, The Guardian WW
for
LRH:LW:ZH:ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1969 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
95
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 APRIL 1970
Issue II
Remimeo (Replaces Grade Attestation forms
OES of HCO P/L 14 March 1968 "Policies
Qual Sec
C&A Governing the Qualifications Division")
SCIENTOLOGY RELEASE ATTESTATION FORM
The following is the form to be used for attestation to
Scientology Grades of Release; single and triple. Use the form per
HCO P/L 14 March 1968 "Policies Governing the Qualifications
Division". This form should be printed and used as one form kept in
the preclear's folder (a copy goes to CF). If the pc is not
attesting to all single or triple grades, have him initial the ones
that apply and sign the final statement.
ATTESTATION OF RELEASE
1, , do hereby attest with my initials and signature below, that
I am satisfied that I have achieved release on the following
grades. I further understand that it is a violation of the ethical
codes of Scientology to falsely attest, or falsely fail to attest,
to any state achieved.
SINGLE GRADES Initial & Date
GRADE 0, COMMUNICATION: I have achieved in auditing the ability
to communicate freely to anyone on any subject.
GRADE 1, PROBLEMS: Through processing I have made to vanish
current problems in life, and have the ability to recognize the
source of problems and make them vanish.
GRADE II, RELIEF: Through processing I have attained relief from
feelings of guilt or regret about past actions of mine, and do not
feel I must keep secret anything that has happened.
GRADE 111, FREEDOM: I have discovered through auditing the
source of past upsets and now understand and feel free of such
upsets.
GRADE IV, ABILITY: I have discovered in auditing, and been
released from, fixed and destructive patterns of action of mine. I
now feel free to do new things.
TRIPLE GRADES
STRAIGHTWIRE: I have achieved in auditing a new understanding of
and confidence about, recalling things.
SECONDARIES: Through auditing, I have re-experienced and been
relieved of, incidents from the past containing loss and painful
emotion.
ENGRAMS: Through auditing, I have re-experienced and been
relieved of, incidents from the past containing physical pain and
unconsciousness.
96
GRADE 0, COMMUNICATION: I have achieved in auditing the ability
to communicate freely to anyone on any subject, and can accept
others communicating on any subject.
GRADE 1, PROBLEMS: I have made to vanish current problems in
life and with others through processing, and now feel confident
about handling problems in general.
GRADE 11, RELIEF: Through processing, I have attained relief
from feelings of guilt or regret about past actions of mine, and do
not feel that I must keep secret anything that has happened. I have
discovered people are responsible for the condition they are in.
GRADE 111, FREEDOM: I have discovered through auditing the
source of past upsets with myself and others, and now understand
and feel free of all such upsets.
GRADE IV, ABILITY: I have discovered in auditing, and been
released from, fixed and destructive patterns of action of mine and
others. I now feel free to do new things.
Having completed the Grades of Release initialed above, I hereby
state unreservedly and without influence or duress that I have
achieved the gains and spiritual betterment I expected from
Dianetics and Scientology pastoral counselling. As a testimony of
satisfaction, I waive any future claim for refund of offerings made
for such services.
Preclear signature Date
Witness, C & A Auditor's name
Craig Beeney, D/G Tech US for
Robert H. Thomas, D/G US for
Jane Kember, Guardian WW for
Mary Sue Hubbard, CS-G for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:CB:kjm.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(See reference to this Pol Ltr in LR14 ED 103 INT, 21 May 1970,
Past Flow Grades Cancelled, page 99.]
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 25 June 1970 (revised & reissued 17 July
1970), Expanded Lower GradesChart of Abilities Gained and
Inabilities Lost, page 159.]
97
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 MAY 1970
Remimeo
ALL TECH
AND QUAL URGENT
HATS IMPORTANT
SINGLE DECLARE
Multiple Declare
Cancelled
(This cancels HCO PL 6 Aug 1966, Declare,
Multiple, which permitted a pc to be run from
Grade 0 to IV and declare them all at once.)
Policy: Only one grade of auditing may be declared or
attested to at one time.
Many pcs have been found not to have attained the End Phenomena
of each lower grade as per both the 1966 and 1968 Classification
Charts.
Unless a pc directly attests the end phenomena to an Examiner
the Grade cannot be awarded and the pc may not proceed.
The examiner is permitted to ask the end phenomena question for
that grade. If the pc cannot attest he has attained it, he must be
returned to session to have the process completed, additional
processes of that grade run.
The Triple Grade and its havingness is run.
There are many other processes for each grade which help attain
that End Phenomena.
The condition has arisen where the lower grades have become
slighted in orgs and the pc is not being set up well for a stable
gain.
For instance Grade III can be repeated a dozen times.
The CCHs and others listed on the "Process Taught" Training
Column of the 1966 and 1968 Classifications Chart have become
neglected YET ARE ALL VALID FOR THAT GRADE AND SHOULD ALL BE RUN,
FOR A GRADE.
The Abilities Attained Column, Processing section of the 1966
and 1968 Classification Chart give the question that must be
answered positively before the pc is let have the Grade or to have
further grades.
The huge version of the Classification Chart should be
republished in a huge format modified in text only as it extends
upwards into OT grades.
These Classification Charts, particularly the Column under
Training "Processes Taught" and under Processing "Abilities
Attained" are valid. "Processes Taught" should also appear as
"Processes Used" under the Processing side. Other Class VI
Processes may also be used to attain these abilities.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO HAVE SEVERAL F/Ns PER GRADE.
It is Policy NOT to downgrade Scientology lower grades just for
the sake of speed and Admin flows.
TRs (0 to 9) are curing some drug addicts. They belong before
Dianetics.
Probably the main trouble orgs have had recently has come from
tossing aside all Lower Grades. Thus the route to Total Freedom
became impeded.
The Multiple Declare PL and any other advice from anyone
permitting pcs to escape direct attestation of lower grades and
Power are NOT VALID AND ARE CANCELLED.
You will note that even the Multiple Declare PL (6 Aug 66) was
SH Only and was intended only for rehabilitation of already run
grades so Power could be run.
DON'T DOWNGRADE LOWER GRADES.
LRH:nt.rw.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright ~~- 1970 Founder
bW
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
98
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE FROM L. RON HUBBARD
LRH ED 103 INT Date 21 May 1970
To: All staff
OES
Tech See
Qual See
All Org Auditors
Class VIlls
C/Ses
From: Ron
Subject: FAST FLOW GRADES CANCELLED
Reference: HCO PL 10 May 70
A large number of HCO PLs and HCO Bs are being cancelled.
The HGC has been permitted to slip into Qual.
Lower grades have become unmocked with the result that lower
grade results ARE NOT BEING ATTAINED. The effect is actually
throwing away Scientology.
These lower grades have MANY PROCESSES. EACH GRADE HAS MANY
PROCESSES.
If you wonder what happened to income, what happened to your
field it is just this: The HGC slipped into Qual, people ceased to
gain the Ability required of each lower grade, Scientology was no
longer being delivered in full.
Every process of the "trained in" Column of the 1968
Classification Chart IS USED.
In particular, HCO Pol Ltr 14 March 1968 "Policies Governing the
Qualifications Division. Fast Flow" is cancelled.
The Qual Org Board reverts to HCO PL 2 Nov 67. Dept 13 is
Examinations, Dept 14 is Review, Dept 15 is Certs and Awards.
A pc completing ONE lower grade must go to the Examiner who asks
him the question contained in HCO PL 6 April 1970 for each grade.
This attest form itself is not valid. But the questions for the
grade are taken from an old SH booklet on grades. This gives you a
ready source for the Examiner's question.
All three flows of a triple grade and its havingness can be run
as THE LAST ACTION OF THE GRADE. It should only be done after the
pc has had any other processes listed for that grade.
C/S
The C/S operates now in Div IV the Tech Div, Dept 12. Any EDs or
PLs or HCO Bs requiring otherwise are being cancelled.
HGC
The HGC holds onto its pcs, setting up a case, correcting
outnesses in auditing a process. "To Review" is a misused and
abused term. An HGC auditor can certainly handle a chain that
wasn't finished in last session.
ONLY WHEN THE DIV IV C/S OR TECH SEC OR (c) OF P GIVES UP ON A
CASE DOES IT GO TO REVIEW.
REVIEW
There is no C/S in Qual. A Review auditor looks over the folder
and the case, finds out what hasn't been or needs handling and puts
the case back together again.
The Review auditor never does major actions. These are done in
the HGC.
Internes can be trained in Qual but they audit in the HGC.
EXAMINER AND GRADE DECLARES
The Examiner can put the pc on a meter, can give the pc the end
phenomena of the grade he is there to declare in print or ask it
and ask if he has attained it.
IF THERE IS ANY DOUBT IN THE PC'S MIND OR IF THE METER IS POOR
OR BAD INDICATORS ARE PRESENT the Examiner sends the pc back to the
HGC!
99
The pc is usually accompanied to the Examiner by the Auditor and
brings the pc's folder. The Examiner can look at the folder to see
what was run and COMPARE it to THE 1968 CLASS CHART COLUMN "TRAINED
IN". If the pc has had very little auditing on the grade (such as
just a single flow of the grade process) the examiner would do well
not to ask the pc anything but send the pc and auditor back to the
HGC.
Procedure would be (a) pc and his auditor go to Examiner; (b)
Examiner looks at the folder to see if it is okay and enough
auditing (the "Trained in" processes) done for the grade; (c)
Examiner sends them back to HGC if he won't examine; or (c) puts pc
on cans; (e) notes meter OK; (f) asks or shows the end question for
the grade; (g) if pc says no it is back to the HGC, if pc says yes
it's on to Certs and Awards.
After every session there is also an examination as per current
policy and the Exam report goes in the folder as has been done.
It is the declare exam for a grade that has reverted to '66 exam
procedure and which is given above.
THE EXAMINER REFUSES TO EXAMINE ANY TWO OR MORE GRADES AT A
TIME.
POWER
EACH POWER PROCESS IN V IS SEPARATELY EXAMINED.
STUDENTS
This doesn't change students but they still must attest.
LEVELS NOT DESCRIBED
Any level not described on the '68 Classification Chart still
requires that the pc or Pre OT declare it and that all folders show
he made it.
CANCELLED PLs, ETC
The full list of cancellations will be issued in PL form, HCO
Bs, EDs and VIII materials are all being corrected. This will be
issued shortly.
It is a considerable emergency that this Ed be gotten into
effect at once!
SO Missions and other data sources show that when we ceased to
require all grade processes be run and ceased to examine each grade
for ability attained we threw away 90% of Scientology.
I have been looking for a long time to find why Class IV orgs
found so little to sell, so little to audit and why they were doing
so badly.
This is it.
Scn orgs are service organisations. When they cease to give full
service and full gains they have trouble.
Therefore this Ed is being sent to you swiftly.
Follow what I've given you. Pry Tech and Qual Divs apart with a
crowbar. Begin to produce in your Production Division.
PURPOSE OF QUAL
HCO PL 9 Jul 65 "There's no reason to start running intensives
in Qual". HCO PL 31 Jul 65 "Review must take over any non-optimum
product". HCO PL 20 Nov 65 No. 77 "Quickly repairs any flat ball
bearing".
HCO PL I Feb 66 Dir Rev repair of goofs. . .
In short we're back to original policy.
The basic structure got varied and the subject got lost.
That's the motto of this Ed.
Good luck and high stats.
--------------------------------------------------------------------
.. ...... . L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
*C ... .. 100
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex -
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MAY 1970
Remimeo
CANCELLATION OF POLICIES GOVERNING THE
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION - FAST FLOW
With reference to LRH ED 103 INT, 21 May, '70: FAST FLOW GRADES
CANCELLED, the following HCO PLs are cancelled:
4 May 65 Release Award
14 Mar 68 Policies Governing the Qualifications Division-Fast Flow
14 Mar 68 Re-issued 8 May 68 Policies Governing the Qualifications
Division
-Fast Flow
15 May 68 Additions to HCO PL 14 Mar 68
13 Dec 68 Cancellation
28 Jan 69 Additions to HCO PL 14 Mar 68
James Fuller D/CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JF:dz.ka.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
101
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 OCTOBER 1967
Remimeo
All Qual Hats
All Tech Hats
Org Exec Course
THE LINES OF THE QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
THE INTERVIEW INVOICE SECTION
This Section is handled by the Qualifications
Interview-Invoice In-Charge.
All bodies coming into the Qualifications Division are routed
through this section, and in some cases bodies leaving the
Qualifications Division are routed through this section.
A body cannot arrive at any point in the Qualifications Division
without first having been routed and invoiced to that point by the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice InCharge.
The Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge interviews the
student, preclear, or staff member in order. to decide what routing
is necessary. The interview is extremely short and direct to the
purpose of getting only sufficient information in order to make a
decision concerning the proper routing.
Once the proper routing is ascertained the student, preclear, or
staff member is invoiced into the Qualifications Division by
writing an invoice stating the date, time, and the Department and
Section to be routed to, and getting the person to sign the
invoice.
Routing
A. STUDENT ROUTINGS
1. A student applicant for certification
A student applicant for certification is routed to the
Certification Examiner in the student Examinations Section of the
Department of Examinations.
In order to be so routed the student must present to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice InCharge his completed
check-sheets showing that all theory checkouts have been completed
for the Level for which certification is being requested.
2. A student who failed certification
A student who did not pass his certification E-Meter check is
routed back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge by
the Certification Examiner and is then routed by the Qualifications
Interview-Invoice In-Charge by invoice and routing form to the Case
Section of the Department of Review where a case review is given
the student. When the review has been completed, the student is
routed back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge.
At this point, the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge
routes the student to the Area Cashier Section of the Department of
Income to pay for the auditing done and to report back to present
the proper invoices of the Income Section and be invoiced out of
the Qualifications Division. The final action is to route the
student to the Ethics Section of the Department of Inspections and
Reports.
3. A student applicant for classification
A student applicant for classification is routed by invoice and
routing form to the Classification Examiner in the student
Examinations Section of the Department of Examinations.
In order to be so routed the student must present completed
practical checksheets and the auditing folder or folders of
preclears he or she has audited for the Level at which
classification is requested.
4. A student who failed classification
A student who failed the classification examination is routed
back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge by the
Classification Examiner and is then routed by the Qualifications
Interview-Invoice In-Charge by invoice and routing form
102
either to the Case Section of the Department of Review or to the
Cramming Section of the Department of Review depending on whether
the student is in need of a review or not.
If the student is in need of review, the Qualifications
Interview-Invoice III-Charge routes by invoice and routing form for
an assist in the Case Section of the Department of Review. When the
assist has been completed, the student is routed by the Case
Officer back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge, who
routes the student to the Area Cashier Section of the Department of
Income to pay for the auditing done and to then report back to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge to present the proper
invoices of the Income Section in order to be invoiced out of the
Department of Review Case Section and invoiced and routed to the
Cramming Section.
If the student does not need review, the student is invoiced
into and routed to the Department of Review, Cramming Section. The
student remains in the Cramming Section until such time as he can
pass the classification examination. Although he may present
himself several times for re-examination and is routed by the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice InCharge to the Classification
Examiner, the student is only out of the Cramming Section when the
classification examination is passed. In such cases the student is
invoiced into the student Examinations Section, but not invoiced
out of the Cramming Section of the Department of Review.
When the student passes his classification examination at last,
he is routed to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice Section from
which he is routed to the Area Cashier Section of the Department of
Income to pay for the number of days spent in the Cramming Section
and to then report back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice
In-Charge in order to present the proper invoices of the Income
Section and to be invoiced out of the Qualifications Division.
5. A student with difficulties
Any student with difficulties routed by the Technical Division
to the Qualifications Division, such as a slow student (getting an
insufficient number of passes per week), an assist or an ARC break,
is routed by the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge by
invoice and routing form to the Department of Review, Case Section.
After the case review has been completed the student is routed
back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge with the
folder containing the reports of the auditing. The folder is
investigated to see if it is necessary to send the student to
Ethics. In any case the student is routed to the Area Cashier
Section of the Department of Income to pay for the review. After
paying for the review, the student is routed back by the Area
Cashier Section to be invoiced out of the Qualifications Division
by the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge upon the
presentation of the proper invoices from the Area Cashier Section
of the Department of Income.
Now if any ethics action is necessary, the Qualifications
Interview-Invoice In-Charge routes the student to the Ethics
Section of the Department of Inspections and Reports.
6. A student applicant for gradation
A student applicant for gradation is routed by invoice and
routing form to the student Examinations Section in the Department
of Examinations.
B. HGC PRECLEAR ROUTINGS
1. -An HGC preclear for review
An HGC preclear for review is either routed to the Qualifications
Interview
Invoice Section by the auditor or is routed there by the Case
Supervisor via the HGC
Administrator. There are certain symbols used by the Case
Supervisor to indicate what
action is necessary in the Case Section of the Department of
Review. REY ' ? ' REY FL?'
and ETH? are all invoiced and routed by routing form to the Case
Section of the
Department of Review, along with the preclear's folder.
When the review auditing is completed the preclear is routed
back to the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge to be routed
to the Area Cashier Section of the Department of Income to handle
the billing for the review auditing. The Area Cashier Section of
the Department of Income routes the preclear back with the proper
invoices to be invoiced out of the Qualifications Division by the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge and the HGC
Administrator immediately notified that the review action on the
preclear has been completed.
103
2. An HGC preclear for Release Declaration
An HGC preclear routed to the Qualifications Interview Invoice
In-Charge for Release Declaration is invoiced to and routed by
routing form to HGC Pc Examiner in the Examinations Section of the
Department of Examinations.
If the HGC Pc Examiner sees that the preclear is not all right
or the folder is a mess, the preclear is routed back to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge for invoicing and
routing to the Case Section in the Department of Review. When the
review is completed, the preclear is routed back to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice Section, thence to the Area
Cashier Section in the Department of Income, back to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice InCharge with the proper invoices
to be invoiced out of the Qualifications Division either back to
the HGC for further auditing or out through the Department of
Certificates and Awards if released in Review.
If the preclear was all right, he would be routed by invoice to
the Department of Certificates and Awards for Grade Certificate or
Declaration of Release.
The symbol used for the grade or Release declaration routing by
the Case Supervisor via the HGC Administrator is DECLARE?
C. STAFF MEMBER R OUTINGS
A staff member, if not an HGC preclear, is routed as follows: 1.
A staff member for Staff Status examination
A staff member for a Staff Status examination is routed to the
Staff Training Unit in the staff section of the Department of
Examinations via invoice and routing form.
2. A staff member for policy or bulletin checkout is routed via
invoice to the Staff Training Unit in the staff section of the
Department of Review.
Routings Out of the Qualifications Division
Staff, students, and preclears are routed out of the
Qualifications Division via the Department of Certificates and
Awards for the following:
1. Students passed for certification
2. Students passed for classification
3. Preclears passed for Declaration of Release
4. Staff members passed for Staff Status Ratings
5. Student preclears passed for Declaration of Release.
All students and preclears are routed out of the Qualifications
Division via the Department of Examinations, Qualifications
Interview-Invoice Section for the following:
1. Students failed for certification after having been handled
by review auditing in the Case Section of the Department of Review.
2. Students failed for classification after having been in cases
of upset, handled by the Case Section for review and in all cases
having been handled in the Cramming Section by passing the
classification Examination.
3. Students with difficulties after having been handled by
review in the Case Section.
4. HGC preclears sent to the Case Section of the Department of
Review after having had their cases reviewed.
5. Student preclears sent to the Case Section of the Department
of Review after having had their cases reviewed.
In all of the five categories routed out of the Qualifications
Division through the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge
with the exception of students who failed gradation, routing is
done in this fashion to insure that the student or preclear is
routed in all cases to the Area Cashier Section of the Department
of Income to pay for the services delivered by the Qualifications
Division and then to route further, if need be, to the Ethics
Section of the Department of Inspections and Reports.
Staff members who fail Staff Status examinations or who pass or
fail bulletin or policy letter checkouts merely return to their
posts or are routed to the Staff Review Officer, depending upon
their study record.
104
Page System
Students and preclears are routed to the Qualifications Division
by Pages in the Department of Technical Services. This is done as
no student or preclear is permitted to carry or bring folders or
files of their own. The Qualifications Division may have a Page of
its own for routings out of the Division or for internal routing.
The preclear folders as brought by the Page are put on the desk
of the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge. Each folder
newly brought in is placed on the bottom of the stack of folders on
the desk.
The Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge merely makes sure
that for every preclear brought in to be interviewed and invoiced
has a folder brought over by a Page, and that the folder is placed
on the bottom of the stack of preclears to be sent to the Case
Section of the Department of Review.
Keeping The Lines Flowing
The Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge is to keep the
lines moving. By this is meant that the people should be routed as
fast as possible to the correct destination. If there is any delay
in service due to the personnel on that post to which the person is
to be routed, the student, preclear, or staff member should be
advised that there will be a delay and asked to wait or make
themselves available for service. The whole idea is to handle the
traffic that is there to be handled and to route these people to
the proper service as fast as possible. If there does seem to be
more delay than necessary, the Qualifications Interview-Invoice
In-Charge should advise the Qualifications Secretary so that steps
can be taken to put on personnel in order to keep the people moving
on the lines and the service performed.
Invoicing
A. WRITING AN INVOICE
In invoicing the student, preclear, or staff member into the
Qualifications Division, the following information is clearly
written on the invoice:
1. The person's name
2. The date and time of day
3. The Department and Section or Unit to which the person is
routed.
There is no need to write the purpose of what is required to be
done as the department, section or unit clearly defines what the
purpose is.
B. ROUTING OF INVOICE COPIES
There are three ' copies and one original of any invoice
written.
These are routed as follows:
I . The original and two copies are given to. the individual to
present to the Officer of the section or unit to which the person
is routed.
2. The last invoice remains in the machine.
The Officer in charge of the section or unit to which the
individual has been routed will return the yellow invoice to the
Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge stamped with the action
undertaken. The student is given the original to present to the
Department of Technical Services for his or her file and the pink
copy is retained by the Officer in charge of the section or unit to
assist with the making of the weekly report required and then are
routed by him to the Qualifications files for the Department and
section or unit.
The Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge with the returned
yellows and the machine green invoices can then see what people
have been handled and who have not been handled so as to keep the
people moving through the Qualifications Division and thereby
receiving the service necessary. It may at times be necessary for
the Qualifications Interview-Invoice In-Charge to have a Page
called in order to find or locate or bring over a person who did
not appear for the service requested.
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.cden The Guardian WW
Copyright (c) 1967 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
105
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Issue I
Remimeo
Qual I & I
All Qua] Hats
All Tech Hats
QEOS Qual Lines Series I
THE LINES OF THE CORRECTION DIVISION
QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE LINES
AND ROUTINGS
(Amends HCO PL 20 Nov 67 "The Lines of the
Qualifications
Division. The Interview Invoice Section.")
All public bodies routed in and out of the Correction Division
are routed through the Qualifications Interview and Invoice
Section.
The Qual Interview and Invoice Officer interviews each person
very briefly in order to decide what routing is necessary. The
interview is extremely short and direct.
Once the proper routing is ascertained, the public person is
logged in, stating name, date, time and where being routed to, then
routed to the proper destination.
The Qual I and I handles bodies by logging them in, routing them
to their correct terminal, then INVOICING OUT WHERE A PAID SERVICE
IS INVOLVED AND COLLECTING THE MONEY FOR THAT SERVICE, or Logging
out if no paid service is involved.
Qual I and I has a log book in which all designated persons,
coming in and going out, are logged in and out, where no invoice is
required.
Qual I and I has an invoice machine and a lockable cash box for
collecting money. (Qual I and I collects invoice packs from the Dir
Income and delivers used invoice packs to the Dir Income,
collecting a new pack at the same time.)
KEEPING THE LINES FLOWING
The Qualifications Interview and Invoice Officer must keep the
lines moving. By this is meant that the people should be routed as
fast as possible to the correct destinations. If there is any delay
in service, due to the personnel on that post not being available,
the person should be advised that there will be a delay and asked
to make themselves available for service.
The whole idea is to handle the traffic that is there to be
handled and to route these people to the proper service as fast as
possible. If there does seem to be more delay than necessary, Qual
I and I must advise the QEO, or in his absence, the Qual Sec, so
that steps can be taken to put on personnel in order to keep the
people moving
on the lines and the service delivered.
Qual Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Founder
Copyright (~) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
106
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Remimeo Issue Il
Qual I & I
All Qual Hats
All Tech Hats
QE0s Qual Lines Series 2
QUAL STUDENT LINES
There are several different lines for handling students
efficiently in Qual. They are as follows:
The following student routings are simply LOGGED IN AND LOGGED
OUT:
I . Students going to Student Examiner for Certification or
Classification Exam who pass the Exam.
2. Students coming back to Qual for re-exam (after they have
flunked, been to Cramming, and returned to Course to review their
materials), and who then pass their re-exam.
3. Students sent for Exams requiring Attestation only are logged
in and routed to the Student Examiner, who does his usual check to
see that the checksheet has been completed, then meter checks for
"falsified" or "Missed" and routes to C&A.
IN ALL CASES ABOVE, QUAL I AND I LOGS THE STUDENT IN, ROUTES TO
STUDENT EXAMINER, WHO ROUTES THE STUDENT BACK TO QUAL I AND I TO BE
LOGGED OUT AND ROUTED VIA C & A OUT TO SUCCESS.
4. Students being routed from Student Examiner or Cramming Officer
to Ethics.
The student has not yet completed his Cramming cycle, and will
return on his routing form to complete, via Qual I and 1.
S. Students wanting to see the Chaplain. These are simply logged
in, routed to the Chaplain and logged out.
6. Students wanting to use the Org Library. These are logged in,
routed to Org Librarian, logged out and routed back to Course on
their routing form.
The following student routings are LOGGED IN AND INVOICED OUT
AND MONEY COLLECTED OR DEBITED:
I . Student going to Examiner for Certification or
Classification exam, who has flunked the exam.
The student is logged in by Qual I & I and routed to Student
Examiner. When a student flunks, the Student Examiner routes the
student direct to Cramming. When the Cramming is complete, the
Cramming Off writes up a chit for Qual I and 1, stating how long
the student has been in Cramming. Qual I and I charges by the day.
Qual I and I collects the money, or debits, and routes the
student back to course to review his materials. The student will
return very shortly after to take his re-exam. Cramming finds out
what a person has missed. Cramming does not teach courses.
2. Students sent to Dept 13 for Word Clearing Method 2 or Word
Clearing Correction List actions:
Qual I and I logs in and routes to Qual Clearing Page for
assignment to word clearing. When the word clearing is complete,
Qual Clearing Page writes up a chit on how many hours and minutes
the student has had and routes to Qual I and I. Qual I and I
invoices out, collects the money and routes the student back to
course.
107
3. Students whose study points are in Emergency or below being
sent to Cramming.
These students are logged in, routed to Cramming, and invoiced
out per chit from Cramming Off, cash collected and routed back to
Course on their routing form.
4. Students being routed from Course to see the Medical Officer.
The student comes in on a routing form via the Ethics Officer.
The only exception to this is sudden injury requiring emergency
medical treatment. In this case, the person is logged out and
routed to Ethics Officer after the first aid has been administered.
The Medical Officer writes up a chit stating any costs payable
by the person for Qual I and 1. These costs involve cost for any
first aid given, plus costs for any medications or vitamins issued
as part of first aid.
Where no cost is involved, Qual I and I logs the student out and
routes back to Course.
5. Students wanting to purchase or renew Memberships. These are
logged in, invoiced for the Membership, the money collected and
routed to C & A to collect their Membership Card.
6. Students being routed to Qual by the Registrar, as a flubbed
product.
These students are logged in and routed to Dir Correction for
interview and handling.
Dir Correction may route within Qual to Cramming, MO, ARC Break
Auditor, Word Clearing, Chaplain or to Ethics. He may call for the
student's pc folder and arrange an Intensive in the HGC.
Dir Correction writes up immediate Cramming Orders on all
personnel involved, including Student Examiner, C & A and Success,
and a Commendable chit on the Registrar for picking up this flubbed
product.
Dir Correction handles internally in Qual or routes out, with
instructions, via Qual I and 1.
If routed to any internal Qual service, the staff member
involved writes up a chit advising the time spent on the service
and Qual I and I invoices accordingly.
The following Student routing is INVOICED IN and LOGGED OUT.,
I . Students being routed to Dept 13 for Word Clearing Method One.
Students for Method One must PAY IN ADVANCE for this service. So
a fully paid up invoice must either be presented to Qual I and I or
Qual I and I must invoice and collect for this service before
routing to Qual Clearing Page for assignment to word clearing.
When the student has completed his Word Clearing Method One, he
is routed out on his routing form via Qual I and 1, who logs the
student out and routes to C & A and Success.
No credit is extended for Word Clearing Method One.
Note: When the volume of public demand for Word Clearing Method
One increases to the point that it is jamming staff word clearing,
it is to be moved over to the HGC, but the C/Sing is retained by
the Qual Word Clearing C/S.
Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright(c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
108
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Remimeo Issue III
Qual I and I
All Qual Hats
All Tech Hats Qual Lines Series 3
QEOs
QUAL PRECLEAR LINES
Although Qual does not handle Review auditing actions, there is
quite a traffic in Preclears and the lines for handling and routing
them are as follows:
The following preclears are LOGGED IN AND INVOICED 0 UT:
I Preclears being routed for a free AR C Break session by the ARC
Break Reg.
The preclear is logged in by Qual I and I and routed to the ARC
Break Auditor. After the session, the ARC Break Auditor writes up a
chit stating how long the session was and sends with person on
routing form to Qual I and 1. Qual I and I invoices the person out
No Charge after the pc has been to the Pc Examiner and the routing
form signed by the ARC Break Auditor, and routes back to the
Registrar for sign-up for a major service.
If a person ever volunteers that he wants to pay for the
session, accept the money. Never ask for money from a person who
has had an ARC Break session. It would be a commendable for a
person to volunteer that he or she wished to pay for the session.
Qual I and I should then write up a commendable chit to the ARC
Break auditor concerned, for a well handled situation.
2. Preclears wanting to buy or renew Memberships.
These are logged in, invoiced for the Membership, the money
collected and routed to C & A for their Membership Card.
3. Very occasionally, the ARC Break Auditor could be used to
handle an urgent Assist for physical injury.
The person is quickly logged in by Qual I and I and routed
direct to the ARC Break Auditor for handling. After the session,
the ARC Break Auditor writes up a chit stating how long the session
was and sends to Qual I and I with the person. Qual I and I
invoices, collects the money and routes the person to the Ethics
Officer for interview.
In some cases, the person may require fast medical attention
prior to the Assist. In this instance, the person is logged in,
routed to the MO, who handles the first aid needed and routes
direct to the ARC Break Auditor for handling. He attaches his chit
for any costs involved to the routing form for Qual I and I to
include on the invoice when the person has had the Assist.
The following preclears are LOGGED IN and MAY BE LOGGED OUT OR
INVOICED OUT, according to Dir Correction or Qual See Instructions:
I . Preclears routed to Qual who have flunked the Key Questions
check at Success.
They are logged in by Qual I & I and routed to the Dir
Correction for interview. If the Dir Correction is not immediately
available, route to the Qual See.
Dir Correction interviews the preclear and finds out what he
can. He may at this point route the preclear for a free ARC Break
Session. If this is done, it is handled by Qual I and I as per (1)
above.
Dir Correction calls for the folder from Tech Services and may
decide to send the pc back to the HGC for case repair. In this
case, he writes up a chit to Qual I and I to route the preclear
back to the (c) of P.
Dir Correction also writes up the Cramming orders for the C/S,
Auditor, Pc Examiner, C & A.
109
2. Preclears being routed to Qual from the Registrar.
The pc is logged in and routed to the Dir Correction, who
interviews the pc The pc may be routed for a free ARC Break
session, and is handled by Qual I and I as per (1). Or the pc may
be routed back to the HGC or Ethics for further handling. The pc is
then logged out per Dir Correction handling orders.
Dir Correction calls for the pc folder and writes up the
necessary Cramming orders on the C/S, Auditor, Pc Examiner, C & A
and Success Off.
The following preclears are INVOICED IN and LOGGED OUT:
I Preclears being routed for Word Clearing Method One.
These pay in advance and no credit is extended. Qual I and I
must inspect a fully paid invoice or invoice and collect for the
service before routing to Qual Clearing Page for the service. They
are simply logged out on completion of the service.
The following preclears are LOGGED IN and LOGGED OUT
I Preclears wanting to see the Chaplain.
Qual I and I logs in and routes to Chaplain and logs out after
the person has seen the Chaplain.
The Chaplain reports any matters requiring handling to the
correct terminal. Ethics matters are reported to Ethics Officer and
any correction actions needed to the Dir Correction in writing.
The following preclears are ONLY LOGGED OUT.
I . pcs, for Declare?
The folder is brought to the Pc Examiner in advance of the pc by
a Folder Page. The Routing Form is placed on top of the folder.
Pc Examiner checks to see that the Grade or Rundown has been
correctly audited to EP, then requests a Tech Page to send the pc
to the Pc Examiner.
The Pc Examiner does the completion check and routes the
preclear to Qual I and 1, who logs the preclear out and routes to C
& A and Success.
If the Pc Examiner finds that the Grade or Rundown has not been
correctly run, he must write up an Out Tech chit and route the
folder to Dir Correction for handling. Dir Correction reviews the
folder and writes up any instructions, plus Cramming orders for the
C/S and Auditor, then returns the folder to Tech Services.
The following preclears are NEITHER LOGGED IN NOR OUT:
1. Preclears who come to see the Pc Examiner for their routine
end of session Pc Examiner check.
These preclears are technically still in the HGC and so are
neither logged in nor out. The Pc Examiner check at this point is a
Qual check on day by day service to report on session quality.
The Pc Examiner sends a chit to the Cramming Officer daily
reporting all Red Tag Pc Exam Forms to ensure that Cramming is done
on each and every flubbed session. This gives the Cramming Officer
a check to see that the C/S is ordering all flubbing auditors to
Cramming. In cases where this is not done, the Cramming Off calls
the Auditor and the C/S in for Cramming cycles.
2. Preclears who do not wish to attest to a Grade or Rundown at Pc
Examiner.
In this case, the Pc Examiner routes the folder to Dir
Correction, who writes up the Cramming orders on the Auditor and
C/S. The pc returns to the HGC.
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
110
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Qual I & I Issue IV
All Qual Hats
All Tech Hats Qual Lines Series 4
QEOS
TEOs
All staff
QUAL STAFF SERVICE LINES
The Correction Division provides a high degree of service to all
staff in an Organization.
The lines for staff in and out of Qual are as follows:
I . Staff members who are students or preclears in Div IV.
They are handled as per student and preclear routings in Qual
Lines Series Nos. 2 and 3.
Contracted staff are charged 50% for Cramming. The Cramming
charge is immediately collectible.
Word Clearing Method One is invoiced at No Charge to contracted
staff by Qual I and 1.
Uncontracted staff pay full price for Cramming and all Qual
services, and all moneys are immediately collectible.
2. Staff members who want first aid or, medical service.
They are routed to Qual I and I on a routing form via the Ethics
Officer, logged in and routed to the MO.
Medical Officer advises of any costs involved and Qual I and I
invoices out for the costs and collects or debits the person.
3. Staff members who are routing in from the Staff Ratting
College for a Staff Status exam or other staff exam, who pass the
exam.
These are logged in by Qual I and I and logged out.
4. Staff members who route in for a Staff Status or other staff
exam, who flunk the exam.
These are logged in by Qual I and I and invoiced out on a No
Charge invoice. Cramming writes the usual chit containing the time
in hours and minutes in Cramming. This is written on the No Charge
invoice.
If at any time a person should break his contract, the moneys
for the No Charge staff training in Cramming become payable and are
added to the Freeloader bill.
5. Staff members who route in to Cramming, as ordered by their
senior, senior Org Execs or anyone in Qual.
These are simply logged in and invoiced out No Charge, as per 4
above.
6. Staff members who do not require to log in or out:
Staff going to see STO, Personnel Programmer, Chaplain, Staff
Librarian, Staff Information Officer.
These do not require to be logged in or out, as they are regular
org service lines and maintain their own logging systems.
7. Staff members for Word Clearing Method 2 or Post Purpose
Clearing in Dept 13.
These are logged in and routed to Qual Clearing Page, who
schedules for service. Qual Clearing Page writes up a chit on how
many hours and minutes of Word Clearing and Post Purpose Clearing
were delivered and Qual I and I invoices the staff member at No
Charge, and writing the cost on the invoice, as per 4 above.
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Issue V
Remimeo
Qual I and I
All Qual Hats
All Tech Hats
QEOs
TEOs
Qual Lines Series 5
QUAL TECHNICAL LINES
There are several purely technical lines between the Technical
and Correction Divisions which need to be stated, as follows:
I STAFF PC FOLDER LINE FROM THE HGC TO STAFF CIS
Folders travel direct from Tech Services to the Staff CIS. Tech
Pages collect and deliver the folders.
2. SENIOR CIS FOLDER LINE FROM THE HGC
Senior CIS in Qual, directly under the Qual See (Qua] See wears
this hat if there is no single hatted Senior CIS in the org), gets
all Red Tag folders for the day, plus any other folders the Tech
CIS is having trouble with and wants assistance on, or any other
folder that the Senior CIS wants to see.
Tech CIS sees the Red Tag folders first, then has his Folder
Page deliver these to the Senior CIS.
Senior CIS also gets a daily list of Red Tag folders from the PC
Examiner as a double check on the folders sent from the HGC.
Senior C/S writes up any Cramming orders not covered or issued
by the Div IV CIS and crams the Div IV CIS where needed.
3. INTERNE AND HGC A AUDITOR ROUTINGS:
Internes and HGC Auditors have direct lines into the Tech
Division and do not pass through Qual I and I in the course of
their daily training or Cramming cycles.
Qua] Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
112
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 DECEMBER 1971
Remimeo Issue VI
Qual I & I
All Qual Hats Qual Lines Series 6
QEOs
QUAL INTERVIEW AND INVOICE OFFICER
LINES - ADMINISTRATION
There are certain admin actions which need to be done in order
to keep the lines in in Qual.
Qual I and I should put up a notice in her area listing the paid
services of Qual and their prices.
INVOICING
A. Writing an Invoice
In invoicing, the following must be written on the invoice:
A. The person's name (in capitals).
B. The date and time of day.
C. The service taken.
D. The amount of time of the service.
E. The cost of the service.
F. Debit or Credit, as applicable.
G. Get the person to sign the invoice on the machine. B. Routing
of Invoice Copies
There are five copies of invoices currently in use. They are
routed as follows:
A. The top copy goes to the person.
B. The second copy is retained by Qual I and I for stat and
records purposes.
C. The third and fourth copies, plus the money collected for the
day, are hand delivered to the Dir Income or FBO at the end of each
day.
D. The fifth copy is left in the machine until 2 pm each
Thursday, when the week's unbroken copies are torn off and hand
routed to the Dir Income.
The new statistic for the Qual I and I is: Total amount of money
collected for the week by reason of Qual Services or Memberships.
Qual I and I also collects all invoices for Membership moneys
collected by Dept 6, 7 or Public Division personnel for inclusion
in the statistic.
It is true that credit is granted for Qual services (except Word
Clearing Method 1) but every effort should be made to COLLECT for
these services, as it is found that refusal to pay is a direct
indicator that the person has not been handled.
If the person comes back and pays for the service within one
week of the service, it is countable in the Qual I and I statistic.
Credit collections of Qual moneys are not countable on the Qual
statistic, if more than one week old.
If the Dir Correction pulls the person in fast and sees that he
is fully handled and the person now pays in full or part for Qual
services, this money is countable in the statistic. So Qual I and I
has a vested interest by reason of statistic and being a Qual staff
member, in seeing that all persons are fully handled and do attain
full results.
Qual I and I must report in writing to Dir Correction any person
who does not pay for their service.
It will be very easy for Qual I and I to get his statistic up.
All he has to do is get Qual services paid for and collect lots and
lots of Membership moneys.
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
113
PURPOSE
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
(From HCO Policy Letter of 27 November 1959,
Key to the Organizational Chart of the Founding
Church of Scientology of Washington DC]
To validate for full results every certificate ever issued in
Dianetics and Scientology. To be the final authority on any
certificates to be issued. To be the final authority on Clear
certification.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jw.rd Copyright(c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED
[Note: The full Policy Letter is given in Volume 7, page 138.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 JULY 1965
[Excerpt]
Remimeo
All Qual Hats
DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS
The prime purpose of the Department of Examinations and all its
sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON ENSURE THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE
ORGANIZATION ARE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT, THAT STUDENTS AND
PRECLEARS ARE WITHOUT FLAW FOR THEIR SKILL OR STATE WHEN PASSED AND
THAT ANY TECHNICAL DEFICIENCY OF ORG PERSONNEL IS REPORTED AND
HANDLED SO THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE ORGANIZATION CONTINUE
TO BE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT."
IT MUST BE KEPT IN MIND THAT THE PRODUCT OF THE ORGANIZATION IS
NOT SCIENTOLOGISTS, BUT CONDITIONS CHANGED BY SCIENTOLOGY.
THEREFORE THE ABILITY OF THE AUDITOR TO CHANGE CONDITIONS IN
PRECLEARS AND THE ABILITY OF THE PRECLEAR OR CLEAR TO CHANGE
CONDITIONS ALONG THE DYNAMICS ARE THE ONLY CONCERN OF THE
DEPARTMENT OF EXAMINATIONS.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes relating to
this department were intended to assist it and expedite the
carrying out of its purpose. Therefore no order, rule, regulation,
policy or route may be interpreted to swerve the Department of
Examinations from its prime purpose, which is paramount in all its
activities. Its policies and routes exist to carry out its prime
purpose and for no other reason.
The integrity of Scientology and its hope for beings in this
Universe are entrusted to the Department of Examinations.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 31 July
1965, Purposes Of
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED the Qualifications Division. A complete copy
appears on page
1.1
114
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
CERTIFICATION BOARD
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Effective for first class or processees
concluding after January, 195 1
The Certification Board of a certified auditors' school has as
its chief responsibility the certifying of students of the school.
As such it is one of the most responsible and trustworthy posts of
the Foundation and can be manned only by the most trustworthy
personnel.
The Board is headed by the Chief Examiner. He is the only
full-time member of the Board. He may request, to aid him in
check-running and examining students, auditors from the Processing
Units or from the Clearing Service but he must not overstrain
either organization. He is not to use, for check runs, instructing
auditors from the school. It is expected that the Chief Examiner
deliver, himself, examinations to the students. And it is not
expected that he certify anyone unless he himself has interviewed
the person.
The Board has a dual purpose, First, it has in its charge the
certification of students and second it has in its charge the
awards given to instructing auditors and to auditors in the
processing units.
For 4- week Students
The student is expected to receive an oral and a written
examination and a check on his auditing skill as measured by his
actual performance in the 4th week on his intensive assigned
preclear. Should the student pass these successfully, the
Certification Board awards him a temporary certification as a
Dianetic Auditor. This certificate is lettered exactly like the
final certificate but it has no engraving on the border and it has
printed diagonally across it in outlined letters, TEMPORARY
CERTIFICATE EXPIRES - (date to be written in, date to be six months
from the date of issue). The temporary certificate is conditional
upon the temporary auditor's delivering to the Board of
Certification, by mail or otherwise, completely satisfactory
evidence as to his having released a mental aberration or a
psychosomatic illness of some magnitude. This evidence must be in
the nature of validation material and its protocol is severe. For
the mental aberration case, psychometry must be given to the
temporary auditor's preclear before and after, and the psychometry
must. be of a kind as to bear the most rigid examination. For the
psychosomatic illness before and after medical examinations must be
made with complete laboratory tests and X-rays where indicated.
Such evidence must be signed by a doctor. The evidence, further,
must be in compact form and yet must give the Dianetic history of
the case.
The Board of Certification gives to each temporary auditor a
printed or mimeographed form explaining exactly what is wanted by
the Board before it awards permanent certification. The Board makes
it known to the temporary auditor that the Foundation will furnish
him with both preclears and testing service should he wish to
remain at the Foundation and complete his work for permanent
certification there, a charge being made to the certified auditor
for such service.
For 6-week Students
The standard certifying course of the Foundation schools is six
weeks in duration. During this period the student will have
processed three (3) persons, all of them on an intensive basis.
Certification of such students can be based on observation of them
in actual auditing sessions, on the psychometry of their preclears
and upon oral and written examinations. The straight check-run
becomes unnecessary if the Chief Examiner observes them while they
are actually auditing.
Permanent certification is awarded by the Chief Examiner. The
certificate is handed out at the conclusion of training, if
awarded.
In accordance with the organizational memorandum about awards,
the Board of Certification informs the administrator concerning the
number of students who have been certified each week and the name
of their instructor. Further, the Board of Certification reviews
the psychometry of all persons processed by the processing unit and
sends a statement to the administrator concerning those who, in the
period between the before and the after psychometry, increased in
their total intelligence factors 25 points, as registered by the
California Test for Mental Maturity or a corresponding rise in a
similar test and the name of the auditor who did the processing.
This list of certifications of temporary auditors shall each week
contain the names of all the students in the class with those
temporarily certified designated and shall be in
115
such form as to be conspicuously posted by the administrator.
The processing list shall likewise contain the names or reference
numbers of all those processed and those who attained the rise in
total factors and the name or names of the auditors processing
them, so that it can be posted. The Board of Certification is held
responsible if the posting does not take place. In special cases of
processing, where a processee is processed for more than one week,
the Board adjudicates the award of five dollars for each temporary
certification and ten dollars for each 25 point gain processee.
As it can be seen, considerable trust is placed in the Chief
Examiner, for the post is susceptible of favoritism. Failure of
trust in this post could do the Foundation and Dianetics enormous
harm. The Chief Examiner is enjoined to report all persuasions of
breach of trust immediately to the office of the president.
Additional duties of the Board of Certification may be given to
it from time to time.
Such an additional duty is the assistance called for from it by
the memorandum on staff grading wherein the Board is a court of
appeal for under and over grading by the administrator.
Another additional duty, consequent to the intimacy of the Board
with the quality of the instruction shall consist of keeping the
Director of Training informed as to the weak points of his
instructors as represented by the examinations. The Board may also
advise new methods of instruction to the Director of Training. The
Board may also devise and advise the office of the president of
such new methods of training.
The Board exists to raise and to maintain at a high level the
standards of certified auditors. This is its central purpose. It
may recall to it already certified auditors for examination and may
recommend suspensions of their certificates but only after the
matter has gone through the Board of Ethics and Standards.
Precision in keeping appointments is an essence of the operation
of the Board. It should never fail to have appointments fairly
kept. And whenever it refuses certification to a student it must
always make a precise appointment for reexamination of that student
at some future date, advising that student of exactly why he was
not certified but advising him in such a way as to retain good
public relations for the Foundation.
The Board of Certification may have appear before it auditors
who have not attended the school but who have learned auditing in
the field and who wish to be certified. Such examinations shall not
be turned down. A charge of $35 shall be made of the non-school
auditor to cover costs of his examination and certification. The
examination given to the nonschool auditor shall be the same in
every way as that given to the school auditor. The nonschool
auditor shall be awarded a temporary certification and shall have
the same requirements made of him as are made of the school
auditor.
LRH:ma.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Typed: December 12, 1950
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I OCTOBER 1958
Full Distribution [Excerpt]
Not Confidential
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
We must now recognize that we are training Earth's
mental-spiritual practitioners of tomorrow. Therefore:
Hereinafter, all examinations for certificates will be conducted
by HCO Boards of Review only.
General Qualifications and prerequisites for all certificates
and degrees worldwide: No candidate for enrollment or examination
may be debarred by reason of race, colour, creed, nationality,
ideology, age, mental condition, language, former training or
social condition.
L. RON HUBBARD
[The remainder of this Policy Letter gave qualification
requirements for HPA/HCA, HCS/BScn and HCS/DScn. A complete copy is
in Volume 4, page 269.1
116
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 NOVEMBER 1958
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW-FUNCTION AND PRACTICE
The HCO Board of Review is often composed of one or two part
time staff auditors working on off hours for HCO and in and under
control of HCO or one or more full time expert Scientologists who
have served as staff auditors and instructors and who now work full
time for HCO.
The basis of HCO Board of Review authority lies in the basic
functions of HCO. These are Ethics, Technology and Awards. Ethics
and Technology are otherwise cared for than by the HCO Board of
Review. Awards are wholly the function of the HCO Board of Review.
The HCO is the holder of all copyrights, trademarks, registered
marks and the rights of all materials of Dianetics and Scientology.
Further, HCO holds in trust the signature "L. Ron Hubbard,
Founder". This signature is the only thing which makes a
certificate valid. This is based on the precedent that the
originator of a science has the right to train persons in it and
the only original right to sign certificates saying so.
No corporation, company, association or Foundation has ever been
given the right to sign or issue Dianetics and Scientology awards.
The only thing which makes these certificates valid is the
signature. The Association, etc, name has no value in the public
eye except as signed by LRH. If LRH stopped signing an
organization's certificates tomorrow that organization could no
longer issue awards of skill and the matter would be upheld in
court by reason of trademarks, registered marks and copyrights.
Therefore the authority wielded by the HCO Board of Review is
quite real. Its stable datum is "We guarantee to LRH that his
signature attests proper training and processing". Administratively
when the HCO Board of Review passes a student for a level of skill
or a pc for clear, it is saying, in effect, to LRH "You can safely
sign" and to the public, "You can trust the person who holds this
award".
The HCO Board of Review, like all the HCO, is a natural rather
than arbitrary outgrowth of our needs. Only where we did not have
proper award handling by an agency like the HCO Board of Review
have we fallen down on this. Therefore, we don't fall down on it
any more. We have an HCO Board of Review that can examine and say,
"Ron, you can safely sign".
It is also an old principle that the people who train cannot
also examine. Therefore an Academy or a HASI or another
organization enfranchised by the HCO (which grants all actual
rights to use materials to such organizations in the first place)
has no right to examine. It can only train to the level specified
by HCO. It is then up to the HCO through its HCO Board of Review to
examine and see if the standard is met. If it is, the HCO Board of
Review says "Ron, you can safely sign" and gives LRH the
certificate to be signed. The training agency cannot do more than
train. It cannot order a student to more processing. It can only
collect all the class work, papers, lessons and indicate that the
student is ready for examination. It sends the papers to HCO Board
of Review. If these papers are complete, (indicated by a check list
prepared by HCO) HCO then calls for the student directly, not via
the Academy, and administers oral exams where feasible and written
exams always. What HCO Board of Review does to guarantee that the
requirements as laid down in HCO Bulletins or Policy Letters have
been met and that the person can perform the required skills is its
own business. If the papers are not complete, HCO Board of Review
returns them to the training agency pointing out the discrepancies.
When the training agency returns these, then the above procedure is
followed-having the student in.
117
If the student passes, HCO Board of Review prepares an
authorized certificate with the student's name and presents it to
LRH on HCO Comm lines, for the signature "L. Ron Hubbard, Founder".
No written examination for any one grade may be repeated within
120 days of the last examination. Thus a student who flunks an HCO
Board of Review exam cannot be reexamined for 120 days. There is no
limit to the number of examinations he can have. And the failure of
a training agency to have the papers complete (HCO Board of Review
having to send them back) does not invoke the 120 day clause.
In examining the HCO Board of Review should be real, not
pedantic. Good TRs, good command of processes for the level, good
axioms and theory should pass a student. But to establish these HCO
Board of Review needn't examine all day and all night. If the
student flunks a few TRs, why go on? He's dead if he ever tries to
audit. Why pass him or even examine further?
In case of failure, the HCO Board of Review may advise
processing or more training but may not say where the training or
processing. is to be taken or how much it will cost. These items
are all outside of HCO Board of Review purview.
On testing for clear, the same principles are followed. If the
pc reads wrong on the meter, why go on to an OCA or APA or IQ test?
If HCO Board of Review says it's a flunk, that's usually that.
The only appeal is to HCO See to LRH and its doubtful if this will
produce any change of decision.
When the person has passed his exam, HCO makes up the
certificate for him, forwards it to LRH and sends it back to the
original HCO Board of Review giving the exam. This HCO Board of
Review gives the certificate straight to the student, not via a
training agency or corporation.
The wording on all certificates is specified by HCO main
headquarters. They can be locally printed but only on okay from
LRH.
An HAS certificate doesn't pass through HCO Board of Review, but
all others do.
It is interesting that the signature of L. Ron Hubbard, Founder
on certificates has been deeded over to HCO and "after demise" will
still remain, but in seal form, the validating signature on a
certificate. Thus these various lines of awarding will not be
disrupted and the institution of HCO and HCO Board of Review are
here to stay for a long, long while.
HCO Boards of Review are necessary in every area where training
is done. They can only exist where HCO has enfranchised the local
operation with exact rights to the materials of Dianetics and
Scientology.
HCO Board of Review is established by written appointment by
LRH. It has existed on verbal consent in the past but written
appointment is now necessary.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.eden
118
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 FEBRUARY 1959
Issued in Washington
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW DUTIES
Academies are poorly informed of HCO Board of Review duties and
responsibilities.
It is the added responsibility of the HCO Board of Review
anywhere to educate the Academy Personnel into functions and
responsibilities of HCO Bd of Review and how it differs from the
Academy.
CERTIFICATE ROUTING
Student hands or mails all papers, reports, etc, to Academy
Administrator (or Extension Course Director as indicated).
All student folders are accompanied by a check sheet listing all
items needed for certificate.
When total folder is collected to the level of certification,
Acad Admin (Certification) sends complete folder to HCO Bd of
Review.
HCO Bd of Review okays student for certification, (or refuses in
which case Acad Admin completes folder again and resubmits) and
sends folder back with its check sheet initialed by HCO Bd of
Review.
Acad Admin (Certification) then has certificate prepared.
Certificate with completed check sheet is sent to LRH Founder
for signature. Acad Admin holds the folder itself.
LRH Founder signs certificate (or refuses at which time whole
process is repeated) and returns to Acad Admin (Certification).
The HCO Bd of Review is often composed of one or two part time
staff auditors working on off hours for HCO and in and under
control of HCO or one or more full time expert Scientologists who
have served as staff auditors and instructors and who work full
time for HCO.
The basis of HCO Bd of Review authority lies in the basic
functions of HCO. These are Ethics, Technology and Awards. Ethics
and Technology are otherwise cared for than by the HCO Bd of
Review. Awards are wholly the function of the HCO Bd of Review.
No corporation, company, association or foundation has ever been
given the right to sign or issue Dianetics and Scientology awards.
The only thing which makes these certificates valid is the
signature. The association, etc, name has no value in the public
eye except as signed by LRH. If LRH stopped signing an
organization's certificates tomorrow that organization could no
longer issue awards of skill and the matter would be upheld in
court by reason of trademarks, registered marks and copyrights.
Therefore the authority wielded by the HCO Bd of Review is quite
real. Its stable datum is "We guarantee to LRH that his signature
attests proper training and processing". Administratively when the
HCO Bd of Review passes a student for a level of skill or a pc for
clear, it is saying, in effect, to LRH, "You can safely sign" and
to the public, "You can trust the person who holds this award".
119
It is also an old principle that the people who train cannot
also examine. Therefore an Academy or a HASI or another
organization enfranchised by the HCO (which grants all actual
rights to use materials to such organisations in the first place)
has no right to examine. It can only train to the level specified
by HCO. It is then up to the HCO through its HCO Bd of Review to
examine and see if the standard is met.
If it is, the HCO Bd of Review says "Ron, you can safely sign"
and gives LRH the certificate to be signed. The training agency
cannot do more than train. It cannot order a student to more
processing. It can only collect all the class work, papers, lessons
and indicate that the student is ready for examination. It sends
the papers to HCO Bd of Review. If these papers are complete,
(indicated by a check list prepared by HCO) HCO then calls for the
student directly, not via the Academy, and administersoral exams
where feasible and written exams always. What HCO Bd of Review does
to guarantee that the requirements as laid down in the HCO
Bulletins or Policy Letters have been met and that the person can
perform the required skills is its own business. If the papers are
not complete, HCO Bd of Review returns them to the training agency
pointing out the discrepancies. When the training agency returns
these, then the above procedure is followed-having the student in.
If the student passes, HCO Bd of Review prepares an authorized
certificate with the student's name and presents it to LRH on HCO
Comm Line, for the signature of "L. Ron Hubbard, Founder".
No written examination for any one grade may be repeated within
120 days of the last examination. Thus a student who flunks an HCO
Bd of Review exam cannot be re-examined for 120 days. There is no
limit to the number of examinations he can have. And the failure of
a training agency to have the papers complete (HCO Bd of Review
having to send them back) does not invoke the 120 days clause.
In examining the HCO Bd of Review should be real, not pedantic.
Good TRs, good command of processes for the level, good axioms and
theory should pass a student. But to establish these HCO Bd of
Review needn't examine all day and all night. If the student flunks
a few TRs, why go on? He's dead if he ever tries to audit. Why pass
him or even examine further?
In case of failure, the HCO Bd of Review may advise processing
or more training but may not say where the training or processing
is to be taken or how much it will cost. These items are all
outside of HCO Bd of Review purview.
If HCO Bd of Review says it's a flunk, that's usually that. The
only appeal is through HCO See to LRH and it's doubtful if this
will produce any change of decision.
An HAS certificate doesn't pass through HCO Bd of Review, but
all others do.
HCO Bd of Review is established by written appointment by LRH.
It has existed on verbal consent in the past, but written
appointment is now necessary.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.lh.cden Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
120
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 APRIL 1959
To all Academies
FINAL HPA EXAM
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
NOTE TO EXAMINER
This final exam is based on the materials of Scientology; the
end goal of its administration is to discover whether the
examinee's command of the theory and practice of the subject is
sufficiently professional in caliber for us to turn him loose on
cases that an HPA level auditor could be expected to handle
successfully, in confidence that he will have more successes than
failures. The exam comprises two parts: oral, designed to test the
student's practical command of the elements of auditing, and
written, designed to test his grasp of and ability to apply theory
to livingness.
The marks on the oral exam are FAILED, POOR, FAIR, GOOD,
EXCELLENT. The examiner must himself be an excellent auditor. We
want on the part of the student a demonstration of good ARC, an
impression of good order and precise handling of the pc and the
MEST of the session and session environment; a good auditing
presence and certainty of attitude with regard to processes, the
subject and the pc; and a good knowledge of and application of some
basic process commands and the TRs. A merely mechanical, rote
handling of these would be marked POOR or lower. A student scoring
POOR or lower should not be passed under any circumstances, no
matter how well he does on the theory section. THE ORAL EXAM COUNTS
FOR 60% OF THE FINAL GRADE.
The marks on the written exam are numerical, total 100. Passing
is 75%. It is possible for a student to miss the first three
questions (comprising the Logics, Pre-Logics, and Axioms)
completely, and by scoring perfectly on the remainder of the
written test to get a barely passing mark. There is some emphasis
on ingenuity and the ability actually to put Scientology data into
application; a student having data by rote with no understanding,
or with a low understanding of the subject would fail it miserably.
Conversely, someone with an understanding of the subject should
pass it well. THE WRITTEN EXAM COUNTS FOR 40% OF THE FINAL GRADE.
(The numbers in parenthesis, brackets, following the question
indicate the number of points scored for a perfect answer of that
question. Imperfect answers receive partial credit insofar as they
are to any degree correct.)
It is not possible to cover the whole of Scientology
exhaustively in one examination of this length; consequently, the
questions have been drawn up rather as a representative sampling
whose handling will give us a fair idea of the student's ability
and state of ARC with the subject and its terminals.
PART A: ORAL EXAM-PRACTICE-COUNTS 60% TOWARD FINAL MARK
1. Have examinee start and end an auditing session. PURPOSE: To
judge smooth handling of two-way communication with a pc.
2. Have EX handle an ARC break; a cognition; an origination.
3. Have EX deliver the auditing commands of Tone 40 8-C with
intention.
4. Have EX deliberately break one item of the Auditor's Code and
handle the resulting ARC break smoothly and well. Examinee must
announce which item of code he is going to break to examiner, then
proceed to violate that exact item, and repair break.
5. Have EX give, with good maintenance of applicable TRs, the
exact auditing commands of CCH 1,2,3,4 with proper acks. (CCH 1,2
Tone 40-3,4, formal)
121
The examiner will judge the ability of the examinee to actually
audit by scoring
him on his command of the environment and session and pc; his
certainty of attitude;
use of the TRs; AP - C with the pc and auditing presence in
general. Grades are
EXCELLENT, GOOD, FAIR, POOR, FAILED.
PART B: WRITTEN EXAM-THEORY-COUNTS 40% OF FINAL
I . Write out in full one (1) of the Pre-Logics in its exact
Scientology wording. Paraphrase it in your own words. Give an
example of it in action. (3)
2. Write out in full two (2) Logics. Then put each in your own
words and give an example of each, relating it to life. (6)
3. Write out in full five Scientology Axioms. Then restate each
in your own words. Then give one example of a situation in life
which illustrates the working of each axiom (one example per
Axiom).
4. Define EVALUATION and give an example of it. (3)
5. Define INVALIDATION and give an example of it. (3)
6. Define SCIENTOLOGY ENGRAM and give an example of it. (3)
7. Define SECONDARY and give an example of one. (3)
8. Define LOCK and give an example of one. (3)
9. Explain briefly (c) & A. Give an example of an auditor's (c)
& Aing with a pc (3)
10. Explain briefly and accurately why entering order into a
case brings about a flyingoff of confusion. (3)
11. Explain briefly why an auditor should be precise, accurate
and overt in his dealings with a pc (3)
12. What is the realest thing to you in Scientology since you
encountered this subject? How did it become real to you? (3)
13. Give an example of some life activity on that part of
people. Now, name the Dynamics which might apply to this example,
showing in each instance why each mentioned dynamic applies to it.
(3)
14. Locate someone you know on the KNOW-TO-MYSTERY scale.
Explain why this person belongs where your estimation places him.
In other words, what can you observe about him that leads you to
place him where you do? (3)
15. What action with regard to children can you expect of a
person at 1.5? What precisely will a 1. 1 do with a communication
you have asked him to forward to another? ' What precisely will a
person at 2.3 do if given a post of responsibility in an
organization? (3)
16. Write out a statement that would be effective if you were to
make it to a person who resonated on the eatingness band to whom
you were trying to sell an automobile.
Write out a statement that would attract the attention of a
person who resonated at mystery whom you were trying to interest in
Scientology. (3)
17. Given a person low on the effect scale, what would his
probable reaction be on hearing that Russia had dropped an atomic
bomb on Iran, killing 300,000 people? What would the probable
reaction of this person be on scratching himself while shaving?
Explain your answers in terms of the effect scale. (3)
18. What is a second postulate? Give an example from life. (3)
19. Which comes first, remembering or forgetting? Why? (3)
122
20. Why is it necessary to handle a pc's present-time problem?
Explain in terms of attention, present-time environment, auditing
environment, and the communications formula. (4)
21. Is duplication really necessary? Answer yes or no, and
justify your answer in terms of communication. (3)
22. Define ABERRATION in your own words. When is an action on
the part of a person to be considered aberrated? (3)
23. In terms of solutions and the dynamics, formulate a simple
method which you could use to estimate an individual's probable
chances of success in a given enterprise. (2)
24. What would you do if you were auditing a pc on a
thinkingness process and you didn't know just how he was executing
the auditing command? (2)
25. Why should the detailed investigation of a pc's originations
be confined to research? (2)
26. How does a VALENCE differ from a deliberately mocked-up
beingness? (2)
27. In terms of the reality scale what phenomena would you
expect to observe on the part of a child who had been given a new
bicycle as he grow progressively familiar with it? (3)
28. How does having something differ from holding a deed of
title to it? (3)
29. If you were to instruct an HPA course, what item of
Scientology data would you concentrate on as being the most
important for your students to understand? Why? (2)
30. What part of your present life could you bring more order
to? How could you go about this? (2)
LRH:mp.cden L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I OCTOBER 1960
CenOCon
CASE ASSESSMENTS FOR STUDENTS
It sometimes happens that a student can graduate from an HPA/HCA
course and pass the exam, and yet fail in the field on account of a
low case level or poor subjective reality on Scientology.
To prevent this, it is now policy that after an HPA/HCA student
has passed the HCO Board of Review examination, and before a
certificate is issued, he shall be required to have from the HCO
Board of Review a case assessment. If it is found that their case
is in poor shape, or that they have little subjective reality on
Scientology, they must be ordered to processing before their
certificate can be issued.
LRH:js.rd Issued by: Peter Hemery
Copyright (c) 1960 HCO Secretary WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
123
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1961
(Issue II)
HCO Secs
Please have an adequate number of these run off. Use to give
Permanent Staff
Exams. No Permanent Staff Status is valid unless this exam has been
passed.
Passing grade is 85%. The Pattern of a Central Org HCO Policy
Letter may not be
in hand while the exam is being done.
PERMANENT STAFF EXAM
"PATTERN OF A CENTRAL ORGANIZATION"
PART ONE
I . What are the duties of an HCO Area Office?
2. What has HCO Area the power to do?
3. What does HCO Board of Review do?
4. What is the purpose and duty of HCO Continental?
5. What is the Assoc See in a Central Organization for?
6. Who expedites Assoc See's communications?
7. What are the Assoc See's duties?
8. What are the main responsibilities of an Assoc See?
9. What are the two Divisions in a Central Organization?
10. Name the three departments which fall under each Division.
11. What is the pc Foundation?
12. What is the Test section and what is its purpose?
13. What is the purpose of a pc Course?
14. What is the purpose of a HAS Co-Audit?
15. Give another name for HAS Co-Audit?
16. How does a pc Foundation fail?
17. What happens when the pc Foundation does fail?
18. Who is the most responsible person for solvency in a Central
Org next to the Assoc See?
19. Who heads the Academy of Scientology?
20. What is the Academy responsible for?
21. Name the Courses taught in the Academy.
22. What makes the Academy?
23. How often does enrolling take place for an HPA course?
24. What is the Practical Course? And how does this differ from a
professional course?
25. What are the results of a poorly run Academy?
26. What does HGC stand for?
27. Who heads the HGC and what cases fall under her control?
28. Who does the administration for (c) of P?
29. How often does the (c) of P interview HGC cases and why?
30. What happens when (c) of P does admin work or audits a preclear?
31. How good must HGC quality be?
32. Which run-down must a staff auditor use and what must he
produce?
33. Who heads the Dept of Promotion and Registration in the largest
of Central Orgs?
34. Otherwise, who heads its two sections?
35. What does the personal Registration section do?
36. What should all Registrars call themselves for public purposes?
37. What is the difference between a Chief Registrar and pc and
Letter Registrar as regards income?
38. Where do Personal Registrars look for prospects when prospects
seem too few?
124 39. Who does the final accepting of applicants
for training and processing?
40. What is the procedure after a person is signed up by the
Personal Registrar for processing?
41. Who should always interview a student or preclear after
training or processing and why?
42. What is the motto of the Personal Registrar?
43. What is the rule as regards Registrars acceptance of money and
why?
44. What should be done when a Registrar is dissatisfied with
results?
45. What do the Letter Registrar and Assistants do?
46. What hats fall under the Letter Registrar?
47. Which people have a file folder in C/F?
48. How are files in CF divided?
49. Which of these does the magazine go to?
50. What should go into CF files?
51. What is the purpose of the address unit?
52. Why should address in charge receive a copy of all invoices?
53. What unit issues HAS Certificates and Memberships?
54. Which is better - volume or quality of letters?
55. Who heals, ARC Breaks and how are ARC Breaks prevented?
56. What is the procedure when personal Registration wants a file
from C/F?
57. What method is used when any other dept wants files?
58. What is Dir Material responsible for?
59. What dept does all purchasing for the Organization?
60. Whose approval is needed before an item can be purchased?
61. If an item is already approved and Material Dept sees danger in
buying it, what does he do?
62. Next to purchasing, which is the next biggest potential upset
in the Material Dept?
63. Who heads Dept of Accounts and what is the purpose of this
Dept?
64. Explain briefly what a Scientology Accounts System is?
65. What are the four sets of files used in the Accounts System?
66. How is a staff member paid? by cash or by cheque?
67. Does the Accounts Dept keep ledgers, journals, etc?
68. What weekly Accounts sheet is shown on the Staff Bulletin
Board each week?
69. How many report forms are due from each Dept every week?
70. What Technical form is submitted by Students? What technical
form is submitted by Staff Auditors?
71. If you needed to know any policy or more about any department
or your post, where would you find it?
72. How should a staff member be judged and how should he not be
judged?
73. What is a good way of getting people in?
74. When free weeks are demanded, what line has broken down and
what does this mean?
75. When should a person not be taken on as Dept Head and when
should a person not be taken on as a staff auditor?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ln.js.cden
Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
125
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 APRIL 1961
Cen Orgs
HCO Secs
Assoc Secs
Ds of P
Do not Remimeo EXAMINATIONS OF ACADEMY STUDENTS
TO BE DONE BY DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING
HCO herewith delegates its examination functions of HASI Academy
students to the Director of Processing, and whatever auditors the
Director of Processing may assign to assist.
This means that the HCO Board of Review functions are delegated
to the Director of Processing.
HCO Area Secretary or Continental Secretary may at any time
re-examine any student, but unless re-examination is undertaken the
examination of the Director of Processing, or his or her staff,
shall be final. In the event of re-examination the examination
given directly by HCO shall be final.
Irrespective of the curriculum taught in the Academy at the
level of HPA/HCA, the examination of anyone for an HPA/HCA
examination shall cover only and precisely the following points:
ORAL:
The student candidate for HPA/HCA shall be orally examined on
each of the following points:
Communication Course TRs. Upper Indoc TRs. Knowledge of the
E-Meter. Knowledge of the CCHs 1 to 4, and their proper use.
WRITTEN:
Knowledge of the Model Session. Knowledge of each basic process
used in the rudiments. Knowledge of the Axioms. Knowledge of the
Tone Scale.
knowledge of the six types of Processes.
Knowledge of an Assist. Knowledge of the Auditor's Code. Knowledge
of the Code of a Scientologist. Knowledge of the twenty or more
parts of the Anatomy of the Mind. Knowledge of HCO functions.
Knowledge of HASI functions.
HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST
or B. Sen. or Special Events Course or Permanent Staff Auditor.
ORAL:
Knowledge of the E-Meter. Knowledge of the TRs 0 to 10. Knowledge
of E-Meter Actions on Assessment.
WRITTEN,
Knowledge of the Model Session. Knowledge of Havingness and
Confront Processes. Knowledge of the Pre-Hav Scale. Knowledge of
SOP Goals
126
39. Who does the final accepting of applicants for training and
processing?
40. What is the procedure after a person is signed up by the
Personal Registrar for processing?
41. Who should always interview a student or preclear after
training or processing and why?
42. What is the motto of the Personal Registrar?
43. What is the rule as regards Registrars acceptance of money and
why?
44. What should be done when a Registrar is dissatisfied with
results?
45. What do the Letter Registrar and Assistants do?
46. What hats fall under the Letter Registrar?
47. Which people have a file folder in C/F?
48. How are files in CF divided?
49. Which of these does the magazine go to?
50. What should go into CF files?
51. What is the purpose of the address unit?
52. Why should address in charge receive a copy of all invoices?
53. What unit issues HAS Certificates and Memberships?
54. Which is better-volume or quality of letters?
55. Who heals ARC Breaks and how are ARC Breaks prevented?
56. What is the procedure when personal Registration wants a file
from C/F?
57. What method is used when any other dept wants files?
58. What is Dir Material responsible for?
59. What dept does all purchasing for the Organization?
60. Whose approval is needed before an item can be purchased?
61. If an item is already approved and Material Dept sees danger in
buying it, what does he do?
62. Next to purchasing, which is the next biggest potential upset
in the Material Dept?
63. Who heads Dept of Accounts and what is the purpose of this
Dept?
64. Explain briefly what a Scientology Accounts System is?
65. What are the four sets of files used in the Accounts System?
66. How is a staff member paid? by cash or by cheque?
67. Does the Accounts Dept keep ledgers, journals, etc?
68. What weekly Accounts sheet is shown on the Staff Bulletin
Board each week?
69. How many report forms are due from each Dept every week')
70. What Technical form is submitted by Students? What technical
form is submitted by Staff Auditors?
71. If you needed to know any policy or more about any department
or your post, where would you find it?
72. How should a staff member be judged and how should he not be
judged?
73. What is a good way of getting people in?
74. When free weeks are demanded, what line has broken down and
what does this mean?
75. When should a person not be taken on as Dept Head and when
should a person not be taken on as a staff auditor?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ln.is.cden
Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
125
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 APRIL 1961
Cen Orgs
HCO Secs
Assoc Secs
Ds of P
Do not Remimeo EXAMINATIONS OF ACADEMY STUDENTS
TO BE DONE BY DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING
HCO herewith delegates its examination functions of HASI Academy
students to the Director of Processing, and whatever auditors the
Director of Processing may assign to assist.
This means that the HCO Board of Review functions are delegated
to the Director of Processing,
HCO Area Secretary or Continental Secretary may at any time
re-examine any student, but unless re-examination is undertaken the
examination of the Director of Processing, or his or her staff,
shall be final. In the event of re-examination the examination
given directly by HCO shall be final.
Irrespective of the curriculum taught in the Academy at the
level of HPA/HCA, the examination of anyone for an HPA/HCA
examination shall cover only and precisely the following points:
ORAL:
The student candidate for HPA/HCA shall be orally examined on
each of the following points:
Communication Course TRs. Upper Indoc TRs. Knowledge of the
E-Meter. Knowledge of the CCHs I to 4, and their proper use.
WRITTEN.
Knowledge of the Model Session. Knowledge of each basic process
used in the rudiments. Knowledge of the Axioms. Knowledge of the
Tone Scale.
knowledge of the six types of Processes.
Knowledge of an Assist. Knowledge of the Auditor's Code. Knowledge
of the Code of a Scientologist. Knowledge of the twenty or more
parts of the Anatomy of the Mind. Knowledge of HCO functions.
Knowledge of HASI functions.
HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST
or B.Scn. or Special Events Course or Permanent Staff Auditor.
ORAL:
Knowledge of the E-Meter. Knowledge of the TRs 0 to 10 Knowledge of
E-Meter Actions on Assessment.
WRITTEN:
Knowledge of the Model Session. Knowledge of Havingness and
Confront Processes. Knowledge of the Pre-Hav Scale. Knowledge of
SOP Goals
126
Knowledge of definitions of Release and Clear Knowledge of the
Pre-Hav Scale. Knowledge of SOP Goals. Knowledge of definitions of
Release and Clear. Knowledge of Auditor's Code. Knowledge of the
Code of a Scientologist.
HUBBARD PRACTICAL SCIENTOLOGIST
Examination of Hubbard Practical Scientologist shall be done by
the Director of Training only, and the Certificate shall be issued
as a result of eight weeks training without repeat weeks and on a
mild examination.
However, the record must be kept in the Training Department and
if the person becomes a candidate of HPA/HCA level those weeks
flunked earlier must be repeated.
To obtain his HPA/HCA an HPS must complete his or her Extension
Course, must serve in the Central Organization in some capacity,
paid or unpaid, for upwards of three months and must show that he
can produce good results on cases.
If a Hubbard Practical Scientologist is to be employed as a
Staff Auditor, he must have passed the above examination given by
the Director of Processing, for the level of HPA/HCA.
Certification of Hubbard Practical Scientologist is done on the
representation of the Director of Training only.
CERTIFICATE PREPARATION
Certificates are still prepared and issued by HCO Area See, no
matter who does the examination.
The above assignment of HCO Board of Review functions to the
Director of Processing apply to student examinations only, and do
not apply to. Release and Clear examinations, and this delegation
shall be effective at once.
The examination outlined above shall be effective 15th June 196
1, and until that time students shall be examined on the technology
on which they have been trained. The Director of Training should
re-adjust his curriculum in ample time to meet the above
requirements.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.cden
Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
1
127
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 SEPTEMBER 1961
(Cancels HCO Policy Letter of 23 November 1960, same
title)
Central Orgs
REALITY TEST FOR STUDENTS
In order to test whether a student can in fact audit a preclear
in real life, the following procedure should be adopted by the HCO
Board of Review.
A candidate for HPA examination should be given a first week HPA
student as a preclear, and must then presession him and get off his
ARC breaks, PTPs and Withholds, arid then proceed to find a
havingness process that works. He should be given three or four
hours to do this; the examiner would look in occasionally and check
progress. The old student would then complete an appropriate
security check on the new student. Afterwards the student preclear
would be checked on an E-Meter by the examiner to see if there was
any major withhold or anything showing heavy charge, which could
reasonably have been found and handled by the examination
candidate, but was missed by him.
This would ensure that the HPA/HCA could get rudiments in and do
a Security check.
All arrangements should be made by the (c) of T. Examination
should be completed by the (c) of P or an appointed staff auditor.
LRH:jl.rd Issued by: Peter Hemery
Copyright(c) 1961 HCO Secretary WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
(Note: This issue introduced the old student doing a See Check
on the new, and added the last two paragraphs.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 SEPTEMBER 1961
CenOCon
Franchise
TRAINING POLICY
In order to emphasize the value of improved training in
Academies and to encourage students to qualify for certificates
without delay, the following policies are instituted.
On and after January 1st, 1962, only students who have
successfully completed an Academy course on or after July 1st, 1961
shall be examined and certificated by the HCO Board of Review.
Any students who have completed their Academy training before
July 1st, 1961 should be notified of this. The HCO Board of Review
should also inform them of the latest date on which they can be
examined. If they do not attend and pass their examination and
complete their certificate requirements by 3 1 st December, 196 1,
they will be required to take further training in the Academy at
their own expense before being allowed to be examined or
certificated by the HCO Board of Review.
Also, students who complete (or have completed) the Academy
course on or after July Ist, 1961, shall be required to pass the
HCO Board of Review exam, and to complete their certificate
requirements, within 12 months. If after 12 months they have not
done so, they will not be allowed to be examined or certificated by
the HCO Board of Review until they have taken further training in
the Academy, at their own expense.
LRH-.jl.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
128
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1961
BPI
ALLOWED PROCESSES FROM COURSES
As it is taking three months or more at Saint Hill to make a
qualified Class III auditor, and as all field courses are only six
weeks, my experience and data on progress of these courses demands,
in fairness to the public, that:
No Course not taught at Saint Hill may qualify a field auditor for
Class III processes, and no field auditor or HGC auditor not
qualified as Class III may use Routine 3.
See Safety Table HCO Bulletin of October 26, 196 1.
It is too dangerous running the wrong goal and terminal to permit
auditors not qualified to find and run them on pcs.
LRH:imj.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1961
Issue II
Gen Non- (Reissued 3 March 1967)
Remimeo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Keeper of the
Seals and
Signature TRAINING QUALITY
It becomes fantastically, screamingly apparent that we must not
ever turn out or let go a bad auditor, poorly trained.
Accordingly put permanent signs where (c) of T and Dir of Exams can
see them in their offices as follows:
EVERY TIME YOU TURN OUT A BAD AUDITOR YOU MAKE ENEMIES FOR
SCIENTOLOGY.
INCOMPETENT AUDITORS ARE A MAJOR SOURCE OF OUR TROUBLES.
LRH:jp.oden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1967 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
129
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JANUARY 1962
CenOCon
Saint Hill
Franchise HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
CLASS 11 AWARDS
Awards of Class Il shall be made as follows at Saint Hill, and
in all Central Organizations and HCOs.
First step consists of completing the check sheet of all
pertinent bulletins and tapes, each one examined and passed upon by
an examiner.
These examinations must be passed, each one, 100% by oral
questioning. The examiner need not be the HCO Board of Review.
Second step is the completion of all demonstrations called for
on the checksheet such as the actual ten manifestations of the
needle, knowing and reading the actual meter on them, Model Session
with all TRs and any other demonstration item.
Passing of these two qualifies the auditor as a temporary Class
IIb. It does not award the classification or any additional pay
because of it.
The third step is the passing of a general written and actual
demonstration examination on the skills and knowledge of Class 11.
This final examination is done by the HCO Board of Review. It
must be passed 100%.
Courses in auditing may only award Class Ilb when class
examination clearly conforms to this Policy Letter.
Class llb does not increase pay or deliver other benefits. It
does permit the auditor to practise for Class 111.
Anyone awarded a Class Ilb should preserve the check sheet on
knowledge and demonstration against future HCO Board of Review
Examination.
An HCO Board of Review may examine anyone with a completed and
instructor verified check sheet, whether from field or
organization.
If the student is not from a recognized Class II Course or has
not studied under a Saint Hill graduate any single item on the
check sheet may be re-examined and failure to pass it shall
constitute a failure of the whole examination. If from a recognized
course for Class If or Central Organization staff, the whole
regular examination shall be given, with practical demonstration on
needle action first, Model Session with all TRs in second, and a
general written examination based precisely on Class II materials
third. Failure of any one of the first two parts makes it
unnecessary for the Board of Review to give the next part.
Re-examination may not be taken in the same week. One week must
intervene between examinations for Class 11.
No certificate or writing may be issued for Class Ilb.
A formal letter or certificate may be issued for Class 11.
No check sheet from the field or a course may be considered
valid for a Central Organization examination for Class Ilb or Class
11. No check sheet of any kind or Class 11 award of any kind may be
considered valid at Saint Hill on the Special Briefing Course, but
having obtained such elsewhere would, of course, make it easier to
pass at Saint Hill.
An HCO Board of Review examination anywhere except Saint Hill,
shall cost the equivalent of f 10 sterling payable to the Area HCO,
for each and every examination taken, whether a reexamination or
not. This charge shall also be made to Central Organizations for
their staff members.
(Class III Classification will follow similar lines to this
Policy Letter.)
LRH:sf.cden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
130
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 JULY 1962
CenOCon
ORAL EXAMINATION FOR HPA/HCA
An examiner must not be used as the subject on which the student
auditor demonstrates his/her degree of auditing skill.
A student must provide his/her own demonstration subject.
Errors in meter reading are 90% of a student's difficulties, and it
is not possible to observe these errors if the examiner is acting
as the preclear.
LRH:dr.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1962
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 SEPTEMBER 1964
Sthil Only
EXAMINATIONS
(Effective this date)
As long standing policy forbids an examination for classification
or certification by the person who trained the student, no
provisional or final classification examination may be given by a
Supervisor, Secretary or Instructor of the Course.
Any examination for any classification must be given by a staff
member at or above the classification level being examined.
As long as the post is occupied by a property classified person the
HCO (WW) Ltd International Org Supervisor will prepare, give and
correct all Class VI Provisional or Permanent Examinations as an
additional duty.
LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1964
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 APRIL 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
CLASSIFICATION PASS MARKS
The pass mark for Classification Examinations for all classes
including VI is now 85%,
When the pass mark was lowered to 80% rechecks showed four students
classified at less than 85% subsequently did not do well with the
level for which they had been classed with a less than 85% grade.
Therefore only 85% or above is the passing mark for classification.
LRH:wmc.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
131
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JUNE 1966
Remimeo
Tech Sec
Qual Execs
All Students
KEEP ACADEMY CHECK SHEETS UP-TO-DATE
Any new HCO Bulletins which are issued and which are needed on a
particular level must be added to the Check Sheets for that level,
before the student receives the check sheet.
The purpose of this policy letter is that of ensuring that
students are trained in the latest materials pertinent to that
level.
It is the responsibility of the Technical Secretary and the
Director of Training to see that this is done.
The Qualifications Secretary and the Director of Examinations
must likewise see that examinations cover the new data as it is
issued and correctly examine students on the required material who
have had such added to their check sheet.
This policy letter does not modify existing policy that a
student may not have items added to a check sheet on which he has
already started working.
LRH:lb-r.rd
Copyright(c) 1966 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1967
Remimeo (Replaces HCO Policy Letter of
Students 29 October 1965 of same name)
Tech Staff
Qual Staff
STUDENT AUDITING OF PRECLEARS
Students may not audit for their Classification any current
preclear of any organization or any preclear who has been audited
in any organization within the past two years.
A student's preclear who does not fall into the above two
categories, but who has had to have either an assist, a Review
session, or a Stabilization Intensive done in any organization due
to the student classification lines is still considered the
student's preclear and is not considered an organizational
preclear.
A student may not audit another student's preclear without
getting a written attestation from the other student that
permission is granted for the preclear to be audited.
A student is held responsible for abiding by this policy.
Further the technology, Ethics, and Policies as regards auditing of
preclears applies fully to a student's auditing
of his or her preclear.
Written by a Board of Investigation:
Marilynn Routsong
Joan Thomas
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
LRH:jp.rd for
Copyright (c) 1967 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
132
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MARCH AD 15
Remimeo (Reissued on 13 September 1967)
Academies Students
Saint Hill Courses
Tech Sec's Hat
Qual Sec's Hat
Dir of Exams' Hat
Student Examiner's Hat
Dir of Review Hat
Cramming Officer's Hat TRAINING DEPT - DIV IV
Supervisor's Hat DEPT OF EXAMS - DIV V
All student examiners are to be star checked on this.
FURTHER MATERIAL ON STUDY - EXAMINATIONS
Progress in study can be inhibited through the usage of a poor
system of examination. By asking of questions irrelevant to the
material covered and by failing to ensure that the student is fully
aware of exactly what question is flunked, the student can be given
sufficient losses to slow down his rate of learning and to cause
ARC breaks.
A misunderstanding comes about in the first instance purely on
the basis that the student understood that he was studying a given
subject. An irrelevant question asked by an examiner indicates to
the student that such an understanding was false or that no basic
agreement existed on the subject in the first place. An example of
this would be to ask a student of a French language course to give
the main historic dates and their significance to Eighteenth
Century France. The original understanding was that the student was
learning to speak and read French, not to learn the history of
France.
In Scientology an example of an irrelevant question would be to
ask the student to give the distribution of a bulletin. The
understanding of the student is that he is there to learn
Scientology, its theory and application, not to learn the internal
administration of organizational communication lines. A further
example would be to ask a Level 11 student a question concerning
data and material covered in Level IV.
Frequently enough a Supervisor has to cope with a student who
has come into Scientology to study the law of Karma or to study
sociology or some other previous misconception without adding to
the difficulties by asking irrelevant questions. Knowing what we
now know about study we can handle earlier misconceptions, but a
Supervisor must never ask a question of a student which is
irrelevant to the subject or level. We must ourselves be careful
not to add to student confusion. Therefore, any Supervisor tendency
to ask irrelevant questions must be firmly restrained.
In the second instance of the unknown question, a student can be
given a verbal question on which he is flunked. In most cases the
student will not be able to remember the question asked as he would
not have flunked it in the first case if he had not already failed
to understand the material covered by the question. Failure to
remember the question asked or a Supervisor's refusal to give him
the question asked reacts upon the student as an unanswered
question, and therefore an uncompleted communication cycle, but
also as an unknown question. The student will ARC break. You can
easily demonstrate this by mumbling a question which is not clear
enough to be understood and then insist upon an answer. You will
soon enough have a very upset person on your hands.
This is what happens when a student is asked a question,
flunked, and then not given to clearly understand the question
asked. Therefore Ron now requires that any examiner must always
write down *verbal questions asked before asking them, and when a
student flunks, hand him the written question which he flunked The
student will then be able to know what he didn't know and be able
to look up the material and
133
clear up what it was that he had not understood. Further, this
will enable him to complete the communication cycle.
If tape examinations are addressed to a class as a whole, these
questions must be posted and the examination papers returned to the
student. The student can then see what it was that he missed and
what question was missed.
Many people have had experience of such poor systems of
examination which failed to follow the above. It is common practice
in universities not only not to give students the questions asked,
but also never to return examination papers. Most frequently all
the university student is given is a grade. If that grade is not
100%, then the student never knows what it was he didn't know and
so can not look it up to know it. This leaves him in the uncertain
condition of insecurity about his data on a particular subject. And
if the student flunks the subject and has to re-take it, he cannot
comfortably study the subject because the whole of the subject has
now become a complete mystery to him. Thus, the subject is set up
as an ARC Break.
Universities probably do this to be sure that their examinations
do not get out to students, but then one can only state that this
is laziness or lack of ability on the part of professors to think
of different questions, or perhaps even a professor's own lack of
understanding of his subject sufficient to enable him to be able to
think of enough questions to ask. It also could be that there is -a
complete lack of worthwhile material in more primitive subjects
than Scientology on which to ask questions, in which case it should
never have been part of the curriculum. (Freudians mainly examine
on the dates of Freud's papers for their qualification of
psychiatrists!)
The administration of a proper system of examination is quite
simple:
I . Tape examinations or examination questions given verbally to
the class as a whole must be written down before being asked and
must be posted on a bulletin board afterwards and all examination
papers must be returned to the students.
2. Verbal questions asked of individual students must be noted
down in a book like an invoice book with tear-out sheets and a
piece of carbon paper. Such books are easily procured from
stationers as they are used in most stores. The student is given
the yellow copy of the questions with the flunked question plainly
marked. The white copy is placed in the examiner's folder for the
bulletin, tape or material.
In this fashion we will be able to collect good questions to be
asked; to notice fundamental areas of mis-understanding individual
students have; and to note any areas of misunderstanding which are
broadly mis-understood. We can, therefore, see where the individual
student needs help and see where it is necessary to elaborate more
fully on certain technical data in order to make it more broadly
comprehensible.
Supervisors and examiners doing this will then be contributing
to the more rapid progress of individual students and to students
in general.
The same principles apply to the Department of Examinations and
any other
student examinations given.
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:ml.jp.rd The Guardian WW
Copyright (c) 1965, 1967 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Note: In the original 1965 issue, the last two lines given here
were a footnote added by LRH and read "HCO BOARD OF REVIEW. The
same principles apply to HCO Board of Review Examinations and
examiners." This 1967 issue changed "Instructor" to "Supervisor"
throughout.]
134
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1967
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
SOLO AUDITING FOLDERS
After completion of the student's solo auditing requirements his
auditing folder is not to be given to the student to take away or
keep as it is the record of a student's Grade VI auditing and as
such must remain at Saint Hill. The folder must be filed safely at
Saint Hill by Technical Services as the folder contains
confidential data and also could at some later date be needed for
reason of review of the Grade.
A student's solo audit course examinations may not be given to
the student to take home but must be kept in the Qualifications
Division Dept of Examinations. The examination is handed back to
the student after the examination has taken place for reference but
must always be promptly returned. - It is the responsibility of the
examiner to see that Level VI exam sheets are returned by the
student.
Written by a Board of Investigation:
Chairman - Monica Quirino
Secretary - Dalene Regenass
Member - David Ziff
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW
Copyright(c) 1967 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 DECEMBER 1968
Issue II
Remimeo
EXAMINATIONS
No examination may be given to any student of any Course which
has not been approved by the Qual See WW who must be a Class VIII
Auditor.
The Qual See WW may not approve any exam which does not comply
with the following two points:
(a) Questions asked must be taken from the data on that level
and no other.
(b) The answer to these questions must be taken from the HCO
Bulletins, HCO Policy Letters, or LRH tapes of that level and the
date and name of the HCO Bulletin, HCO Policy Letter or LRH tape
must be quoted in the answer sheet so that if the student flunks
that question he can be referred to the exact source of the correct
answer.
Philip Quirino CS-5
Tech and Qual Aide
LRH:ei.rd for
Copyright(c) 1968 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
135
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, Fast Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo Tech & Qual Hats All Students
STANDARD EXAMINATIONS
It has occurred that on a practical (Classification) examiner
took the place of the doll in the examination. This is out tech as
such a thing can cause an overrun of a process. Because of this
dolls are used and have been for several years.
Therefore, so that it is well known to students and examiners
the following is the procedure for Provisional Certification and
Provisional Classification Exams.
Provisional Certification Exam-This is a written test taken from
HCOBs, tapes, Policy Letters of the theory material the student
studies. This test examines the student to ensure the student knows
the data. 85% is passing grade. Below 85% is a flunk and the
student goes to Cramming.
Provisional Classification Exam-This is a practical exam. The
test consists of a check out of TR 0-4 any of the meter drills of
the level, and the auditing of a doll on the process or processes
of that level with full TRs and Admin. The examiner gives the
student a mock C/S and the student Audits the doll on that C/S. The
student is required to pass this exam 100%. The student is flunked
for out TRs, out meter drills, out admin, or out tech only.
FURTHER TO THE ABOVE AN EXAMINER MAY NOT ANSWER ANY TECHNICAL
QUESTION OF THE STUDENT BUT MAY ONLY REFER HIM TO THE PROPER HCOB
OR LRH TAPE OR TR OR HCO POLICY LETTER.
The student is examined on a standard. That standard is the
exact duplication and application of the technical data of HCO
Bulletins, LRH tapes, TRS, and meter drills.
The student is not expected to handle situations above his level
of abilities, but he is expected to recognize the phenomena
indicating that situation has arisen that he can not handle. Nobody
expects a Dianetic student to handle an ARC Broken pc but we do
expect him to be able to recognize the situation and to see that it
is handled by a more qualified Auditor.
The Classification exam will only be difficult and impossible to
pass for the non standard auditor. That's what it's aimed
at-Ensuring that the auditor is a standard auditor at any level.
The Founder-L. Ron Hubbard has spent years and years sorting it
out and showing us the road out. Qual's job is to ensure that road
remains straight, standard and true so that those who follow will
also make it out.
STANDARD TECH will keep it straight.
Lt. O.J. Roos
Flag C/S
W/O P.D. Quirino
LRH:PDQ:OJR:sdp.ei.cden CS-5
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue II, Fast Flow
in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
136
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1969
Issue II
Remimeo
Dianetic
Course Qual Secs Tech Secs
DIANETIC COURSE EXAMINATIONS
There are two examinations on the Dianetics Course.
I . PRE-AUDITING EXAMINATION.
This is done after the student has completed the theory and
practical drill sections of the course. The examination is standard
and has been written up and issued to all Qualifications Divisions
in Orgs. It must be passed 100% before the student is permitted to
audit.
As Dianetics is now a very standard routine it will be found
that the student either understands it or he doesn't. There are no
shades of grey.
If the student flunks the examination he goes to Cramming to
review the materials of the course.
2. FINAL EXAMINATION.
This is done after the student has completed his auditing
requirements. When the 25 hours of auditing are complete (or more
if required to obtain the required result), the student presents
all his auditing folders to the Examiner with an attestation that
he was the auditor, and that all the sessions he audited have been
recorded in the folders presented to the Examiner.
The Examiner inspects the folders to see if the auditor has
demonstrated the practice of Standard Dianetics and to see if the
PC has attained the expected gains. (If the sessions look standard
but the PC has not attained the expected gains the examiner knows
the session reports are incomplete or false.)
If the Examiner is satisfied the student is auditing 100%
Standard Dianetics the student is passed and graduated.
If the auditing is non-standard and the results have not been
obtained the student must continue auditing until the Examiner is
satisfied.
The student auditor's sessions are case supervised. If the PC is
in trouble the auditor ends the session and sends the PC to the
examiner. The case supervisor orders the, student to cramming if he
has goofed.
The PC may be ordered to a Scientology Review such as a Green
Form.
Review and cramming are at normal Org rates. There is no charge
for case supervision.
Brian Livingston
LRH:BL:cs.ei.rd CS-5
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue II, Fast Flow
in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
137 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 JUNE 1969
Remimeo
Examiners
DIANETICS
PRE-AUDITING EXAMINATION
Confidential HCO Policy Letter of 5 May 1969 Pre-Auditing
Examination is cancelled.
The pre-auditing examination consists only of a tough written
examination which must be passed 100% before the student is
permitted to audit.
After a period the current written examinations will become too
well known, also some students may flunk the exam several times
before eventually passing with 100%, hence more examinations will
need to be written from time to time. These should be originated as
necessary by the Qual Sec WW or, under his direction, by some
competent person who is a Dianetic Graduate.
All examinations must consult the student's understanding and
ability to relate the materials to a session.
Sometimes a student will get high marks in the nineties and only
lost marks for an incomplete answer rather than incorrect answers.
In such cases the examiner after marking the paper can verbally ask
the student the questions on which he lost marks. If the student
then gives the missing data, without having referred to the
materials or discussed the examination with somebody in the mean
time, he passes.
This opportunity is not given if the student answered any
question incorrectly or had less than about 94% on first marking.
The purpose of the examination is to find out if the student
knows and understands the materials cold. If he doesn't he will
mess up cases.
The student who flunks the examination or auditing goes to
Cramming and then back to course to re-do the full course.
THE ENTIRE PURPOSE OF THIS EXAM IS TO PREVENT THE MESSED UP PCS
WE FIND OCCURRING WHEN THIS QUALIFICATION TO AUDIT EXAM IS OMITTED.
Brian Livingston CS-5 for
LRH:BL:eky.ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1969 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue II, Fast Flow
in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
138
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1971
Remimeo
Examiners
All Qual Personnel
Ethics Officers
SCIENTOLOGY COURSES EXAMINATION POLICY
(Addition to HCO P/L 8 March 66 HIGH CRIME)
(Effective I February 1972)
As it has not been previously explicitly stated it now becomes
firm policy that anyone examining a student for certification on a
Scientology Course, not just Technical courses but administrative
as well, e.g. SS 1, SS 2, OEC, FEBC, etc, must have been starrated
first on the Policies and related HCO Bulletins or other issues in
Qual before writing or grading exams.
I Not to do so has been found to cause upset on student lines
through poor examinations and does not guarantee the Organization
is producing a Quality Product.
Not to have this HCO P/L in effect by I February 1972 will be
deemed a High Crime.
Committee of Evidence FCO 1611 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:PM:IC:JAAF:HH:CR:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED
139
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1965
Remimeo
Board of Review Division 3
Dept 12
Department of Qualifications
Board of Review Hat
METER CHECKS
For passing a Class VI auditing requirement for classification
at Level VI, a check must be done on the E-Meter and the following
qualifications concerning the TA must be observed:
4.0 to 2.0 - acceptable as passing
4.0 - that is alright
4.5 - barely passing
5.0 - absolutely not passing
Below 2.0 - not acceptable as passing
The E-Meter used for the checkout must have its Tone Arm
properly calibrated with a 12,500 ohm resistor and a 5,000 ohm
resistor hooked between the exact cans which the student will hold
during the check. The student is not audited or spoken to during
this check but is simply put on the meter and the meter condition
noted and written down which is the end of the check.
RELEASE CHECK
For a release (formerly keyed-out Clear) check, the TA position
may be anything from 2.0 to 3.0 with a floating needle. There is no
other test of any kind for a release. The E-Meter on which the test
is conducted must be calibrated as above.
Note that this is the old "clear test". It now is
classified as a RELEASE.
GRADE VI CLEAR TEST
For a clear checkout, there must be no reaction on the needle.
The needle must be completely free with the Tone Arm at clear read
for the sex of the person being tested. The needle can be made to
impulse with the body totally motionless, hands steady, and no
tricks. Further the needle can also be shoved from one side of the
dial to the other by the clear by looking at it.
Records must be presented showing that all R-6 materials have
been run and no other characteristics or phenomena are required or
demanded of the GRADE VI CLEAR (this state is referred to in
earlier literature as Theta Clear and has been loosely referred to
more recently as OT, but the state of OT is not actually attained
without the drills and practices which were more-or-less covered in
1953 as Route One. The state of Clear (Book One and all other
definitions) is totally attained at GRADE VI).
GRADE CHECKS
Grade checks require no meter test and consist of an inspection
of the case folder looking for any TA action left on processes and
not flattened.
If unflattened processes are found in the folder of the grade
being tested, they must be flattened by the auditor and the
preclear returned.
140
When the preclear's auditing reports are not available and the
preclear asserts and maintains that the processes at a grade have
been flattened on him, discuss with the preclear the name of the
grade as a subject (which names are on any org board, above the
various departments) and see if the preclear seems to have attained
it. Then put the preclear on the E-Meter and see if the TA is
abnormally high or the needle sticking or dirty or rockslamming. If
one of the latter is found to be the state of the needle, "the
proper procedure is direct that the preclear be cleaned up by an
auditor who must run each process of the grade in question in turn
briefly to see if the process develops TA, and if it does, auditor
must run the process until the TA action is out of the process".
However, the Board of Review passes the matter to the Department of
Inspections which directs the above repair be made. It may assist
the Dept of Inspections if the Board of Review makes the above
repair action (in quotes) known in a note on the folder merely
saying the above. It is unlawful for the Board of Review to pass
the matter directly back to the HGC or Academy, just as it is
unlawful for the post of the Director of Inspections (Div 4, Dept
13) to be held by anyone from the Academy, the HGC, or the
Department of Qualifications.
Care must be taken in Grade testing not to invalidate the
preclear's actual gains as that may produce a Dirty Needle or even
an RS.
The possession of a grade certificate from an org junior to that
of the Board of Review is never accepted on its face value, but the
preclear is always checked as above.
LRH:wmc.eden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1965
Issue III
Gen Non Remimeo [Excerpt]
All Orgs
Sthil Staff
Sthil Students
ROUTING
No student or pc may leave an org by any other exit than through
the Department of Examinations.
If students or pcs, fail for any reason to be up to required
standards they are shunted by Examinations to Review.
If the student or pc passes the Department of Examinations'
appraisal, he or she is sent to the Department of Certifications
for attestation of attainment and for logging out of the org.
Until so logged the student or pc has not technically left the
org.
Departure without logging is "Departure unauthorized" and is
treated as a "blow" and passes into the hands of Ethics at once.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 28 April
1965 Issue III,
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Power Processes. A complete copy can be found
on page 343.]
141
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div
QUAL GOOFS
The Examiner in Dept of Examinations can goof on examining pcs
sent for declare release by not abiding by policy of his role in
this.
The Examiner just looks at the pc. He does not examine the
folder or put pc on a meter. That's all been done. He just looks at
the pc Pc seems bright, then he passes; pc gloomy, he sends to
Review.
The point is contained in the Fast Flow System. You don't check
lines until there's something wrong with them. You don't try to
find things wrong as the first action.
The Examiner must have a reality on other hats and not try to
wear them all.
An Examiner can ARC Break a new release or rehabilitated release
all to pieces before the person is so declared, by being nosey and
suspicious. The pc is enroute to Certs and Awards. The Examiner
stop is just a glance for a Release of any kind. It operates like a
refusal to ack if the Examiner goes nosey at this point.
REVIEW HOLDS
Review must NOT hold on to pcs. There is no 2nd HGC in Review.
Review does the required actions and sends pc back to HGC admin.
There's no reason to start running intensives in Review. That's
for the HGC.
Check them, find what's wrong, send them back to HGC.
The Case Supervisor of course receives the folder from HGC Admin
before the next session.
But Review does not ask the Case Supervisor for further
directions. Review asks the Dir Review and the Dir Review asks the
Qual See if needed.
But there should be no question on a case. Review actions are
very pattern. They do a form. They put it in the folder and send
the folder and pc back to HGC Admin. HGC Admin then sends the
folder to the Case Supervisor who writes the Case Supervisor's
instructions in the folder for the HGC Auditor, who then goes on
with the intensive. If the intensive is considered over, by reason
of Release or Ethics action, HGC Admin tells the pc and does the
remaining necessary actions.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.kd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
142
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 AUGUST 1965
Remimeo
Examiner Hats
QUAL DIV
TECH DIV
RELEASE CHECK OUTS
Supersedes Former Policy
As many auditors can't tell a floating needle from a fence post,
the Examiner is going to get a lot of false declares unless he uses
a meter on every pc that comes by. ALWAYS USE A METER IN PC
EXAMINATION.
Examiners should use a meter briefly on a pc to ascertain the
needle character and TA position before declaring. The Examiner
doesn't audit the pc He wants to see the TA, the needle, the
folder, and wants to know if the pc thinks he or she is a Release.
A disease gets amongst auditors called Perfunctoryitis. They see
a floating needle in every blowdown (when, of course, the needle
does behave loosely for the moment during the blowdown). As a
result such an auditor runs a process to a blowdown and says
"Floating Needle".
The reverse disease, Needleblinditis, more frequently occurs.
The auditor never sees a floating needle and plows right on by it.
This, of the two diseases, is the worst and most prevalent so
probably happens most often. Overrun was the main auditor fault in
the last 15 years. This is detected by high TA right during or
after a Declare request. The auditor plowed on. The floating needle
did occur, wasn't seen.
Thus the Examiner must use a meter. And he must be suspicious of
"the electric shocked pc who went Release in 20 minutes" on 0-0. Or
the pc who "ran R6EW to 4th Stage Release in I hour".
DECLARE BY THE NUMBERS
Declare Releases in Consecutive Numbers only.
Don't declare a Ist Stage next a 4th Stage. Declare a Ist Stage
a Second Stage only when the Power Processes have been run.
An R6EW floating needle on a pc who has been a first stage only
doesn't make a 4th Stage Release. If you later run the Power
Processes the R6EW may blow off as a lock on Power Processes (as it
has done many times on pcs, while I was Power Process Case
Supervisor). Thus the first stage who goes free needle on R6EWis
not then a 4th Stage Release. He is not a second stage either. He's
a I st Stage plus if you want to call it something.
At this time when we have had people on R6EW who were not I st
Stage Release, and when we haven't followed the gradient, there are
going to be mix ups. We'll just have to cope.
But for the Examiner, it is the rule to go by the numbers.
Process by the numbers I st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th. Examine and Declare by
the numbers. Don't skip.
Usually trouble occurs when a Release has been overrun. The TA
goes up. In fact this is the best reason for TAs going up. People
with high TAs I for I have been found by me to be former releases
or have been overrun on upper stage release processes.
143
Therefore a HIGH TA is always marked as overrun of some former
release state either on that very process or at some earlier time
and the Examiner's order is, for all high TAs who have been
audited, when they come to Examiner, "To Review: Rehabilitate
former release."
If the pc has been declared and the pc Roller Coasters and the
TA goes up, send to Ethics as PTS-and be cross if Ethics gets
"reasonable" about the pc and says "pc won't disconnect" or "not
PTS". For Ethics has goofed in not finding the right suppressive. A
Roller Coaster is a Roller Coaster. Only a PTS situation can cause
Roller Coaster. And the TA goes up.
So, in any event, a high TA is "To Review" or "To Ethics",
usually Review unless a Roller Coaster is evident.
A below 2 TA is never declared anything. Only Power Process 6
will raise a low TA case above 2. That's the total datum and it's
factual. Only Power Process 6 raises a low TA case. No other
process ever has permanently.
A pc whose Tone Arm is between 2 and 3 and whose needle
"floated" for the auditor and not for the Examiner has been overrun
or underrun. It's a matter for Review to find out. But it's only
those two, overrun or underrun. If the TA then goes up higher in
Review it's always an overrun. If the TA stays in the same range (2
to 3) in Review it's definitely an underrun; to wit, the needle
didn't float for the auditor at all.
Don't be afraid to put a pc on a meter when you're an examiner.
Floating needles aren't all that tender. On first and second stage
releases the TA goes up late at night and may be higher in the
morning.
But the message here is that they can be gently examined by an
Examiner. Just put the pc on a meter. If released in the last few
hours, the needle will always be floating if it floated for the
auditor and the auditor stopped. If it isn't floating for the
Examiner and the TA is between 2 to 3, it didn't float for the
auditor either.
EXCEPTION
Because 2nd Stage Release by Power Processing is a phenomenon,
not a floating needle necessarily, a pc's needle may not be
floating after ending Pr Pr 6. Floating needle is not an absolute
requirement for Pr Pr 6 2nd Stage Release. But it's nice when the
needle is found to be floating. The auditor rightly tries to be
sure and may overrun a trifle. It's hard not to. And so declaring
2nd Stage is chancy and may not stick. The pc may have to have a
further run if the needle did not float and the TA is still between
2 and 3.
Be alert, Examiners. This is a delicate job of course. But it
can be done correctly.
A former release supposedly rehabilitated will have a floating
needle at least for a day or two. If they don't have a floating
needle, require further rehabilitation.
First and foremost, know what a floating needle is. Once seen,
you never mistake one.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
144
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 AUGUST 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
Examiner Hat
QUAL DIV
FLOATING NEEDLE ON FORMER RELEASES
As Former Releases have sometimes been overrun to such an extent
that it is very hard to turn the floating needle back on it is not
an absolute must that the Examiner find a floating needle on Former
Releases sent to Declare.
The Examiner may declare a Former Release without seeing a
floating needle if other data substantiates it well, and the
Rehabilitation has been carried out by HCO B 30 June 65 technology
(and as followed by other HCO Bs in this series).
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 AUGUST 1965
Addendum to HCO Policy Letter of
5 August 1965, Qual Div, Tech Div
Remimeo
Examiner
Hats
RELEASE CHECK OUTS
The Examiner must also do the meter check of floating needle on
students sent to Review for Assists, in which Review the Assist was
ended on a 'floating needle' or any other action in which the
Review action is ended on a 'floating needle'.
Review Officer and Examiner please note,, that if the person
being Reviewed for whatever reason, has reads and/or answers on the
part of the Review Form having to do with Ethics, HE OR SHE MUST BE
SENT TO ETHICS, WHETHER THE QUESTION CLEANS OR NOT, AND WHETHER THE
REVIEW ENDS IN A FLOATING NEEDLE OR NOT. Also, any Release of any
stage who shows up in Review for an Assist is suspect of
rollercoastering, so be alert. Roller-coasters are sent to Ethics.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.bp.rd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
145
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 OCTOBER 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div RELEASE DECLARATIONS
Any untrained person may not be declared at a grade of Release
higher than that to which Power Processing will take him, namely
Grade VA, and no one may be declared Grade VI Release or above who
has not been properly trained in the skills of solo auditing at
Saint Hill. Also, a person who has trained to Level VI but not been
audited up through the grades, and so cannot do solo auditing on
Class VI (Clearing Course) materials, may only be classed as Prov
Class VI.
Before being permitted to engage on the processes of solo
auditing (the first being R6 EW), all students in Training will
have to be released on the Power Processes, in order to ensure a
successful passage through the higher levels.
There will be cases such as those which are handled by SEC ED
122 SH on which Power Processing may not be a prerequisite to
higher level Training and materials, but each such case will be
handled on its own merits.
LRH:ml.kd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 OCTOBER 1965
Qual Div
Tech Div
Sthil Students REQUIREMENTS FOR STUDENT CLASSIFICATION
HCO B of 27 September 1965 "Release Gradation" states "It is
obvious then that GRADE CERTIFICATES FOR PRECLEARS lapse and are no
longer issued and are replaced by Release awards, awarding "Grade -
Release" when attained.
HCO Policy Letter 31 July 1965 "Purposes of the Qualifications
Division" states that the prime purpose of the Dept of Examinations
and all its sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON ENSURE THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE
ORGANIZATION ARE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT, THAT STUDENTS AND
PRECLEARS ARE WITHOUT FLAW FOR THEIR SKILL OR STATE WHEN PASSED AND
THAT ANY TECHNICAL DEFICIENCY OF ORG PERSONNEL IS REPORTED AND
HANDLED SO THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE ORGANIZATION CONTINUE
TO BE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT."
"The integrity of Scientology and its hope for beings in this
Universe are entrusted to the Department of Examinations."
Because of the above it becomes necessary that students in
training present their preclears to the Examiner to be declared at
the grade of Release attained if a floating needle is attested by
the student auditor. Even if a floating needle is not obtained
students should still present their preclear to the Examiner for
her to observe that good indicators are in on the pc
Provision for this is made on the Night Foundation and in cases
where the preclear works at night and cannot be presented to the
Examiner, special representation may be made to the Examiner and
the matter will be individually handled.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 196S
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
146
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 NOVEMBER 1966
Remimeo
Clearing Course
Students
Clearing Course
Personnel
Clear Checkers
Div Organizer
Qual WW
CLEAR CHECK-OUTS IN CONTINENTAL ORGS
The Clearing Course is available ONLY at Saint Hill. However, a
student who comes to Saint Hill to enrol in and start the Clearing
Course may then return to his home and continue it by
correspondence. He may then, when Clear, obtain a Clear Check at
his appointed Continental Organization.
In order to speed up the checking out of Clears residing in
other countries and to handle the tremendous flow of Clears that is
occurring, and in the interest of economy for students, personnel
have been appointed in certain Continental Orgs to perform this
duty.
When an overseas student sends in his folder to the Clearing
Course Supervisor WW requesting a Clear Check the Clearing Course
Supervisor examines the folder, and if satisfied that the student
is ready for a Clear Check, initiates a Routing Form for a
Continental Clear Check. This routing form then goes airmail
immediately with the student's complete folder to the Continental
Clear Checker concerned and the Clearing Course Supervisor at the
same time writes to the student informing him that he will be
contacted by the Continental Clear Checker.
The Continental Clear Checker, upon receipt of the routing form
and folder, telegraphs the student to come in for a Clear Check.
Upon arrival at the Continental Org an amount of 927.0.0 (or the
equivalent in local currency) must be paid in to the Area Cashier
by the student. f 12.0.0 must be transferred IMMEDIATELY to Saint
Hill to cover the postage and handling costs that have been
incurred in airmailing the student's complete folder to the
Continental Organization and L12.0.0 is retained to cover the
Continental Org's expenses in returning the folder to Saint Hill.
Balance of L3.0.0 comprises the Continental Organization's Clear
Check fee.
When the Checkout has been completed and the student has been
announced Clear, a cable is sent to the Clearing Course Supervisor
WW announcing the following facts:
1. Name of Clear.
2. TA position.
3. Where the Clear received his early training.
The Continental Clear Check routing form is then completed and
sent to the Clearing Course Supervisor WW complete with the
student's complete folder and all reports and materials used in the
Checkout.
Every Continental Clear Checker must have completed the
following steps before being allowed to check out a Clear:
I . Checked out thoroughly on all Clearing Course Tech
Materials.
2. Checked out on the Clearing Course remedies.
3. Checked out on the Clear Check Hat.
Training of a Clear Checker is done under the Supervision of the
Divisional Organizer, Qual WW.
Having been chocked out Clear, if the person is invited on the
OT Course Part One, enrollment can be handled by mail from Saint
Hill.
LRH.jd.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
147
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1967
(Amends HCO Policy Letter of 6 September 1967)
Remimeo
Div 5 SH
Advance Course
Supers
Clear Checkers
CLEAR CHECK OUTS
All former check out procedures for Clear are cancelled.
The check out hereafter shall consist of
I . Has run the materials of the Clearing Course to free needle.
2. Is the person's TA between 2 and 3 with a loose or flowing
needle?
3. Rehabbing ALL grades from Dianetic Release up to Clear,
making sure they have actually, each one, been run and attained.
4. A marked change in the person.
5. Is the person cheerful and happy about being Clear?
No person may be declared Clear who has a bad Ethics record
which demonstrates suppressiveness. He can be told he is Clear but
the Clear cert must be sent to the Ethics Officer who holds it for
6 months pending any new symptoms of suppressiveness. The person
meanwhile may enroll on Advanced Courses but it must be plainly
noted he is a "Pending Clear Cert".
No person may be declared Clear who asserts he is not or asserts
a psychosomatic worsening of body as a result of "being Clear".
Calling out things to a person in a Clear check is forbidden.
Anyone using this order to suppress or invalidate Clears or the
state thereof or stop Clearing is liable to heavy Ethics penalties
as Suppressive.
Any declared Clear before this date who subsequently developed
an Ethics record is to be stricken from the list of Clears.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd
Copyright (c) 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED (Note: The amendment was the addition of point
1.]
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 9 January 1968, page 154.1
148
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remimeo
HCO Exec Secs
all orgs
URGENT
Div 5 Dept 13
Div 2 Dept 6
Div I Dept 3
RELEASE AND CLEAR CHECK OUTS
(Effective date 15 Oct 67)
As an org can only have a soaring clear and release check out
graph and a level non-advancing income graph IF THE CHECK OUTS ARE
BAD AND NON FACTUAL the following policy is implemented:
NO CERTIFICATE DECLARING ANY GRADE OF RELEASE OR THE STATE OF
CLEAR OR ANY STATE OF OT IS VALID UNLESS THE EXAMINER IS A CLEAR
CHECKED OUT AS PER POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1967, "CLEAR CHECK
OUTS", AND WHO IS AN SHSBC GRADUATE. .
No check outs not so done will be considered valid and only
check outs so done may be graphed.
For a long time I was puzzled as to how an org could be checking
people out for release at a high rate and yet have no advance in
income. Truly released persons pay their bills and flood in for
more service. Finally I found out how this could be-the check outs
for release were nonfactual or suppressively done or were an
evaluation the person did not accept. Pcs so treated do not pay
their bills or enroll for training.
Looking further I found the key point in an org persons of
suppressive tendencies would monopolize would be EXAMINER DEPT 13.
This is the weak point in any org. It can undo all the tech of
Div 4 (or hide its bad tech) and undo all the Admin skill of Div 7
without any real signs appearing except down income.
An examiner can force a grade off on a pc or refuse a grade the
pc has attained and directly stop the willingness of the person to
have further courses or processing.
Academy enrollment would also collapse if the Examiner Post was
awry as persons properly declared then want to be trained.
In an enthusiasm to get a high graph orgs will turn a blind eye
to misdeclares.
YET THE ONLY TROU13LE I HAVE HAD WITH PERSONNEL OF RECENT MONTHS
HAS COME ONLY FROM MISDECLARES.
People who are declared VI who have never had III or IV run, who
had Clear grade forced on them, who in general had not been
properly advanced or declared, have been the ONLY ones who gave us
trouble. This is so much the case that an Ethics Officer should
always suspect misdeclare in a trouble-maker.
When people are properly examined and the exact finding made all
their good indicators come in EVEN WHEN REFUSED A GRADE NOT
ATTAINED.
A suppressively inclined (or badly trained) auditor
sitting on the examiner post
149
can make people think we are dishonest with his or her
misdeclares. This post is the post that requires the greatest
honesty in Scientology.
If at this time, clears were put on Dept 13 or did its work and
all declares of the past year were re-examined, the income of the
org would soar.
The ARC Break Registrar will find that misdeclares are a hidden
factor in many people who aren't re-enrolling as students or paying
their bills. The thing to do with these misdeclares is to bring
them in for re-examination and give them the CORRECT finding on
their grades, good or bad. They made it or they didn't. The TRUTH
brings in their good indicators.
A whole area can be wrecked by someone who believes that only
awarding certs whether earned or not will make people happy. It
doesn't. Only HONEST and FACTUAL examination will make people
happy.
Also when the Examiner says a grade has been attained that has
not bad tech is validated in Div 4 AND ALL CHECK ON DIV 4 IS LOST
TO THE EXEC SECS AND BAD TECH BECOMES THE RULE. This must not be.
The Examiner is there to make Div 4 be good.
So when you see a "number of releases and clears" statistic
soaring and income remaining the same, you know what is happening.
EXAMINERS ARE NOT BEING SKILLED OR HONEST.
Only skilled and honest examinations with the real result
announced to the pc will make the income graph soar.
Our grades of release are factual. They exist. They are not some
commercial gimmick or a means of magic incantation by the Examiner
to make a district "happy".
You can wreck an area by declaring people who haven't made it.
You can wreck an area by refusing to declare people who have
made it.
All it takes is an HONEST examiner.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.cden Copyright (c) 1967 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Note: See HCO P/L 2 March 1968, Qual Sec Must Be Clear, page
74, which modifies requirement in paragraph 2.1
150
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 SEPTEMBER 1967
Issue II
Remimeo
Div 3 Dept 8
Div 5 Dept 13
EXAMINER BONUSES
(Effective 15 Oct 67)
(Cancels any and all local or Pol Ltr or ED Examiner
Bonuses)
The Clear who is chosen as an Examiner in the Pol Ltr Issue I of
this date is entitled to the following bonuses on preclears only
(not Academy students study awards):
For every Correct examination for grade for any grade of release
or Clear, whether passed or failed by the pc the Examiner shall
receive personally the sum of L1 or $2.50 US or similar sum in
other currencies of an even amount.
If at any time within 90 days after examination the examination
is found to be incorrect the Examiner shall pay the org L5 or
$12.50 or similar sum but always 5 times the examination fee
received.
The sum is paid by the Org not the pc and is paid for any
declaration examination including multiple declares. The 5 times
fine is paid to the org not to any person.
The examination fee is paid even when the org offers free
examination. It is free to the public but the org pays the
Examiner.
The fee is paid (or 5 times it is forfeited) on re-examinations
also.
The Examiner receives the fee regardless of whether the result
is a declare or a flunk. If the pc passes and is certified in grade
or if the pc does not pass and is not certified makes no
difference-the fee is still paid.
The forfeit for a misdeclare or failure to declare is paid by
the Examiner if he declares a pc to have made it who has not or who
fails to declare a pc who has made it. Either one is an INCORRECT
examination.
The way an Examination is found to be incorrect is if the pc,
within 90 days:
1. Becomes the subject of an Ethics Order of any kind; or
2. Fails to carry on with further processing or fails to
signify he is going to; or
3. Does not signify his intention to get training or further
training; or
4. Becomes the subject of a review for case; or
5. Is found by a board to have been the subject of an
examination leading to an incorrect result; or
6. Goes out of comm with the org.
If the pc by any subsequent Examiner at the next or higher grade
or grades is found to have been incorrectly declared or incorrectly
denied a declare, at ANY FUTURE DATE, the Examiner who did the
incorrect examination shall pay the forfeit to the org. The
Examiner threatened with such a penalty by reason of this paragraph
only, may ask for a Board of Investigation on the matter.
The full intent of this policy letter is to make it worthwhile
for an Examiner to make a completely honest examination without
regard to anyone's statistic and to be immune from any pressure to
declare or not declare, the whole repute of Scientology depending
as it does in HONEST examination.
This system is also aimed to make it worthwhile for a Clear to
be an Examiner and provide adequate reward for same.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jp.bp.cden Founder
Copyright 1'-~ 1967
by L. ROD Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
151
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 OCTOBER 1967
Remimeo
CLEAR CHECKS AND RE-CLEAR CHECKS
(Reference HCO PL 13 Sept 67)
A Clear Check or a Re-Clear Check is done exactly per HCO PL 13
Sept 67, "Clear Check Outs".
The first step, CC materials to FN, is a folder inspection. If
no FN was noted in the CC folder, the point is rehabbed if it
exists. Standard Rehab-date time or times, etc. Materials not run
to FN is a flunk.
The second step requires the TA between 2 and 3. Proper cans
giving full hand contact must be used. Solo cans are NOT used. The
meter and cans must be checked out before the check by placing a
500 ohm resistor between the cans, and then a 12500 ohm resistor.
The resistor is clipped to the cans, not the leads.
Use sensitivity 5 on the Clear and Re-Clear Check.
In rehabbing the grades keep in mind HCOB I I Feb 66. "Free
Needles How to get them on a Preclear". That is, if a grade does
not rehab to FN, go on to the next grade, etc, until you have a FN.
Then pick up those that you left. The one really keyed-in will hold
down the others. .
You do HCOB 30 June 65, 21 July 65, 2 Aug 65, 21 Oct 65 exactly.
Listing and dating each and every release on a grade. REMEMBER that
a pc may have gone release more than once on a given process, so
check for it. You get in all steps and do a proper job of it,
getting the pc happy about it before leaving the grade. When you
are done you will have isolated the out grades, if any. Such a pc
goes to Review to get them put in.
You must have down that the grade was RUN. "Have you been run on
ARC Breaks, yes, FN, that's it", is incorrect. See 21 Oct 65. What
processes were run? - list them-find which went release on, etc.
Standard tech.
N.B. Straight wire, secondaries, engrams, and Grade Va, do not
need to be ran. Their absence does not constitute a flunk.
However, if they were run and the pc did not go release, they
would naturally have to be completed. But, this is only done IF
they were run previously.
Some pcs have not been run on Grade V due to ED on old SH grads.
Point is, are they whole track engram releases? If not, handle any
by-passed charge. DO NOT run Power. Do not run Power on anyone who
has run the CC materials.
So, on such a pc as falls under this ED, when you get to where
you would be rehabbing Grade V, you instead just locate his old
track processes, like Helatrobus, Fac One, etc, and find out if he
went release. You use your 27 Sept 65 bulletin here-what did the pc
look at that got the release-what keyed out . . This determines
whether or not he's whole track engram release.
For example, pc ran on old Advanced Procedures and Axioms
process of go to a moment of occlusion in this lifetime. Bang, he
went whole track, a picture of two anthropoids showed up in an
electronics incident. The key-out gave the pc a release
152
lasting 3 1/2 years. On rehab, when this electronic was spotted
again, there was a great resurgence and FN.
During these grade rehabs the TA may go below 2 or above 3. This
is OK, you continue the rehabs as you usually would.
After rehabs are all done, any out grade is run to FN in Review,
excluding those listed above.
A person pending an S & (c) does not receive his check until the
S & (c) has been completed on the person and Ethics clearance has
been given on it.
A Clear who acquires an Ethics record of a Crime Level obviously
is a misdeclare, and must be put on the usual lines and get a
Re-Clear Check, then a complete Review to get in the out grade or
grades. This Ethics record must be accurate and proven, not just
some chit written which may or may not be true. It is a PROVEN
record resulting from a Hearing, Board of Investigation, or Comm
Ev. If the record is in question, it must be cleared up before
revoking a Clear Certificate.
Failure to pass a Re-Clear Check by TA position is meaningless
technically because upper Levels key-in after Clear and will move
the TA all over the dial and can tighten the needle (tighten, not
scratchy). So do not withdraw the Certificate. Continue the check,
do rehabs, and get in any out grades in Review. Exams does the
check.
You get a person cleaned up on whatever you found out so that he
can then pass a check.
A person who flunks a Clear Check or Re-Clear Check does NOT run
the CC materials to another FN before getting another check. If,
however, the flunk was because the CC materials had not been run to
FN, he would of course do so before another check.
LRH:jp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1967 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remimeo
GRADES ABOVE CLEAR
All grades above Clear may be checked only when Clear check
already done per
current policy.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jp.rd Founder
Copyright (c) 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
153
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 NOVEMBER 1967
Remimeo
CLEAR CHECKS AND RE-CLEAR CHECKS
(reference HCOB of 8 October 1967)
In Re-Clear Checks done by Continental Clear Checkers, the folder
inspection for FN ("The first step" as per HCOB 8 October 1967) may
be done by the Clear Checker, Sea Org, with attestations sent to
the Continental Clear Checker who then proceeds with the Re-Clear
Check as per standard tech.
Janet Guilford Chief Supervisor
Advanced Courses
Helen Pollen Qual See SH
Len Regenass HCO Area See WW
Tony Dunleavy Exec Council WW
Eunice Ford
Ken Delderfield LRH Comm WW
Joan McNocher D/Guardian WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.aap The Guardian WW
Copyright e 1967 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JANUARY 1968
Remimeo
CANCELLATION OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPT 1967
AND HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPT 1967
HCO Policy Letter 13 September 1967, "Clear Check Outs", and HCO
Policy Letter of 12 September 1967, "Clearing and 0. T. Course
Regulations, Clearing and O.T Course Supervision", are hereby
cancelled as both policies contain inspection before the fact and
therefore violate the Fast Flow System of Management.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd Copyright 0 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
154
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 OCTOBER 1968
Remimeo
EXAMINER
The whole duty of the examiner is to note the TA needle behaviour
of the pc.
This duty is done muzzled. No talk or chatter.
The pc comes in. The examiner smiles, indicates for the pc to sit
down.
The examiner hands the pc the cans.
Notes the TA needle and looks up at the pc for his statement.
When the pc says what he wants the examiner says thank you very
much.
And indicates with an arm gesture the way out.
This is the whole drill.
To do, say, anything else will invalidate the pc and or lose the FN
he or she got in session. You don't as an examiner care about
anything except TA-needle behaviourstatement. The pc will tell you
what he wants to. You don't have to ask for it.
LRH:ja.ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1968 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 11 DECEMBER 1968
Remimeo
ADDENDUM TO HCO P/L 13 OCT 1968
EXAMINER
If the pc appears to be disturbed by the silence of the
examiner-they show this by restlessly shifting in the chair, or
talking on and on or trying to get the examiner to talk-it is
permissible for the examiner to politely acknowledge the pc's
origination. This acknowledgement will make the pc comfortable and
he will then give his statement.
The examiner never originates anything except to answer a question
about himself.
Example: Pc: "How are you?"
Examiner: "Fine thank you."
The whole idea is never invalidate or evaluate for the pc by word,
attitude or expression.
CS-5
LRH:PQ:Idm.ei.eden.rd Tech & Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1968 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
155
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JANUARY AD20
Issue II
Remimeo (Revises HCO P/L of 13 Oct '68
Examiner's Hat and I I Dec'68 "Examiner")
All Auditors
Issue as HCO B
also
EXAMINER AND FLOATING NEEDLE
The whole duty of the Examiner is to note the TA, needle
behavior of the pc.
This duty is done muzzled. No talk or chatter.
The pc comes in. The Examiner smiles, indicates for the pc to
sit down.
The Examiner hands the pc the cans.
Notes the TA, needle and looks up at the pc for his statement.
When the pc says what he wants, the Examiner says "Thank you
very much." AND INDICATES THE PC HIS FIN IF HE SEES ONE.
And indicates with an arm gesture the way out.
This is the whole drill.
Very rarely, the pc appears to be disturbed by the silence of
the Examiner. They show this by restlessly shifting in the chair,
or talking on and on, or trying to get the Examiner to talk. It is
permissible for the Examiner to politely acknowledge the pc's
origination. This acknowledgement will make the pc feel
comfortable,
To do, say, anything else will invalidate the pc and/or lose the
FIN he or she got in session. You don't, as an Examiner, care about
anything except TA, needle behavior and indicating FIN if one is
observed, statement, pc indicators. The pc will tell you what he
wants to. You don't have to ask for it.
Stable Datum = Always indicate FIN when you observe one, whether
an Examiner, Auditor or pc.
Belkacem Ferradj CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:BF:jz.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
156
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LET-TER OF 28 MARCH 1970
Remimeo
All Tech Sees
All Qual Secs
Adv Courses (Cancels and replaces
Class VIII C/S HCO P/L 28 January, 1970
"R6EW and Clear".
All references to the Clear
Cognition in Dianetics are
cancelled and have been
deleted.)
R6EW AND CLEAR
Above VA processes, one enters the field of Advanced Courses.
Advanced Courses, specifically R6EW and CC, deal with R6,
materials of which one DOES HAVE TO AUDIT in order to attain the
stable gains of the grade.
In the old R6EW Checksheet, the study background and the process
itself were all in one pack. There were possibilities that one
would self-audit once he has seen the auditing materials; it was
observed that some people factually did self-audit and later on
they had to have a patch-up in Review on a grade that wasn't
audited in the first place! Well, that is a Non-Standard action to
begin with on Advanced Courses. Therefore, we made R6EW materials
into 2 packs = study in Div IVs (orgs) and auditing materials are
issued at the last minute in Div Vs, as per HCO P/L 4 December 69
"Confidential. Additions and Changes to R6EW Checksheet" (HCO P/L
of 2 Oct 69).
The liability of self-auditing of the Grade VI got resolved then
and the preclears audited the grade with fantastic wins.
Therefore, IT IS HEREBY MADE POLICY THAT ONE DOES HAVE TO AUDIT
THE GRADE BEFORE HE CAN CLAIM ATTAINMENT OF ITS END PHENOMENA.
Specifically in R6EW, where one definitely has to do the solo
drills anyway.
Grades are Grades = Their End Phenomena is attained by auditing
them exactly as per the Scientology Gradation Chart, and that is
true of any Grade.
That's the stable data.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:kjm.ei.cden Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
157
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I APRIL 1970
Issue II
Remimeo
Examiner
Hats
Auditors
Case Supervisors
REVIEW COMPLETE?
When a preclear has completed a Review and the C/S has okayed
the preclear as complete, the folders are sent to the Examiner, who
asks the preclear: "Are you satisfied that your Review is
complete?" If the pc says yes and VGIs flood in and the needle
floats broadly the pc may then attest.
If the preclear says that he is not satisfied, the Examiner
asks: "What specifically did not get handled?" He notes down the
answer exactly and routes the folder to the C/S.
The C/S then decides if what is needed is further Review action
or may route the preclear to sign up for an Intensive in the HGC.
Review only corrects.
Note that the above actions are taken ONLY after the C/S has
written that a Review is complete.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:kjm.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
358
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 JUNE 1970
Remimeo Revised and Reissued 17 July 1970
OES
Qual Sec (Cancels HCO PL 6 Apr '70 Issue II
Examiner Scientology Release Attestation Form
C&A which referred to cancelled HCO PL 14 Mar '68.)
EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED AND INABILITIES LOST
This chart is used by the examiner when a pc is sent for
"Declare?" on a grade.
The examiner first checks the pc's auditing folder to see that
every process of a Grade being attested to has been run to true End
Phenomena for each process.
He then puts the pc on the meter noting TA and needle behaviour.
The pc then makes a statement to the examiner which indicates
that the pc actually made the end result of a Grade.
The examiner gets the pc to state the ability he has attained:
the exact wording of flows 11 2 and 3 of the Grade as given below.
The pc may give the exact meaning in his own words, expressed as an
ability gained or an inability lost for that Grade.
ABILITY GAINED INABILITY LOST
GROUP PROCESSES
Awareness that change is available. Freedom from unawareness.
LIFE REPAIR
Awareness of truth and the way to Freedom from no hope for change or
personal freedom. future.
ARC STRAIGHTWIRE
Knows he/she won't get any worse. Freedom from deterioration.
DIANETIC CASE COMPLETION
Well and happy human being. Freedom from physical pain and mis
emotion.
GRADE 0, COMMUNICATIONS RELEASE
F1: Ability to communicate freely with Fl: Freedom from, or no
longer both anyone on any subject. Likes to outflow. ered by
communication difficulties. No longer withdrawn and reticent.
F2: Willing for others to communicate F2: Lost any resistance to
others to him freely on any subject. communicating to him on
unpleasant and unwanted subjects.
F3: Will permit others to communicate 173: Loss of reaction to
others
about anything to others. communicating to others.
GRADE 1, PROBLEMS RELEASE
Fl: Ability to recognise the source of Fl: Has no problems.
problems and make them vanish.
F2: Feels free about any problems F2: No longer worried about the
others have with him and can recognise problems he has been to
others.
source of them.
F3: Free about others problems with or F3: Loss of inability to
have others
about others and can recognise source of having problems with
others.
them.
159
GRADE 11, RELIEF RELEASE
F1: Ability to be cause without fear of Fl: Relief from the
hostilities and hurting others. sufferings of Life.
F2: Is willing for others to be cause F2: Freedom from things
others have over him. done to him in the past.
F3: Is willing for others to be cause F3: Loss of need to protect
another over others without feeling the need to from actions of
others for fear of them intervene. doing harm.
GRADE III, FREEDOM RELEASE
F1: Ability to face the future. Ability Fl: Freedom from the
upsets of the to experience sudden changes without past.
getting upset.
F2: Allows others the beingness to be F2: No longer feels he has to
change the way they are and choose their own people to make them
more acceptable.
future; can also cause changes in
another's life without ill effect.
F3: Is willing for change and interplay F3: Loses the need to try
and prevent
to occur between others. change occurring among others.
GRADE IV, ABILITY RELEASE
F1: Ability to do new things. Ability to F1: Moving out of fixed
conditions.
face life without need to justify own Loss of make guilty
mechanisms, self
actions, defend self from others. Can be invalidation, and demand
for sympathy.
right or wrong.
F2: Can tolerate the fixed ideas and F2: Freedom from others' fixed
ideas,
habits of others towards self and does justifications and
make-guilty on self. Is
not feel the need to respond in a like not intolerant of the habits
of others as
manner. they affect him.
F3: Can tolerate fixed conditions F3: Loss of resistance to another
amongst others and does not get making others guilty, asserting
self or
involved by others' efforts to justify, justifying own overts.
dominate or be defensive about their
actions against others.
EXPANDED RELEASE
CONFIRMATION OF EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
Knowledge of having fully made Lower Freedom from cruel impulses
and from
Grades. being Humanoid.
Flag Qualifications for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JF:RL:dz.kirn.nt.sb.rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Note: This revision changed the third paragraph by deleting "He
then does a meter check for false completion of the Grade being
attested" and replaced it with "He then puts the pc on the meter
noting TA and needle behaviour."]
160
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 SEPTEMBER 1970
Remimeo
Qual Div
Dept 15
Examiner's Hat
E/O Hat
Dept 3 Hat
EXAMINER'S 24 HOUR RULE
A flubbed session is visible at the Examiner.
Regardless of the worksheet or report, any session ending with
Bad Indicators, above 3.0 TA or below 2.0 with no FIN or an ARC Brk
needle, a Stage 4 needle, a rock slam, a stuck needle, still or a
dirty needle independent of TA position indicates a non-optimum
session.
When an Examiner sees any one of these following four
manifestations in a pc after a session:
I . Non-optimum TA position (above 3, below 2);
2. Non-optimum needle (ARC Brk needle, stage 4, rockslam, stuck,
still or dirty);
3. Bad Indicators as per HCOB on Bls;
4. Non-optimurn statement from pc, critical, hostile,
belittling, sad, etc.
The Examiner applies the 24 Hour Rule.
This Rule is:
ANY GOOFED SESSION MUST BE REPAIRED WITHIN 24 HOURS.
The reason for the rule is that occasionally, particularly when
a person has had a sickly life, physical illness will key in after
a session goof.
Such are purely CIS or auditing flubs.
A CIS flub consists of gross violations of case programming.
Auditing flubs consist of corny things like running a Rud but no
FIN, failure to flatten a Chain, bad TRs, auditing over out-ruds,
chopping the pc before full End Phenomena is attained.
Evaluation or even chatter after the session can upset a pc that
ended session on FIN VGIs.
IN ALL CASES as per 1 to 4 above the EXAMINER paper clips a RED
CARD on the outside of the FRONT COVER OF THE FOLDER and marks on
it THE DATE AND HOUR of the Examination as well as places the EXAM
REPORT in the folder, the Examiner logs it in his log in RED
BALLPOINT.
The EXAMINER must see that the CIS receives this folder as soon
as possible.
The CIS gives total priority to C/Sing it and it is given
priority in auditing that CIS.
The pc may even be asked to wait if it can be done in the next
hour or two.
THE FASTER THE FLUBBED SESSION IS REPAIRED THE EASIER IT IS TO
REPAIR.
Sessions which are left unrepaired for more than 24 hours
occasionally find the pc physically ill. If repaired quickly or at
least within 24 hours no physical reaction results.
The illness will be a key-in of illnesses the pc often had
before any auditing. All the flubbed auditing does is key it in, it
itself makes no one ill.
If you check folders of ill pcs you will find usually a long
period of no-auditing or a flubbed session a few days before the
onset of the illness.
161
pcs, who have not been properly programmed but have been audited
on random this or that instead of Progress, Advance and Class and
Grade Chart to fully completed grades are the most likely to become
ill.
Penalty for violation of the 24 Hour Rule is loss of a day's
stats for the division, the day being that day when the unrepaired
flub occurred and subtracted at the time the flub is found.
If a flubbed session is found hidden and not disclosed the
division loses all its stats for that week.
This action is important.
If C/Ses and auditors made no flubs whatever they would really
be getting top results on pcs.
If a division can prove a flubless 100% FIN VGI week of Exam
reports to Dept 3 with actual records, it gets a 25 percent stat
increase on all stats.
LRH:rr.ka.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1970 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1971
Remimeo
Qual Div
Dept 15
Examiner's Hat
E/O Hat
Dept 3 Hat EXAM 24 HOUR RULE
(Additional Information)
When it comes to light that a pc has roller coastered despite an
FIN at session end and at Examiner's and if neither Tech nor Qual
makes any effort to remedy, then the matter becomes a High Crime.
Example: If a pc at the Examiner's F/Ns and yet within a few
hours returns for a second Examination with a complaint which does
not FIN, then the 24 hour rule applies.
If the Tech CIS ignores it and no repair is done within 24 hours
by Tech or Qual, both lose their stats for that day.
If the matter continues unhandled the matter becomes a High
Crime.
HIDDEN FAILURES
If due to failure to repair or handle session errors or failure
to complete a major action, a pc becomes ill or unable to work, and
if no effort is made by Tech or Qual to handle, the matter becomes
a High Crime under
HCO PL 7 Feb 65 reissued 15 June 1970, Keeping Scientology
Working, (see Note at the beginning of that Policy Letter) and
HCO PL 7 Mar 65, Page 2 No. 3 Crimes: Placing Scientology or
Scientologists at risk.
In such a case a Comm Ev must be convened and having fixed the
cause of neglect and the persons responsible may, in addition to
any fines or penalties, cost Tech and Qual all stats and bonuses
for a reasonable period following the occurrence as set by the Comm
Ev and as refundable by the divisional personnel from future pay.
LRH:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1971 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
162
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1971
Remimeo
Examiner's Hat (Replaces and Revises HCO P/Ls of
Tech Services 9 May 69 and 26 Jan AD20, "Exam Form")
Hat
(Mimeo on
16 Sub paper)
EXAMINER'S FORM
(Important Note: This form is handled exactly as per HCO P/L of
26 Jan AD20 AND NO EXAMINER MAY EXAMINE UNLESS STARRATED ON THAT
P/L, and HCO B 5 Mar 71 (C/S Series 25) AND AN E-METER COURSE.
Students and pcs can be very upset if this post's duties are not
done correctly and org pc and course results ruined.)
After Session Qual Div (Place)
Volunteered- Date
Medical Time
Pc or Pre OT name
Last Grade Attained
Grade, Course or Action Being Attested
Pc's Statement (Write down exactly what pc says.)
TA Position and any BD pc Indicators
State of Needle
F/N Indicated to pc
Signature of Examiner
ROUTE THIS FORM TO TECH SERVICES WHICH ROUTES IT INTO THE
FOLDER.
WHEN ILLNESS REPORTED MAKE THIS OUT WITH A CARBON UNDER IT AND
ROUTE ORIG TO T/S AND FOLDER AND CARBON TO MO OR QUAL SEC.
RUSH ROUTE ANY ROLLER COASTER LATER REPORT OR SICK RPT TO FOLDER
TO PREVENT C/S ERRORS.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mes.rd Founder
Copyright (c) 1971 [Note: Two earlier issues of the Examiner's
Form, HCO P/Ls
by L. Ron Hubbard 18 September 1968 and 30 September 1968 Issue II,
were revised
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED by HCO P/L 9 May 1969 which was later revised
by this issue.]
163
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 NOVEMBER 1959
[Excerpt]
CenOCon
KEY TO THE ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
OF THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF WASHINGTON DC
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
Purpose: To validate for full results every certificate ever
issued in Dianetics and Scientology. To be the final authority on
any certificates to be issued. To be the final authority on Clear
certification.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:js.rd Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED
[Note: The full Policy Letter is given in Volume 7, page 138.1
HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 JULY 1965
[Excerpt]
Remimeo
All Qual Hats
THE DEPARTMENT OF CERTIFICATIONS AND AWARDS
The Department of Certifications and Awards has the prime
purpose in all its functions:
"TO HELP RON ISSUE AND RECORD VALID ATTESTATIONS OF SKILL, STATE
AND MERIT HONESTLY DESERVED, ATTAINED OR EARNED BY BEINGS,
ACTIVITIES OR AREAS."
The validity of issue and decrying any false issue are the
concerns of the Department of Certifications and Awards.
The Department is fully within its rights to recommend issue
when it is unjustly denied or to refuse issue when it is obviously
not in keeping with its prime purpose.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes were
intended to assist it and expedite the carrying out of its purpose.
Therefore no order, rule, regulation, policy or route may deny the
personnel of the Department the right to carry out its prime
purpose as above.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 31 July
1965, Purposes of
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED the Qualifications Division. A complete copy
appears on page 1.1
164
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
Extract from:
OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO. 3
7th November 1955
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
The HCO takes over final authority on any certificates to be
issued. The certificates are prepared by the various Scientology
organizations, but they are finalized by the HCO. No other
organization can issue certificates except the HCO.
W. H. Young
(copy HCO, Washington) Chairman
(11/19/57)
bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH 1957
STAFF CERTIFICATE DISPLAY
Each staff member shall display near his place of work his highest
practical (not honorary) certificate, his highest ordination and
staff member card, suitably framed.
LRH:rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1957
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
GOAL
Our goal is to review and stamp every staff certificate of any
level or task and every field certificate Validated for Advanced
Processes HCO Board of Review 1957, after their passing a proper
examination on 5 levels of Indoc and CCH.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.rd
165
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
(Issued at Washington)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 AUGUST 1957
To: All Staff
Bulletin Board
RELEASE ALL CERTIFICATES THAT ARE PAID UP WITH ACCOUNTING,
VALIDATED OR NOT.
PERMIT VALIDATION WHERE NECESSARY AFTER FACT OF RELEASE.
LRH:md.rd
rs:26.8.57 L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
(Issued at Washington)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1957
- Effective this Date -
All Staff
B. Board
FIELD CERTIFICATES
The only certificates which may be issued in the Field will be an
HAS-Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist. This is world-wide.
Auditors whose certificates have been validated with a gold seal
may coach auditors in the field and validate their highest
certificate.
Washington and London central organizations will be the only places
where one
can obtain an HCA, HPA, BScn, or DScn.
LRH:md.rd
rs:6.9.57 L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 NOVEMBER 1957
HCO - FINAL AUTHORITY ON CERTIFICATES
HCO takes over final authority on any certificates to be issued.
Certificates are prepared by the various Scientology Organizations
but they are finalized by HCO. No other organization can issue
certificates except HCO.
[Unsigned] Taken from Hat Digest No. 3 HCO B 31 August 1957.
166
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
(Issued at Washington)
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 MARCH 1958
All Staff
Bulletin Board
Field Offices
ONLY ORGANIZATION OFFICES CAN CERTIFY CLEARS
We are in receipt of many protests from auditors concerning our
announcement that any auditor could certify clears.
It is felt by field auditors that only HASI and HCO offices
should finally test for and certify clears.
It has been explained to us that the state of Clear must not
become the subject of invalidation and that this might occur in
field testing and certifying.
Therefore the HCO Board of Review has made a ruling that only
Central Organization offices such as HASI-L.A., HASI-London,
HASI-New Zealand, HASI-South Africa,* FC-New York and
HCO-Washington may test for issuance of a final certification of
the state of Clear. Only HCO Washington may issue Clear Bracelets
at this time.
This cancels a statement that field auditors can certify clears
and get bracelets for their pcs, Field auditors may however send
their cleared pcs, in for tests and bracelets to the Central
Organizations named above.
It must be understood that this decision is made only after a
flood of objections to field Clear certification by the field
itself.
The cost of tests at Central Organization is f 3 and the cost of
a sterling silver Clear Bracelet S 15 US (UK *) except to HGC
preclears who receive them free of charge when Clear is actually
reached during an intensive.
HCO Board of Review
UK bracelet price to be issued later.
bt.rs.rd
167
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
(Issued at Washington)
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1958
(Revision of HCO Bulletin of 28 May 1958)
1 each Staff Member
Dir Pr hat
HOD Bd Review hat
Testing hat
Field Offices
PROCEDURE FOR CERTIFYING CLEARS
This applies WORLD-WIDE
All Offices and Auditors
Clears are tested by several departments. In only one department
does all this data assemble. And only that one unit can pronounce a
clear "Clear".
Testing department gives test. Testing should not tell pc
anything which would lead pc to think he has been passed for clear.
Dir of Pr gives an E-Meter test and review of written tests but
cannot finally inform pc he is clear. The most he can say is that
it seems so, but final declaration of clear is reserved to the HCO
Board of Review.
When all papers and data are assembled at HCO Board of Review,
this unit then reviews the entire picture. HCO Bd of Review can
call for a retest at its own discretion after a lapse of time.
HCO Bd of Review then submits all tests to LRH for a final
review. Only after LRH certifies a person as "Clear" can a clear
bracelet be issued.
THIS APPLIES WORLD-WIDE. ALL TESTS FROM ALL OFFICIAL
SCIENTOLOGY OFFICES.
The issuance of the bracelet by HCO Bd of Review is the first
time the recipient is informed finally that he is clear.
This Bulletin is retroactive to the first person cleared by
modern Scientology.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
168
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
1 ea staff member HASI POLICY LETTER OF 30 JUNE 1958
Testing hat (Revision of 25/2/58 FC Policy Ltr
Dir Pr hat - not originally issued in London)
HCO Bd Review hat
Invoicing hat
Field Offices CLEAR BRACELET PROCEDURE
All clear bracelets cost L4. This is the only price. Applies to
Field Offices, ACC students, individuals, everybody. The only FREE
bracelets issued are to HGC-made clears, and cleared Permanent
Staff Members, London.
The London Procedure is as follows: a person desiring to be
tested for clear reports to Testing FIRST (after paying Reception
for test). Testing dept gives test. Testing should not tell person
anything which would lead person to think he has been passed for
clear.
Person then reports to Dir of Pr who gives an E-Meter test and
review of written tests but cannot finally inform person he is
Clear. The most he can say is that it seems so, but final
declaration of clear is reserved to HCO Bd of Review (after final
review by LRH). Dir of Pr then sends all tests and E-Meter checkout
sheet to HCO Bd of Review.
HCO Bd of Review goes over all the papers and tests to make sure
they are in order. (HCO Bd of Review can call for a retest at his
discretion after a lapse of time.) When HCO Bd of Review has all
tests and papers on that person in order, he then submits them to
LRH for a final review. After LRH certifies the person as "Clear",
HCO Bd of Review then notifies person they are eligible for a clear
bracelet. When HCO Bd of Review advises a person that they are
eligible for bracelet, he should ask them to let him know
immediately the exact way they want their name written on the
bracelet, if he does not already have this information to hand. HCO
Bd of Review gets the exact date of clearing from the tests.
If the person was an HGC preclear, there is no charge to him for
the bracelet, and HCO Bd of Review must notify INVOICING that that
person is entitled to a clear bracelet, whereupon Invoicing writes
up an invoice for that person, marking it "HGC preclear London, no
charge". (If person is a London Permanent Staff Member, Invoicing
marks "London Perm. Staff Member, no charge".)
If person is NOT an HGC preclear, then HCO Board of Review
advises them at the time he informs them of their eligibility for a
bracelet to send in f 4 to "Invoicing".
Payment- note: Payment of bracelet can be arranged, however,
before the person leaves the central organization premises. They
can pay L4 to Invoicing and the invoice can be retained by HCO Bd
of Review in the person's folder. If person pays before they leave,
then Invoicing should make out the invoice exactly as the person
would like to have their name appear on the bracelet. Bracelets can
be partially paid for-they will be engraved and sent C.O.D. for
balance where necessary. If it is a local purchase, the total
payment must be on hand before delivery is made. Can be paid for a
little at a time before delivery is made.
FIELD OFFICES: (example: HASI, South Africa) When they check an
HGC preclear, they send all tests and papers to HCO Bd of Review in
Washington, DC. Above procedure follows. (Field office bears cost
of an HGC preclear, not the person himself.)
All bracelets issued must be invoiced and must follow this
procedure.
L. RON HUBBARD
Note to field offices: LRH gives final authority on issue of
bracelets, so send completed tests to wherever he is-but send f 4
to London for price of clear bracelet.
LRH:md.rd
169
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
GREEN ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 NOVEMBER 1958
Full Distribution
CLEAR BRACELETS
No clear bracelets will be issued until person has been tested for
engrams as per
E-Meter techniques of 5th London ACC which will be made available
shortly.
LRH:mp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH 1959
CERTIFICATES HANDLING
When handling certificates, never put hands, arms or anything on
area of certificates printed for signature.
Do not use paper clips on certificates. All certificates should be
hand carried through the lines to keep their shape, and keep from
getting worn by handling. Use a certificate folder set aside for
this purpose.
VALIDATION SEALS FOR FIELD AUDITORS
A Blue Seal is rated after:
1. The person is trained by a Gold Seal holder
2. He passes TRs & CCHs to satisfaction of Gold Seal
3. He is recommended by Gold Seal holder
4. He is ok'd by Dir of Tr and HCO Bd of Review.
A record of all validated auditors in a log book should be kept at
all times by the HCO Board of Review.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
170
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JULY 1959
CenOCon
SENDING CERTIFICATES BY MAIL
When sending certificates by mail, always roll them up very
carefully and place inside a rigid tube. The tube should always be
longer than the roll of certificates. Make sure that the
certificates are secure in the tube by passing a string through
lengthwise and/or sealing the ends of the tube with wadding and
gumstrip paper.
It has been found that this method is the most successful so
long as the tube is really rigid and of sufficient diameter so that
the certificates do not have to be too tightly rolled.
Send them by first class surface mail, not usually by airmail.
Peter Hemery
HCO Communicator WW
PH:brb.mc.cden
Copyright (c) 1959
0
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 AUGUST 1959
CenOCon
CERTIFICATIONS
In order to get an HPA/HCA or BScn/HCS Certificate, it is not
necessary to wait one year.
It is necessary, however, that the student be fully trained and
have all Extension Course work completed and corrected.
HCO Secretary WW`
NW:brb.rd Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
171
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 DECEMBER 1959
Cert Depts
ROUTING OF CERTIFICATES FOR STERLING AREAS
The following arrangements will apply to the routing of
certificates in Sterling Areas.
HCO Area See London arranges for blank certificates to be
printed. When other HCOs require certificates, they should send the
route sheets completed to HCO Area See London, who will have the
details written on the certificates. Always make sure the names are
supplied in legible form exactly as they are to appear on the
certificates.
When the certificates have been completed, HCO Area See will
then send them to LRH for his signature. They will then be sent
back to HCO Area See London, who will airmail them to the
appropriate HCO.
HCO Area See London will also keep a world wide certificate log
book.
FINANCE: Area HCOs will pay to HCO Area See London the cost of
the certificate and printing of the name, plus 5% to cover the time
spent. The local HASIs will pay all postage costs, as this is a
service we are doing for them.
This system should simplify the routing of certificates, and at
the same time ensure that the quality of certificates is
standardized.
LRH:js.cden.rd Peter Hemery
Copyright(c) 1959 HCO Secretary WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1960
CenOCon (Reissued from Sthil)
HCO
Board of Review
HPA QUALIFICATIONS
Policy states that an HPA/HCA certificate may not be awarded
until all requirements including Extension Course, are completed.
However, students who have completed the academy course and have
graduated successfully and have passed the HCO Board of Review
examination are in fact entitled to start practising professionally
even though they may not have completed the Extension Course work.
Sometimes also a student may have passed all the requirements
and yet may not be in possession of a certificate because he has
not completed paying for the course.
In all such cases, provided that the HCO Board of Review is
satisfied that the student is fully competent to start practising
professionally, the student should be given a letter of Certificate
Pending by the HCO Board of Review. This letter would give the
student a grace period to complete his qualifications, say 6 or 8
months, and would state that he is entitled to audit professionally
during this period. Each letter would be dated and would state the
limit of the grace period, set according to the individual's
circumstances.
This procedure would regularize the position of the new auditor
who is waiting for his certificate, and will also encourage the
individual concerned to complete his requirements, including paying
off his account.
LRH:js.mm.cden.rd Peter Hemery
Copyright (c) 1960 HCO Secretary WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
172
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 APRIL 1960
BPI
HCO Secs
CenOCon
MA
IMPORTANT CERTIFICATION CHANGE
Effective at once all persons satisfactorily completing an HCA
or HPA course at a Central Organisation Academy and passing an HCO
Board of Review Examination at course end shall be given their
certificates as soon as administratively possible, keeping in mind
they have to be prepared and airmailed to me for signature.
All auditors who have been trained at an academy shall be
certified immediately that they pass their Board of Review
Examination.
A 1960 validation seal, Red, shall be affixed to the certificate
when the auditor has completed his Extension Course and has passed
further examination on the CCHs and Model Session ability.
The Extension Course is still necessary for a Red validation
seal.
LRH:js.cden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(c) 1960
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1960
CenOCon
CERTIFICATION CHANGE
As regards the HCO Policy Letter of April 25, 1960, entitled
"Important Certification Change", this policy of issuing at once
HCA or HPA certificates to all persons satisfactorily completing an
HCA or HPA Course at a Central Organization Academy and passing an
HCO Board of Review Examination at Course end does not apply to
persons who have not completed full payment for their course.
The regulation concerning the requirement that no certificate
can be issued until such time as the student has paid for his
course in full, still applies.
LRH:js.cden Mary Sue Hubbard
Copyright (c) 1960 Organizational Supervisor, WW
by L. Ron Hubbard for
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
173
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 MAY 1960
Reissued from Sthil
Assoc Sees
HCO Sees
Board of Review
CenOCon
CERTIFICATIONS
It is important that the project for issuing outstanding
certificates should be carried through successfully, and as quickly
as possible.
One reason is that all of these old certificates which have been
"hanging fire" should be issued before HASI Ltd becomes a fact. It
is greatly to the advantage of Central Orgs to get these
certificates into the hands of all who are qualified to have
them-it means more trained auditors, more memberships in good
standing.
To qualify for a certificate, a person must pass, or have passed
an HCO Board of Review examination based on the data he was taught
rather than new data. His course fees must either be fully paid up
or (in the sterling area) he must be making regular payments on a
banker's order. A certificate may be used if he signs a banker's
order and starts making regular payments, (in sterling areas).
If the person is not already entitled to a validation seal, he
may qualify for the 1960 Red Validation Seal if he complies with
certain provisions. These provisions may be modified from time to
time as technology and training alters. At present, a person may
obtain a validation seal when he has completed his Extension Course
successfully and passed an HCO Board of Review examination on CCHs
and Model Session (HCO Policy Letter of April 25, 1960).
The person immediately responsible for seeing this project
carried through is the HCO Board of Review. Until it is completed,
it may be necessary to place a person on this post full time and
make arrangements for part time assistance for correspondence,
practical examinations, etc.
HCO Secs and Assoc Sees are requested to assist in every
possible way to ensure that this project is pushed along until
every certificate which is now outstanding has been issued.
(Note: This does not alter the policy that in order to keep a
certificate in force an auditor must have a membership in good
standing.)
Peter Hemery HCO Secretary WW for L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.gh.cden Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
174
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint HUI Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 FEBRUARY 1961
CenOCon
HCO Bds of Review
CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS
REVISED LIST
The following certificates only may be promised and issued
effective immediately. All are issued by "HCO on behalf of the
Academy of Scientology" except as indicated:
Certificates
Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist
Smaller than HPA/HCA. Signed by Letter Press with a small L. Ron
Hubbard signature. Issued by Address Unit with the person's name
and date typed on with a very large type typewriter. Issued on
receipt of a pc Invoice to pc Course Instructor before Friday of
the week of enrolment. Must carry the words "Does not authorize
professional processing." Given for one week's attendance on pc
Hubbard Practical Scientologist
Same size as HPA/HCA. Same wording except it adds clearly -
"Does not authorize professional processing for a fee". Issued by
HCO Bd of Review on request of Academy. Requires 8 weeks of day
training or a full course of evening or week end training. Requires
minimal oral examination. Signed L. Ron Hubbard by means of an
embossing seal.
Hubbard Professional Auditor (Commonwealth) or
Hubbard Certified Auditor (US)
Same wording as always. Issued by HCO on behalf of Academy.
Issued only after repeat weeks needful for passing Academy, a stiff
oral and written exam by HCO Bd of Review and certain time spent on
a staff of a Central Org. Costs not more than 1/3 more than an HPS.
Signed by LRH personally or his signature at HCO WW.
B.Scn. (UK) or
Hubbard Clearing Scientologist (US)
Same conditions of issue as HPA/HCA with course examination and
a good case history as requirement. Signed by LRH personally or at
HCO WW.
D.Scn. (Commonwealth) or
Hubbard Graduate Scientologist (US)
Issued by HCO only on its own behalf after meeting requirements
stipulated for any given course.
Awards
Clear Bracelet. Issued on LRH Authorization only after
requirements met for HCO Bd of Review in an area.
Fellow of Scientology- Issued by LRH for some contribution to
the knowledge of Scientology.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH.-js.cden Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
175
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1961
CenOCon
HPA/HCA REQUIREMENT
With the advent of the certificate Hubbard Practical
Scientologist, and the long term no use of Validation Seal, it is
hereafter established that:
IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A VALIDATION SEAL ON ANY CERTIFICATE, THE
PERSON MUST HAVE SPENT A ONE YEAR INTERNESHIP IN AN HGC.
This suggestion, put forth by Smokey Brand, HCO Area Secretary
DC, has been sent to most organizational personnel throughout the
world for their comment. The reply was an overwhelming affirmative.
Hereinafter, no Validation Seal may be stamped on a certificate
without the above requirement.
Effective at once, all personnel on HGCs who will have been on
an HGC one year by May 12, 1962 will receive a Validation Seal of a
new style stating the fact of interneship.
As a special award all auditors who have served in an HGC one
year beginning January 1, 1960, may receive a Validation Seal, old
style, on any and all their certificates at once.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.cden
Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 NOVEMBER 1961
CenOCon
STABILIZATION OF CLEARS
All Clears who have been made on SOP Goals procedure must be run
again on Routine 3D, to ensure stabilization. In many cases this
will not take long, since Modifiers or Opposites will blow on
assessment, if not already found and blown on previous assessments.
In future, no Clear bracelet will be issued until the Clear has
been run on Routine 3D and is recognized to be thoroughly stable
during a period of three months. The Clear should then be checked
out again, and a bracelet applied for in the usual way.
LRH-.jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
176
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1962
HCO Secs
HCO Board of
Review
CERTIFICATE APPLICATION FORM
Any person who has qualified for a certificate should be
required by the HCO Board of Review to complete a Certificate
Application Form, as under.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Confidential This form is for
BOARD OF REVIEW first issue of
certificate only,
(address appropriate) not RE-issue
CERTIFICATE APPLICATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Address ..................................................
hereby apply for an HPA (HCA) B.Sen (HCS) HGS D.Scn certificate
from the Hubbard Communications Office, which is the only examining
and certifying body in Dianetics and Scientology.
I have duly completed all the requirements for this certificate.
I understand that the certificate is given to me free of charge and
I have not paid for it to HCO or any agency which could be
connected to HCO, or construed to be connected.
Signature Date
I understand that I may continue to hold this certificate only
as long as I subscribe to and abide by the Code of a Scientologist,
the Auditor's Code, and the rules and regulations that apply to an
auditor in professional practice as they appear from time to time.
Signature Date
I hereby affirm that I am not a Communist nor do I have criminal
or communist connections. I also affirm that I have no unpunished
crimes in my past in the eyes of the law and that I do not have a
criminal record (THIS LIFETIME).
Signature Date
This space for Office use only.
Checked by HCO Board of Review on E-Meter
(signature)
OK to issue certificate: HCO Board of Review
(signature) (name of Org or
Continent)
Any other comments:
177
If the student has not yet completed all the requirements for
certification, he may yet partially complete the form, and in fact
should receive the meter check before leaving the Central Org.
This form is given to the student upon his request by the HCO
Board of Review of the Organization where the student has
completed, or will complete, his course. When it is finally
completed and signed by the Central Org Board of Review, it must be
sent to the HCO Board of Review, Continental, by the student
applying. (However, the Central Org Board of Review should see that
the student understands the procedure and sends in his application
when all requirements are complete.)
Board of Review Continental then checks the applicant's check
sheets (which should have been received from the Central Org Board
of Review). If the check sheet is complete, the HCO Board of Review
Continental issues the certificate. If it is not complete, the HCO
Board of Review Continental informs the student via the Central Org
Board of Review, which has the direct responsibility for seeing
that the check sheet is properly completed.
HCO Board of Review Continental should not issue a certificate
until it has in hand both the completed check sheet and the
certificate application of the applicant.
The E-Meter check required shall consist of being checked out on
O/Ws and missed withholds which the applicant may have accumulated
while at the Org concerning the staff, students and preclears; and
a check on the last question of the application form. The person
checking should also determine the general case level of the
applicant by observing TA, needle and person while being checked.
If the case level seems poor or bad, the Central Org Board of
Review should require the person to be audited before completing
the application form.
THE HCO BOARD OF REVIEW CONTINENTAL IS NOT TO ALLOW THE
CERTIFICATION OF ANY PERSON WHOSE CASE LEVEL IS NOT UP TO HCO
STANDARDS, OR WHO HAS NOT HAD THEIR O/Ws FROM COURSE CLEANED UP.
Finally, it is emphasized that every effort should be made to
expedite the issue of certificates. HCO Boards of Review should
make sure that graduating students complete all their requirements
and send in their applications for certificates as soon as possible
after graduation.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Sec WW
for L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by: L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
178
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO Secs
HCO POLICY LETTER OF
19
OCTOBER
1962
HCO Board of
Review
Central Orgs
PREPARATION OF HPA/HCA CERTIFICATES
No HPA/HCA graduate should be considered released from the
Academy until he has fully completed Course requirements and he has
passed his Oral and Written examinations and has satisfactorily
completed his Certificate Application Form. Delays in completing
these last three items should be minimal.
Providing his Course fees have been fully paid, or satisfactory
arrangements have been made for completing payment, on the day that
he is released from the Academy the new Graduate is to be handed
his HPA/HCA certificate.
Therefore, instead of waiting until Course' completion for
preparation of certificates as previously, on date of commencement
of HPA/HCA Course a despatch is written by the Director of Training
to the HCO Board of Review giving the full names of the new
students who have commenced on Course.
HCO Board of Review will then proceed immediately with the
preparation of these certificates, This follows the normal
procedure except that after I have signed them and sent them back,
they are placed in the Valuable Documents Safe and remain there
until date of issuance. They are NOT to be embossed with the HASI
Seal until the date on which the certificates are actually handed
to the new graduates.
Delays in certificate issuance are to be obviated completely.
LRH:gl.cden.rd
Copyright (c) 1962 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
CenOCon
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 DECEMBER
1962
BPI
R2-12
VALIDATION
Change all Certificate Validation seals to read:
0
> HCO
When a student or staff member or retread has passed Class Ilb
for Routine
2-12,
so validate.
I
Disseminate this datum broadly in magazines.
LRH:dr.rd
Copyright (c)
1962
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
179
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 AUGUST 1963
BPI
CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS
(Changes earlier policies where these are at variance)
The certificate of HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR (ST HILL) CLASS will
hereafter be issued for successful completion of the Saint Hill
Special Briefing Course.
The certificate HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST will no longer be
issued but may be converted to HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST. No
further courses for this level may be enrolled in Academies until
such time as Scientology Three is codified. HUBBARD SENIOR
SCIENTOLOGIST may be given for HCA/HPA retread.
The certificates HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR for the US and HUBBARD
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR for the UK and Commonwealth will continue as
the professional certificate issued by Central Organizations. It is
given for successful completion of an Academy HCA/HPA Course.
This certificate and no other (except HDA as follows) is
requisite for the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course.
The certificate for Scientology One is HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR. This
is granted under various conditions in the Orgs. The reason being
that no book auditor should audit without a certificate. It
replaces HUBBARD APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST and this certificate may
be exchanged by anyone for a HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR certificate. (I
do not personally sign this certificate. It is signed by
letterpress.)
CLASSIFICATION
Classification is in addition to certification and is by
additional examination by HCO.
Classification is sealed on any certificate by "Class" and large
Roman Numerals and a Hubbard Communications Office ring, the Roman
Numerals denoting Class to be huge and in the centre of the seal.
HBA may be sealed with a Class 1.
HCA/HPA may be sealed with a Class I or a Class Il.
HSS may be sealed with a Class 11 or Class 111.
HGA (St Hill) may be sealed with a Class III, Class IV or a Class
V.
The object of class is that course completion alone may award a
certificate. But course proficiency is denoted by a Class Seal.
Auditors who have difficulty getting results should not be
classed.
Classses and certificates are now fully aligned and permanent in
comparison with the five levels of Scientology HCO Policy Letter of
August 2, AD] 3 and Classification Policy Letters.
Classification is not a matter of obligation to HCO. It is a
special award and is not owed to anyone.
HANDLING OF ISSUE
It is required that the following policies of issue be followed.
HBA - Issue certificate to anyone who is auditing industriously.
Give Class I only to such as also take new Comm Course training.
180
HCA/HPA - Issue only to Academy students who complete their check
sheets. Classify certificate as Class I inevitably but as Class II
on the basis of staff employment or retread,
HSS - Issue certificate to HPA/HCA retread if promised. Classify
as 11 or III only on the basis of further retread or staff
employment.
HGA (St Hill) - Issue certificate on completion of check sheets.
Classify III on basis of competent auditing. Classify IV on basis
of excellent showing in results on pcs or on retread at Saint Hill.
Classify V only on reaching OT and retread at Saint Hill.
DOCTOR OF SCIENTOLOGY
This is an honorary degree, not granted for scholastic reasons
but is purely an award to those who at Class III or IV perform
signal service to Scientology activites. An HCS or HGA (St Hill) is
understood to qualify.
FELLOW OF SCIENTOLOGY
This is an honorary award for signal contribution to Scientology
technology beyond the scope of a new process. The work must be
complete and approved. Usually reserved for Class IV or V auditor.
HUBBARD DIANETIC AUDITOR
This certificate remains in full force.
It may however be exchanged for an HPA/HCA without further
examination and at cost of certificate and preparation of it.
However, HDA is the single exception to acceptance for Saint Hill
training for which it is valid, waiving then the HCA/HPA
requirement.
HONOURS
Any classification may be issued "with honours" providing the
candidate has exceeded the check sheet requirements by a notable
degree and is also eligible for the upper classification range of
that certificate. HBA Class I is the exception. It is the
classification that is given "with honours". "With honours" however
may not be given without the written recommendation of the
candidate's own instructors.
ADMINISTRATIVE CERTIFICATES
Three new certificates totally devoted to administrative actions
and skills are announced herewith and are now available.
The certificate HUBBARD ASSISTANT ADMINISTRATOR will be issued to
properly qualified persons who have served one year or more in an
HCO or Scientology organization in the Administrative Division and
who have successfully passed the examination of a permanent staff
member as issued or amended; or who has successfully completed a
course in administration given by a Scientology Organization.
The certificate HUBBARD ADMINISTRATOR will be issued to properly
qualified persons who have served two or more years on the staff of
an HCO or Scientology Organization in the Administrative Division
and who have passed the required examination; or who have
successfully completed a course in administration given by a
Scientology Organization.
The certificate HUBBARD EXECUTIVE will be issued to properly
qualified Hubbard Administrators who have successfully completed
the studies required.
Permanent staff member certificates will no longer be examined
for or issued but may be retained and also converted to the
certificate. Permanent Executive certificates will no longer be
examined for or issued but may be retained and also converted to
Hubbard Administrator certificates.
181
RELEASE
Release buttons (an "R" set in the S and double ARC Triangle of
Scientology) may be (and should be) issued to HGC pcs who have
attained its requirement by HCO Sees without charge. CLEAR
BRACELETS
Silver Clear Bracelets are issued by HCO Sees at the expense of
the HGC or the field pc to those who meet clear requirements.
(Note: No such bracelet shall be issued until procedure of test
is established in HCO Policy Letters after this date, all former
such tests being cancelled.) OT AWARDS Gold OT Bracelets will be
issued when requirements are specified and met. SCIENTOLOGY PINS
Associate Membership is the sole requirement of a Scientology pin
issue. MINISTERIAL AWARDS AND INSIGNIA
These are not properly Scientology awards but are authorized and
issued only by Church boards. They are handled by courtesy by HCOs
attached to Churches. These include Doctor of Divinity, Minister of
the Church and Spiritual Counselor.
There are no other valid Dianetic or Scientology awards. Any
former certificate legally issued by a Scientology organization may
be turned in for any of the above comparable certificates.
Illegal certificates in Dianetics and Scientology, meaning any
issued by an agency not authorized by HCO, should be seized and the
issuing agency sued by HCOs for violation of trade mark and
copyright and fraud. ISSUING AGENCY
Hubbard Communications Office has full control of all
certificates and awards of Dianetics and Scientology and may issue
according to policy, and suspend or cancel at discretion.
The basis of issue is competence.
The basis of suspension is violation of ethical use.
The basis of cancellation is failure to comply with the
conditions of an order of suspension. VALIDITY OF CERTIFICATES
No certificate is valid without my personal or printed signature,
that signature now being fully copyrighted and trade-marked. IN
FORCE
It is considered as of the date of one day after this policy
letter that all those certificates and awards ever issued are to be
considered in full force regardless of circumstances except those
suspended between March 13, AD13 and August 12, AD13. L. RON
HUBBARD LRH:dr.aap Copyright (c) 1963 [Modified by HCO P/L 16 June
1964, Personnel Records by L. Ron Hubbard Admin Certs, page 184.
See also Class and Grade Programme, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Volume 4,
pages 360-403.1 182 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 FEBRUARY 1964
Central Orgs Franchise Field ISSUING OF CERTIFICATES
HUBBARD APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST Certificates and Level I
Classifications are authorized by Field Auditors and HAS and Class
I Course Instructors. They are issued by the Area Central Org upon
application to the Field Auditor Consultant in the Central Org. The
certificate is signed by Letter Press with a small L. Ron Hubbard
signature.
Application approved by a valid HQS certificate holder is the
only requirement necessary for issuance of an HAS Certificate or
Level I Classification.
HUBBARD QUALIFIED SCIENTOLOGIST Certificates are issued by the
Area HCO Board of Review upon completion of Course requirements and
application to the Area HCO Board of Review. The certificate is
signed by Letter Press with a L. Ron Hubbard signature.
Level 11 Classification is issued by the Area HCO Board of Review
upon passing the Level 11 examination given by the Area HCO Board
of Review.
HQS certification and Level 11 Classification standards are the
responsibility of the Area HCO Board of Review following current
policy regarding HQS and Class Il requirements. HQS Certificates
and Level II Classification are not sent to Saint Hill for approval
or signature.
The only change of procedure for HPA/HCA and HCS level is that
certificates are issued upon completion of the course, but
classification depends upon examination by the Area HCO Board of
Review.
HUBBARD ADVANCED AUDITOR, HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST and
HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR Certificates, as well as Level V, VI and
VII Classifications, are issued by HCO Board of Review, Saint Hill,
only, for L. RON HUBBARD upon completion of the requirements on the
Saint Hill Course.
Any changes or modifications in the supply or format of
certificates will be notified in directives from time to time as
necessary. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.rd Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 183 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 JUNE
1964 Cent Con HCO Secs Assoc Sees PERSONNEL RECORDS ADMIN CERTS
(Modifies HCO Pol Ltr of August 12, 1963)
As a special project, Admin Certs are being issued to all current
and past staff members of Scientology Organizations on the
following basis:
Hubbard Administrator certificate: Will be issued to (1) any
staff member, currently on staff, who does not qualify for a
Hubbard Executive certificate; or (2) any person who has previously
worked on the staff of a Scientology Organization, no matter how
briefly, who does not qualify for a Hubbard Executive certificate.
Hubbard Executive certificate will be issued to:
1. Any staff member currently on staff, who can claim to have
served on an Executive post in a Scientology Organization for a
period of at least one year.
2. Any person who has previously worked in a Scientology Org, who
can claim to have served on an Executive Post for at least one
year.
Executive posts are defined as follows: In HASI: In HCO: Assoc
(or Org) See HCO Continental Secretary pc Director HCO Area
Secretary Director of Training Director of Processing Director of
Enrolment Chief Registrar (Body) Director of Material Letter
Registrar Director of Accounts.
IN ORDER TO OBTAIN THE CERTIFICATE, THE ATTACHED APPLICATION FORM
MUST BE FILLED IN AND SENT TO HCO WWI SAINT HILL, VIA YOUR ASSOC
SEC AND HCO AREA SEC.
HCO Area Sees:
1. Distribute these forms to all current Org staff, including HCO
personnel. Route to Org Supervisor WW, with Assoc See comment and
HCO See comment, which are confidential, after completion by the
staff member.
2. Send a form and explanation to every past staff member known
to you or recorded in your files. Get them to send the application
back to you for Assoc See comment and your comment, and then route
to Org Supervisor WW.
3. Advertise the offer in your Continental magazine, telling them
to send to you for an application form.
The Admin Certs will be printed and issued by Saint Hill only.
They will supersede the current Permanent Staff and Permanent
Executive certificates, which are now abolished.
Holders of Permanent Staff and Permanent Executive certificates
must however send in their application for the new certificates.
The deadline for this project ends on 3 Ist December 1964, after
which the Admin Certs will be available only to current staff
members and requirements will be harder. So send in your
application form NOW. LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1964
by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 184 ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex APPLICATION FORM FOR ADMIN CERTIFICATE Org
location Date I wish to apply for a Hubbard Administrator/Hubbard
Executive certificate. I am a current/past staff member. I have
filled in my staff record below. signature Name in full: (Print in
capitals please) Current address for posting cert: (Print in
capitals please) Scientology certs hold and dates obtained Staff
posts held (Name of post and approx dates) (Give name of Org also):
If service on staff continuous, or broken, name approximate dates
of service (dates only) Total service (in months or years) Total
service on Executive posts (in months or years) Assoc Sec/Org Sec
comment (confidential) HCO Sec comment (confidential) 185 HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF I JULY 1964 HCO Sees Assoc Secs Address Depts
CERTIFICATION AND CLASSIFICATION
There is no intention at present of issuing all certificates from
HCO WW. HCO Boards of Review should therefore be prepared to
continue their present system of preparing, issuing and recording
certificates of all kinds, as before.
Supplies of blank certificates of all levels up to IV are now
obtainable from the Book Department of HCO WW at Saint Hill. These
are: HAS - LEVEL I HQS - LEVEL II HCA - LEVEL III HPA - LEVEL III
Class III HCS - LEVEL IV
HAA (Level V), HSS (Level VI) and HGA (Level VII) are however
still obtainable only at Saint Hill at this time.
In addition, the honorary DScn, FScn and in the US, ministerial
certificates, are still obtainable as before.
The supply and issue of certificates should be an easy, rapid
process.
The system is briefly as follows:
As soon as a student enters a course, his certificate is
prepared, his name lettered on it and if necessary (HPA and above
at present) the certificate is sent at once to HCO WW to be signed
by LRH.
The certificate is therefore ready to be presented to the student
as soon as he graduates from the course and passes his examination,
if any, Before receiving the certificate, however, at Level 11
(HQS) and above, he should complete an application form for the
HCO. This application form is in duplicate. One copy is sent to HCO
WW Address Dept for their information, when the student receives
his certificate or classification. The application form should
include a mailing address.
Check sheets for routing certificates should be kept in the usual
way.
A roll book should be carefully kept of certificates and
classifications at Level III (HCA) and above. For levels below 111,
it is sufficient to keep track of it in C/F and Address Depts.
The HCO Area Sec is responsible for seeing that certifications
and classifications are speedily and efficiently handled, though
the actual function may be delegated to another personnel. The
actual function of certification and classification for a whole
area is centralized at the Area HCO of the main central org of the
area. At present, these are: London for UK and Europe; Washington
DC for America and United States (except California); Los Angeles
for California; Johannesburg for Africa; Melbourne for Australia
and ANZO. HCO WW also does its own certification and classification
at Levels V, VI and VII. Certificates at Levels I and 11 may also
be issued by other offices at the discretion of the central issuing
offices. However, Franchise holders and individual auditors must
apply to HCO for issue of HAS or HQS certs to their students.
In addition to certification, the HCO Board of Review is now also
responsible for classification, at Level III and IV.
Classification is stamped on a gold seal in the lower left hand
corner of the appropriate certificate. It consists of a large roman
numeral surrounded by a circle, sample as under: 186
The address department at HCO WW is to be notified, as a routine
procedure, of all classifications, This can be done by sending a
copy of the application form when the classification is awarded,
The application form should include a mailing address.
It is emphasized again that a student receives a certificate on
completing course, and receives a classification seal on the
appropriate certificate after successfully completing further
training at that level.
Every effort should be made to keep this system moving smoothly,
and to ensure that students receive their certificates and
classifications immediately on graduating or passing exams.
LRH:nb.rd Issued by: Peter Hemery
Copyright
(c)
1964 'International Org Supervisor
0
for LRH
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Authorised by: LRH
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 DECEMBER 1964
General Non-Remimeo
The Auditor
CERTIFICATES
You will note all our certificates bear a place for signature by
the "Examining Board" in addition to my signature.
New Classification policy states that an Academy student may be
certified at the end of his course but that he is examined for
classification before the beginning of his next course.
Therefore the signature on our certificates for "Examining Board"
is left blank when the student is merely certified. If the student
is classified for any class, the examiner only then signs as the
examining board. At the same time the certificate is sealed with a
-old seal with Roman Numeral for the Class awarded.
In case the student has a higher certificate but passes only for
a lower class, the certificate is signed by the examiner on the
highest certificate held. But the stamp and seal is only for the
lower classification obtained.
Classification can easily lag behind certification and is the
important point on the certificate for pcs to watch for, as an
auditor cannot charge fees for the processes of a grade higher than
that auditor has been classified for. Thus classification is more
important than certification in judging an auditor's skill and
finding what processes he
can run professionally.
LRH:jw.rd
Copyright
(c)
1964
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
187
HUBBARD, COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MARCH 1965
Remimeo
Franchise
HCO (DIVISION 1)
BPI
CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS
NEW STATUS OF HONORARY AWARDS
(Cancels earlier policies on honorary awards)
The only honorary awards (DScn, etc) that now may be given are
only for the application of Scientology processes, principles,
books or literature.
For new ways to apply existing processes or levels or for
successful applications to new areas or stratas of society with
actual results, any one of various honorary awards may be given.
These consist of memorial medals or honorary certificates.
For successful, broad application of training procedures or
arrangements in new areas, memorial medals or honorary certificates
may be given.
For new methods of dissemination or ideas which when applied
resulted in markedly broader successful dissemination, memorial
medals or honorary certificates may be given.
For excellent application of Scientology administrative
procedures such as in forming or recovering the status of an
organization, or applying Scientology to the reorganization and
better of business, group and government memorial medals or
honorary certificates may be given.
No awards will be issued for new processes as nearly all those so
proposed in the past already existed in the research technology or
were less workable variations of existing processes.
No awards will be. issued for new principles as these are usually
cognitions routinely rising from applied Scientology principles and
lead astray from advancement, hanging the person in a personal win
which the person then seeks to pass on to others who in actual fact
would have similar cognitions if run on standard processes.
No awards will be given for new training procedures or drills. We
have far more of these than we can ever apply. But awards may be
given for adapting existing drills to new zones of education
providing they are standard drills for new uses.
No awards will be given for new administrative procedures
anywhere. But honorary awards will be given on the application of
our standard administrative procedures outside orgs providing they
are not varied and are accredited to us.
Award nominations are made to HCO (Division 1) officers and are
forwarded on routine channels. It would not be usual to request a
specific honorary award. The scope of the application and the tests
made and the actual results of it should be properly detailed.
The award itself is recommended to the board by HCO Sec WW and,
bearing a Hubbard signature, is then passed back through channels.
TYPES OF AWARDS
Certificates denoting courses taken are issued as an obligation
to the student as soon as feasible after the course is completed.
This is a standard award. It must bear a Hubbard signature at board
level. This is true also of Admin certificates.
Classification and seals are given in local areas totally at the
discretion of HCO (Division 1) and after examination. A record of
these is forwarded to HCO WW. No other signed document is issued
than a seal and a letter from an HCO Secretary.
No classifications given locally are credited on the Saint Hill
Course when the student comes to Saint Hill for training and are
re-awarded as Saint Hill Classifications.
188
These consist of a letter and as feasible a seal, the letter
bearing only a Hubbard signature at board level. If no
classification is awarded at Saint Hill, local area classification
may be resumed.
Classification is never promised. It is entirely at the
discretion of HCO. It is never owed anyone.
Certificates for courses and classification are elsewhere given.
Grades are awarded preclears (or students) by HCO in the area
attained. These consist of a nomination to Grade by Division 2
(Training and Processing) and are written as letters on LRH
stationery and signed for him (per pro) by the HCO Area Secretary,
who specifies area in which given, and issued by HCO through the
Registrar.
Staff certificates or grades resulting from staff training or
processing in technical, instructional or administrative subjects
are nominated by Division 2 (Training and Processing). They are
then handled as above; certificates are locally drawn up and
forwarded to Saint Hill for signature. Classifications are drawn
lip and signed locally by HCO, Grades are drawn up locally and
signed by HCO and all are issued to the staff by HCO.
HONORARY AWARDS
All certificates and awards obtained not as a result of courses
or examination are termed honorary.
All honorary certificates are marked "Honorary" in distinct
lettering.
An honorary certificate may not be substituted for a standard
certificate or classification and may not be required as a
qualification for anything and does not waive any requirement to
have a certificate or classification.
Honorary certificates and awards are only given for achievement
in application. They do not however grant any now right to apply.
Lists of honorary certificates are to be issued from time to
time.
Memorial awards are medals or plaques and have the same
conditions as honorary certificates.
Scientology pins, release pins, and clear pins are the more usual
memorial awards, signifying an event or an achievement in
application, the first of which is becoming a Scientologist, the
next consisting of obtaining a known case gain and the clear pin
signifying the attainment of a meter condition.
These three are awarded by HCO locally as follows: The group,
field auditor,. franchise auditor or org sends to their local area
HCO a list of the names and addresses of persons who have joined. A
Scientology pin is mailed as a matter of course to the home address
of each person by Prom Reg, at no cost to the nominator or
recipient. A Release pin candidate is nominated to their local HCO
by a field auditor, Franchise auditor or Division 2 (Training and
Processing) and is awarded by the Area HCO by mail or hand. A clear
pin is nominated to HCO by a Franchise auditor or Division 2 of' an
org, is attested by the nominator as to the meter condition and
grade of the former preclear and is then awarded by the Area HCO,
usually by a request to Continental HCO to send it. A clear pin is
issued at no cost to the nominator or the recipient but the
recipient may buy a silver identification bracelet from the org if
he or she wishes.
Scientology pins, release pins and clear pins are paid for out of
the HCO Book Fund Account of the area in which they are issued.
Supplies are obtained as feasible and economic. The design and
quality Of the award article is passed upon by HCO WW to which
designs for all intended manufactures and samples of all
manufactured must be passed upon at HCO WW before actual issue in
the area.
Memorial medals and awards will be described and issued from time
to time.
LRH:jw.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
189
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Gen Non Remimeo
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 APRIL 1965
HAT Quals See
HAT Dir Exams
HAT HCO Dissem See
QUALIFICATIONS SEC
HAT Dir Prom Reg
HCO DISSEM SEC
HAT Letter Reg
BOOK AUDITOR
The old old practitioner THE BOOK AUDITOR must be recognized as a
valid practitioner of Scientology.
Unclassed, the Book Auditor cannot legally charge fees or be a
field staff member.
But the Book Auditor may be given a certificate on application to
the Qualifications Division. The certificate is
HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR
It must say "not examined" somewhere on it, small, and it is
signed by HCO's Office of LRH.
The offer of this certificate may be made in mailings to persons
who have bought books.
The application for it should also ask if they want processing or
formal training at its end.
"My future plans for Processing are .... (3 lines) ..........
"My future plans for Training are (3 lines)
The application they must make should give us a profile of the
person such as what magazines they read and what they do, all that.
Age, sex, schooling, financial status. Things required by Letter
Reg so she can handle their want.
The SOLE requirements are that they have read the book and done
"some" processing on another successfully.
The application is for a certificate as HBA. A facsimile copy of
the cert with SAMPLE across it may be printed up as the flier,
enclosing the questionnaire.
The flier would be mailed by Prom Reg, received by Qual Sec, the
certificate made up at once and mailed and the questionnaire
carefully preserved and given the Letter Reg.
Such questionnaires must never be put in CF until they bear a
stamp on them: Answered by Letter Reg.
These questionnaires express wants and questions.
The Letter Reg stamps "Answered by Letter Reg", forwards the
original to Address where an HBA plate is cut. The questionnaire
then goes to CF for a folder.
This is a routine action to all book buyers who have not yet been
trained to the level of HAS. Sending such an offer to an HAS could
be very confusing to a new Scientologist.
Therefore, in sending such a mailing in the first place
Address-in-Charge is responsible that no HAS or certified auditors
are included in the addresses being supplied.
This is a STANDARD promotion to book buyers who are not yet
trained. It can be made to pcs, of any grade if they are not also
auditors.
There must be NO CHARGE for this Certificate.
LRH:wmc.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
190
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 APRIL 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
Sthil Students
Sthil Executives
URGENT
Instructors
Board of Review
CORRECTION TO POLICY LETTERS ON
CERTIFICATION AND AWARDS
Not on Saint Hill Special Briefing Course or any other course is
it required of a student to be classified or that he or she take
the classification examination. Classification is a vital necessity
for professional practice at the level, and no auditing fee may be
charged by an auditor who has not been classified.
For the sake of maintaining the quality of auditors turned out by
Saint Hill, I do, however, require that on the Saint Hill Course,
check sheets be satisfactorily completed before the award of a
certificate, and exercise my prerogative to examine students for
the basic competency of an auditor before
signing the
final certificate-this examination not leading to Classification.
It is called to attention that a Saint Hill certificate does bear
the word "Saint Hill" and must be safeguarded even when no
classification is awarded. However, a Continental certificate may
be issued when competence is not considered up to Saint Hill
standards.
The definition of a
Saint Hill certificate is
t ' hat it is granted for complete check sheets-not amount of
time on course-in Theory, Practical and on Auditing check. sheet on
others.
PC GRADES
On the Saint Hill Course a student is only audited according to
the Gradation programme of Grade Certificates, so that it is
possible to have an HGA certificate with a lower grade auditing
certificate as a preclear.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright
(c)
1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
191
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 APRIL AD 15
Remimeo
Staff Hats
All Staff
BASIC CERTIFICATES
UNCERTIFIED PERSONNEL
For purposes of Org Status all staff members to have a staff
status number must have a
Basic Staff Proficiency Certificate
This consists of
(a) A specified period on staff (variable from 2 weeks to 3
months depending on
employment conditions at the time);
(b) A demonstrated proficiency or outside training in his type of
work;
(c) A completed check sheet demonstrating prescribed study of
specified materials
(such as have been staff hat materials);
(c) A completed check sheet of prescribed materials covering the
character of the
organization and its pattern and purpose; (e) A thorough
knowledge of the Org Board and Comm System used by orgs; (f) A
clearance from the Ethics section. (g) A final examination.
None of the above requires any technical certificate or technical
knowledge of Scientology beyond that contained in (c) above.
CERTIFIED PERSONNEL
All staff members of an org whose duties bring them into any
contact with technical activities or who perform them must already
have a Scientology Auditor's certificate to be placed on such a
post.
For technical personnel to have a staff status number the
following is required:
Basic Technical Certificate.
This certificate is required in addition to the Basic Staff
Proficiency Certificate for all such personnel.
This certificate requires
(a) A specified period on staff to be set from time to time;
(b) A demonstrated proficiency in technical matters and a
certificate from an
Academy HQS or above;
(c) A completed check sheet of basic org technical procedures for
Estimations, the
HGC, the Academy, Examinations, Review, Certification,
Classification and
Ethics.
(c) A completed check sheet of prescribed materials covering the
relationships of
various technical posts and their policies, and admin procedures;
(e) The recommendation of a senior technical executive in the org;
(f) A final examination.
STAR RATED
Although the materials are simple and brief the check sheets are
all star-rated.
CURRENT ACTION
These materials are under issue and check outs on them before a
final check sheet is received will all be credited to the staff
member by entering them on a sheet marked with his name as checked
out by an examiner.
No status of any kind of any person will be assigned until the
required Certificate or Certificates are in the staff member's
hand.
LRH:wmcrd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
192
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JULY 1965
Remimeo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Tech Div
Qual Div
RELEASE DECLARATION RESTRICTIONS
HEALING AMENDMENTS
The following three policies emerged from a Comm Ev conducted at
Saint Hill 23 July 1965.
RELEASE RESTRICTED
No person who is
dependent
for his or her livelihood upon a Suppressive Person or Group, may
be awarded any Release award declaration or pin as such a person is
riot released in his environment.
No person who is
dependent
for his or her livelihood upon compensation being paid for
physical or mental disability, may be awarded any Release award
declaration or pin as there is too much vested interest in
remaining disabled.
HEALING AMENDED
All students of any course are debarred from visiting any medical
or healing practitioner unless they are given an Ethics clearance
first and all possibility of
11
roller-coaster" (sudden case decline) has been looked into and
any suppressives or bad auditing precisely isolated. The exception
is an emergency involving severe injury or
infectious
disease, but in this case the student must be cleared by Ethics
to be permitted back on course or even in the org. This includes
all accidents.
Course Supervisors are subject to Comm Ev in not so routing
students requesting to see a doctor.
All students
must
have permission to see a medical doctor except in cases of
severe emergency.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 AUGUST 1965
Remimeo
Franchise
CERTIFICATION OF FRANCHISE STUDENTS
In order to ensure that Franchise Auditors are able to get their
students certified for Beginning Scientologist, Hubbard Apprentice
Scientologist, and Hubbard Qualified Scientologist, a Franchise
Auditor is permitted to make an Attestation As to the competence of
the students as regards their practical and theory work as laid
down by policy covering the above named courses.
Such Attestations are to be sent in to the Director of
Examinations of the nearest Central Org and are then passed by that
post to the Department of Certificates and Awards for making out
and mailing of the certificate to the student.
The nearest Central Org may charge for such service.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
193
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 AUGUST 1965
Issue 11
Gen Non-Remimeo
CREDITING OF AUDITOR IN
RELEASE LOG BOOK
In logging a Release in the Release Log Book, Certs and Awards is
to credit as auditor, the HGC auditor who was on the case at the
time of Releasing. In some cases, other auditors will have worked
on the case, but as auditor reassignment is usually due to the
auditor having goofed too often, only the auditor who gets the
final result will be credited..
Review action in Qual is not to be credited, as this is Review of
the result, and not the actual auditing to Release.
If the person was not Released and had to be finished by Review,
meaning a process had to be run, the Review Auditor is credited.
In the case of a Rehabilitated Former Release, Certs and Awards
is to credit the HGC auditor who did the rehabilitation and is to
enter a "(Rehab)" after the name to
show that it was a rehabilitation.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright
(c)
196S L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 OCTOBER 1965
Remimeo
BPI
Qual Div
GRADE AWARD INSIGNIA
The standard Scientology pin is a plain gold S and double
triangle. When a Red "R" is mounted on the face of this pin it
signifies a RELEASE, Grades O-IV.
When the preclear has attained Grades V or VI the Release pin is
the S and double triangle with the Red "R" surrounded by a gold
disc larger than the pin itself.
Grade VII CLEAR is signified by a silver identification bracelet
with the S and double triangle on it.
Operating Thetan is signified by a gold identification bracelet
with the S and double triangle on it.
The Release pins for Grades O-IV and for Grades V and VI are
given by Certificates and Awards without charge when awarded.
The silver CLEAR bracelet is purchasable at Saint Hill after the
completion of the Clearing Course when Grade VII is attained.
The gold Operating Thetan bracelet may be purchased when the
grade is attained
and has to be specially made up.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
194
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 NOVEMBER 1965
Remimeo
Exec Sec
Qual Personnel
Certs and Awards
Dissem Dept Pubs
RELEASE PINS
Grade 0 to Grade IV Release awards (in addition to the Grade
Certificate) consist of one pin to each pc for all these lower
grades. One does not give a separate pin for each grade.
The Release is given his Release Pin as an award for Grade 0. He
is issued no further Release pins as he attains Grades 1, 11, 111
and IV.
If he has lost his Release Pin and so states, he may sign a
Certificate of loss in Certs and Awards and may purchase a new
Release Pin for the grade to which he is entitled for 5 shillings
sterling or $0.75. The Certificate of Loss is then sent to Ethics
for their files so that this pc can't keep "losing Release Pins".
The Certificate of Loss simply states "I have lost my Release Pin
and attest that I have not given it to another person". And is
signed legibly so that the name can be read. It is of course
grounds for false attestation if the matter ever comes up.
Grades V, Va, and VI have a larger pin given when the pc attains
the higher grades.
This pin similarly is issued for Grade V, Power Release only.
Subsequent Releases (Va and VI) do not obtain another pin.
In case of loss the procedure is the same as for the lower grade
pin but the charge may be higher.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd. Copyright
(c)
1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
195
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1965 Gen Non-Remimeo
NUMBERING OF CERTIFICATES
All certificates are numbered by Certs & Awards WW.
The system used is chronological numbering from 0 onwards.
One number, once assigned is continued for that person,
regardless of where he may later be trained, and appears on any
certificates he gets. It is preceded by the area code of the area
where the first Cert was awarded and this area code is kept in the
number regardless of where later training is accomplished.
Example: A person gets a cert, say an HRS. The next available
number, written on a chalk board on the wall in Certs & Awards at
WW, is assigned. Say it's 504-that's his number, and when he gets
his HRS cert prepared, it is numbered 504 preceded by the code of
the area where trained. If in London, then it would be UK 504. When
he gets his next level, his HTS, it is numbered UK 504 also and so
on. When he comes to St. Hill and gets his HSS, it is also numbered
UK 504.
Where someone moves from one area to another, say he got his HRS
at Scientology Twin Cities in Minnesota, and was assigned TC 505,
and then goes to DC to get his HTS, his HTS Certificates will be
numbered TC 505. When he gets his HSS at St. Hill it will be
numbered TC 505. End of Example.
This number is also the number that goes on his Scientology
Passport when issued. It is a number perforated through all the
pages of the passport book by a machine that is designed to do
this. The Passport is issued with his first certificate.
When the passport books are ready, they can be numbered from the
logs in Certs and Awards, at St. Hill.
As this changes somewhat the numbering system used in the past,
logs must be brought into PT using this new system. This is
initiated at WW and as these logs are brought into PT (HGA-the
highest Cert first), numbers are assigned to these certificates,
the certs prepared and numbered and issued from the top down. That
is: HGA, HSS, etc.
New Cert applications from Orgs are dealt with, priority given
always to the highest level first, that number given being the next
in line, soon, this will find the new Scientologist assigned a
number, passport & certificates, when he completes his first
course. No priority being necessary as the higher cert will always
have a number already when applying for his next certificate as
well as his passport showing this number. Invoicing & Assignment of
number, passport & cert to be done immediately upon arrival of a
cert application. (The "in lieu of" letter from orgs.)
Older certificate holders, where numbers are already assigned
will not turn in these certs, these will be honored as they stand
and the numbers already assigned will stand on these certificates,
and in Org Logs where they were issued.
Where the highest cert has already been attained, the number
already assigned will be used as the person's number under the new
system.
Where new certs are issued to an old cert holder, numbered under
past systems, a new number as assigned will become the person's
cert number for all new certs and will be his passport number.
All numbers are assigned by WW and Certs are charged to and
routed for final preparation, i.e. Classification seals and
presentation by the Org awarding, who will note the cert number in
their logs after receiving the cert from WW and before presenting
the cert to the student.
The new certificates will name the Org training the person at any
level, this being printed on the Cert by Certs & Awards WW, when
the Cert is prepared. No Area Code need be shown beyond the one
originally assigned. LRH:emp.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 196 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 17 JANUARY 1966 Gen Non-Remimeo Franchise UNCLASSED CERTIFICATES
HAS, HBA, HQS HBA, HAS, HQS Certificates are available to orgs as
per See ED 146 Int.
These may be prepared and awarded by Div 5, Dept 15, on
completion of Course Requirements by a student,
The numbering of these NON-CLASSED Certificates is as follows:
The Certificate is invoiced N/C to the candidate. The number of
the Invoice is taken, the last 2 digits of the year added and the
cable code added after that to complete the number.
A Dispatch is sent to Saint Hill giving the student's name,
address and cert number, and also the org awarding.
Example: Invoice number F 6840 year 1965 area Washington DC
Resulting Certificate Number = F684065/DC
End of example.
The cert number is then entered on the space provided on the
certificate. This applies only to non-classed certificates and this
numbering system is used exclusively on non-classed certificates.
All classed certificates will bear the number assigned per Pol
Ltr of 13 Dee 1965 and the number must be obtained from Certs and
Awards, Saint Hill.
When a course has been run by a Franchise holder, which awards an
HAS, HBA or HQS, the Franchise holder should make out a letter of
attestation to the student naming the award and stating that the
student has completed. The letter should be letterhead and name the
Franchise Centre or give the Franchise auditor's name and address.
A copy of this letter is then airmailed to your nearest Central
Org who will issue a Certificate invoicing the costs to the
Franchised auditor applying for his student in this way.
The name and address of the student must appear on the carbon
copy. The
Franchised auditor should keep , p a log book for any certs he
issues, to obviate the
possibility of loss of records through mail being undelivered,
etc.
The org awarding for a Franchise holder should, when having
completed the certs and mailed them to the Franchise ordering them,
send the letter copies, having written the invoice number and date
issued on the letter, on to Saint Hill for info of Certs and Awards
Logging Officer. Certs and Awards, Dept 15, of course keeps a
complete log for any and all certificates issued by it. L. RON
HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (~) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 197 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I AUGUST 1966 Remimeo SIGN
UPS AND DISCOUNTS
As a result of a Board of Investigation, WW, No. 1653, 27 July
1966, Monica Quirino, Chairman, the following policies are adopted
regarding sign ups and discounts in all organisations:
I . A separate contract shall exist for each item signed up for,
including all processing and training. The contract covers what is
actually being paid for.
A copy of the contract shall be handed cashier who is to verify
its accuracy and receive the money for service and who is then to
file this copy.
The contract shall specifically note all discounts being allowed
and if any allowed, the status of the person signing up shall be
noted on the contract.
2. Persons shall verify their status of membership or staff
member for discount purposes by displaying a current membership
card or a staff member card signed by the HCO Area Sec.
Where a person is not currently a member he shall be signed up
for membership by the Registrar and this shall be paid at the time
the other sign up is paid for.
3. The Cashier in issuing an invoice copy for any different type
of membership or service than the pc or student now has, shall
issue a card directing the person to Certs and Awards.
4. Certs and Awards, to which the student or pc or staff member
is so routed shall issue, after examination of the invoice, a
badge.
These badges are plastic transparent covers with a pin as used in
Congresses.
They are flash-marked with a card on them as follows: (a) SHSBC
Student RED (b) Preclear BLUE (c) Solo Audit Student GREEN
The person's name and the status is marked on each card and
signed by Certs and Awards. The person is told to wear it at all
times when around the org.
Certs and Awards issues the Membership card, if purchased, at the
same time.
5. Staff members, on being employed, are to receive badges from
Certs and Awards as follows:
(A) Temporary Staff Member - Plastic Badge (GREY) marked
"Temporary Staff Member" with the person's name.
(B) Provisional Staff Member - Plastic Badge, Divisional Colour,
with the person's name and post.
(C) Contracted Staff Member, non-executive - a metal badge, gold
coloured, to be designed and issued. Executive - a larger badge.
Until such time as such badges are available, a gold card shall
be used bearing the person's title and name.
6. The Personnel Control Officer routes on staff members to Certs
and Awards for badges by a mimeoed initialed slip.
All cards must be signed by Certs and Awards.
Falsifying a card shall be classed as a Crime.
Persons not wearing badges may not have any service. L. RON
HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 198
HUBBARD COLLEGE OF SCIENTOLOGY Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 AUGUST 1966 All Students
Director of Examinations Pc Examiner Certs and Awards Secretarial
to Exec Dir Franchise RELEASE GRADES
The only Release Grades delivered by Certs & Awards are mentioned
in HCO Bulletin 27th September, 1965 "Release Gradation" and
available as well in 26th September, 1965, Routing and Gradation
Chart.
There is no particular declare for Keyed-out OT or any
certificate such as Grade I OT, Grade 11 OT, etc. These states are
simply acknowledged by the auditor without any further action apart
from getting the actual, grade declared. LRH:ec.rd Copyright (c)
1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF 11 JULY 1969 Remimeo DIANETICS AUDITING COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
When a PC is completed on Dianetic auditing the Department of
Certificates and Awards issues a certificate stating that this
person has been audited on Standard Dianetics at (Org concerned),
that the person at this time is complete on Dianetic auditing and
may proceed with Scientology Grades (or Advanced Courses if that is
his or her next step). The certificate is signed and dated.
The main function of the certificate is that of a passport to
Scientology auditing. It is presented by the Registrar who signs
him up for his next auditing.
When signing up for Scientology processing at another Org the
certificate is shown to the Registrar of that Org by the PC.
It is recognised that the person may require further Dianetic
auditing at a later date. It is therefore not a Grade Certificate.
Brian Livingston LRH:bl.ei.kd CS-5 Copyright (c) 1969 for by L. Ron
Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
(important: See also HCO Policy Letter of 17 November 1969,
Dianetics & Scientology Services, Volume 4, page 401.1 199
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 SEPTEMBER 1969 Students ASHO
& SH (HCO Policy Letter of 20 January 1969 Academy Students Certs &
Awards Amended and Reissued) CLASSIFICATION
On completion of his or her checksheets and passing of
provisional certification examination the student may be awarded a
Provisional Certification and Classification for the level he is
trained up to.
A provisional Certification and Classification remains in force
for one year only. At the end of the year the Provisional
Certificates are automatically cancelled.
To obtain full permanent Certification and Classification the
auditor must apply to the Qualifications Secretary of the Central
Scientology Organization of his area (not necessarily the
Continental Org) three months prior to the expiration date of his
provisional Certificate.
Permanent Certification and Classification will be judged on
1. Application of technology-10 case folders must be sent in by
the auditor of 10 persons he has audited-this is verified by the
organization.
2. Activity in Scientology and what he has done to further the
purpose and goals of Scientology; this is to be listed by the
applicant and attested to before an Ethics Officer.
3. Clean Ethics record-must obtain an attestation from Ethics
Officer of his local organization that his ethics record is clean
and no lowered conditions have been assigned-if this is not
possible then full details must be sent.
4. Acceptability exam.
5. Judgement exam.
6. A letter stating the auditor's plans, intention and goals in
Scientology.
7. Full international membership in force for the next year.
The cost of handling the application is paid by the Organization
of the person applying for permanent Certification and
Classification. 11 If the student flunks his application or does
not apply for permanent Classification his provisional
Certification & Classification is cancelled and he will be required
to retread. If the student passes he will be awarded full Permanent
Classification and Certification by the Qual Sec of the Area Org.
Philip Quirino LRH:ei.rs.ei.rd CS-5, Tech and Qual Aide Copyright
(c) 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Founder [Note: This issue amended the 20 January 1969 issue of same
title by: having the application for permanent Certification and
Classification made to the Qual Sec of the local area Org instead
of the Sea Org; changed the payment of cost of handling from "the
person applying" to the "Organization of the person applying";
deleted the requirement "No permanent Classification will be
awarded until the expiry date of the provisional certificate." I
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue 11, Fast Flow in Training,
in the 1972 Year Book.] 200
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 NOVEMBER 1969 HCO ES Hat
Issue 11 HCO Area See Hat Dept C & A Hat Gdn Hat Legal Hat
DIANETICS RIGHT TO AUDIT The following pledge is required to be
signed and witnessed by any applicant for HDC before issue of the
actual certificate. HDC CERTIFICATE APPLICATION Location Date I of
Block Letters Permanent Home Address hereby apply for a certificate
as a HUBBARD DIANETIC COUNSELOR. I hereby solemnly pledge myself:
1. To use the AUDITOR'S CODE well known to me whenever employing
DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS.
2. To use only STANDARD DIANETICS in processing persons at
Dianetic levels.
3. Not to use DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS or its technology
or principles under another name or to alter the technology in
processing.
4. 1 recognize the right of the Guardian WW or her officers to
intervene in matters where the misuse or abuse of DIANETICS or
STANDARD DIANETICS occurs.
5. 1 recognize the Hubbard Organizations as the only certifying
body for Dianetics.
6. 1 realize gross errors in Dianetics can be corrected by
Scientology Reviews.
7. 1 swear that I have been through the STANDARD DIANETIC
MATERIALS three times, have passed a comprehensive examination on
them with a 100% grade and have audited several sessions
consecutively with excellent results according to the preclear.
8. 1 swear that I will use DIANETICS and STANDARD DIANETICS to
the best of my ability to help my fellow man and Mankind. SIGNATURE
Witness Witness TO LEGAL FILES WW L. RON HUBBARD LRH:rs.ei.rd
Founder Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
201 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 NOVEMBER 1969 HCO ES Hat
Issue III HCO Area See Hat Dept C & A Hats Legal Hat Gdn Hat
DIANETICS RIGHT TO TEACH
An HDG (Hubbard Dianetic Graduate), to obtain his actual
certificate as an HDG and to obtain his right to teach must sign
and have witnessed the following statement and application of his
HDG certificate. HDG CERTIFICATE APPLICATION Location
1, Block Letters
do hereby apply for my Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Certificate and
my right to TEACH Dianetics and to obtain HDC certificates for my
qualified students by application to an official Hubbard Dianetic
or Scientology organization. By witnessed signature hereon I pledge
myself:
1. To use and abide by and require my students to use and abide
by THE AUDITOR'S CODE.
2. To teach STANDARD DIANETICS.
3. To use the term STANDARD DIANETICS in communicating any of the
technology of STANDARD DIANETICS.
4. To use the term DIANETICS in communicating any of the basic or
older materials of Dianetics.
5. To publicly state to students or classes that anything that
may have been added or evaluated to a general course of instruction
that is not STANDARD DIANETICS that it is not Dianetics or STANDARD
DIANETICS when it is not.
6. To require three times through the materials, theory and
practical and a 100% passed examination and several well done
sessions in a row before I recommend any student for certification
or give him a course completion.
7. To inform all my students that errors made in Dianetics are
reparable by Scientology Reviews.
8. Not to give support or encouragement to activities calculated
to injure measures or persons seeking to safeguard and continue the
teaching of Dianetics or Standard Dianetics in a pure state.
9. 1 recognize the right of the Guardian World Wide to intervene
in matters where the misuse or abuse of DIANETICS or STANDARD
DIANETICS occurs.
10. 1 recognize Hubbard Organizations as the only valid
certifying body for Dianetics and Standard Dianetics.
11. To teach and use Dianetics to the best of my ability to help
my fellow man and Mankind. (Seal) Witness Signed Witness TO LEGAL
FILES WW LRH:Idm.rs.ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright 1969 Founder H
by L. Ron ubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 202 HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 25 APRIL 1970 Remimeo Tech Sec Hat (c) of T Hat Supervisor Hats
C&A Hat Dir Pubs Hat Registrar Hat GUARANTEE OF SERVICE DELIVERY A
new line is to be added to Scientology training and processing
Certificates. On student Auditor certificates, above the HCO
signature line is to be added:
"I guarantee that I have trained this student to the best of my
ability", with a line for signature. The Supervisor signs his or
her whole signature.
On preclear certificates, the following is added:
"I guarantee that I have audited this preclear on the above Grade
or Grades to the best of my ability and standard tech has been
applied to full End Phenomena," Auditor signs the cert in full, and
before HCO signs it.
When a student or preclear signs up for training or processing,
when the student or preclear reaches Tech Services, Tech Services
takes the Routing Form to the Tech See for the following to be
guaranteed:
"I guarantee that the above named preclear/student will receive
very good service in this Organization and will attain the expected
Grade or level of training." The Tech See signs his full name to
this guarantee.
This line is to be added into all Routing Forms immediately after
the student or pc's arrival at Tech Services.
This procedure is needed to alert Tech Sees, Auditors and
Supervisors to their full responsibility for real training and
effective processing in Scientology Organizations and to ensure
that we do deliver what we have, promised. CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD
Founder LRH:JZ:nt.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 203 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1971 Issue
III Remimeo OES Qual Sec C&A Examiner ATTESTATION AT CERTS AND
AWARDS Following the completion of the entire auditing and examiner
cycle, per HCO P/L 25 June 1970, "Expanded Lower Grades", the pc is
then routed to Certs and Awards where he signs the following
attestation form: ATTESTATION 1, , having completed (action or
grade) , do hereby attest by my signature below that 1, have,
through processing, gained, the ability (filled in by C & A per
latest issue Routing and Gradation Chart) to my complete
satisfaction. This statement is made entirely on my own cognizance
and without reservation. Preclear Signature Date Witness, C & A
Auditor's Name Note that this is the final step and is only
initiated AFTER the action or grade the preclear is being audited
on has been completed to correct and complete end phenomena to the
satisfaction of the preclear, the case supervisor, and the
Examiner, This is as outlined in standard technical procedure.
Craig Beeney, D/G Tech US for Robert H. Thomas, D/G US for Jane
Kember, G WW for Mary Sue Hubbard, CS G for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:CB:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 204 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT
GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street,
London WA HCO BULLETIN OF 6 APRIL 1957 [Excerpt] MEMBERSHIP
HANDLING
Memberships are handled by, and are the exclusive property of,
the File Clerk. The File Clerk also handles memberships, It will be
found that memberships in active times, if the files are up to date
and the stencils are well handled, will occupy from a third to a
half of the File Clerk's time and that is a very routine procedure
and people make so much work out of memberships and all you do is,
you take in the membership and you fill out the card and you have a
little letter or note of some sort and send it to the person. The
reason memberships is hard to do is because everybody runs into
memberships everything else. All Membership consists of is telling
people to renew, and renewing, and making out cards and so forth
and that's all it consists of. If there's anything else comes up on
the line it is somewhere else.
Now part of memberships is "change of address" and when your
change of address comes in you may have to cut some new
addressograph stencils, something of that order.
Membership consists of two channels. It has two incoming baskets.
One basket is memberships (which is just renewal or a new
membership) and the other basket is change of address and all
Changes of address and all memberships, go to CF, and they have two
baskets that sit side by side marked IN and two baskets that sit
side by side marked OUT, and you park those things (there's a
special arrangement of a table you can make with memberships which
is very good). We worked this out and it did prove to be good. We
take two baskets on the left of the table and then two baskets at
the extreme right of the table and the one which is to the edge of
the table is the membership basket and the one which is at the back
of the table is the change of address basket and we have them "in"
and "out" and then we put on that table and never disturb, all of
the materials necessary to do a membership or a change of address
and we just lay those materials out on the table. Stacks of paper
and the membership cards and everything we have to make out and do
and it's all on the table in plain sight in the order that they're
used. Thereby we can take, change of address and go straight
through them and take change of memberships and get them through
quickly so it doesn't take much time. Otherwise a membership clerk
is always going "Oh, what do I do now?" What they will send you in
the guise of memberships is fabulous. Somebody wants a book list,
what is my discount, and all that sort of thing; they have nothing
to do with memberships but come under business administration. If
you can tell people brutally that they are off-line when they try
to disturb the membership chain you'll find memberships don't
occupy very much time. But if everything comes in on the line that
appertains to members, including the policy that the Association
Secretary should make, which they try to throw away, why then you
have a mess.
LRH:rs.cden.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO
Bulletin of 6 April 1957, Central Files and ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Procurement. A complete copy can be found in Vol. 2, page 248.1
[Note: Certs and Awards is now the point of issuance of
Membership Cards and "pushes the Scientology Membership programme
along heavily." - FDD 18 Qual Int page 34. Two of its Promotional
Actions are: "82. Issues credentials that will be seen around-pins
that people will wear, certificates they will hang up, cards they
will show. 85 a. Pushes along the Free Membership programme and
makes sure Accounts sends a bill for the next year's Membership the
moment the six months expires AND IS ITS STATISTIC." HCO P/L 15
December 1965, see page 4.] 205
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 MAY 1960 CenOCon KEEPING MEMBERSHIPS
IN FORCE
In order to deal with the problem of professional auditors who
allow their memberships to lapse, the following routine action is
authorized:
When a membership lapses, the memberships clerk should write
three reminder letters. If the membership is not renewed HCO Area
See should then be notified by the memberships clerk. The HCO Area
See will then write a letter informing the person that if he does
not renew his membership within one month, his Certificate will
cease to be valid. If the membership is still not renewed,
Memberships and Addressograph must then be notified by the HCO Area
Sec. Addressograph should then remove the person's HPA or other
qualifying letters from his Address plate. However, the tab should
not be changed; in this way the person will still receive mailings
to auditors, and there is still a chance that his interest will be
revived and that he will eventually renew his membership. Peter
Hemery LRH:js.rd HCO Secretary WW Copyright (c) 1960 for by L. Ron
Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 5 JUNE 1962 CenOCon PERMANENT STAFF PRIVILEGE
Staff Members who complete Permanent Staff requirements may
receive the benefit of International Membership while they are on
the staff of a Central Organization or City Office.
A N/C invoice is made out by Accounts (so that records exist)
upon application by a staff member.
If a Permanent Staff Member leaves the Org voluntarily or is
dismissed for a valid reason, the International Membership fee
becomes payable (part of a year's membership to be worked out pro
rata). L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jw.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 206
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JULY 1963 CenOCon SALES OF LIFETIME
MEMBERSHIPS OR SHARES Due to projected changes in the corporate
status of Scientology organizations, no further sales of HASI Ltd
shares or Lifetime memberships are permitted anywhere in the world,
effective immediately, L. RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.cden Copyright (c)
1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 21 APRIL 1965 BPI Gen Non-Remimeo MEMBERSHIP ATTESTATIONS Notary
and Justice of the Peace notarizations are no longer necessary on
any member application forms. These have been made unnecessary. A
simple, signature is adequate. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:wmc.kd Copyright
(c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 207 HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF I SEPTEMBER 1965 Issue V Gen Non-Remimeo
MEMBERSHIP POLICIES 9Preserved Policy from former Policy Letters
which have been cancelled) Memberships
Members enrolling must be furnished their cards at once. However,
this is also done by application form and on that form the person
signing must pledge himself to abide by the rules, codes and
policies of the organization and that he understands there is no
refund of membership and that he does not belong to or work for any
hostile organization or group or any group undisclosed to us that
is dedicated to the harming of Mankind.
Only a signature is required, not a notary. Pins
Wherever possible, make it easy for persons to obtain and wear
Scientology pins, the S and double triangle.
Such a pin as available should be given new members. Pins should
be purchasable for a small sum along with books in the reception
office.
Policy as to who wears a Scientology pin is governed only by
their being a member and subscribing to the membership application
statement. However there is no penalty for non members wearing
general pins that do not bear notation of class for grade or state
of case. Membership Not Part of 10%
No 10% administrative percentage is to be sent to Saint Hill on
memberships sold. It all goes into the HCO Book Account in the area
where the membership is bought and is not part of the
organization's weekly gross income. Membership monies go to
dissemination. Memberships Non-Refundable
No membership monies are ever refundable even for a portion of a
year since the purchaser of one usually receives many times its
value in discounts within a few days or months. International
Membership for Staff Members
Staff members, full or part time, continuously employed and under
contract are given their International Membership yearly without
charge. Their Lifetime Membership must be purchased by themselves.
On departure from staff a staff member's International Membership
is cancelled as of that date, but may be renewed on proper payment.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.kd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard
(Note: The original PLs, now cancelled, from which these were ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED preserved, are in Volume 3, Price Engram section,
pages 91-136.] 208 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT
GREEN ON WHITE SECRETARIAL EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR Office of LRH SEC ED
147 INT 10 December 1965 Applies to Org Exec Secs for Execution
Address, Certs and Awards and Accounts MEMBERSHIP BILLING Your six
months free memberships are beginning to expire. Be certain to send
all free membership members a bill for a year's membership for the
next year on their expiry date and stating, "Your membership in -
is expiring. Please send us your cheque or money order to renew."
As this was the whole point of issuing free memberships and as the
majority will pay for renewal, the action is worth a lot to your
org and must not be neglected. It is a continuing action. Be sure
the line is in. [seal] I 0 L 0 G L. RON HUBBARD At - .......... I
F 0 [Note: Further Policy Letters on the Membership Programme can
be found in Volume 3, pages 143, 150, 151, 157, 165, 245-254 and
258.) 209 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 FEBRUARY 1972 Remimeo All
Staff Aft Auditors Add to Qual Personnel Hats IMPORTANT URGENT THE
PURPOSE OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT
The Department of Personnel Enhancement Division V,
Qualifications is held responsible for these things.
1. THAT NO MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS EXIST AMONGST STAFF, AUDITORS OR
IN ORG PUBLIC.
2. THAT ALL TRAINING AND AUDITING PROGRAMS OF STAFF, STUDENTS,
AUDITORS, INTERNES OR IN ORG PUBLIC ARE IN CORRECT SEQUENCE,
WITHOUT SKIPPED GRADIENT AND DONE.
3. THAT ALL STAFF CASES ARE PROGRESSING SATISFACTORILY WITH GOOD
OCA (APA) GAINS AND THAT NO NO CASE GAIN CASES ARE ON STAFF.
If there is an outness in any of these three purposes, it is the
DIRECTOR OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT who is held responsible,
regardless of where the violation occurred in the org or why.
Breakdown in Cramming (through no Misunderstood words being
found), breakdowns in training (because of skipped gradients),
failures of staff members (through no mis-U word handling,
programming for hatting and case) and counterintention of persons
on org staff or public lines (through no case gain) all lead
DIRECTLY to the breakdown and lack of prosperity of THE WHOLE ORG.
Thus the DIRECTOR OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT and his or her staff
HOLD THE KEYS TO STAFF AND ORG SUCCESS.
They do not hold HCO responsible or Tech responsible or C/Ses or
Supervisors. THEY GET THE JOB DONE!
Word Clearing is Priceless tech. They are the Custodians and
appliers of it.
Programming on smooth gradients is priceless tech. They are the
Custodians of it.
Staff personal cases and health make or break the org. The
personnel of Personnel Enhancement are the Custodians of these.
PERSONAL
The whole operating basis of Personnel Enhancement is PERSONAL.
There is no mass, disinterested, bureaucratic approach.
"Problems of Work" is the key to operating this Department.
Particle by Particle, step by step, each individual is HANDLED and
MAINTAINED. 210
REACH The Department does NOT just sit in one place waiting for
others to originate. A good Personnel Enhancement staff member
REACHES. And in spite of all rebuffs, gets the job done. It looks
for business all over the org and brings it in. ANATOMY An org is
made up of individuals. The customers are individuals. If each part
of the whole is handled then the whole will be complete and
successful. And what can go adrift with these individuals? Words
are misunderstood. The individual then goes blank on his materials
and does not act. Training and auditing skip gradients and leave
the person confused and inactive. Cases bog or are neglected or
health deteriorates and the individual is a drag on himself or the
group, or gaining not at all is destructive. SUMMARY So with these
three guiding purposes, the DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT can
make an org rise and rise and rise. With all departmental lines
adjusted to these purposes and with each of its staff in full
agreement and in action on them, the even partially established org
cannot fail. This is the repair crew, which, functioning well
individually and on an all hands basis at need, keeps the most
vital part of the org, its beings, in shape to run. This department
keeps each individual staff member running. And at need it keeps
the In Org public gaining. It is a very great trust. L. RON HUBBARD
Founder LRH:ne.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 211 FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY 1812 19th Street, N.W.,
Washington, D.C. FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1957 All
Staff INTENSIVES FOR STAFF Superseding all earlier arrangements,
staff intensives may be had in the following manner: I . The staff
member pays the units of the staff auditor. 2. The staff member
getting the auditing also forgoes his own pay (or units) for the
period audited. 3. Only 25 hours may be had at any one time. (Tip:
Under a unit pay system, if one picks a low week one (a) gives the
staff auditors something to do and (b) pays little for his
intensive.) No staff intensives may be had when all auditors are
needed on outside pcs. These have priority. L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd [Note: The above P/L was first issued on 11 April 1957
from HASI London.] NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT
GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street,
London W. I ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE OF I I JUNE 1957 STAFF
INTENSIVES
Staff Intensives cost the amount of the Auditor's unit for that
week plus room rent if any.
No staff member may have more than 25 hours in one block.
Staff receiving an intensive forgo their unit pay for that week.
The Department head must notify the Association Secretary of the
fact that a staff intensive is to take place no later than the
Thursday of the week prior to the intensive.
In the event of the Clinic being fully booked no staff intensive
may be had in that week.
It must be clearly understood that in the Clinic outside
preclears have priority and that if a preclear comes in which makes
a staff intensive difficult to fit in the staff intensive will be
immediately cancelled and carried forward to another week.
No later than the Monday morning of the intensive the staff
member receiving an intensive must pay to the Registrar the sum of
8 units of whatever value the unit is for the following Friday plus
any room rent which may be necessary. Staff intensives cannot be
charged against an account. Jack Parkhouse 212 NOT HCO POLICY
LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C. HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1958
STAFF CLEARING The Director of Processing is in charge of Staff
Clearing. LRH:bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD H.A.S.I. L.A. POLICY Effective
27 October 1958 (Refer to HCO Bulletin of 9 July 1958) No staff
member is to be processed by anyone other than another staff
member, assigned by the Dir of Processing who is in charge of all
processing. Julia Lewis Salmen Executive Director HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. 1. HCO POLICY
LETTER OF 22 JULY 1959 Issued in Saint Hill CenOCon PROCESSING OF
STAFF MEMBERS No person may be ordered to processing in any
organization without being suspended without pay for the duration
of the processing. The duration of the processing must be such as
to totally resolve the case if the person has been ordered to it.
LRH:brb.mc.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JUNE 1960 Sthil STAFF
AUDITING Staff auditing, the auditing of staff and by staff during
regular working hours is herewith suspended due to a new work
programme. Co-auditing or auditing arrangements after hours or on
week-ends is encouraged. L~ RON HUBBARD 213 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21
DECEMBER 1960 Re-issued from Sthil All Central Orgs All Staff
Member Hats STAFF CLEARING-NEW POLICY
All staff clearing co-audits are abolished herewith.
Instead, the following plan is effective immediately on receipt
in order to benefit staff personnel with more hours of processing
than were available in staff clearing courses.
HGCs will at once, put on staff one, two or three extra auditors
on a continuing basis, if they have no extra auditors as a normal
rule.
Staff members, providing they are permanent and full time and on
units may have 121/2 hour intensives as regular HGC pcs, during any
one week. The staff member can be audited mornings or afternoons,
21/2 hours per day.
In the case of a staff auditor only a 25 hour intensive may be
given or an evening 12 1/2 hour intensive.
The staff member does not necessarily surrender his whole pay for
a 121/2 hour intensive. He surrenders half a staff auditor's units
from his own units. The surrendered units go only to the salary
sum. In the case of a staff auditor receiving a 25 hour intensive,
his units are surrendered. If he takes a 121/2 hour evening
intensive, the person auditing is paid extra the units that were
surrendered.
All processing is handled as in the case of any HGC pc by the (c)
of P. All testing and admin and interview is the same for a staff
member as for any HGC pc.
The staff member enrolls for this through the Registrar with the
usual steps and invoice. The invoice is marked only the number of
units surrendered.
The Registrar, checked by HGC admin, carries a staff processing
roster. No staff member may have consecutive intensives. If a staff
member has an intensive, he must "fall in" afterwards at the bottom
of the waiting list. Only when no staff intensives are otherwise in
demand could this rule be violated.
During the remaining hours of his work day during a week when he
is getting an intensive a staff member is expected to be busy at
his post as usual. On posts where time off must be covered, the
staff member should arrange with someone to cover for him or her
the 21/2 hours he is being audited (as in the case of an instructor
having a lecture).
On a staff of 35, two auditors should be added to HGC strength
permitting 4 12 1/2 hour intensives to be given per week. This
permits a staff member to have an intensive about every eight
weeks.
HCO Board of Review is requested to expedite the examination of
permanent staff members on the Org Board, comm system and knowledge
of a general staff member's hat.
The (c) of P may use the extra two staff auditors to take up
slack on a sudden influx of pcs but the scarcity may not be
permitted to continue more than one week. In a slack period any HGC
auditor may be used for intensives for staff but not for more than
two weeks. LRH:js.gh.oden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1960 by L.
Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 214 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22
MARCH 1961 Central Orgs One to each Staff Member STAFF MEMBERS
ORDERED TO PROCESSING
The Association Secretary or the HCO Area Secretary can order a
staff member to processing, if it is considered necessary. The
maximum -number of hours allowed for this is 121/2, but 5 hours is
preferred. In this time, the rudiments, mainly withholds, and
Formula 15 should be flattened. On a person ordered to processing
nothing else may be run but these processes.
The processing must be carried out in the HGC, and supervised by
the (c) of P. When the processing is completed, the HCO Area
Secretary checks the staff member to see if he or she is ready to
resume his or her post in the organization.
A full report of all such processing must be forwarded to HCO
Technical Secretary WW'.
Should longer than 121/2 hours be considered necessary, the HCO
Area Secretary must submit a full report to the Executive Director,
for approval before any longer period than 121/2 hours is
undertaken. It is unlikely that it would be okayed due to the staff
intensive programme.
This processing should be taken in ordinary day schedule
auditing, and the staff member does not receive units for the time
spent in processing.
If after 121/2 hours, the HCO Area Secretary does not consider
the staff member is yet able to resume his post, the staff member
should be told this, and that it is up to him to get his case up to
the level where he can ably handle his post. L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.rd Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
215 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 APRIL 1961 CenOCon STAFF INTENSIVES
(Modified)
I have some particular goals in clearing.
I want to see the Association Secretary or Organizational
Secretary and the HCO Secretary cleared first, then the (c) of P,
then the Chief Registrar and Letter Registrar, then the remaining
executives and then the staff.
Although the HCO Policy Letter of Dee 21, 1960 lays down equal
amounts of auditing for each staff member, the rule was made before
speed of SOP Goals clearing was established.
The programme should be:
I . Abolish all former staff auditing arrangements for persons
who do not intend to stay with the Org any time (who are temporary
and have balked at signing a year's contract). These go on List 3
below.
2. For a Central Org, make 2 lists of staff. List One is the Assn
See (Org See), HCO Continental and/or Area See, the (c) of P, the
Chief Registrar and the Letter Registrar. Make up List Two which
consists of other executives and long term staff. Make up List
Three of staff balance as below. Put an auditor on List One and
rotate 121/2 hour intensives on it. Put another auditor on List Two
and rotate 12YZ hour intensives on it.
As you have deleted temporary staff members from List Two it is
not too long a list.
For the moment, pay these two auditors from units (but don't take
their units back from other staff members).
Make no charge to executives or staff members for their auditing
who are on Lists One or Two.
3. Make List Three. This comprises all temporary staff. Permit
them to have auditing when a staff auditor is idle, 12 1/2 hour
intensives, meaning two intensives each time a staff auditor has no
pcs. Temporary staff pay in half their units for the week they have
a 12 1/2 hour intensive. LIST ONE
The Assn (Org) See and others on the list may be audited on 121/2
hour intensives for which they do not pay or may be audited
straight on up to release, whichever is best in the opinion of
their auditor, depending on how far their case has gone and what
state they are in. If the 121/2 hours are extended, it must be to
another 12 1/2 hours. Other intensives for List One are put back
that much. LIST TWO The persons on this list are rotated equally,
regardless of where they have arrived. LIST THREE
The persons on this list are rotated equally. 216
4. City Offices should have one staff auditor auditing staff,
paid on units. Until the Assn Sec and Area Sec are Releases, they
receive 12 1/2 hours per week every other week, and remaining staff
take the remaining 12 1/2 hours in rotation.
When a state of release is obviously attained by the Assn Sec and
Area Sec they receive then their auditing in rotation with other
staff.
Now that we have easy releasing and faster clearing, let's take
advantage of it and get principals and staff clear before the rush
begins.
AUDITORS MANDATORY
A Central Org may not refuse to assign two auditors for Lists I
and 2 and may not use these auditors for paying pcs.
A City Office may not refuse to employ a staff staff auditor for
auditing staff only, and may not use said auditor for outside pcs.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ph.rd Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1961
Sthil
AUDITING SCHEDULES
Now that there is so little uncertainty on clearing persons, we
are now to invest both time and money in clearing all Saint Hill
Staff.
We have, and must continue to have, a Technical Secretary who is
a willing and able auditor.
Under the general supervision of myself, under the case
supervision (check outs on correctness of rudiments, goals,
terminals, levels and engrams) of Mrs. Hubbard, under the
assignment supervision of the Technical Secretary, Philip Quirino,
the programme is now launched.
All auditing shall consist of Routine 3 on whatever case. This
consists of finding goal, terminal and Pre-Hav levels and running
them, Security Checking and running engrams on the goalsterminal
chain.
Some auditing is to be done by staff members, as authorized, some
by the Technical Secretary, some by any assistants agreed upon for
the Technical Secretary.
LRH.il.rd L. RON HUBBARD 217
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1961 Sthil STAFF CLEARING
The Saint Hill Staff Clearing Programme will begin on Monday
October 9, 196 1.
Overall supervision of cases shall be done by Mary Sue Hubbard.
All assignments to auditors, auditing rooms, auditing reports,
book-keeping and time sheets, all files and administration of this
programme shall be handled by the Technical Secretary.
Anyone on staff, Scientologist or non-Scientologist, office or
domestic staff may have auditing under this programme. Auditing is
not compulsory. It must be requested by the person himself and the
request routed to the Technical Secretary.
Any certified auditor on staff, holding a certificate of Hubbard
Professional Auditor or higher may act as a staff auditor to staff.
Application must be made to the Technical Secretary. AUDITING FEES
All auditing shall be free to the staff member. The staff member
is not paid by us for receiving auditing.
We will pay each auditor 7/6d per hour for every hour of auditing
actually delivered providing it is delivered after working hours
(9.00 a.m. - 5.30 p.m.) and on all weekends. Auditing delivered
during working hours shall be unpaid.
To be paid for auditing, the assignment must have been made by
the Technical Secretary, must be signed on a regular Purchase Order
Form by the auditor, the Technical Secretary and finally
initialled, by myself, and a regular report of the session must be
turned in to the Technical Secretary. PROCESSES
The allowed processes of this auditing are only 1. Processing
Security Checks, 2. locating goal and terminal, 3. Pre Hav Scale
running and 4. engram running when specifically authorized by the
Technical Secretary.
All goals and terminals found must be verified by Mary Sue
Hubbard before being run, or at her discretion, checked out by an
auditor of her designation. An auditor doing checking will be paid
for his time. The Technical Secretary working after hours will be
paid for his time when devoted to this programme.
It will be seen, then, that only processes leading directly to
clearing are authorized.
Assists are not authorized for this programme. REPORTS
A special foldered file for each case being run will be kept by
the Technical Secretary and will be retained in confidence in a
locked file drawer,
Each session report will be reviewed by the Technical Secretary,
commented on and enclosed in the file. The file will be made
available to the auditor before session and must be turned in at
session end.
The Technical Secretary also shall make a weekly progress report
to me on cases being run.
Accounts must be given by Thursday noon of each week all session
purchase orders if they are to be paid that same week.
Accounts shall file these purchase orders in the personnel pay
folder of each auditor employed on this programme. The amounts
shall be paid not as pay but as bonuses. SUMMARY This is an
opportunity for auditors to earn bonus money and help Saint Hill.
This is an opportunity for all staff members to get clear, using
evenings and week-ends to be audited. They do not receive money or
pay for being audited but will receive more lasting benefit in
their lives, as witnessed by the stable gains now being made.
LRH:jl.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 218 by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY 1962 Central
Orgs STAFF STAFF AUDITOR'S HAT The following write up of a Staff
Staff Auditor's hat, as used in Washington DC, can be used
everywhere as a model hat for a Staff Staff Auditor. STAFF STAFF
AUDITOR HAT THE PURPOSE OF A STAFF STAFF AUDITOR: To keep Staff
morale high, by keeping missed withholds cleaned up. To see to it
that Staff gets best auditing possible. To Release and Clear Staff.
AN OUTLINE OF THE DUTIES OF A STAFF STAFF AUDITOR: 1. He accepts
his pc for processing. 2. He releases his pc from processing. 3.
He maintains his schedule. 4. He is responsible for his part in
the routing of staff preclears. 5. He routes and handles all
dispatches routed to him. 6. He answers all mail routed to him. 7.
He makes out his auditor report neatly. S. He arranges missed
withhold interviews with the Technical Director for his preclears.
9. He helps maintain his auditing and testing room. 10. He
maintains his hat and is responsible for knowing his hat. 11. He
is responsible for the E-Meter issued to him. 12. He is
responsible for the results he gets on his preclears. 13. He
follows auditing procedures as issued in HCO Bulletins. 14. He
maintains the Auditor's Code and the Code of a Scientologist. 15.
He keeps auditing ability good. 16. He clears staff members. 17.
He follows all organization policies. 18. He sets a good example
for HGC Staff Auditors. 19. He does other duties as assigned by the
Technical Director such as checking Staff Auditors on HGC
Bulletins, or helping give missed withhold checks on HGC preclears.
20. As staff deserves the best auditing in the world, the Staff
Staff Auditor must do all that is possible to keep his skill high
and handle his post in a business-like and orderly fashion. 21. He
follows the Technical Director's advice regarding his preclear.
ACCEPTANCE AND RELEASE OF PRECLEARS I . A Staff Staff Auditor can
refuse only a preclear he feels he cannot help. 2. He may refuse
to process a preclear for whom he has a marked antipathy. 3. He can
refuse to release from processing a preclear whom he feels it would
be dangerous to the survival or morale of the Organization to
release at that time. SCHEDULING The Staff Staff Auditor should
maintain quite exactly the working hours of the 219
Organization and his auditing schedule. It is a violation of the
Auditor's Code to be late to sessions with the preclear. This is
most important, then.
Any time lost in processing which is due to the lateness of the
Staff Staff Auditor will have to be made up by that Staff Staff
Auditor. Any time lost due to the lateness of the preclear will not
be made up by the Staff Staff Auditor.
SCHEDULING
The Staff Staff Auditor will follow the schedule posted by the
Technical Director. He should check the Information Board in the
Auditors' Room for his auditing schedule, the room assigned, and
for special interviews requested by the Technical Director for his
preclear. Also for any further assignments after his auditing day
has finished.
AUDITOR REPORTS
The Staff Staff Auditor makes out, daily, an Auditor's Report in
duplicate. The carbon of this is kept in his preclear's folder; the
original is sent to HCO WW. The Staff Staff Auditor places the
carbon in his preclear's folder and puts the original in the HGC
Administrator's "In Basket". This must be kept orderly since we
don't want staff preclear's Auditor Reports floating around all
over the Organization for anyone to read.
CONDUCT
The Staff Staff Auditor is not auditing a follow staff member and
"buddy". He is auditing a preclear, and should conduct himself with
an orderly, business-like and professional attitude while auditing
his preclear. A Staff Staff Auditor's preclear should be treated
like any preclear. A Staff Staff Auditor should understand that
he's auditing a preclear who has a bank, and should not let the
fact that he's a staff member and a Scientologist colour his
decisions in auditing that preclear. Neither should he let this
fact excuse him from conducting his sessions with a professional
attitude. A preclear is a preclear no matter who it may be.
RESULTS
The Staff Staff Auditor must get results on his preclears. He
should attend any auditor training provided by the Organization. He
has the Technical Director (c) of P'ing his auditing and should
fully co-operate with the Technical Director in the auditing of his
preclears.
The Staff Staff Auditor helps the survival of the whole
Organization to the degree that he makes staff members more able to
handle their jobs.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Sec WW
for
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:cw.rd Copyright
(c)
1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
220
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 SEPTEMBER 1962
(Reissued from Sec ED No. 397 of Washington DC)
CenOCon
STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM
This replaces all programs; there are no other Staff Clearing
Programs of any kind, no auditing is being given to Staff. This
doesn't disturb Staff families and so forth being fed into the HGC
at unit rates as offered for DC only when you have a spare auditor
or intern or something like that. But it does knock out all other
Staff Clearing Programs and it immediately releases and relieves
Staff Staff Auditor Number One and Two, and Three, and cancels all
directives as pertaining to these people. That's gone.
In its place we put a Staff Clearing Program which we will call
the Staff 3GA Clearing Program. The essence of this is goals
finding and administration. The personnel required for it are a
Goals Finder and an Assistant. The Goals Finder has no other post
or activity of any kind. He is simply Goals Finder and keeps more
or less regular auditing hours; he has an office and auditing room
which are the same thing-this auditing room also has in it an
administrative desk for use after auditing hours.
The Goals Finder finds goals on Staff Members when they are
ready. The readiness of a Staff Member to have his goal found is
determined by the availability of the Goals Finder and by the
readiness of the case to have a goal found. If there are many cases
ready to have a goal found, it is selected by lot-bamboo sticks,
shake the lucky number out of the box and that's you for next week.
All other auditing activities are either leading to finding the
goal or listing the goal out. This program does not halt with one
goal, it goes on through-but no second goal may be found on anyone
as long as there is a person who hasn't had their first goal found.
The only thing that could derange this is some unlocked for
circumstance such as somebody's just broken his neck and will be in
the hospital for 17 weeks or some such thing. Then the Goals Finder
would start right through on his next series.
The activity of the staff who are auditing each other is as
follows:- A Problems Intensive; goals listing for the 850 list;
then it just skips right there, the person gets another Problems
Intensive if they are waiting, they can't be hurt by that many
Problems Intensives.
Then there's this area where they pass in to the hands of the
Goals Finder-he snaps them off post and audits them full auditing
hours until that goal is found. That is not by intensive, but is by
how long it takes. If he finds the goal in 5 hours on Monday, then
the next person on the list is taken on Tuesday; somebody else he
takes a week and a half to find their goal, so he takes a week and
a half to find their goal. It's not by intensive, it's by goal.
Then that gives us the remainder of our activity of mutual
auditing on staff which is the listing out of that goal. Of course
the Assistant to the Goals Finder and the Goals Finder keep their
eye on that listing activity to make sure that the goal is cleaned
up at the beginning of each session, and that it is going smoothly.
Now there are two zones of activity: 1. For the inexperienced,
the untrained, or the fellow who doesn't think he is too competent
to audit somebody. This we call the Staff Co-audit and that meets
at least twice a week in the evening for a three hour session. They
would give three hours and receive three hours. Like, they would
give
221
three hours on Tuesday, and receive three hours on Thursday. Now
this activity is supervised by the part time Assistant of the Goals
Finder who is also the Administrator-he comes on duty at the end of
the day's auditing in the HGC and does his administrative action,
and on the off evenings, when he's not supervising any class, he
can catch up on his administrative work, reports and so on. This
fellow has a board which denotes the Staff Co-audit and how many
people are on that.
Now we come to the second activity on staff which is a mutual
auditing activity and everybody has a pc, and everybody is a pc.
These hours of auditing are given at the discretion of these
people. They can audit in their own rooms or most anyplace.
Everyone of their sessions has to have a full auditing report which
must be brought into the Administrator of the Staff 3GA Clearing
Program, who is the Staff Auditor who is also the Supervisor of the
Staff Co-auditand that auditor report must be checked out and OKd
and eye must be kept on the progress of the sessions.
There's a rule here that a person may not receive more auditing
hours than they give, so therefore the number of auditing hours
received and given must be posted as part of the posting on the
lists of this mutual auditing activity. Of course the Staff
Co-audit keeps itself more or less straight, but if somebody's
absent from that, God knows what happens. This must be discouraged.
On goof-offs no persuasive action will be taken-we will just say,
"This is the way it is, this is what you do, and God help you if
you don't. If you're not interested in clearing somebody in the
Staff 3GA Clearing Program we don't think you're interested in
being part of this Org." We won't threaten with immediate
excommunication because people get restimulated and everything
else, but don't expect on a Clearing Program everything is going to
go smooth and everybody's going to stay in session-because they're
not. There will be a lot of randomity and it takes just pure
unadulterated force to keep it in line.
Now there must be checking of Rudiments, and checking for Missed
W/Hs and such activities as that. How these are arranged is
relatively unimportant but they must exist.
If the Goals Finder finds that a Staff Auditor is goofing up on
his Staff Clearing Program pc, there should be an investigation of
HGC to find out what that Staff Auditor is doing to the public pcs.
The Goals Finder moves as rapidly as possible to get as many
goals found and checked out as possible. He will ordinarily want
these goals checked out by somebody else, so there should be
somebody else ready to check them out-it won't amount to more than
one or two a week. As soon as we have completed all the Staff all
the way around on finding the first goals we go back to the
beginning again and find the second goals.
When a new person comes on staff he is added to the bottom of the
list. Order of seniority must be established.
There is no other complication on this Program. There are no
check sheets required from these people, there's nothing required
from these people.
The Goals Finder finding bad sessions going on should make some
duressful action-he should say, "The bulletins were available, you
didn't read them-what the hell was wrong with you?" This is tough.
This program is not the courtesy staff mutual co-audit or staff
clearing we've had in the past where we were being nice to
everybody and marking time. There's a vast difference here-this is
our determination to get everybody cleared on Staff. It takes
somebody's determination to get people cleared; a person himself
bucking into this line is apt to quail and fall back, so therefore
you have to keep the determination high to get the project
completed. It's not courtesy; our feeling is if a person does not
want to get cleared or help clear somebody he has no business
whatsoever in the Organization. That's just that! Bang!
222
The Administrator makes the team assignments, but appeal may be
made to the Goals Finder, whose adjudication is final. You can have
an additional Part Time Administrator to help outand if you have
another Goals Finder well fine. There's no limit on this except the
amount of talent. YOU MUST NOT PUT A NON STHIL GRADUATE ON THE POST
OF GOALS FINDER. It would cause the demise of the Org.
This program abolishes the responsibility of the (c) of P for
Staff state of case, that all goes under Goals Finder Hat.
Co-audit teams which exist already on staff and which are
successful should not be broken up. This would be a breach of the
Auditor's Code-"Do not permit a frequent change of auditors."
That is the program as I see it.
If this is carried forward quite forcefully and quite
persuasively and without anybody listening to any nonsense, and so
forth, you're going to wind up with, in a very few months, a bunch
of clears on Staff.
If you kept this program going forward and furnished people for
training to Sthil on whom you could count when they came home in
sufficient number so that you've got them for the public and you've
got them for Staff you'll wind up with a completely OT Staff before
you got through.
And I can see that this is well within our existing Technical
Reality.
Two further notes:
An eye should be kept on the listing after goal is found and it
should be part of the Goals Finder's Hat to check such cases that
are listing to clear, and frankly his time from the time he ceases
to audit on his regular auditing period during the day, to the end
of the working day, should be more or less consumed with checking
over cases and seeing how they are going rather than doing
administration. These cases should be checked over for free needle
and this and that and the other thing.
The Missed W/H Programme run on staff by Org See or through HCO
or by HCO or by the Org See See or anything else, any security
programme of any kind or any missed W/H programme of any kind, has
absolutely nothing to do with the Staff 3GA Clearing Programme.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright
(c)
1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(Amended by
HCO P/L 17
June 1963, Staff Clearing Program, page 226.)
223
HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
(Reissued from Washington DC)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER AD 12
CenOCon
GOAL PROCESSING - IMPORTANCE OF
It is of the importance of Policy that Staff Members are not left
with unfinished cycles of action on goals processing.
It has come to my attention in many instances on the return of an
Organization Member from Saint Hill, or after an Organization
Member's goal has been found in an Organization and checked out,
that a state of utter neglect sets in which is highly detrimental
to the efficiency of the Organization as well as the case of the
individual. The longer a goal is left unlisted the more trouble is
going to be had in listing it.
Recent research has revealed that the earliest goals found on
individuals were probably the right goals, and if these goals are
checked out they should be listed as soon as possible. Finding a
Dynamic and finding an Item may be of the utmost therapeutic value,
and finding a Goal may be of considerable interest to the pc and
the auditor alike, but the most important step is not undertaken
until the goal is listed. That listing is sometimes long and
arduous is no reason to forget to do it.
The full effect of goals processing and indeed any lasting effect
from goals processing is only attained when the state of clear is
reached.
I am cross-in having found out that nearly every Saint Hill
Graduate returned to an Organization has been given no auditing on
the subject of Goals Item Listing.
Finding a Dynamic and an Item or finding a Goal does not make a
Clear. It is only listing that makes a Clear. Listing should be
accomplished to a state of complete free needle on all lines. There
is no substitute for this. We do not want a bunch of 1/3 or
1/4
cleared persons about who are still enturbulated with their cases
and who still do not have a subjective reality on clearing.
The utmost attention will be given this at once by all Technical
Directors, Directors of Processing, Staff Goals Finders, as well as
HCO Sees and Org Sees. The essence of the Policy is-do not let half
cleared persons stay half cleared around staffs. Audit them out to
Clear-check it out to clear. We do not want to be the cobbler's
children.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
224
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 APRIL 1963
Sthil
THE SAINT HILL STAFF CO-AUDIT
All Co-auditing on Saint Hill staff is under the general charge
of the Course Secretary and under the direct handling and
supervision of the Co-Audit Supervisor.
Any session given to any staff member must become a matter of a
proper auditor's report and all auditor's reports must be turned in
to the Co-audit Supervisor within 12 hours from session end.
All permanent records and Case Folders are retained by the
Co-audit Supervisor and must be made available to auditors before
the start of sessions.
All auditing assignments are made by the Co-audit Supervisor
after consultation with the Course Secretary.
Any disagreement with assignments as to time, auditor or
preclear, should be made directly to the Co-audit Supervisor and if
not satisfactorily settled may be appealed to the Course Secretary
whose decision shall be final.
Disagreements with technical directions should be taken up with
the C Co-audit Supervisor before the session to which the
directions apply and if not satisfactorily settled may be appealed
to the Course Secretary. This makes it important that folders be
examined by auditors well before session time. Departures from
technical directions given may not be undertaken at the beginning
of or during a session. If there is no time to appeal, do as
directed and appeal afterwards before the next session to be given.
Adhere to current auditing practice and technology. Ignorance of
it is no excuse, and no allowances will be made. Do your best in
any session and find out about any questionable points as soon as
possible.
Auditors will receive in so far as possible as many hours as they
give. No all audit-no auditing, or the reverse, all receiving and
no giving will be tolerated.
Any staff member if auditing or being audited by Saint Hill
staff, or auditing as a staff member on such things as assists, are
members of the Co-audit. There are no exceptions, special
arrangements or "withdrawals from the Co-audit". If a Scientologist
staff member is on staff he or she is part of the Co-audit. If a
Scientologist staff member is not on the Co-audit he or she is not
on staff. Exemption to this rule may be obtained only by permission
in writing from both the Co-audit Supervisor, and the Course
Secretary to be exempted.
By Scientology staff member is meant any staff member ever
awarded any certificate or Course, completion at any time in
Dianetics or Scientology.
A family member of the Co-audit is one who is related by blood or
marriage to a Saint Hill Scientology staff member and who has been
awarded at, any time a certificate or Course completion in
Dianetics or Scientology. Such a person may join the staff Co-audit
but may not do so temporarily or for only some of the sessions.
Permission for such membership in the Coaudit is proposed to the
Co-audit Supervisor and must be passed on by the Course Secretary.
No fees are paid by members of the Co-audit for auditing or being
audited regardless of the time or length of sessions. Fees are paid
for auditing only for assists or auditing nonScientology staff and
only when arranged in advance by the Course Secretary, and only for
the period stated in the arrangement.
Clear bracelets at the expense of the organization will be
awarded members of the Co-audit cleared on the Co-audit when
clearing requirements are met.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
225
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1963
(Amends HCO Policy Letter of September 10, 1962)
CenOCon
STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM
This replaces all programs: there are no other Staff Clearing
Programs of any kind, no auditing is being given to Staff. This
doesn't disturb Staff families and so forth being fed into the HGC
at unit rates as offered for DC only when you have a spare auditor
or intern or something like that. But it does knock out all other
Staff Clearing Programs.
In its place we put a Staff Clearing Program which we will call
the Staff R3 Clearing Program. The essence of this is supervision
and administration. The personnel required for it are a supervisor
(Saint Hiller) and an Assistant. He has an office and auditing room
which are the same thing-this auditing room also has in it an
administrative ' desk for use after auditing hours.
The activity of the staff who are auditing each other is as
follows:- A Problems Intensive, if necessary; then
running on
current goals procedures.
A Saint Hiller is appointed as Staff Supervisor of Staff Cases.
He calls them in during the day, checks over cases and progress-can
even audit them. Does anything and everything to clear them.
Now there are two zones of activity: 1. For the inexperienced,
the untrained, or the fellow who doesn't think he is too competent
to audit somebody. This we call the Staff Co-audit and that meets
at least twice a week in the evening for a three hour session. They
would give three hours and receive three hours. Like, they would
give three hours on Tuesday, and receive three hours on Thursday.
Now this activity is supervised by the part time Assistant of the
Supervisor who is also the Administratorhe comes on duty at the end
of the day's auditing in the HGC and does his administrative
actions, and on the off evenings, when he's not supervising any
class, he can catch up on his administrative work, reports and so
on. This fellow has a board which denotes the Staff Co-audit and
how many people are on that.
Now we come to the second activity on staff which is a mutual
auditing activity and everybody has a pc, and everybody is a pc.
These hours of auditing are given at the discretion of these
people. They can audit in their own rooms or most anyplace.
Everyone of their sessions has to have a full auditing report which
must be brought into the Administrator of the Staff Clearing
Program, who is the staff Auditor who is also the Supervisor of the
Staff Co-audit-and that auditor report must be checked out and OK'd
and an eye must be kept on the progress of the sessions.
There's a rule here that a person may not receive more auditing
hours than they give, so therefore the number of auditing hours
received and given must be posted as part of the posting on the
lists of this mutual auditing activity. Of course the Staff
Co-audit keeps itself more or less straight, but if somebody's
absent from that Godknows what happens. This must be discouraged.
On goof-offs no persuasive action will be taken-we will just say,
"This is the way it is, this is what you do, and God help you if
you don't. If you're not interested in clearing somebody in the
Staff Clearing Program we don't think you're interested in being
part of this Org." We won't threaten with immediate excommunication
because people get restimulated and everything else, but don't
expect on a Clearing Program everything is going to go smooth and
everybody's going to stay in session-because they're not. There
will be a lot of randomity and it takes just pure unadulterated
force to keep it in line.
Now there must be checking of Rudiments, and checking for Missed
W/Hs and such activities as that. How these are arranged is
relatively unimportant but they must exist.
If the Supervisor or Technical Director finds that a Staff
Auditor is goofing up on his Staff Clearing Program pc there should
be an investigation of HGC to find out
226
what that Staff Auditor is doing to the public pcs.
The Co-audit Supervisor moves as rapidly as possible to get as
many goals run out as possible.
When a new person comes on staff he is added to the bottom of the
list, Order of seniority must be established.
From time to time introduce any necessary training to keep the
members of the Co-audit abreast of current technique.
The Supervisor finding bad sessions going on should make some
duressful action-he should say, "The Bulletins were available, you
didn't read them-what the hell was wrong with you?" This is tough.
This program is not the courtesy staff mutual co-audit or staff
clearing we've had in the past where we were being nice to
everybody and marking time. There's a vast difference here-this is
our determination to get everybody cleared on Staff. It takes
somebody's determination to get people cleared; a person himself
bucking into this line is apt to quail and fall back, so therefore
you have to keep the determination high to get the project
completed. It's not courtesy; our feeling is if a person does not
want to get cleared or help clear somebody he has no business
whatsoever in the Organization. That's Just That! Bang!
The Administrator makes the team assignments, but appeal may be
made to the Supervisor or Technical Director, whose adjudication is
final. You can have an additional Part Time Administrator to help
out - and if you have another, well fine. There's no limit on this
except the amount of talent. YOU MUST NOT PUT A NON STHIL GRADUATE
ON THE POST OF SUPERVISOR. It would cause the demise of the Org.
This program abolishes the responsibility of the (c) of P for
Staff state of case, that all goes under the Supervisor's hat. The
Supervisor could be the Technical Director or another Saint Hill
graduate working under Technical Director.
Co-audit teams which exist already on staff and which are
successful should not be broken up. This would be a breach of the
Auditor's Code-"Do not permit a frequent change of auditors."
That is the program as I see it.
If this is carried forward quite forcefully and quite
persuasively and without anybody listening to any nonsense, and so
forth, you're going to wind up with, in a very few months, a bunch
of clears on Staff.
ARC Break assessments are done where necessary. Anything and
everything is done to help clearing of staff.
If you kept this program going forward and furnished people for
training to Sthil on whom you could count when they came home in
sufficient number so that you've got them for the public and you've
got them for Staff you'll wind up with a completely OT Staff before
you get through.
And I can see that this is well within our existing Technical
Reality.
Two further notes:
An eye should be kept on the progress of cases and it should be
part of the Supervisor's Hat to check such cases that are listing
to clear, and frankly his time from the time he ceases to audit on
his regular auditing period during the day, to the end of the
working day, should be more or less consumed with checking over
cases arid seeing how they are going rather than doing
administration. These cases should be checked over for free needle
and this and that and the other thing.
The Missed W/H program run on staff by Org Sec or through HCO or
by HCO or by the Org See Sec or anything else, any security program
of any kind or any Missed W/H program of any kind, has absolutely
nothing to do with the Staff Clearing Program, L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright 0 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
227 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 AUGUST 1963 CenOCon ARC BREAK
ASSESSMENTS ON STAFF (Cancels previous similar policies on Staff
O/Ws, Missed W/Hs, etc)
An ARC Break Assessment, as per HCO Bulletin of July 5, AD 13,
should be done on all Staff weekly, replacing any Missed Withhold
or By-Passed Charge checks currently being done.
This check is primarily the responsibility of the HCO Area Sec
but may be delegated to the Tech Dir, (c) of P, or whoever is in
charge of the Staff Clearing Programme, but no delegation of the
action relieves the HCO See from responsibility for getting it done
well and weekly. L. RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.rd Copyright (c) 1963 by L.
Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 DECEMBER
1963 CenOCon ORG STAFF W/H CHECKS (Cancels earlier Pol Ltrs on
Missed W/H Checks)
All Central Org and City Office Staff Members must be given a W/H
session each week, particularly execs and staff auditors.
By new Classification Chart, only general O/W may be run at Level
11, and Itsa on the org below that level. The (c) of P is
responsible under guidance of HCO Area See. As these sessions are
longer, possibly an hour or so, Co-audit assignment and a chit for
it should be arranged, L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1963
by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 228 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 13 DECEMBER 1963 Sthil Only CO-AUDIT Co-audit will hereafter
concentrate only on OT processes. A period of training for all
Co-audit members will be entered upon as of December 16, 1963.
Until after Christmas Basic Auditing and TRs and general O/W will
be concentrated on during scheduled auditing periods. After
Christmas special training will be given in: I . Basic Auditing for
Goals 2. Nomenclature and Definitions 3, Technique of running. It
is expected that by February 15, 1964, all the data will be
instinctively known by pcs, and auditors and goals processes will
then be entered upon by all Co-audit members. No further goals
processing or other processing than the above will be done on the
Sthil Coaudit until further advices. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.rd
Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 229
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 MARCH 1964 CenOCon STAFF REGULATIONS
STAFF INTENSIVES
Any permanent staff member of a Central Organization may buy
auditing from that organization's HGC by:
(a) Paying one half the staff auditor's units.
(b) Giving up his or her own units for that week.
(c) Arranging during the week of the intensive to have his or her
post covered adequately.
Any such intensive must be taken the full 25 hours in that week
and may not be proportioned into other weeks for any reason.
Such intensives are made available through the Registrar but may
be scheduled only by the Director of Processing,
No staff intensive may be scheduled by deferring auditing
purchased by non-staff members. Outside pcs, have priority. STAFF
TRAINING
Academy Training is not available to any staff member solely by
reason of being a staff member.
A staff member must take a leave of absence to be trained. No
staff member may be ordered to training. (See earlier regulations.)
STAFF CO-AUDITING
Staff Co-auditing arrangements may be made by the Case Supervisor
on the staff's own time.
All folders of staff co-audit members are submitted to and
reviewed by the Case Supervisor, not less than once for every five
sessions.
Staff co-auditing should be on a co-audit pair basis with
turn-about, the auditor auditing and then being audited by his pc
Sessions should alternate one for one.
No co-auditor should give more hours than he or she receives.
No co-auditor should receive more than he or she gives.
All pairing of teams is under the direction of the Case
Supervisor whose word in such matters is final.
Pairing of teams should be on the basis of comparable class.
In staff co-auditing particular attention should be given to
completing any auditing cycle begun as per the tape of March 19, AD
14.
The tapes of April and March AD 14 are a requisite for both
members before any co-auditing may be done.
Only concurrent HGC allowed processes are permitted by staff
co-audit members with the addition of Itsa for supervised teams.
Certain co-audit teams may be required by the Case Supervisor to
audit and be audited in a central place under direct supervision.
No staff co-auditing may be undertaken without
I . Specific permission from the Case Supervisor.
2. Without routine auditing schedules adequate to obtain case
gain and
3. Without making a regular and factual auditor's report and
enclosing it in a folder for the pc.
Husband-wife teams are permitted but under the above regulations
and with ARC Break assessments available by another auditor in case
of bad consequences or cessation of auditing. LRH:dr.rd L. RON
HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
230 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1965 Remimeo Staff Hats ALL
DIVISIONS BONUSES
The only bonuses which may be awarded staff members shall consist
of courses and intensives.
Courses awarded will consist of one course under the Academy
system employed after this date.
Intensives: shall consist of 12 1/2 hour or 25 hour intensives
according to the bonus awarded. STAFF CO-AUDIT
All routinely scheduled staff co-auditing is cancelled effective
I July 1965, except for assists including ARC Break, PTP and Missed
W/H assists.
Solo auditing successfully carried out, but subject to (c) of P
supervision, is permitted, and solo auditors are permitted to do
auditing by list to give each other assists. REVIEW
Bonus auditing award may include Department Review auditing to
handle various case types and ease scheduling. GRADES
Staff Members must be audited up through the Grades properly in
the HGC or in Review.
The additional processes of a Grade may also be run. POWER
PROCESSES
No staff member may be run on a Power Process except by an
auditor properly qualified in the Review Case Cracking Unit.
EMERGENCY
No staff member or executive of a section, department or division
or org under Emergency Condition may have auditing. AFFLUENCE
Staff, members in a section, department, or division designated
as in Affluent Condition are favoured in bonus awards. FIELD STAFF
MEMBERS
A Field Staff Member who has sent twenty persons into the org may
have a course or a 12 1/2 hour intensive at his or her election.
EXTRA STAFF
Enough Tech or Review extra staff must be on hand to give every
staff member in the org a 12 1/2 hour intensive every 6 weeks.
But this staff may not be counted in computing the tech-admin
ratio. These are the staff staff auditors.
This balance may not be cancelled out by overload. But other
auditors may be used, such as Review Auditors in this programme.
QUALITY
Staff members should have fully qualified auditors in their
auditing. To qualify additionally as a staff staff auditor, a staff
auditor must also have an 231
excellent record of personal case gains and good T.A. STAFF STAFF
AUDITORS DURING EMERGENCY
When an entire org is under Emergency, staff staff auditors are
assigned to promotion duties such as mailings, etc. COURSES
A staff member awarded a course instead of an intensive may have
only one course and may be only on quarter pay or units for that
period. SAINT HILL COURSE AWARD
Only the higher status staff member may be sent to the Saint Hill
Course as an award and only for a very praiseworthy accomplishment.
The Saint Hill Course is awarded a staff member only by the
Office of LRH.
This does not prevent staff members from undertaking their own
training at Saint Hill with some org assistance on expenses. SAINT
HILL AUDITING
A staff member of very high status in any org may be awarded
auditing at Saint Hill, but only for praiseworthy accomplishments.
This award is only at the personal orders of LRH. LIMITED AMOUNTS
A staff member may only have 121/2 hours at a time in the HGC
from staff staff auditors of the HGC or, in Review, only to a
result, which may vary from 8 hours to 50. But unless specified no
staff member may be awarded Review auditing more than once in an
org which has a Case Cracking Section.
There are no Review staff staff auditors. Auditing there is done
only by the regular Review staff. PARTIALITY
Aside from Emergency and Affluent Conditions the bonus of
auditing and courses should be spread evenly.
No executive has any right to order a staff member to auditing
for several intensives at the expense of other staff.
Staff of portions of an org in other Conditions than Emergency
and Affluence should be treated fairly. STAFF MEMBER FAMILIES
No members of families of staff may have staff staff auditing.
They may however, as a special favour, be given professional rates.
An org does not owe auditing to a staff member's family.
The Hardship Section of the Department of Certificates and Awards
often will have auditors on fist for the auditing of the staff
members' families. COMM EV
No Comm Ev or Court or executive may after this date sentence
anyone to auditing.
Such Ethics bodies may, however, deprive a person of auditing or
training or technical communication or any communication. RECORDS
All records of course and auditing awards and rotation thereof
amongst staff are kept by the Department of Certificates and
Awards. AUTHORITY OF AWARDS
All authorities for bonuses for intensives or courses must stem
only from the Office of LRH in the org. LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard 232 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1966 Remimeo Dist Staff
Students REGULATIONS FOR AUDITING OF STAFF AND STUDENTS
In HCO Pol Ltr of 24 May 1965 Student Guide to Acceptable
Behaviour, it states under # 15, "Do not give any processing to
anyone under any circumstances without direct permission of the
Course Supervisor (Emergency Assists excepted)", and # 16, "Do not
receive any processing from anyone under any circumstances without
the express permission of the Course Supervisor" (now (c) of T).
In HCO Pol Ltr of I April 1960 Regulations for Staff Members and
Ex-Staff Members, # 2, "Any Staff Member of the organization may
not audit any current preclear or student unless that preclear or
student has been signed up for processing in the Hubbard Guidance
Centre by the Registrar and has been assigned the auditor by the
Director of Processing" (now HGC Admin).
These policies are still in effect. Any Staff Member, student or
Interne requiring an assist or Review (unless an Emergency) must
notify their Dept Head who arranges with Qualifications Div, Dept
of Review for an assist to be given if the Dept Head deems it
necessary.
The only exception is the Clearing Course Student who is handled
entirely by the Clearing Course Supervisor and may not be audited,
sent to Review, or given an assist (except in an Emergency like an
Injury) by anyone. The Clearing Course Supervisor is notified if a
Clearing Course student is having difficulty with their case at
home, at work, etc and the Clearing Course Supervisor handles it.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' 233 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill
Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY 1970
Remimeo (TECHNICAL) All Tech Hats C/0's Hat Exec Dir Hat Chaplain's
lain's Hat Qual Sec Hat Dept 13 Hat C/S Hats C/S Checksheets HCO
Area Sec Hat E/O Hat CASES AND MORALE OF STAFF
Two recent circumstances have called to attention urgently a
relationship of the VIABILITY (survival value) of an org and STAFF
CASES.
X Org was failing. It was causing trouble on world publication
lines. An independent survey on cases found 47 percent of the cases
on that staff were failed cases, mainly because of lack of
auditing. The 4th Mate Athena began a single handed project to
straighten up these cases and get them functioning. Because of this
(and other admin actions) the org began to function, outstanding
actions were done and the org became solvent where it had
previously not even been paying its staff. It is now fulfilling its
obligations over the world.
Y major Org was found to be down morale, non-functional and
dwindling. A survey showed 57 percent failed cases with 87%
mentioning no wins. It was not paying its staff and was being
bolstered by the SO. The early action is to handle staff cases. The
SO has the situation well in hand. But it shows graphically what
staff case neglect will do to an org.
Many earlier cases are on record. Varying degrees of poor tech,
altered tech and almost total loss of tech have illustrated
gruesomely that INATTENTION TO STAFF CASES CAN ALL BUT DESTROY AN
ORG OR ACTIVITY.
The reason why squirrel groups fail in the first year or two is
the alter-is and abandonment of actual tech plus guilt. Here the
cases, if handled at all, get butchered.
The factor therefore is a very important one. The policy
therefore is:
THE CASES OF STAFF MEMBERS REQUIRE ATTENTION AND CASE GAIN.
There are multitudes of reasons why this "can't happen". "No
auditors", "have to handle the public", "GI would crash if any
people were off post being audited", "can't afford extra auditors",
and thousands more can be offerred in excuse for not auditing
staff. Financial reasons are so unreal as to be treasonable. As
when cases aren't handled the GI crashes. It's all rather like "if
we put any fuel in the car we won't have any money to make the
trip".
It is not generally recognized that when lower grades and full
tech slipped out, ethics came crashing in. It was just the time
when quickie auditing began to be done that ethics in orgs became a
problem. The HCO org board slipped from Dept I (Routing and
Recruitment functions) to Dept 3 (Ethics functions) because Div IV
(the Tech Division) ceased to handle staff cases as well as public.
Div V (Correction) neglected to notice and tech slid into it. Div 2
(Dissemination) slid into the Public Divisions because new public
had to be gotten-there "wasn't enough to audit" to use Central
Files pcs,
In short, when tech lost full use and was not used and used well
on staff cases even the org board scrambled.
All this when analyzed and found is of course being put right.
But from this we learn 234
1. SHORT CUTTING TECH DELIVERY IS FATAL.
2. LOSS OF AND FAILURE. TO USE VALID DIANETICS AND
SCIENTOLOGY TECH FOR WHATEVER REASON IS FATAL TO AN ORG'S
SURVIVAL.
3. FAILURE TO HANDLE STAFF CASES WITH FULL TECH AND GOOD
AUDITING CRASHES AN ORG.
Quite obviously then the intent of any of these counter
intentions is treasonable. For it results in a crashed org.
Thus resistance to full tech delivery, dropping tech off
checksheets and not auditing staff cases to good wins are charges
of the most serious nature and should result in immediate dismissal
of the instigator when proven beyond reasonable doubt in a properly
instituted Comm Ev. SYSTEMS
To get over this hump of staff cases where it backlogs there are
several solutions.
A. The staff staff auditor was an essential post in the 1950s and
was very successful. It was never authorized to be abolished. There
should be two staff staff auditors for every fifty staff members,
doing each other's C/Sing or C/Sed on usual lines. For 75 staff
there should be two staff staff auditors and a C/S.
B * A staff lacking auditors can train part time and co-audit.
The co-audit would be by groups of comparable levels of training.
This is a more expensive (in terms of org time and GI) arrangement.
It should be in progress anyway as far as part time training goes.
It can be combined with A in which the staff trains but does not
rely on co-auditing for case progress. AUDITING PRIORITIES
Staff staff auditors should do their own scheduling or with
cooperation from tech services exactly on this pattern and no
other:
The folders of the staff are arranged in four files under these
categories.
Staff Case Category 1: Those who have had VGls F/Ns at Examiner
and OK as to Case Gain.
Staff Case Category 2: Those who haven't had VGI F/Ns at Exam
recently.
Staff Case Category 3: Medically ill in need of thorough Assists
and Medical Attention.
Staff Case Category 4: Consistent no change, no case gain in
their auditing history.
Obviously to pick up staff morale and general effectiveness SO
THAT MORE ATTENTION CAN BE AFFORDED it is of great interest that
the cases are scheduled only in this fashion.
Staff Case Category 3 (Medically Ill) gets priority and full
auditing to put them into Category No. 1.
Staff Case Category No. 2 (no recent VGIs F/Ns) are audited to
get them into Category No. 1.
Staff Case Category No. 4 (Consistent no case gain) is routed to
Ethics lines for Sec Checks, production examination, etc and if
status unrelieved and unproductive, off staff lines into a pc
category.
Staff Case Category No. I is programmed to bring them on up their
grades (or Progress and Advance to get them back to their last
grade) in an orderly fashion apportioning the auditing fairly. If
this scheduling is followed and continues to be followed and if the
C/Sing and 235
Auditing are normal in quality, then the majority of staff will
at all times be in good case condition. If other scheduling of
staff is followed, then the cases and the org will suffer.
STATISTIC
The Staff Case Supervisor statistic is percentage of staff who
are in good case gain condition measured by the last Examiner
reports and cancelled by any adverse Exam report. The stat is
simple to calculate. It is simply the number of folders in Staff
Case Category No. I divided by the number on staff. If 39 staff
cases were doing well out of 52 on staff, it would be about 75. 1
%.
The C/S would also have number of staff case folders C/Sed.
The staff staff auditors would have number of hours of well done
auditing sessions. If no C/S they would share the percentile stat.
STAFF AUDITING SECTION
This unit belongs in the new Department 13-Dept of Personnel
Enhancement as the Staff Auditing Section.
Any purely auditing goofs in the last session can be repaired by
Dept 15 Case Review and returned to the Staff Auditing Section. Or
if there is any danger of wait, repaired by the staff staff auditor
(since any wait in repairing an auditing goof occasionally winds up
in a Medical Category).
LACK OF SECTION
Lack of this section or a condition of no auditing on staff is an
Ethics Charge that can result in removal. Its presence as a section
and the state of staff cases should be the point of first
importance to any investigatory body or SO Mission to that org.
It should be realized that an unflat or undone Grade I (Problems)
when not fully handled causes no case gain and the suppressive
tendencies of the society to move right on into the org.
Above and beyond any efficiency factor, staffs work hard
ordinarily and it is very unjust to deny them by any excuse or
mechanism the technology which they handle.
Any and all trouble occurring in orgs during a long period of
heavy enemy attack on them was traced not to the enemy BUT TO LOSS
OF TECH MATERIALS, REDUCTION OF THE USE OF TECH (as in quickie
grades) AND IGNORING STAFF CASES.
, Thus these points are spotted as the points most likely present
when an org is failing or failing to take and hold its area.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS POLICY LETTER CANNOT BE OVERSTATED.
Follow it, get it in!
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:sb.rd Copyright
(c)
1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
236
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HOD POLICY LETTER OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1969
Remimeo
STAFF TRAINING OFFICER
A Staff Training Officer (STO) is the head of the Staff Training
Section Dept 14 Div 5.
The purpose of the STO is:
TO HELP LRH Train individual staff members and applicants from
his own and other orgs in Ethics, Tech and Admin, keeping track of
them, guiding them through org courses, giving them checkouts,
expediting their training, seeing that their personnel records in
Dept I of their org are factual as to training and assisting them
in every way to get training and to be trained rapidly, with the
end product that orgs have no untrained staff members.
As the STO deals in large measure with staff members and staff
applicants from another org than his own he must keep close liaison
with the STOs of other orgs. For instance, Foundation staff members
are largely trained in the Day org. And Day org staff members are
largely trained in the Foundation. As the office and files of the
Day STO and Fnd STO are the same, this presents no file or board
posting problem as long as they are kept up and as long as they
co-operate to get all staff members through their courses.
The STO does not conduct those courses which are regular courses
in the org. The staff member is simply enrolled onto them as just
another student. BUT the STO makes sure these particular students
appear for training, get trained fast, get sent to cramming and
review at the first sign of slow and in general pushes hard. The
Day STO will find himself pushing Fnd staff members directly as
they are in class while he is on duty. The Fnd STO will find
himself mainly dealing with Day staff members. However each STO is
answerable to the EC for their staff members' progress so he must
know the whole picture.
Reports are required by the STO weekly on the progress of a staff
member or applicant. This STO student report is filed with the STO
files.
A board is kept so that staff member progress is visible. The
more visible the board to staff members the better.
Staff members are quite commendably dedicated to their posts in
the org and often look on training as a distraction. Without
slowing down that dedication, the STO must still see that they get
in their training, Otherwise the best staff members wind up the
least trained and least audited.
Case has a lot to do with training. Where no other person is
directly responsible for staff cases, the STO should take this over
and be sure tech is USED where staff members are ill or where they
are going unprocessed.
When a staff member is sent to a higher org for training or
grades, the STO is the one who keeps track and pushes from a
distance. This is still his staff member. He must get in touch with
the STO in the higher org and say "George Jinks is arriving there
for his Cl VI. He is an org staff member here. Put him on your STO
list and push." And the STO of the sending org gets reports. IF THE
STO OF THE SENDING ORG CONSIDERS PROGRESS TOO SLOW IN THE HIGHER
ORG he can report the matter to his own EC and assign the distant
student a Condition and his EC can write WW proposing the higher
org STO be assigned a Condition.
It sometimes happens that a staff member sent to a higher org is
pirated by the higher org. This costs the STO a completion, his org
one of its better staff members and breaks a contract. The abuses
on this have in past years been so great that lower orgs often
refuse to send staff members. When this happens, the higher org
should be reported to WW and should be made to pay the lower org
(a) Full fees for lower courses given in the lower org (b) all fees
paid by the lower org to the higher org for the training (c) all
pay paid to the student since departure from the lower org (c) a
fee for the contract.
The time to transfer to a higher org is when one's contracts are
completed.
237
The person to handle and keep track of this and make it prominent
in the staff student files is the local org's STO. It hurts his
post and personal security and even pay to lose a staff member by
reason of higher training and without recompense to his org. It
also messes up his planning and slows his programme.
STO TRAINING
The STO must be an expert on Study technology as contained in the
HDG pack on Course Supervision.
He must know more about Course Supervision than Course
Supervisors.
The entire speed of progress will come from the STO insistence on
following all Course Supervision technology.
STATISTIC
The stat of the STO is the number of training points run up in
the week by the staff students being trained in his org whether
from his own org or not, plus a second curve on the number of
completions by staff members from his own org, meaning courses or,
in Academy, classes of training, HDC and HDG count separately.
INCOMPLETE CHECKSHEETS
The STO retains in STO files any fragmentary or incomplete
checksheet of any staff member. He can furnish copies of it on
request.
It sometimes happens that a senior requires one of his staff to
check out on an HCOB or Pol Ltr. This is done (the checkout) by the
STO. The STO also credits a cheeksheet that has that HCOB or Pol
Ltr on it and places the checksheet in the staff member's STO file.
Checkouts are always credited against courses by the STO so they
are not lost.
TRAINING ABUSES
The staff member who is a student must know, by being told by the
STO, that any training or case complaints must be taken to the
staff member's own STO.
These complaints you will find are seldom capricious. Whenever
you straighten out a training or case snarl for a staff member you
often straighten out something indirectly for the public also.
People make progress or they don't. The answer to the problem is
always to be found in the fields of Ethics, Tech or Admin or
violations of study know-how.
INDIVIDUALS
Classes are too often taught as classes. The STO must work with
the individual staff student as an individual. Where one is doing
very well he should be commended. Where he is doing slowly or not
at all, the problem is an individual one and can be handled.
LIAISON POINTS
The STO's points of most constant liaison are
(a) Individual staff students (b) Other STOs (c) The (c) of T (c)
The Ethics Officer (e) Course Supervisors (f) The Dir of Review (g)
The EC of his org.
SUMMARY
If the STO carries out his duties interestedly and well, he can
achieve the target of fully trained competent staff members and
with this comes a far better operating environment, higher stats
and a greater advance toward a higher civilization. It is a very
important post. If he does his job without distracting the org from
its public service and duties, he is very very valuable indeed.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.ei.rd Founder
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
[See also HCO P/L 3 December 1972 issue 1, The Value of
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED a Staff
Training
Officer,
in the 1972 Year
Book.)
238
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE 3 JUNE 1957 QUALIFICATIONS OF A
PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER
ADMINISTRATIVE:
1. Must have been with organization three months.
2. Must know the Code of a Scientologist.
3. Must have passed an examination on the Organization Board and
Comm Centre given by HCO Board of Review.
4. Must be accepted by a staff majority vote, an Advisory
Committee majority vote and finally must be passed on favourably by
Association Secretary.
TECHNICAL:
I . Must have been with organization three months.
2. Must have a certificate in force in Dianetics or Scientology.
3. Must have passed successfully five levels of Indoctrination.
4. Must know the Auditor's Code and Code of a Scientologist.
5. Must have passed an examination by HCO Board of Review for
validation.
6. Must have passed an examination on the, Organization Board and
Comm Centre given by HCO Board of Review.
7. Must be accepted by a staff majority vote, an Advisory
Committee majority vote and finally must be passed on favourably by
Association Secretary.
BOTH: A permanent staff member cannot be dismissed except by a
unanimous vote of the Advisory Committee or by L. Ron Hubbard. He
has the rights of vacation with pay. There may also be an honorary
staff member who is neither temporary nor permanent. Permanent
Staff Member Examination is given by HCO Board of Review. Jack
Parkhouse
(Note: Originally issued in two sections, Administrative and
Technical, as FCDC P/Ls of 2 May 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard, with an
additional point between 6 and 7 which read: "7. Must have a
minister's certificate in force and must keep it in force."] 239
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HASI
POLICY LETTER OF 5 SEPTEMBER 1957 To: All Staff Bulletin Board
VALIDATION OF STAFF All Technical Staff not validated or who have
not passed an Admin examination by the time of the Congress shall
be: I . Considered temporary 2. Shall lose certain pay units. All
Administrative Staff who have not done the following by the
Congress shall be considered temporary with a lower pay rating: 1.
Passed an examination on the Org Board. 2. Passed an examination on
the Comm Centre. 3. Passed an examination on the telephone systems,
PO and internal phones. 4. Passed an examination on the Purpose of
the HASI. 5. Read "Problems of Work". Those receiving Permanent
Staff rating will receive higher pay than those not so rated.
LRH:rs.cden L. RON HUBBARD HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy
Street, London W.1 HASI POLICY LETTER OF 10 MARCH 1959 PERMANENT
STAFF MEMBERS Permanent Staff Members are entitled to claim
Permanent Staff Member privileges when they become in possession of
their certificate. These privileges naturally cease should a
Permanent Staff Member leave staff without a formal leave of
absence neither can they be claimed if a Staff Member has given
notice of leaving. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:cden Copyright (c) 1959 by
L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 240
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 JANUARY 1960 CenOCon (Issued as Sec
ED in Washington DC) QUALIFICATIONS OF PERMANENT STAFF MEMBERS
(Cancels previous Directives) 1. Knows Organization Board. 2.
Knows Communication Centre. 3. Meets OCA (APA) and IQ Standards.
4. Has worked for Organization for three months. 5. Has been
checked clear on all present life overts and withholds. LRH:js.rd
Copyright (c) 1960 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 JUNE 1960 CenOCon (Cancels
previous directives) REQUIREMENTS FOR STAFF POSTS Applicants for
staff positions in HCOs or Central Orgs must pass: I . A security
check demonstrating no criminal record or intentions; 2. A "help
check" showing normal help ability; 3. An acceptable (not wholly
below centre line) profile on a personality test; and 4. An IQ of
at least 110. Persons showing criminal background this life may not
be employed. STAFF AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS A staff auditor must have
the following: I . A professional certificate in hand and in force
except where certificate is awaiting only final signature when the
interim letter maybe substituted. 2. A knowledge of modem
processes. A staff auditor, to obtain permanent staff status, must
have: I . A thorough knowledge of an EMeter, pre-sessioning and
model sessioning. 2. A thorough knowledge of the CCHs. 3. A free
needle on help. 4. A profile in the upper third of the graph. 5. An
IQ of 120 or more. 6. A knowledge of the comm centre. 7. A
knowledge of the Org Board. A permanent staff member in any
division must meet the above requirements. REGISTRAR POSTS No
person may serve in a letter writing or registration capacity who
is not reasonably released on "help" (does not consider help
impossible in the field of action of PrR). Such persons should be
specially processed on help. LRH:js.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright
(c) 1960 [Modified by HCO P/L 21 July 1972, Issue IV, Staff by L.
Ron Hubbard Qualification Requirements for Hiring Cancelled, ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED with regard to checks and qualifications on
hiring.] 241 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street,
London W. I HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 NOVEMBER 1960 Reissued from
Sthil All Central Orgs Already issued in SA PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER
REQUIREMENTS (Effective I April 1961) To qualify for staff
intensives, vacations, sick leave and other benefits in an HCO or
Central Org a person must be a Permanent Staff Member. The
following are the requirements of a Permanent Staff Member: I . Any
certificate in force (including HAS). 2. Security check passed. (No
Criminal, subversive or Commie background.) 3. Help button in good
condition. 4. An acceptable (not wholly below centre line, and
majority of points not lower than the centre line) graph. 5. IQ 110
or above. 6. A knowledge of the Comm System and HCO Policy Letter
April 8, 1958. 7. A knowledge of the Org Board. 8. 3 months on
Staff. Note: (Persons showing a Criminal, subversive or Communist
background may not be employed.) REQUIREMENTS FOR AN EXECUTIVE POST
I . Permanent Staff Member. 2. A Professional Certificate in force.
3. Control button free needle. 4. Help button free needle.
REQUIREMENTS FOR A TEMPORARY STAFF AUDITOR 1. Professional
Certificate in force. (Or a letter showing exam has been passed and
certificate is being prepared.) (Letter from (c) of T.) 2. A
thorough knowledge of the E-Meter. 3. A thorough knowledge of the
CCHs. 4. No inversion on help. 5. No inversion on control.
REQUIREMENTS FOR A PERMANENT STAFF AUDITOR 1. Permanent Staff
Member. 2. Free needle on Help. 3 ' Free needle on Control. 4.
Adequate case gains on pcs, processed. Note: The pay grade of a
staff member should be regulated in view of the above as well as
his actual position in the. Org. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:aec.gh.rd
Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 242
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1961 CenOCon PERMANENT
STAFF REQUIREMENT CHANGES (Modifies HCO Policy Letter of November
26, 1960)
Instead of passing an examination on the Org Board, effective on
receipt of this policy letter, a permanent staff member applicant
must pass a stiff examination on
"The Pattern of a Central Organization", HCO Policy Letter 14th
February, 1961 and
The Staff Information Bulletin that gives the paper colour flash
system and other data and has long been in staff hats, being a
condensation of many earlier bulletins. (HCO Policy Letter of April
8, 1958.)
Further, if a staff member has not qualified for permanent staff
member by deadline, he may not receive staff rate processing under
the (c) of P. Deadline on the earlier policy letter is relaxed
until June 1, 196 1. LRH:js.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961
by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26
FEBRUARY 1961 CenOCon QUALIFICATION OF EXECUTIVES
See HCO Policy Letters on Executives and Personnel, 13th February
and 17th February, 1961.
I will qualify and issue a Qualification Certificate to any staff
personnel who meets executive requirements regardless of whether
they occupy an executive post or not.
This means that an Executive Qualification Certificate for a
Central Organization executive post, does not demand or command
that the holder occupy the post or receive executive units.
A person who does not actually hold an executive post but who
wishes to receive an Executive Qualification Certificate must pass
all requirements for that executive post and must receive as well a
high mark on a Hat check of that post.
Having once occupied such a post in the organization does not
automatically qualify a person but will be taken into account.
Such persons seeking an Executive Qualification Certificate,
should be handled exactly as an executive is handled in their
application.
Having extra qualified persons on staff for all executive posts
means faster expansion and quicker filling of vacated posts, with
immediate executive units rather than filling posts on a temporary
basis with the consequent long wait for units. LRH:jl.cden.rd L.
RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 243 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 MARCH 1961 CenOCon
PERSONNEL POLICIES STAFF POST QUALIFICATIONS PERMANENT EXECUTIVES
TO BE APPROVED (Modifying HCO Pol Ltr of Feb 17, 196 1) I desire
now to approve of all executives appointed to post in Central
Organizations, before the appointment is given permanent status. I
desire a full report from HASI attendant to the dismissal of any
permanent executive before the dismissal occurs. The data to be
submitted to me, to qualify a department head as a permanent holder
of post includes: I . A minimum of 45 days successful performance
of duty on post. 2. A statement from the (c) of P taken from pc
graphs of the Auditor quality and ability of the person being
appointed. 3. The appointee's own graph and IQ. 4. A summary of his
Scientology career. 5. A security check sheet on the person. 6. An
E-Meter assessment, particularly on Help and Control. 7. His exam
results for permanent Staff Member. 8. Report on Hat Check of post
by HCO Sec. 9. SOP Goals procedure fully flattened. No new
executive, not approved by myself on the above basis, may draw the
salary of his executive post, but only the salary formerly drawn on
a non-executive post until my approval is received by the Assn Sec,
effective on receipt of the letter. No executive may continue as an
executive on permanent status, unless approved by myself, on or
after 1 August 1961, and if not approved will revert to pay as a
leading auditor even while retaining post. For the purpose of this
Policy Letter the following posts are defined as Executive Posts:
In HASP Association (or Organization) Secretary pc Director
Director of Training Director of Processing Director of Promotion
and Registration Chief Registrar (Body) Letter Registrar Director
of Material Director of Accounts. In HCO: HCO Continental Secretary
HCO Area Secretary. All persons permanently so appointed by myself
shall be given a small certificate to that effect. The assembly of
the materials required, I to 9 above, is solely the responsibility
of the person being appointed 244
Temporary Executive Appointments to be Passed by HCO
The HCO Continental Secretary must pass upon any temporary
appointment of an executive, before the person is given post. This
does not mean such temporary appointment may receive the pay of the
post.
The authorization to appoint a temporary executive may be refused
only on the following grounds:
I . Past unsuccessful experience with the appointee on that post.
2. Graph points lower than centre.
3. IQ less than 120.
4. Security check not passed.
5. Control and help buttons get very bad reaction on E-Meter.
6. Examination of staff profiles and longevity show other persons
better qualified for post.
If no person can be found who qualifies for the temporary
executive post, it may not be filled.
In event of abuse or confusion of this section the Assn Secretary
may stop any action in progress and send full details to me for
decision. Temporary and Permanent Defined
A Temporary Executive fills the post on a temporary-, basis,
using the word Temporary in the post title. He or she does not draw
the executive post's units, but draws former units or the units of
a leading auditor, whichever is higher. He or she may be removed
from post with or without cause by the Assn See at any time, or a
qualified HCO See during the time that HCO See is handling a State
of Emergency.
A Permanent Executive uses the full title of and draws the full
units of a post.
He or she may be transferred to a similar post by the Assn Sec,
or by the HCO Sec who is handling a state of emergency that applies
to that department. He or she may be suspended for no longer than
two weeks in any three months from post without pay, to be
processed in event of a consistent failure in that department. He
or she may be removed from post only by myself after due
investigation, and reports are received by me. Appointment to Staff
Posts
No appointment may be made to any post on staff until the
following procedure has been followed.
An application form (green ink on pink since it belongs to
Accounts and affects pay) is made available at the office of the
Assn See's Secretary.
People desiring employment are directed by Reception to the Assn
Sec's Secretary (or a small stock of forms may be left with
Reception).
The application form is self-directing. The person fills in his
own various qualifications and vital statistics. It then sends the
person directly to Test in Charge to be given a test or (as is more
likely) to receive the test from his files. The person then goes to
the HCO Sec. The HCO Sec marks the application form in spaces to
review the test, makes a brief security check and marks in that
result and then states either (a) The person is employable on staff
or (b) This person cannot be employed on staff until processed or
(c) This person cannot be employed.
If the results are (b) or (c) the person is so told at once. If
the results are (a) the person is sent to the Assn Sec (or his
Secretary) for interview and results of interview are marked. The
person is then told when to come to work or that he or she will be
informed if there is an opening.
If the person is employed (now or later), the application has the
units or pay marked on it by the Assn Sec's Sec and is sent to the
Accts Dept, when employment is begun.
The Accounts Dept makes a folder for the person in the creditor
file.
Accounts may not pay out a cheque until the form is in the
Accounts Dept, and is initialled OK, throughout. 245
The routing of the form is written on the left margin in each
case.
Important: After August 1, 1961 the Accounts Dept may not pay out
pay even to old staff unless an application form is in the Accounts
file. Termination of Employment
When employment is terminated, the person terminating, to receive
his or her final pay, must be routed on a similar form.
The form is obtained from the Assn Sec's Sec, who is custodian of
all forms, by the Dept Head of the leaving person's department or
by the Assn See.
The form is self-routing on the left-hand margin. It is green ink
on pink paper.
The form is headed: Termination Form Without this form you cannot
receive your final pay or any recommendation to future employers.
The leaving person fills in name and date and writes his given
reason for leaving, He gives the form to Dept Head for his or her
remarks.
The leaving person then reports to HCO and gets checked out for
ARC breaks and withholds, and may be ordered to processing at
Organization expense, but not longer than, 12 1/2 hours, preferably
5 hours,
If the leaving person then changes his or her mind about leaving
the form is destroyed by the Dept Head.
The person reports again to Dept Head for the form to be
continued, or destroyed in event of person staying, and then takes
the form to Director of Material to turn in his supplies and any
equipment, and get an initial. This includes E-Meter and any such
and in the case of a Dept Head or an Assn Sec may require a full
inventory by a paid company if the amount is great.
The person now goes to Accounts with the form and receives with
the form his or her final pay.
Accounts, while keeping the creditor folder of the person in a
"dead file" at the back of creditors file, until the year's storage
of files is made, places the person's original application for
employment and the termination form (stapled, termination at the
back) into Comm lines to the Assn Sec's See who files.
The person's final pay cheque is sent to HCO by Accounts and may
not be paid directly by Accounts to the person. HCO hands over the
final cheque when the person has been checked out by HCO or has
received any auditing recommended. Seeking Personnel
Dept Heads seeking personnel may procure it wherever they wish,
and however they wish, but must first look in the job application
file of the Assn See's Sec in order to save time.
To keep the file straight, the Assn Sec's See should divide the
file into live (with 3 months) and inactive segments.
In times of expansion a mailing can be sent to the whole list.
This would serve to freshen the file and the replies can be filed
with the original applications. Until they lose a body, these
applicant people do not get "dead filed".
Keeping this application file up prevents the randomity of
Emergency Hiring and by-passes of security.
The most fruitful sources of new personnel are the pc and
Academy, and permanent help wanted notices should be posted in
each. LRH:ph.cden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L Ron
Hubbard [This 28 March 1961 reissue of HCO P/L 17 February 1961 ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED added the parts shown in this type style.] 246
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1961 CenOCon EXECUTIVES' PAY
HCO Policy Letter of March 28, 1961 is modified as follows:,
All permanent Executives (who were to meet the August 1, 1961
deadline or have their pay revert) are extended to October 1, 196
1. SOP Goals Clause
The qualification of persons having to be flat on SOP Goals by
August 1, 1961 as per HCO Policy Letter March 28, 196 1, is changed
to "Must be flat on Routine I A by October 1, 196 1 LRH:jl.rd L.
RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 OCTOBER 1961 CenOCon PAY
OF EXECUTIVES (Modifies HCO Policy Letter of July 22, 196 1)
The deadline of executive pay is extended to February 1, 1962.
The process to be flattened now is "Problems Intensive" as per
Saint Hill data of October, 196 1. LRH:iet.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF 23 JANUARY 1962 CenOCon PERMANENT EXECUTIVES
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr of February 17, 196 1)
The award of Permanent Executive status has hitherto been delayed
by changes in the processing requirements set forth in HCO Pol Ltrs
of July 22, 1961 and October 23, 1961.
Effective immediately, the award of full permanent Executive
status shall only be made to an executive who has fulfilled all the
requirements as laid down in HCO Policy Letter of February 17, 196
1, Staff Post Qualifications, and who has also been checked out as
stably clear by HCO.
Meanwhile, any Executive who has fulfilled all the requirements
of HCO Policy Letter of February 17, 196 1, except the processing
requirements, and who is not yet stably clear, shall be awarded the
status of Provisional Permanent Executive. This will entitle
him/her to draw the full pay for his/her post. But he/she will not
be allowed to draw permanent staff bonus units as an executive
until such time as he/she is checked out by HCO as stably clear.
LRH:sfrd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 247 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 MAY 1962 CenCCon
PERMANENT STAFF (Cancels earlier directives)
When a staff member has completed a contract with the
organization, has passed an examination on the Pattern of a Central
Org and has received a cleaned Prepcheck on the last two pages of
the Joburg and Form 6A, Saint Hill, informed of this, will issue a
Permanent Staff Certificate for that staff member. L. RON HUBBARD
LRH-.jw.jl.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
[Cancelled by HCO P/Ls 9 August 1971 issue IV, Urgent-High Crime
PIL-Operation Staff Stability and Personal Security, 16 September
1971 Issue III, same title, and 8 January 1972 revision of 9 August
1971 Issue IV, in the Year Books.] HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5
JUNE 1962 CenCCon PERMANENT STAFF PRIVILEGE
Staff Members who complete Permanent Staff requirements may
receive the benefit of International Membership while they are on
the staff of a Central Organization or City Office.
A N/C invoice is made out by Accounts (so that records exist)
upon application by a staff member.
If a Permanent Staff Member leaves the Org voluntarily or is
dismissed for a valid reason, the International Membership fee
becomes payable (part of a year's membership to be worked out pro
rata). L RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.eden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 248 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 JANUARY
1966 Remimeo Issue V All Staff Hats A copy given to ea new person
employed PERSONNEL STAFF STATUS (This is a Policy Letter. The
basic law of this organization and its rules are found only on
letters such as this one, printed as this one is, green ink on
white paper and signed as this one is.)
A Staff Status is a number giving the value and promotion
eligibility of a staff member in this organization.
The number appears after a person's name on the organization
board in the Communication Centre.
The numbers run from zero to ten. They designate the type of post
to which a person may be promoted or the status of the person.
It is important to have a higher status number. Therefore do all
you can to increase yours.
The status numbers most important to a new staff member are 0
(zero), I and 2. 0 = Temporary I = Provisional 2 = Permanent
Above that are the promotional numbers which must be earned by
study and experience in the organization.
There are also technical status numbers. These are not
necessarily required of personnel in nontechnical departments and
are elsewhere described.
If you do your job in this org and study how to be a better staff
member you will advance and will be secure.
The first three status numbers and the states follow: TEMPORARY
A staff member who is newly hired is designated 0 (zero) status
after his or her name on the organization board. The person is
classed as TEMPORARY until he or she has been to Review after a few
weeks on post. The TEMPORARY must obtain a slip from their
immediate senior saying they are doing fine on post and present
this to Review. Review may require they have a knowledge of the org
board and comm lines and their own department before passing them.
Review may give the person who bears a recommendation several
interviews to pass the exam but after the 3rd exam is failed, must
dismiss. If they have no recommending slip, Review notes their name
and tells the person to get one from their senior and come back.
Review keeps a close record of all persons calling on it. Review,
when a recommendation slip is presented, then may examine the
person concerning the org board, etc, as per current "provisional"
check sheet. If the TEMPORARY is recommended and passes, Review
assigns the person a 249
PROVISIONAL Staff Status and advises Org Board and Personnel
Files by sending them chits attesting the fact. The staff member
also gets a copy.
While TEMPORARY a staff member may be dismissed with or without
cause by his immediate superior or by Review or a Secretary or
anyone senior to a Secretary.
If Review does not pass the Temporary, Review dismisses the
person. However, if the person is to be dismissed, Review must
inform the person what he must do to make himself more employable,
get the person on a pc Course and processed, etc.
When Review tells a Temporary he or she did not pass or is
dismissed, Review also informs Dept 1, Personnel Officer.
Any Temporary, dismissed, may apply again to the Personnel
Officer for employment in another section or department of the org.
Pay ceases while under dismissal. Therefore when Review dismisses a
TEMPORARY, Review
I . Tells the person he has not passed and no more chances will
be given.
2. Tells the person how to become more employable.
3. Puts the person in the files for possible future employment if
the conditions are met (2 above).
4. Informs Dept 1. Dept 1, being advised of a dismissal:
(I a) Informs Accounts at once.
(2a) Makes a note of it in the person's file noting also Accounts
is informed.
(3a) Notifies the person's immediate superior whether the
superior is otherwise I informed or not.
If a Temporary dismissed is upset about it, he or she is sent to
the Chaplain.
The Chaplain, on any dismissed person coming to him should
ascertain if the above lines were followed properly, that no ethics
policy or order was violated by superiors or org officers and that
the person follows the advice to become more employable if the
dismissal is in good order. If the Chaplain finds a gross
irregularity in a dismissal he should bring the person to Ethics.
TEMPORARY is designated as 0 status on the org board.
Every quarter the HCO Exec See of an org must dismiss all persons
who have Temporary Status and have not become Provisionals. Such
persons are sent to Review for dismissal. PROVISIONAL
A staff member given a PROVISIONAL rating may have recourse to
Ethics and have an Ethics hearing if dismissed. He may be
transferred to other divisions without a hearing if his division is
over-manned.
· person, after one year, may apply for permanent status.
· PROVISIONAL is designated as "I" on the org board after
his or her name.
To obtain permanent status a PROVISIONAL must obtain his or her
Basic Staff Certificate. This has a check sheet for which the HCO
EXEC SEC is responsible for compiling. This is covered in earlier
Policy Letters.
The certificate is examined for by Review and issued by Certs and
Awards. The requirements are relatively elementary but are quite
firm. 250
Ethics chits issued while the person was employed are taken into
consideration.
The Secretary of the person's division must recommend permanent
status in writing to Review before an exam may be given. PERMANENT
A PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER may not be demoted, transferred or
dismissed without a full Committee of Evidence being held. The
person may himself request a change of status or another post or
may resign without a Committee of Evidence being convened. (The
Evidence and findings of a Committee of Evidence are taken by a
Committee composed of one's coworkers and to be valid and put into
effect must be passed by LRH personally.)
No person may be paid as permanent or posted until the person's
name appears in a SEC ED. LRH Executive Director may not at his own
discretion wish to make the permanent award and if not included in
a See Ed it is not awarded.
PERMANENT status is then designated on the Org Board by the
numeral "T' after a person's name.
Certs and Awards issues the Permanent Certificate, but only after
a SEC ED so declaring has been issued.
Review, passing a person for permanent must advise Dept I
Personnel, and the AdCouncil to prepare a SEC ED for LRH Exec Dir
issue.
The SEC ED advises Accounts and Org Board, and no pay may be
changed or the permanent status posted until the SEC ED is issued.
A person failing to get a permanent status remains provisional.
A person with PERMANENT status gets longevity pay according to
the number of years employed, at so much for each year. This is
backdated to first employment. HIGHER STATUS
The higher status numbers are given to staff members as earned by
passing check sheets. Gaining a higher status does not mean
promotion but eligibility for promotion, said eligibility being in
plain view on the org board with higher status number.
No one may have a higher status than 2 after his or her name on
any org board without meeting all requirements up to the new status
sought, and passing the check sheet for each status in sequence.
Items already passed are credited on any future check sheet where
the items occur on the check sheet and have been passed.
The HCO Exec See WW is responsible for all check sheets for staff
status and the use and following of this Policy Letter via HCO Exec
Sees in orgs.
Staff quotas for Divisions and Sections are set by the Advisory
Council.
No hiring, promotions, assignment of status or appointments are
made except as made above. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c)
1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Modified by HCO P/L 5 January 1969, Staff Status Two, Volume 1
-page 136, Volume 5-page 255, Volume 7page 503.) 251
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1966 Remimeo All Staff Applies
to Dir Review Staff Tr Officer POLICY CHECK OUTS AND E-METER
When a staff member who is taking a check out from the staff
training officer flunks, regardless of his grade of release or
state of case, the following is done: REMEDY POL-A I He or she is
meter checked out on misunderstood words and these are handled.
2. He or she is checked out for disagreements with policy and
these are handled. REMEDY POL-B
When a staff member who has been so reviewed still has a high
flunk rate, he or she is given full meter handling on the subject
of earlier admin systems or earlier policies and these are handled
as to (1) misunderstood words and (2) disagreements with the
earlier systems or policies.
The above actions in a small org are all done by the staff
training officer. In a large org the actions of Pol Ltr check out
are done by the staff training officer and if a flunk occurs the
staff member is sent to a Review auditor at once to get Remedy
Pol-A done.
If the staff training officer's check out log (which he keeps)
shows that Remedy Pol-A is not handling the person then Remedy
Pol-B is directed by the staff training officer and done by the
Review auditor.
The Review auditor is under the orders of the staff training
officer in matters concerned in this Pol Ltr. NO other action may
be undertaken by the Review auditor other than those directed by
the staff training officer.
Please note that to do misunderstood words and disagreements
before check outs violates the Fast Flow System of Management as
one is correcting errors which have not occurred. In the Fast Flow
System of Management one corrects only after actual errors have
occurred, otherwise the org becomes the typical bureaucracy that is
making our era miserable. We are in the business of making things
better. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 252 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY
1966 AMENDED 19 MARCH 1968 Remimeo STAFF STATUS (Corrects all
earlier See Eds and Pol Ltrs)
The intentions of the staff status system 'and the conduct of it
require a clarification as follows: TEMPORARY
I After two weeks' employment, if a newly hired staff member can
obtain a written recommendation from his immediate superior, he can
report to the Staff Training Officer in the Qualifications
Division, give him the recommendation and receive the training
materials for provisional. He can then study these and get checked
out on them by the Staff Training Officer and if passed, get his
Staff Status One, Provisional. STATUS ONE PROVISIONAL
2. When the Provisional Staff Member has his Staff Status One, he
can receive the materials for Staff Status Two from the Staff
Training Officer and begin to study and pass them by check outs
from day to day. When he has passed them all, he is given a written
examination and, passing this, he obtains his Staff Status Two.
STAFF STATUS TWO
3. When a staff member has his Staff Status Two he can apply for
the materials for Staff Status Three, executive rating, and so on
up the Staff Status levels.
Obtaining an executive Staff Status does not ensure the
appointment as an executive but makes one eligible for such
appointment.
The one year service between One and Two is abolished.
Only a Staff Status Two is now eligible for contract.
Staff Status Two, if on contract, is entitled to free processing
up to Grade V, a 50% discount on training and further processing
and uniforms. No lower status has these privileges. This is true
for all Orgs, SH, WW and AO.
A Temporary Status staff member may be dismissed, transferred or
demoted without any Ethics action. Any person still a temporary
status after 3 months on staff will be let go.
A Staff Status One must have been given an Ethics Hearing and
found guilty of a misdemeanor or more in order to be dismissed but
may be transferred without a hearing.
A Staff Status Two must be given a Committee of Evidence and
found guilty beyond reasonable doubt to be dismissed and an Ethics
Hearing to be demoted or transferred.
A deputy or acting appointment may be demoted without Ethics
action, but only to the last permanent grade. Staff Members may
request transfer or demotion without Ethics action. PENALTY If a
Staff Member breaks his Contract, leaving employ or going to a
higher Org 253
with Contract incomplete, he is then liable for FULL PAYMENT of
all courses and processing he has received at FULL RATE (not just
50%), and owes for all transport or expenses he may have been paid.
SECURITY CHECKS
Security Checks should be given any new staff on a meter.
When a theft or insecurity has occurred staff should consent to
such a check and such a consent is contained in the hiring
Contract.
CHECK OUTS
Any staff member receiving a check out from the Staff Training
Officer and flunking is told to go off and study some more. The
item being checked out is marked with a date and initial at the
point just about where the flunk occurred and if the staff member
comes for reexamination within one week, the item being checked out
is simply checked from the last mark on. But if more than one week
elapses the whole item must be examined again.
A staff member is only sent to STAFF REVIEW OFFICER for remedies
if his flunks have been continual and he is not making progress at
all.
A log, loose leaf, containing the names of a staff member per
page is kept by the Staff Training Officer.
The Staff Training Officer may not hold any additional post than
Staff Review Officer and if so check outs must consistently be at
one period of the day and review another. If traffic is too heavy
not even this additional hat may be worn. If Staff Review Officer
is singly held the holder may also audit staff, and do assists.
ORG BOARD
The Org Board must reflect the status of a staff member.
UPPER STATUS GRADES
Grades Three and above are given check sheets by the Guardian WW.
EVENING STUDY
Staff members should study in their own time not on the job. But
they may be examined or reviewed while on the job.
LRH:jc.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1966, 1968 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(Note: The 19 March 1968 amendment added the last sentence in
paragraph 8, and also the section headed "Penalty"; and under
"Security Check" added and such a consent is contained in the
hiring Contract and changed No Security Check should be given any
new staff on a meter except investigatory personnel to the above.
I
ADDENDUM per
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 AUGUST 1966
Issue III
Only a staff member with Staff Status Two is eligible for
contract. Thus, before a Class VI may start his actual Internship
period, he must come on staff and while working in the org, study
for and attain Staff Status Two, at which time he will be eligible
for both Internship (provided of course he meets the other
requirements for Internship) and staff discounts.
LRH:lb-r.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright
(c)
1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
254
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo
Guardian Hat
RAP
STAFF STATUS TWO
(Modifies HCO Policy Letter 4 January 1966,
"Personnel, Staff Status")
Staff Status Two, which precedes staff signing a contract, may be
awarded by a duly appointed Asst Guardian and the ED awarding such
may be okayed by the LRH Comm provided application for such is
accompanied by full CSW which demonstrates conclusively that the
applicant is fully qualified as per policy for Staff Status Two.
Any violation of this policy which results in an improper award
of Staff Status Two being made will be considered as a False Report
and will result in the assignment of a Condition of Doubt.
Mary Sue Hubbard The Guardian WW for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:ei.cden Copyright
(c)
1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
255
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1971
Remimeo
Scn Orgs
SO Orgs
CLOs
FLAG
STUDY TIME
A staff member is entitled to 2 1/2 hours study or auditing time
per day.
Executives are responsible for so scheduling work that this time
becomes available to their staff but it must be additional to eight
hours of post work.
All activities including Flag CLOs or ships must have a Crew or
Staff Course Supervisor who observes "What Is a Course?" P/L
including suitable scheduling that does not interfere with work and
makes Supervision available to all crew or staff. Roll call,
materials, stats, etc must be part of this course.
Where a Foundation and Day Org exist together the staff may study
in the other org so long as that org does have a Supervisor.
The Supervisor must at least have been hatted by the Mini Course
Supervisor Hat and must know the Word Clearing Series of HCO Bs.
A typical solution would be three to four crew or staff course
periods a day, each of 21/2 hours, morning, afternoon and evening
with the crew or staff member enrolled and assigned to a specific
course period and roll called for that period.
A crew or staff member must have gone through lines, be invoiced
and enrolled, must have had his student hat put on and must in all
respects be a student for that period to which he is assigned.
An Exec which restrains such attendance is driving himself into
cope by failing to take a routine organize action.
QUAL
Any crew or staff member must have been programmed ONTO not off
of his current post.
The question is what is he lacking to qualify for the post he is
on? Staff Member Hat? SS I? SS II? AB and Sea Watch Picture Book?
Post hat with checksheet and pack? Divisional hat? Officer's
Checksheet? Exec Cramming Course? Tech Courses? OEC? What has he
missed to fully qualify for the post he is now on?
When he's done all this up to the post he is on or the post in
case of a recruit he will be on he has arrived at "A" and only now
could he think of going to "B" (see Supreme Test of a Thetan HCO
B).
When this study is done, tech courses can be considered. But Tech
courses are in the same classroom under the same Super.
Qual does FULL Word Clearing rundowns in the same Department as
programming.
INCOMPLETES
You will find numerous incomplete courses amongst staff and crew.
These
256
became incomplete because of a misunderstood word or earlier
misunderstood subject.
An Exec who is a failed student also has misunderstood words.
So failure to sign up or attend are the business of the Course
Super or the same Dept in Qual. It comes down to a misunderstood
word. STRAIGHT ORG
The only way an org will come out straight is by forbidding
musical chairs and getting in such a program as this. AUDITOR HATS
Auditors have hats as well as Tech. Lack of knowing their staff
hats and auditor hats is a reason for losses. Student and staff hat
comes before tech. AUDITING TECH
When an org expands it must observe its 2 to I Admin Tech ratio.
Admin people can qualify as auditors part time.
Deserving staff members when properly replaced can go on full
time training. Only when a crew or staff member has been a good
attending upstat student on part time with good post stats should
he go on full time training. OTHER TECH
Posts often have other tech such as engines or cars or machine
operation.
When possible this is studied part time in the usual way. Crew
and staff members may also be sent to special outside schools for
brief training periods. SUMMARY
When Qual does not do such programming, when the org has no on
policy part time crew-staff course supervisor then it unstabilizes
its people by leaving them untrained and will be upset by any
effort to expand.
HCO Expeditors just hired will be a hindrance unless they are
rapidly put through basic training on part time study, rigidly
adhered to and well organized.
People already on post in orgs are seldom programmed and trained,
at this writing, to the post they are on.
Execs often mistakenly do not cooperate in such part time
training.
Such courses do not consider a non-attendee a blown student but
should.
By following this P/L expansion can occur and staff members can
hold their posts much more easily.
This is a very rewarding program. It must be followed. L. RON
HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 257
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1972 Issue 11 Remimeo
(Cancels and replaces HCO PL of Personnel 20 Jan 72 of the same
title) Programmer Personnel Programming Series I PERSONNEL
PROGRAMMING
A Programme can be defined as:
"A plan of study for an individual student over a given period."
"A Plan of procedure; a schedule or system under which action may
be taken toward a desired goal. The keynote is a sequence of
actions."
"To work out a sequence of operations to be performed by a person
or computer."
The root words associated are Programme (French)-A public notice,
and Prographein (Greek) To write before. (Webster's 7th Collegiate
Dictionary.)
A Personnel Programmer works with individual staff members and
draws up workable personnel programmes and sees that they are fully
executed.
The purpose of a Personnel Programmer is: to help LRH to expertly
programme each staff member to a point of real success on his own
post, to operate well as a member of the group and attain higher
and higher levels of skill, knowledge and ability, through full use
of the technology of Scientology and Dianetics. Qual Aide for L.
RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 258 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT
COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill
Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Issue
I Remimeo Personnel Programmers Personnel Programming Series 2
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING RULES
There are certain rules which apply to Personnel Programming,
which if violated, will result in unsuccessful and incomplete
personnel programmes, and subsequent low morale and stats.
I . "All the rules of auditing apply in personnel programming" -
LRH "A Talk on the Basic Qua]" tape 5 Sept 1971.
2. The primary purpose of personnel programming is to get each
staff member competently wearing their own post hat, and operating
well and smoothly as a member of the group.
3. The Basic Personnel Programme provides: (as per the attached
chart)
A. One main entrance channel comprising Sea Org and staff basics,
culminating in full post hatting.
B. The Tech route.
C. The Policy route.
D. The Seamanship route. (Sea Org Only)
4. The Personnel Programming Repair Programme is that which
designates repair training actions on past posts in order to make
the current post occupiable, or short repair actions which are
interjected into the current Post Advance Programme, to handle a
situation on the person's post.
5. The Personnel Programming Advance Programme is that programme
which lays out the steps necessary to get the person fully on post.
6. Do not do unnecessary repair actions.
7. Do not interject or allow study actions which violate the
programme the person is On.
8. Let staff members have their wins on programme actions and see
that each completion is separately declared.
9. Complete major programme cycles and do not switch routes in
mid-programme.
10. Work to complete each major programme in turn, resulting in a
fully trained and processed staff member and Sea Org Member.
11. Complete earlier cycles begun before starting a new cycle.
12. In the case of older staff members who have many incomplete
actions or checksheets in all routes, prescribe the necessary
repair completions and get the person into the route which will
most benefit him on post. 259
13. Be prepared to redo some programmes if skipped gradients and
missing data are discovered.
14.
Be prepared to interject a post repair programme into any cycle,
as an immediate action required to handle a PT situation.
15.
Ensure all programmes incorporate full word clearing of all
materials and tapes per FO
2960
Course Requirements (SO only).
16.
Use full study tech and every tool we have to get your result:
A. Word Clearing
B. Demos
C. Star-rate checkouts
D. Clay demos
E. Drills
F. Cramming
G. The Org Library.
17. Do not issue stereotype programmes. Each must be done
individually, as per any preclear programme.
18.
Push each person to a win, then another win, and another win, and
so on.
19. The workability of a programme is "Is it being done?" If a
staff member bogs, the programme must be re-examined for skipped
gradients and/or missing data or incorrectly included data.
20. Draw up the length of programmes and the time limit according
to the capacity of the staff member. Newer staff or staff needing
repairs should be short programmed to a win, then can have slightly
larger programmes.
21. Do not get "stuck on a win" with one programme and give that
programme to all others. Programmes are individual.
22. See that staff go to the Registrar to sign up for Courses and
checksheets after being programmed.
60%
of staff can get lost if this is not done.
23. Schedule needed Specialist Sea Training cycles at a "rest
point" in a post hatting programme cycle. (SO Only.)
24.
A programme rest point is: A completion to F/N VGIs.
25.
Push staff cases to get completed to VA and get them onto the
Solo Course. This is not a long course and can also be scheduled in
at a "rest point", depending on how the person is doing on post.
26.
Tell staff members to come and see you when they reach Points
24
and 25 above so that you can adjust their programme accordingly.
27. Get Crew Supervisors to supply weekly lists of any not
attending crew study regularly. Call these in and find out why and
get them back on course.
28.
Programme in Dianetics and Scientology books into programmes
liberally. These contain basic operating data vital to all staff.
29.
Upsets on past posts still causing PT distress require auditing
and the C/S must be advised.
30. Rehabilitation of the person and cleaning up past post
misunderstoods on past posts which were failed or lost may play a
vital part in getting an unmoving staff member on the road to
success again. This, of course, is a Personnel Repair action.
260
31. If the Personnel Programmer is not familiar with a post area
and what is required to get the person on post, he must go into the
data collection step and could get added data from the person's
senior.
32. A Personnel Programmer must know the Org Board or Org Boards
in the areas in which he is operating.
33. There are three main areas which lead to unnecessary staff
losses in programming:
A. Trying to do a programme with missing or wrong data.
B. Mis-programming.
C. Mis-Course Supervision.
34. All the rules of study apply to Personnel Programming.
35. Do not commence the metered programming action with the TA
above 3.50 or below 2.0. End off and advise the C/S to handle.
Meantime the person can study their next needed action.
The only limitations to personnel programming are the actual
courses available in a given org. Sea Org Members have the most
benefit in this because all courses are available to them at all
times.
If an org recruits in excess and programming is done well,
getting a person to their nearest AOSH for higher level training
and processing will be routine and no problem.
STOs must wear their hats as part of the STO network, keeping
track of area org staffs doing local training, pushing them
through, and seeing that they get back to their orgs fast.
Personnel programming plays a very important role in the actual
prosperity and viability of an org and its staff.
HCO puts an org there, but Dept 13 makes it R RUN - gets it
operating.
Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
261
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971
Issue 11
Remimeo
Personnel
Programmers
Personnel Programming Series 3
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TECHNOLOGY
"All the rules of auditing apply in personnel programming" - LRH
"A Talk on the Basic Qual" tape 5 Sept 1971.
As in all preclear programming (the C/S must have and use data
about that preclear), so the Personnel Programmer must have full
data on a Staff Member to be able to do intelligent and successful
personnel programming.
Successful programming = the programmes being done, staff members
winning, wearing their hats better and more fully, their stats are
up and into a higher range. The org is into a higher operating
level.
The steps of Personnel Programming are:
A. Data collection. Collect all. past and present post and study
data.
B. Data evaluation. Evaluate the data received.
C. Draw up a proposed programme.
D. Interview the staff member on the meter, with the proposed
programme and all data to hand and check out the programme for
validity and making any needed adjustments, to F/N VGIs.
Therefore, the operating procedure of Personnel Programming is:
I . Get each person to fill out the full Tally sheet.
2. Do the Personnel Programming White Form on each staff member.
3. Study the tally sheet and see what has been completed, what
is incomplete, etc.
4. The immediate goal is to get each staff member fully wearing
his hat, as a participating staff member and SO member.
5. Make a list of all incomplete Courses or checksheets, listing
them in order of completeness to the least completed. This is the
programme error summary.
6. Which of these incomplete courses or checksheets affect the
staff member's current post? Mark these with a star.
7. Recheck what actual progress the staff member has made on his
post hatting cycle. List out any and all missing steps. This is the
Post Advance Programme-to bring the person up to where he should be
on his post.
8. Check SO Basics and see if the SO member hat is done.
9. Check staff member basics and see if SS I and II are done.
10. NOW, with the purpose in mind to get that staff member on
post and operating as a member of the group, draw up a proposed
programme for the person.
11. Call in the person, and ON THE METER, go over and present the
tentative programme to the person.
262
12. If there are any disagreements, first check for misunderstood
words and clean these up Method 2, each to FIN.
13. Now, make any needed adjustments, putting in a time limit
(shortening into a series of shorter programmes, or putting in a
missed training action) to FIN VGIs.
14. Send the person to the Examiner and then to the Registrar to
sign up for the first course or checksheet on the programme, then
to Course Super and back to post.
15. Collect exam. If no FIN VGls at Examiner, the staff member's
personnel folder and programme will have to be re-evaluated, the
worksheets taken during the programme examined and the error found.
Then the person is brought back and the programme corrected and to
Examiner with FIN VGIs.
16. No staff member who did not FIN VGIs at Examiner may be
neglected or left with a wrong programme. This must be handled.
17. Write up five copies of the programme and send to:
A. The staff member
B. The person's Div head
C. F/MAA or MAA
D. Pers Enhancement TIM
E. Staff Course Supervisor.
18. Put a time limit on each programme.
19. Assign the staff member's Division head responsible for
getting it done.
20. Put up a set of Personnel Enhancement TIM baskets for:
A. One day (urgent repair or cramming cycle).
B. One week.
C. One month.
D. Three months.
21. Place the TIM copy in the appropriate TIM basket.
22. File all papers and worksheets in the staff member's
Personnel File in Dept 13.
23. Copy any needed data off the Personnel Programming White Form
and body route the form to Pc Admin for filing in the person's pc
folder.
24. Get the person to complete the programme.
25. If the staff member goes well on the first two or three steps
and bogs down, call the person in and recheck the programme for a
missing gradient, misunderstoods, etc to FIN VGIs. Distribute any
amendments to that person's programme as per 18 above.
26. When each programme is complete, recheck the tally sheet, see
that it is fully updated, re-examine the Personnel Programming
White Form, .
27. Call the staff member in (tell him to bring his stats) and
draw up his next programme. If the person isn't fully and totally
flying on his post, more actions will be required. If the person is
doing very well on his post, then programme him/her into the
channel of training which will most benefit him/her on post and in
accordance with future plans. To FIN VGIs
Judy Ziff Qual Aide for
LRH:JZ:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1971 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
263
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971
Remimeo
Issue III
Pers Programmer
C/Ses
Personnel Programming Series 4
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING WHITE FORM
The following is a White Form for Personnel Programming. It is
done on a meter. The answers are written on this form with all
E-Meter reactions.
This could be a valuable tool in getting needed data for
compiling valid and workable personnel programmes and getting any
and all past areas of post upsets cleaned up.
Copy off important details required for personnel programming and
send this Personnel Programming White Form to the HGC for filing in
the staff member's pc folder.
Tell the Staff Member that "This is a Personnel Programming White
Form. This is not auditing."
NAME POST- DATE
ORG
E-Meter
Reaction
1. How long have you been in the Sea Org?
2. How long have you been a Scientologist?
3. What was the first book you read?
4. What other Scientology or Dianetics books have you read?
5. What was the first tape you ever heard?
6. What past posts have you held?
Post Where When
264
7. What posts did you have wins on?
8. What posts did you have difficulties with?
9. What posts before Scientology did you have wins on?
10. What posts before Scientology did you have difficulties with?
265
11. What are your areas of interest in the Sea Org?
12. What are your areas of interest in Scientology and Dianetics?
13. Is there any specific post (or posts) you had a huge win on?
14. Are you having any particular difficulties with your current
post?
15. Is there any specific area of your post requiring more
specialized training? What sort of training?
16. Do you know the Org Board for your Division or Org?
266
17. Do you know how to route a communication to anyone in the org
or ship?
18. Is there much dev-t in your area?
19. Do you know how to deal with dev-t?
20. Is there anyone who is distracting you from your post?
21. Is there any way you could do your post better?
22. Have you completed your Mini Hat?
23. Do you have any misunderstoods on your Mini Hat?
24. Have you completed your full hat checksheet?
25. Do you have any misunderstoods in your full hat checksheet?
26. What would be of assistance in helping you to wear your hat
more fully?
27. Is there anything else you would like to say about your post
or hat?
Thank you. That's it.
Judy Ziff
LRH:JZ:nt.rd Qual Aide
Copyright
(c)
1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
267
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971
Issue IV
Remimeo
Pers Programmer
Personnel Programming Series 5
MASTER PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TALLY SHEET
Purpose: To ensure that Personnel Programmers have full data to
hand when doing personnel programming.
This is the master tally sheet and once filled in by all staff,
it is filed carefully in the staff member's personnel file in Dept
13, and thereafter filed as staff complete courses and checksheets
The tally sheet is attached.
Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
268
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLACK ON WHITE
MASTER PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TALLY SHEET
To: Date:
From: Personnel Programmer
Dear Staff Member,
Please fill in the attached sheet with ticks and dates, as
indicated and send back to me soonest.
I will be using the data on this master tally sheet along with
other data to ensure that your post programming and future
programming is properly done.
Love,
Personnel Programmer
COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX
SEA ORG BASICS Just Middle Near DATE
(SO ONLY) Started End STARTED
1. Sea Org SS
2. SO Member Hat
3. AB
4. Mission School 3rd
STAFF MEMBER BASICS
1. Staff Status I
2. Staff Status 11
3. OEC Vol 0
POST HA TTING
I . Mini Hat
2. Divisional Summary
3. Mini Hats of all
Juniors
4. Full post hat
checksheet Incl
A-1
5. Div Hds-FP
Member Hat
6. Div Hds-Ad Council
Member Hat
7. Fully checked out
& can competently
operate all
machines in Div
or Dept
8. Data Series
9. Org Series
269
COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX
Just Middle Near DATE
Started End STARTED
10. Personnel Series
11. C/S Series (Tech
& Qual)
12. Target Series
13. Dev-T Series
14. Stable Terminal
Checksheet
15. OEC Vol for Div
16. All FOs on Div
POLICY
I . OEC Divisional
Volume
2. Full OEC
3. Sur OEC
4. FEBC
5. FEBC Internship
6. PRO Course
7. Tours Course
8. Other Specialist
Courses
TECH
I . Wd Clearing Mini
Course
2. Checkout Mini Cse
3. Student Hat
4. TRs Course-HAS
5. HQS
6. HSDC 1
7. HDG
8. HC
9. Mini CSC
10. RPCSC
11. Solo Course
12. Academy 0,1,2,3,4
13. Non-Pro Course
14. SHSBC
15. Cl VII
16. Cl VIII
17. HSST
18. Cl IX
19. Cl
x
20. Cl XI
21. Cl XII
FUTURE PLANS FOR TECH TRAINING:
270
COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX
Just Middle Near DA TE
SEAMANSHIP (SO ONLY) Started End STARTED
1. Sea Watch Picture
Book
2. QM of Gangway
3. Anchor Watch
4. Rec/Fath Specialist
5. Helm Specialist
6. Radar Specialist
7. Radio Specialist
8. Signals Specialist
9. Lookout Specialist
10. QM Specialist
11. OOD Specialist
12. Celestial Nav
Specialist
13. Con Specialist
14. Petty Off Chsht
15. SO Officer Chsht
MISSIONAIRE
SPECIALIST (SO ONLY)
Mission School 2nd
Mission School Ist
PROCESSING
Method One
Highest Grade Attained
Future Plans for processing
Staff Member Signature
Judy Ziff
Qual Aide
for
L, RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.rd
271
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER- 1971
Issue V
Remimeo
Pers Programmer
E0S
Personnel Programming Series. 6
PERSONNEL PROGRAMMER ETHICS INTERVENTION RIGHTS
Staff members get into Ethics trouble basically through improper
or inadequate Dept 13 Personnel Enhancement activities.
The staff member is:
A. Not programmed.
B. Mis-programmed. (The current programme has neglected or
mis-placed an urgently needed action.)
C. Will not complete training or hatting cycles or programmes.
When a staff member gets into Ethics trouble, the Personnel
Programmer should check his records and see if the staff member is
indeed not programmed or mis-programmed. If this is the case, he
must appeal to the Ethics Officer for the action or condition to be
suspended pending guaranteed completion of a Cramming and word
clearing cycle.
This would not be done if a person was named as an Interested
Party in a Board of Investigation or a Comm Ev for Crimes or High
Crimes.
If a staff member won't complete programmes and hatting cycles,
the Personnel Programmer should assist the Ethics Officer by
relaying all known data in a Knowledge Report. Similarly, the
Ethics Officer should relay information on failing staff to the
Personnel Programmer for handling and so avert a real collapse of a
personnel or Unit or Section or Dept or Division.
By doing the above, we will be working towards the rehabilitation
of a person and using our technologies for the greatest good of the
greatest number of dynamics.
Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright
(c)
1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
272
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971
Issue VI
Remimeo
Personnel
Programmer
Execs
Personnel Programming Series 7
INDIVIDUAL STAFF STUDY ORDERS
In order to protect personnel programming lines and ensure that
correct personnel programmes are not violated or ignored by others,
the following rule is introduced:
ALL ORDERS CONCERNING INDIVIDUAL STAFF STUDY, CRAMMING OR
TRAINING MUST BE SENT TO THE PERSONNEL PROGRAMMER FOR
IMPLEMENTATION.
The Personnel Programmer will then inspect the staff member's
existing programmes and handle as follows:
A. Compare the order against the existing programme.
B. Incorporate the order, as an urgent post repair cycle, into
the existing programme.
C. If the programme is badly violated, send the order back to the
originator with a suggested handling.
Copies of all Personnel Programmes will, in future, be sent to
all Div Heads, so the possibility of programme violation is
minimal, but in the interests of stable progress of staff, the
above rule is laid down.
Any investigatory body must also check with the Personnel
Programmer before ordering any training actions.
Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JZ:mes.nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
273
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 JANUARY 1972
Remimeo
Pers Programmer
Personnel Programming Series 8
TIPS ON PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING
The following should be of assistance in implementing Personnel
Programming.
1. The Personnel Programmer must:
A. Be a Class III.
B. Be able to do Two Way Comm well.
C. Know the Org Board.
D. Know the basic activities of posts.
E. Good TRs.
2. The basic data on Personnel Programming is contained in the
C/S Series and it is proven that the C/S Series must be word
cleared and star-rated prior to studying and applying the Personnel
Programming Series successfully.
3. In putting in the Personnel Programming technology newly into
an org, it is more simply done if an entire Division is tackled at
a time, i.e. HCO first.
This can be relatively easily done as follows:
A. Interview the Division Head, with a list of all staff, their
posts and stats to hand.
B. Find out what each staff member is doing, how they are doing
on post and the senior's estimation of what is required, plus any
weak areas noted.
C. Compare this data to the data obtained in doing the steps of
Personnel Programming, as outlined in No. 2 of this series, and
complete the steps as outlined.
D. The senior's data should be of assistance, but may not be.
E. Go by raw statistics only-never by opinion.
4. Shorter programmes are more acceptable to staff and are more
easily done.
5. When first putting in individual Programming of staff, there
will be errors and some minor conflicts with other study orders
issued, but these can be handled and ironed out fast by calling in
the staff member and making any amendments to the programme.
6. Execs are starting to use Admin Cramming more-which is good,
but make sure these orders go via Personnel Programmer and are
co-ordinated in the programme. Keep order in Personnel Programming.
7. Be prepared to find staff who have never even read one
Scientology or Dianetics book. These must be given a short "Make a
Scientologist" programme of basic books, plus TRs, as needed.
274
8. The three elements you are dealing with are:
A. A Scientologist who knows the data and applies it in his life
and livingness. B. A staff member who is part of the team.
C. A hatted staff member.
The more each of these elements is IN, the more happy and
successful the staff member,
9. Staff members who have not had Method I Word Clearing may
bog-so make sure this is done prior to standard staff study and
Method 2 word clearing actions.
10, See that the Personnel Programming White Form is routed to
the staff member's preclear folder immediately on completion. Do
not allow this to be filed in Dept 13 files.
11. The White Form may show that the staff member has read a few
chapters from several books-this is an immediate signal for word
clearing Method 2 on the first book. Failure to handle this will
result in a bogged study programme.
12. Do not neglect Execs-they need a programme also.
13. Sometimes it will be found necessary to take a staff member
off post for one or two days in order to get the needed word
clearing and Cramming done on a staff member who is in difficulty
on his post. This would be done in the case of a staff member who
was actually enturbulated by his inability to handle post duties
and causing dispersal in the area. A short cramming cycle, in this
case, will work wonders. This action, of course, is done with the
agreement of the person's senior and Div Head.
14. If a Programme gets badly bugged, it is up to the Cramming
Officer to find out what is wrong and correct it.
Qual Aide for
L~ RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright
(a)
1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
275
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1972
Remimeo
Hats Off
Pets Prog
STO
Cramming Off
Personnel Programming Series 9
EO
Execs
INTER-DEPENDENT HATTING AND
PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
The ultimate responsibility for the full hatting of a staff
member crosses the org board through:
A. The Hatting Officer in HCO
B. Personnel Programmer in Qual
C. Staff Training Officer in Qual
D. Staff Course Supervisor in Tech
E. Cramming Officer in Qual
F. Word Clearing Auditors in Qual
G. Ethics Officer in HCO
H. The senior.
All the above terminals play their role, as needed, to get the
staff member through.
The Hatting Officer issues the post hat checksheets and packs,
does hat checks and usual post functions. He keeps a very close
line in with the Personnel Programmer.
The Personnel Programmer draws up the programme and co-ordinates
data, events, orders necessary to get the staff members fully on
post and operating successfully. His primary skill is in the
sequence of actions and the exact gradient of programmes to bring
about a specific result.
The Staff Training Officer's primary interest in life is getting
staff completed on courses, whether tech or admin. He provides
liaison between Personnel Programmer, the Course Supervisor, and
staff.
The Staff Course Supervisor in Tech runs a standard course and
sees that staff are not lost and do complete their courses. It is
known that staff training in some orgs is still done in Qual under
the STO but the ideal would be a proper course with a Supervisor in
the Tech Div.
The Cramming Officer is called upon when staff need special
Cramming or debugging in a specific area.
It is expected that all org staff will be put through the Word
Clearing Mini Course so that they can all do Method 2 and 3 in the
classroom. Additionally, Word Clearers in Qual are used for special
or extensive cycles, Method 1, Word Clearing Correction List
actions and Post Purpose Clearing.
When staff members won't hat or won't do Cramming or checkouts
ordered, despite a sincere effort to handle, it is an Ethics matter
and the staff member must be sent to the Ethics Officer and then
returned to complete the action.
The ultimate responsibility for a staff member's hattedness lies
with their immediate senior and the Division Head. It is the
interest, help and guidance of the senior, added to the efforts of
the above terminals, which provides the actual turning point in
hatting a staff member. The coordinated actions of hatting by other
terminals are only partially successful unless fully backed up and
pushed along by the Div Head himself.
So the first target of Personnel Programmers must be the Div Head
himself. Raise his performance and he will pull his juniors up with
him. The tone and production level of a Division is set by the Div
Head.
276
There is one other person who is directly connected with success
in hatting functions-and that is the Staff C/S. He sees that staff
are scheduled for regular IN hour Intensives and that they do
progress case-wise up the Grade Chart. Additionally, the C/S can
ensure that work upsets and difficulties, whether present or past
are cleaned up in Progress Programs, as needed.
It will be seen that more than half of the actions necessary to
get a staff member functioning successfully on post are in Dept 13
Dept of Personnel Enhancement. Their effectiveness monitors the
Departmental,. Divisional and Org Valuable Final Product of
EFFECTIVE AND WELL TRAINED STAFF MEMBERS and the statistic of Gross
Income divided by Number on Staff,
Qual Aide
LRH:JZ:mes.rd for
Copyright (c)
1972
L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard Founder
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF
14
JANUARY
1972
Remimeo
Issue III
Personnel
(HCO PL
24
June
70
Programmers
same title revised)
STO
Hats Off
Personnel Programming Series 10
MANAGEMENT CYCLE
1. RECRUIT
Suitable qualifications.
2.
HCO EXPEDITER
Works as Expediter. Completes SSI and II.
3. ON POST AS TRAINEE
Posted in org. Completes Method I and word clearing
2
and 3 on Mini Hat before
going on post. WCs and star-rates the Divisional Summary, plus
any Divisional
Team Member Mini Checksheet whilst on post.
4.
PURPOSES
All purposes of post cleared by two way comm.
5. AUDIT
General case advance. Programmed for regular Intensives by Staff
C/S.
6. FULL POST TRAINING
Completes full Post hat and A to I for post, plus any other
programmed actions
for post. Then star-rates full Divisional pack or book.
7.
ON POST
Fully grooved in and functioning.
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1972 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
277
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JANUARY 1972
Issue IV
Remimeo
Personnel
Programmer
Dir Pets Enh
Personnel Series 24
Hats Off
C&A
Execs
Personnel Programming Series I I
Dir Validity
STO
THE "OK TO BE A SYSTEM
A gradient scale of hatting, programming, checkouts and
correction is required to get a staff member fully hatted and
functioning competently on post.
The "OK to Be a - - " System has been worked out. The system
parallels the OK to Audit system for training auditors.
1. Mini Hat completion entitles the staff member to a Temporary
OK to be a - Certificate. (All new staff hired or recruited must
complete the Mini Hat before going on post.)
2. The staff member is now serving an apprenticeship or
Interneship on the post. He must continue with his full post
hatting cycle part time during staff study periods.
3. The staff member's senior and Division Head handle the staff
member on the One Flub = Checkout system. Any slightest error on
post and the staff member is ordered to check out by STO on the
Policy violated. Repeated or flagrant flubs signal a Cramming order
to be issued.
4. The Temporary OK to do the - - Hat Cert expires if the full
hat is not completed in part time staff study within the following
time periods:
A. Section Head - 2 weeks
B. Dept Head - 4 weeks
C, Division Head - 6 weeks
D. Senior Exec - 8 weeks.
5. STO keeps a board on which all staff are posted, with the
above deadline dates posted for each staff member. It is his
responsibility to push these through to completion and advise Dir
Personnel Enhancement of any slows or noncompliances. Some posts in
the org at Section Head level have very large hat$ and should be
allowed Director time limit for full hatting, i.e. Ethics Officer,
Body Registrar, PPO, PCO, etc.
6. If the staff member's Temporary OK to Do a post expires, STO
must advise Dir Personnel Enhancement, who must see that the staff
member redoes his Mini Hat before proceeding with his full post hat
checkouts.
7. When the full post hat checksheet is completed, the staff
member is awarded a Provisional Okay to Do the - - Hat Cert.
8. Daily correction actions and checkouts as needed continue to
be ordered by the senior and Div Head.
278
9. The staff member continues his apprenticeship on post for a
further eight weeks after the Provisional Cert is issued. At the
end of this period, he writes up a full CSW and submits to C & A
via his senior, Div Head and Dir Validity.
10. The senior attests that a full and proper apprenticeship has
been served, that full correction actions have been taken and that
the staff member is now competent on post.
11. Dir Validity inspects the CSW, the stats, the staff member's
area and products before okaying the staff member for full post
Cert.
12. If Dir Validity flunks the staff member, he must write all
the reasons, listing policies violated or not applied and send to
the staff member, with a copy for Dir Personnel Enhancement. Dir
Personnel Enhancement must see that a new programme is drawn up to
cover these points, plus any other weak area disclosed.
13. The staff member is awarded a full Permanent Post Certificate
on completion of full hatting, apprenticeship and proven post
competence, demonstrated by high statistics.
It takes daily actions and care and interest by a Div Head and
senior, plus good programming, checkouts, word clearing, cramming
and training to really put a staff member on post. This action has
to continue and continue until the person is fully competent on
post and does not require any executive intervention. Obviously at
this point, the, person is fully hatted on post, must have up stats
and is eligible for his full post hat certificate.
The staff member can then have an In Training posted under him
and be programmed for his promotion.
The A to B in Personnel Programming and training actions is from
unhatted to fully hatted and on post functioning competently.
It is the responsibility of Dir Personnel Enhancement to see that
Div Heads and seniors commence implementation of the "One Flub"
correction system. He must call in Div Heads for checkouts on
relevant materials if they are failing to train or correct their
staff. Failure to handle seniors at this point will threaten the
whole of the hatting and personnel programming activities of an org
and unnecessarily depress the stats.
The OK to Be a - - system lays out a more efficient system of
getting staff fully hatted. Nearly every post in Qual has a role to
play in ensuring that it is put in and maintained.
HCO PL 28 Dec 67 "Qual Senior Datum" points out Qual's
relationship to students and pcs "Qua] is the students' and pcs'
friend. A last refuge when other doors close." This definition is
now extended to include staff; "Qual is the staff's best friend.
The first refuge when a door closes."
Qua] Aide for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
279
The Church of Scientology
CREED
We of the Church believe:
That all men of whatever race, color or creed were created with
equal rights.
That all men have inalienable rights to their own religious
practices and their performance.
That all men have inalienable rights to their own lives.
That all men have inalienable rights to their sanity.
That all men have inalienable rights to their own defence.
That all men have inalienable rights to conceive, choose, assist
and support their own organizations, churches and governments.
That all men have inalienable rights to think freely, to talk
freely, to write freely their own opinions and to counter or utter
or write upon the opinions of others.
That all men have inalienable rights to the creation of their own
kind.
That the souls of men have the rights of men.
That the study of the mind and the healing of mentally caused
ills should not be alienated from religion or condoned in
non-religious fields.
And that no agency less than God has the power to suspend or set
aside these rights, overtly or covertly.
And we of the Church believe:
That man is basically good.
That he is seeking to survive.
That his survival depends upon himself and upon his fellows, and
his attainment of brotherhood with the Universe.
And we of the Church believe that the laws of God forbid Man:
To destroy his own kind
To destroy the sanity of another
To destroy or enslave another's soul
To destroy or reduce the survival of one's companions or one's
group.
And we of the Church believe:
That the spirit can be saved and
That the spirit alone may save or heal the body.
280
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH 1957
MINISTERIAL ORDINATION
All Ministerial Ordinations of the Church must be in full force
for the current year before Income Tax provisions can be claimed,
Ordination requires an HCA or HPA Certificate, or higher, a
Ministerial certificate from the Founding Church, or Church of
American Science, and membership in the Hubbard Association of
Scientologists, International.
HASI dues are S 15.00 per year to all members, staff, officers,
or otherwise.
Ministerial Dues are 915.00, either in the Founding Church, or
the Church of American Science.
No certificate may be issued unless Accounting gives a clearance.
A D.D. ordination may amply serve for ordination but must be
renewed, just as a Ministerial certificate may be renewed and at
the same cost.
Transfers to and renewals in the Founding Church refunds half the
cost to staff.
L, RON HUBBARD
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 15 AUGUST 1957
(Second revision 12 June 1958)
MINISTERIAL QUALIFICATIONS
A minister of the Founding Church must meet the following
requirements:
I . Must have a Validated certificate in Scientology.
2. Must know the Church Creed verbatim.
3. Must be capable of giving the various ceremonies.
4. Must be able to pass an examination on the great religions.
5, Must have a knowledge of St John.
6. Must be of good moral character.
7. Must be able to conduct a Sunday service for the church.
8. Must have a moral and ethical code by which he can live and
abide.
LRH:bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD
[The 12 June '58 revision deleted the requirement that "All
Ministerial Certificates must be Validated by January 1, 1958 to
continue in force"; deleted under 4 "(Sample Text: The Religions by
Which Men Live-published by Fawcett Publications, Fawcett Building,
Fawcett Place, Greenwich, Conn.)"; and added 7 & 8. The IS August
1957 issue was itself a revision of FC PL of 3 May 1957, adding 2
above, and changing St Luke to St John. The FC PL as published
above was reissued on 22 September 1967 from Saint Hill as an HCO
Policy Letter with identical text, adding routing as follows:
Remimeo, All Staff, (c) of T Hat, Dir of Exams Hat, Dir of Certs
and Awards Hat, Sec to Executive Director Hat.]
281
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1962 Urgent to D.C., N.Y., &
L.A. Information CenOCon RELIGION (Furnish a copy of this to all
attorneys dealing with our interests for us.)
It is of interest to all organizations that all Scientology
incorporations are religious in nature.
Not only the Founding Church of Scientology or the Churches of
Scientology in the United States, but also all HASI Inc. offices
(which includes all British and Commonwealth offices as HASI Ltd.
is not fully in force anywhere except New Zealand) are religious
corporations.
In the HASI Inc. incorporation papers the corporation is clearly
designated as a "religious fellowship".
The use of the E-Meter in Scientology, but not Dianetics, is
describable as follows:
"All religions seek truth.
"Freedom of the spirit is only to be found on the road to Truth.
"Sin is composed, according to Scientology, of Lies and hidden
actions and is therefore Untruth.
"The Electrometer is used to disclose truth to the individual who
is being processed and thus free him spiritually.
"Only in this way can Man's spiritual self be regained.
"A religious confessional fails only when not guided by a modern
instrument such as the Electrometer.
"Religions in the 1960's use modern aids. The Electrometer is a
valid religious instrument, used in Confessionals, and is in no way
diagnostic and does not treat.
"Regardless of any earlier uses of psychogalvanometers in
Dianetics or psychology or in early Scientology publications when
research was in progress, the Electrometer in Scientology today has
no other use than as directed above."
In view of the "interest" the Food and Drug Administration has in
the E-Meter, the above data is vital and must be impressed upon
investigating agents as it is only the truth of the matter. They
thought that outside the U.S. Scientology was not religious, which
is false. The impression must be strongly corrected in the FDA at
once.
Dianetics used an older instrument to detect engrams. The book
Electropsychometric Auditing is entirely a Dianetic manual.
For information of the London and Commonwealth offices, they will
soon be transferred to Church status when the Founding Church of
Washington DC is given full tax exemption, and HASI Ltd.- and HCO
Ltd. shares will be converted to equally valuable Church
certificates.
Scientology 1970 is being planned on a religious organization
basis throughout the world.
This will not upset in any way the usual activities of any
organization. It is entirely a matter for accountants and
solicitors.
I have evidently failed in designating HASI Ltd. as a non-profit
organization and cannot transfer HASI Inc. assets to any but a
non-profit corporation. Therefore other arrangements must be made,
but these in no way shatter any organization or change its
personnel or actions in the slightest. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd
Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard 282 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST AD 15 Issue 11 Gen Non-Remimeo
Tech Division CHAPLAIN Every org has a Chaplain. The Chaplain's
Office is located in the Technical Division, Division 4, and in the
Department of Technical Services. The purpose of the Chaplain is
"To help Ron minister to others, to succor those who have been
wronged and to comfort those whose burdens have been too great." It
should be made well known to pcs and students that when they cannot
elsewhere be heard, they always have recourse to the Chaplain. The
Chaplain, while without actual authority to order remedies, may
call cases of obvious mishandling to the attention of the
appropriate department or section. His is also the complaints
department. The Chaplain holds services where required, regularly
on Sunday, or marriages, christenings or funerals. The Chaplain
takes over Ron's hat in all these things. As all orders, rules,
regulations, policies and routes for this activity are designed to
further its basic purpose, no order, rule, regulation, policy or
route may be made or used to interfere with the purposes of this
office. The Chaplain is an Officer and heads a Section called The
Chaplain Section. LRH:ml.rg.rd Copyright (a) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by
L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19
JANUARY 1966 Issue IV Remimeo CHAPLAIN, TRANSFER OF The Office of
the e Chaplain being basically a Review function, rightly belongs,
and so will move to, the Review Department of the Qualifications
Division. The Chaplain has the rank of Officer. A Chaplain's
Section is formed in the Department of Review. LRH:ml.rd Copyright
(c) 1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 283
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint, Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 AUGUST 1966 Issue 11 Remimeo Division
6 Division I CHAPLAIN'S COURT CIVIL HEARINGS
As many matters come before Ethics which are not properly Ethics
but civil matters (i.e., between other persons), a Chaplain's Court
Unit is formed in Division 6, Dept 18, as part of Section 5, The
Chaplain's Section, which is formed herewith in Div 6 and abolished
in Div 5.
The Chaplain is transferred to this Section and is its Section
Officer.
A permanent presiding justiciary who must be a minister may be
appointed called an Arbiter where activities warrant.
The Chaplain (or the permanent or part time assisting Arbiter)
presides over all Court Hearings and renders judgment.
The organization of this activity is similar to any civil
proceedings and may, when conditions warrant, have clerks and other
personnel.
The court may charge reasonable fees and has these as its
statistic.
Only Civil Matters may be heard or judged.
All Ethics matters must be referred to Ethics. JUSTICE Reasonably
priced and easily obtained justice are requisites to any
civilization.
The purpose of the Chaplain's Court Unit is to resolve matters of
dispute between individuals.
Staff personnel, pcs, students and Scientologists may utilize
this Court Unit to resolve their own disputes or legal affairs.
Staff members may not be sued by reason of performance of their
org duties, as this belongs to Ethics where such complaint may be
made.
Any suit filed must be against the person who actually personally
knew and damaged the individual suing by an action directed
personally against the plaintiff, except for suits to remove Ethics
orders.
The org, a division, department or section may only be sued to
obtain restoration of status, to revoke or alter Ethics orders or
obtain service which was denied such as auditing time to right an
omission. The org or any part of it may not be sued for financial
damages or refund.
Preliminary hearings only can be given in divorce matters at this
time as these must also have state action before any such findings
can be considered legal in the eyes of the state. However,
separation may be found, both parties consenting.
Collection of debt and remedy in defaulting on obligation may be
sought from the court. REBUTTAL DAMAGES
If a person who is sued has reason, he can, as defendant, require
damages in his rebuttal and should the suit be fallacious and found
against the plaintiff such may be awarded. 284
COSTS
Costs may be recovered as part of damages, meaning costs of court
action. EXTENT OF DAMAGES
Any damages assigned by the Court must be reasonable and in
keeping with reality. ETHICS RELATIONS
Ethics may route civil matters to the Chaplain's Court Unit.
In return in matters of perjury or the collection of damages
awarded by the Court, the Court Unit may refer the matter to
Ethics. REFUND SUITS
Suits for refund fees may not be filed as this is an Ethics
matter. LRH SU ITS
Suits against LRH or the Guardian, board members, executive
secretaries or secretaries are not accepted by the Court. WRONGFUL
ETHICS ACTIONS
HCO may be, sued in the Court for erroneous issue of an Ethics
Order and for no other action. Damages requested may not exceed $5
or an order apologizing or restoration of status. I . BONUS ACTIONS
All bonus matters or disputes between or amongst Tech, Qual and
Treasury or their personnel may be heard by the Court Unit. STAFF
MEMBER DISPUTES
Personal disputes between staff members even when org business is
concerned may be heard by the Chaplain's Court. FAILURE TO ABIDE
Failure to abide by a Court Finding may become an Ethics matter.
JURY
When requested and allowed by the Chaplain, a jury of three
persons may be chosen and used. The persons chosen must be agreed
upon by both litigants. ATTORNEYS
Anyone may act as an attorney in the Court Unit.
Professional attorneys may appear before it.
No attorney is required. PROCEDURES
All procedures for the Chaplain's Court Unit are developed by and
all magisterial appointments are made by the Chaplain in the form
of Distribution Division See Eds. All fees are set in this manner.
The Chaplain and the Court and such See Eds may be over-ruled only
by. the Guardian or an Assistant Guardian or, when ordered,
standardized amongst orgs by the Org Exec See WW. L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 285 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 NOVEMBER 1966 Gen Non
Remimeo ROUTING OF CHAPLAIN'S COURT ORDERS
The findings and orders of the Chaplain's Court are issued in the
form of Distribution Division Executive Directives, and require
before issue, the signature of the Chaplain or Arbiter who presided
over the Court Hearing, who signs and attests that the finding or
order is "OK and not against policy".
The original and all copies are then forwarded to the LRH
Communicator who approves and seals them on the OK of the Chaplain
or Arbiter who signed.
The LRH Communicator may not alter or over-rule the Chaplain,
Court, or any such Executive Directives, but may refuse to issue
the Executive Directive where it is contrary to policy or
technology.
In case of such veto the date, name, , e, and paragraph number of
the HCO B, Policy
Letter, or prior Sec ED or ED must be stated in the veto, and the
proposed ED and
veto and any other relevant information packaged together and
sent to the Assistant
Guardian (if one has been appointed) and thence to the Guardian
WW.
The Assistant Guardian or Guardian may over-rule the Chaplain,
Court, or such EDs, or may return the proposed ED to the LRH
Communicator with instructions to issue.
Chaplain's Court orders or findings, when approved and sealed by
the LRH Communicator, are returned to the Court for the court to
distribute.
In addition to any distribution that the Court may find necessary
the following is done. Two copies to the Founder. Two copies to the
Guardian WW. One copy to the Assistant Guardian (if one has been
appointed). One copy to the LRH Communicator Area. One copy to HCO
Area Sec.
Distribution Division EDs establishing and developing procedures
and making magisterial appointments are made by the Chaplain and
are issued on the normal organizational ED issue lines. Ken
Delderfield, LRH Comm SH J.J. Delance, Qual See SH Gareth McCoy,
Area Sec SH Ad Council SH Joan McNocher, HCO Exec See SH Otto Roos,
Org Exec Sec SH Ad Council WW
Leon Steinberg, HCO Exec Sec WW Pam Pearcy, Org Exec Sec WW
Philip Quirino, LRH Comm WW Mary Sue Hubbard, The Guardian WW
LRH:jp.rd for Copyright 1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard
Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 286 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER
1967 [Excerpt] CHAPLAIN'S SECTION Chaplain Chaplain's Court Arbiter
Chaplain's Court Clerk Chaplain's Court Files Clerk Sunday Services
Promotion Clerk Chaplain's Sunday Services Assistant Mary Sue
Hubbard LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW Copyright (c) 1967 for by L. Ron
Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
(Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 2 November 1967,
Distribution Division, Departments Of Public Information, Clearing
and Success. A complete copy can be found in Volume 6, page 9.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE I Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1968 (Appeared I st as SO
Flag Order 1094 of 26 July 1968) Remimeo CHAPLAIN
The Chaplain's primary duties are keeping people on the Org Board
and the public in Scientology.
The Chaplain's main area of operation in preventing people from
falling off the Org Board, is Auditors.
He/she is concerned with the auditors' morale, and endeavors to
see that their troubles and problems get seen to. The Chaplain also
knows who is their next of kin and family.
The reason for this area being chosen as Chaplain's priority is
that Auditors make others better, the able more able in using
Scientology Tech and must not, above all be hindered by low morale,
problems and troubles. An auditor's high morale equals a better
delivery of standard Tech to his Pcs.
The Chaplain does not and must not advise auditors on Tech. His
role is to hearten and defend them and get people to let them audit
and be audited and make their own grades. That attended to he has
his other hat and service duties. LRH:ei.rd Copyright (c) 1968 L.
RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 287
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 FEBRUARY 1969 CenOCon Public Exec
Sees ECs LRH Comms RELIGION Visual evidences that Scientology is a
religion are mandatory on the pcs, Any staff who are trained at any
level as auditors (but not in AOs) are to be clothed in the
traditioned ministerial black suit, black vest white collar silver
cross for ordinary org wear. Creed of the Church is to be done big
and plainly posted in public areas. Stationery is to reflect the
fact that orgs are churches. All public literature must state that
Scn is religious philosophy. Since its first incorporation as HASI
Arizona all orgs have been Religious fellowships by corporation
statements. All orgs are now Churches by their C of S of California
affiliation. The minister's course is a requisite for permanent
certification. The legal decisions handed down on Scn by US high
courts uphold it as a religion. It has never been anything else. It
seeks SPIRITUAL FREEDOM. This may or may not be publicly
acceptable. This is NOT the point. It is a requisite defense and it
is true. Those are the points. Reinforce this in all possible ways.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sdp.ei.eden Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [See also HCO P/Ls 9 May 1971 Issue 11,
Scientology Org Staff Uniforms, and 2 September 1971 Issue II,
Religion-Scientology Org Staff Apparel, in the 1971 Year Book.] 288
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 MARCH 1969 Remimeo BPI SCIENTOLOGY IS
A RELIGION
"Scientology is a religion in the oldest sense of the word, a
study of wisdom. Scientology is a study of man as a spirit, in his
relationship to life and the physical universe.
It is non-denominational. By that is meant that Scientology is
open to people of all religions and beliefs and in no way tries to
persuade a person from his religion, but assists him to better
understand that he is a spiritual being .... 11 Mary Sue Hubbard
>From Supplement to "Communication" September 1964
The following definitions are from Webster's New Twentieth
Century Dictionary (2nd EditionThe World Publishing Company,
Cleveland and New York-1959). A. RELIGION (noun)
Derivation: from Latin religio (-onis) (religion), (piety),
(conscientiousness), (scrupulousness), from religare (to bind
back), re-, and ligare, (to bind), (to bind together).
(a) Any specific system of belief, worship, conduct, etc., often
involving a code of ethics and a philosophy; as the Christian
(religionj, the Buddhist (religion), etc. (b) loosely, any system
of beliefs, practices, ethical values, etc. resembling, suggestive
of, or likened to such a system, as, humanism is his (religion). B.
RELIGIOUS (adjective)
Derivation: from Latin religiosus (religious). Of, concerned
with, appropriate to, teaching, or relating to religion; as, a
(religious) place; (religious) subjects.
Also
Careful; scrupulous; conscientiously exact; such as religion
requires; as, a (religious) observance of vows or promises. C.
PHILOSOPHY (noun)
Derivation: from Latin philosophia; Greek philosophia, from Greek
philosophos, from philos (loving), and Sophos (wise). Originally,
love of wisdom and knowledge.
A study of the process governing thought and conduct; theory or
investigation of the principles or laws that regulate the physical
universe and underlie all knowledge and reality; included in the
study are aesthetics, ethics, logic, metaphysics, etc.
The general principles or laws of a field of knowledge, activity,
etc; as the (philosophy) of economics.
(a) A particular system of principles for the conduct of life;
(b) A treatise covering such a system. A study of human morals,
character and behaviour. The mental balance believed to result from
this; calmness; composure. 289
Scientology is a religion by the very nature of its philosophy
and system of Ethics, Technology, and Administration, all of which
is designed and set up for life to free itself from entrapment, and
restore total freedom to the spirit.
"But one of the oldest things that was ever given into the
training of wise men that I know of was simply this-the basic faith
in which the individual has been trained and the basic political
allegiance of the individual must not be tampered with by the Order
training him. And it was the Order itself which laid that down.
That's an old, old one. They were training very wise men and that
was the first thing that they made sure not to do. They did not
tamper with these things. If the individual cared to alter these
things himself nobody was even vaguely persuading him. It might be
in the course of his study that he found certain things that men
did laughable, or confusing, or he found certain things that men
did remediable-but nobody was standing there trying to lead him
into a higher religious or political
conviction.
And that is the case with Scientology."
Extract from Phoenix Lectures.
by L. Ron Hubbard
(The celebrated lecture series given by L. Ron Hubbard to the
Professional Course, Phoenix, Arizona, in July
1954.)
L. Ron Hubbard's treatise on Scientology as a religious
philosophy and a religious practice is given in Hubbard
Communications Bulletin (H.C.O.B) of 21 June,
1960
"Religious Philosophy and Religious Practice" (as revised 18
April,
1967).
It is highly important that all promotional literature and Church
literature reflect the fact that Scientology is a religion.
For instance one promotional piece of recent time stated
"Scientology is a philosophy and a science." There was no mention
that Scientology was a religion.
If any statements are made in any literature which reflect that
Scientology is other than a religious philosophy, an appropriate
condition must be assigned to the party so making same.
Kevin Kember
Policy Safeguard Chief WW
Jane Kember
The Guardian WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Controller WW
LRH:ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
290
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1969
Remimeo
SCIENTOLOGY MARRIAGE CEREMONIES
Marriage ceremonies may be performed in any Scientology chapel or
organisation, or by any minister of the Church of Scientology or
affiliated churches only when all legal requirements of the state
in which the marriage takes place are complied with.
In most areas the Certificate of Marriage issued by the Church is
fully legal, but in areas where a Civil Certificate of Marriage is
also required, it is the responsibility of the Chaplain to
ascertain the legal requirements of the area, this must be obtained
BEFORE the Scientology ceremony is performed.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD.jk.ei.rd CS-6 Public Aide
Copyright (c) 1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 APRIL 1969
Remimeo
pcs,
Chaplain's Bar
A SCIENTOLOGY CHURCH REGISTER
A Register for Marriage, Recognition and Naming, and Funeral
services is to be kept in every Church of Scientology.
This Register should be in accordance with any local regulations
regarding such. Having a Church Register is in keeping with our
status and responsibility as a Church.
Peter Moule T/Chaplain WW
Tom Armistead Pub Act Sec WW
Jim Keely Qual Sec WW
Bruce Glushakow HCO Area Sec WW
Ad Council WW
Rodger Wright LRH Comm WW
Approved by Jane Kember The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ei.cden Founder
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
291
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JANUARY 1970 Remimeo Public
Divisions Dir Success SCIENTOLOGY PRAYER
Below is a prayer for Total Freedom to be delivered at the end of
the ceremony of each Sunday Service. It was written by Peter
Ginever in November, 1969. A PRAYER FOR 'TOTAL FREEDOM'
May the author of the Universe enable all men to reach an
understanding of their spiritual nature.
May awareness and understanding of life expand, so that all may
come to know the author of the Universe.
And may others also reach this understanding which brings Total
Freedom.
At this time, we think of those whose liberty is threatened; of
those who have suffered imprisonment for their beliefs; of those
who are enslaved or martyred, and for all those who are brutalized,
trapped or attacked.
We pray that human rights will be preserved so that all people
may believe and worship freely, so that freedom will once again be
seen in our land.
Freedom from war, and poverty, and want; freedom to be; freedom
to do and freedom to have.
Freedom to use and understand Man's potential-a potential that is
God given and God-like.
And freedom to achieve that understanding and awareness that is
Total Freedom.
May God let it be so.
Lt. Cmdr. Diana Hubbard CS-6 for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:DH.jz.rd
Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 292
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL 1970 Remimeo Chaplain's Hat
PEO Hat pcs, Hat MORALE
Morale is defined as "a sense of common purpose or a degree of
dedication to a common task regarded as characteristic of or
dominant in a particular group or organization". Also defined as "A
confident, resolute, willing, often self-sacrificing and courageous
attitude of an individual to the function or tasks demanded or
expected of him by a group of which he is a part that is based upon
such factors as pride in achievement and aims of the group, faith
in its leadership and ultimate success, a sense of fruitful
personal participation in its work and a devotion and loyalty to
other members of the group". Also "a state of well-being and
buoyancy based upon such factors as physical or mental well-being,
a sense of purpose and usefulness and confidence in the future."
Morale in a military sense applies to the whole group as in
"Esprit de Corps" (spirit of the group).
However, a group's morale is after all the additive result of the
morale of each individual member.
When one speaks of "bad morale" one can mean an individual's bad
morale or that of a whole group.
By caring for the morale of each individual one can raise the
morale of the whole group.
By working on group morale one can also change the morale of the
individuals in the group.
Successes tend to increase morale. Failures tend to decrease
morale.
Morale is subject to propaganda attacks entering false data into
a group.
Sound morale is best built by Reality. The restricting of
unsavory news can injure morale by throwing out the R factor.
Similarly false validation can injure group morale as the R
factor is corrupted.
The "expertise" of military groups in "handling morale" is to a
marked degree worthless wherever it violates R factors.
A severe or savage experience does not necessarily destroy group
morale. I have observed that there was no group at all much less
morale in combat units before they had a harsh experience in
common. The highest morale groups in the world have been those
whose common lot was harsh mutual experience. (US Marines, the
Foreign Legion, etc.)
Morale is not a sweetness and light proposition. Hand holding and
sympathy can destroy morale if it also lessens group solidarity or
injures the belief in the group's leadership.
R is the vital factor in all morale problems.
Six months or even a year before an operational or functional
catastrophe one could have detected out-morale in certain areas.
Such out-morale areas, continuing, have preceded a general upset or
severe loss for the whole group.
If small zones of out-morale are noticed and repaired when they
occur, the group can be saved future upsets of magnitude. 293
The repair of individual morale is accomplishable, in the field
of Scientology tech and Ethics. The handling of group morale is
done in the area of accomplishing objectives along the agreed upon
group purpose line and in the sphere of group social relations. If
any organization has a chaplain with a full grasp of the subject of
morale, its definitions and technology and if he works factually
and successfully, group catastrophes would be averted. Lack of this
function can be very destructive to a group. Successful
accomplishment of it can be the source of group success. Skill in
Scientology Tech, group organizational functions and Public
Relations are the requisites of a good chaplain. LRH:dz.ei.rd L.
RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1970 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 OCTOBER 1970
A/G Hat Issue V pcs, Hat see of Public Services Hat Dir of Public A
BOOK: "THE BACKGROUND TO THE Events Hat RELIGION OF SCIENTOLOGY AND
CEREMONIES Dir of Training OF THE CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY Hat
Chaplain Hat OF CALIFORNIA WORLD WIDE" There has been a gradual
standardization of Sunday Church services and other ceremonies over
the last few years. There is an increasing interest in the
religious philosophy of Scientology amongst Scientologists and
indeed non-Scientologists. Currently there is an increasing number
of individuals entering missions, franchises, Churches and
organizations, who before Scientology had no religious practice or
persuasion. It is therefore an entirely predictable evolutionary
step to produce a standard ministerial and lay reference book for
study and corporate prayer. From January Ist 1971 it is to be added
to the Minister's Course Checksheet. It is to be used in all Sunday
services in all Churches of Scientology. The A/G, the pcs, and
Chaplain in every org are to have a copy as part of the post
materials. David Gaiman for Jane Kember The Guardian AV for Mary
Sue Hubbard LRH:MSH:JK:DG:sb.ka.rd Controller Copyright (c) 1970
for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
294 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 APRIL 1971 Remimeo Issue I Qual Sec
Hat Dept 15 Hat Dir Success Hat HOD Area Sec Hat Minister's
Checksheet Ethics Officer Hat ORDINATION CEREMONY (Reference HCO PL
12 June 1958)
A Church Member seeking Ordination as a Minister of the Church of
Scientology is firstly duly examined as to Ethics, secondly as to
the Codes and Creed, and thirdly as to the ability to counsel and
deliver the religious services of the Church in the normal course
of his or her theological studies in an Academy of Scientology,
These examinations having been completed and necessary
certification by the Department of Examinations, Certificates and
Awards having been issued as covered by requirements per
Ministerial Examination Checksheets, the final investiture proceeds
as follows:
I . PRESENTATION: The candidates for ordination are called in the
presence of the congregation and before duly ordained Ministers of
the Church, to read and attest to the Auditor's Code and Code of a
Scientologist. The candidates then deliver a short sermon on the
subject of Scientology. After this, the officiating Minister reads:
"In the name of the Church Council, and before these witnesses,
this member (these members), name(s), having been examined most
thoroughly as to fitness, aptitude and vocation to serve the
Ministry of the Church of Scientology are here declared accepted."
2. INVOCATION: "By this invocation of the symbol of our Church,
we recognize and acknowledge that he (she) (they) is/are ordained
and henceforth be, Ministers of the Church with all rights,
sacerdotal privileges, and responsibilities due to and from a
Minister." (The Minister is here presented with a Church of
Scientology cross.) "Before these witnesses, you are now charged
with the responsibility of furthering the spiritual work of the
Church in all its aspects, to hear confessions, to preach, and
otherwise minister to the spiritual travail of your fellow man and
to hold inviolate the confidence that your fellow beings impart."
3. ACCEPTANCE: "By the acceptance of these credentials, you are
further charged at all times to uphold the religious and ethical
tenets, precepts, and principles which form the cornerstones of our
Faith."
"I ask the congregation now to acknowledge and recognize the
Minister(s) here presented and ordained." (Dismiss.)
This policy in no way changes requirements for qualifications as
a Minister. Robert H. Thomas Deputy Guardian US for Jane Kember The
Guardian World Wide for Mary Sue Hubbard LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:nt.rd The
Controller Copyright (c) 1971 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 295 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 JUNE 1971
Issue II Remimeo PRAYER DAY ORDINATION CEREMONY (Reference HCO PL
12 April 197 1, Issue I)
The following Ordination Ceremony, as successfully used in Prayer
Day in Los Angeles, may be utilized in such similar cases when
Ordination is integrated into a larger service. The requirements
referred to are outlined in HCO PL 12 April 1971 "Ordination
Ceremony". ORDINATION
This ceremony is conducted by a Scientology Minister in complete
ministerial dress.
,, Will the candidates for Ordination please come forward?"
(They come forward and stand facing the minister. They wear
clerical dress without the Scientology cross.)
"(The full name of each candidate is inserted here)... you come
before us at your own behest, in order to make known to these
assembled witnesses your desire to serve the Ministry of the Church
of Scientology."
"Do each of you affirm that you have fulfilled all requirements
set forth by the Church for Ordination, and do you further affirm
that you have been duly examined and certified as having completed
such requirements?"
(They answer each in sequence, "I do.")
"Do you also attest that you will abide by the Auditor's Code and
the Code of a Scientologist?"
(They answer together "I do.
"Please turn and face the congregation."
(They do so.)
"(The name of each inserted here). . ., having been examined most
thoroughly as to fitness, aptitude and conviction to serve the
Ministry of the Church of Scientology, and having thus manifested
their vocation, are, in the name of the Church Council and before
these witnesses, accepted."
(They turn and face the minister.)
"By the invocation of the symbol of our Church, we here
acknowledge that Reverend (names inserted here, each with Reverend
in front of it)... are ordained and henceforth be, Ministers of the
Church of Scientology, with all rights, sacerdotal privileges, and
responsibilities of the Ministry."
(The ordaining minister places a cross around each ordainee's
neck, and presents him with his cert if desired.)
(After the crosses are received the ordainees turn and face the
congregation.) "Before these witnesses, you are now charged with
the responsibility of furthering the spiritual work of the Church
in all its aspects: to hear confessions, to preach, and otherwise
minister to the spiritual travail of your fellow man, and to hold
inviolate the confidence that your fellow beings impart." "By the
acceptance of these credentials you are further charged at all
times to uphold the religious and ethical tenets, precepts and
principles of our faith." "Do you, the congregation, recognize,
agree and acknowledge these Ministers are Ordained? If so say 'we
do'." (Congregation: "We do.") "Thank you. Having been agreed, it
is so." (The ordainees stand briefly and then singly return to
their seats.) Note that this Ordination Ceremony is especially
useful in Ordaining several ministers in the same ceremony. Craig
Beeney DG Tech US for Robert H. Thomas DG US for Jane Kember The
Guardian WW for Mary Sue Hubbard Controller for L. RON HUBBARD
Founder LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:CB:ne.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron
Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 297 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint
Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER
1970 Issue 11 Remimeo C/S Hats Qual Sec Hats Medical Spec Chksht
HDC Chksht Health Series No. I C/S Chksht MO Hats MEDICINE AND
DIANETICS
Medicine ideally applied using the technology contained in such
Series as Programming and The Data Series does work and does cure
many.
There are a few things which occur however to give a doctor a
loss in his own technology and a disbelief in a specific technique
or treatment he knows by all scientific basis and early tests
should have worked.
Most of these are covered in the Dianetics Course and it is
assumed the student of this course is familiar with the technology
of medicine and has graduated from Dianetics prior to reading this.
The main basis of loss of confidence in a medical technique falls
into two categories:
A. The patient was in fact already physically cured of the
diagnosed disease but still has the symptoms.
B. The person never did have the disease by test but has the
physical symptoms, sometimes classical, of the disease.
An example of A. in looking through actual case files shows a
patient who at one time had type HI hepatitis. This was in 1960. It
was tested then and all tests positive. Treatment was given and all
tests negative and by actual physical body tests was cured.
In 1970 the patient suddenly develops all of the symptoms of the
disease, including the pain and somatics. All outward physical
signs are evident in a preliminary exam. However, Clinical tests
done in a hospital under controlled conditions were negative.
A physician working without lab facilities using only office
equipment he can afford would be quite justified in trying to treat
this patient medically as the patient was in pain and suffering
just as severely with the same superficial symptoms as in 1960.
However, tests showed in 1970 medicine had cured her earlier.
The person had not been processed Dianetically in 1960. The
physical body then was still subject to re-experiencing the
somatics and pain and attempting to fight a disease it no longer
had.
Various cases showed acute rises in temperature; in the case of a
TB patient cured in 1955, fluid collected in his lungs; skin
coloration, pulse, respiration, blood pressure and even blood in
the urine have occurred in tested cases where an early disease no
longer, in fact, exists.
The body due to a key-in simply believes it's there.
Reactions to some vaccines and inoculations demonstrate the
physical aspect of this-the bank aspect is another story. 298
In example B. the same follows. Case history shows the disease
itself was not a physical fact this lifetime but body reactions
quite physical with all signs of the. illness except the actual
micro-biotic in the body occurs.
So where after tests it is shown that in actual fact the disease
exists, it should be treated medically.
Then once a physical cure occurs and along with the medical
treatment it must be treated Dianetically for the patient to remain
physically well.
This course shows how medicine and Dianetics; and Scientology are
correlated to produce a permanent non-reoccurring cure, it shows
when to use medicine and when to process and how they work
together.
Mary C. Robinson, Medical Specialist Flag Medical Officer for W/O
Susan Pomeroy D/4th Mate for Ens. Robin Lindsell Flag 4th Mate for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:RL:SP:MCR:rr.rd
Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
299
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1970
Med Spec Chksht
Issue III
MO Hat
C/S Hat
Health Series No. 2
Qual Sec Hat
HDC Chksht
C/S Chksht
THE ROLE OF THE MEDICAL OFFICER
Scientology Organizations now have a post in their Qualifications
Divisions which has as its main purpose:
INCREASING THE NUMBER OF STAFF DECLARED IN GOOD HEALTH.
KEEPING THE ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH AND HYGIENE STANDARDS HIGH.
It is sometimes necessary to programme individuals for medical
test series and examinations by medical specialist in order to
determine beyond doubt which category an unwell person comes under:
I . Has a known physical illness in present time which is
medically curable.
2. Has a known physical illness for which there is currently no
medical cure.
3. Has symptoms of physical illness but test results show no
current disease, malfunctions or deficiency, of a physical nature.
Yet the person is not well.
Whenever it is found that medical treatment will result in a
physical cure, or relief of a symptom or symptoms the individuals
are then programmed and directed through a medical series to a
result.
As per Dianetic and Scientology technology such persons are given
assists and auditing as directed by the Case Supervisor.
Reports on the medical progress of programmed individuals are
sent regularly to the C/S by the Medical Officer who is in turn in
liaison with the Medical Specialist giving the treatment.
Where medical treatment is found to not be producing results
without processing, it will be found to work with it. So charts for
the person have the processing times entered on them as well.
Where there is no known medical cure as in No. 2, or no known
medical illness as in No. 3, it is entirely up to processing to
produce a cure-a Well and Happy Human Being even though some
medical relief for the symptoms may be used.
DRUGS - PAIN KILLERS AND ANAESTHESIAS
There are some cases when drugs must be used in the very early
stages of treatment to enable healing. For the most part these are
drugs to control spasms such as in an ovary infection given along
with the curative medication until such time as the response to
healing occurs and the spasms cease. It has been found where a good
touch assist is given such drugs are discontinued and only the
curative medication continued. In any event they are never given
any longer than absolutely necessary, as each dose extends the time
before auditing can begin. Anaesthesias for tooth extractions, if
local, wear off in twenty-four hours while a general anaesthesia
prevents auditing for seven days so is discouraged. Surgical
general anaesthesia. for minor surgery is discouraged in the cases
of injury if a local anaesthetic will do. In all events any time a
general anaesthetic is used it must be run out in processing as
soon as possible so the Medical Officer keeps the C/S advised of
the exact time and date drugs have been administered. The Medical
Officer in the Sea Org may discontinue a drug at any point
regardless of medical prescriptions as he is in a position to
observe assist and processing results the medical doctor may not be
aware are occurring.
No drug is ever given in the Sea Org without the C/S permission
and this applies to Scientology staff as well. Those undergoing
intensive processing also are subject to this policy.
So the Medical Officer acts as the "middleman" so to speak
between the C/S and
300
medical specialist and is the one responsible for the medical
progress of those on his lines.
In clinics and hospitals where the practice of Scientology and
Dianetics is correlated with the practice of medicine the liaison
is the Qual Medical Officer.
Those programmed for medical tests and treatments are started on
one because:
1. The C/S has ordered it based on no or slow processing gains or
as a general precautionary measure.
2. The Medical Officer orders it based on a continued observation
of ill health in a staff member.
A Dianetically trained medical doctor may also refer a patient to
an organization's Medical Officer so that liaison records are
maintained and the C/S and medical doctor know what is occurring
with the preclear.
It has been the experience of the Medical Officer on Flag who was
conducting programmes from port to port that in some countries a GP
who gives only a superficial exam such as the company yearly
check-up or insurance check-up does not have a good record of
locating what is wrong with the person. In some countries a person
must be in an acute stage before he can be admitted to a hospital
and be properly programmed and tested to find out what is wrong
with him. Yet the hospital is the only place where adequate
equipment and testing facilities exist to really properly diagnose
a chronic illness.
In such cases it pays to programme a testing series (such as
blood, urine, X-Rays, EKG, basic metabolism tests, barium X-Ray as
applies) first, and then send the patient, tests in hand to the
doctor for blood pressure and general check-up and consultation,
rather than waste a trip to a GP to find out a person whom you know
is ill has nothing Wrong with him. Where tests involve admittance
and observation, small hospitals or clinics may be found who will
do it, where government ran hospitals are restricted to the acutely
ill. Having to 8C in order to get a result should not be necessary
in the medically advanced countries where proper tests are part of
the routine.
In using the technology of Dianetics and Scientology it sometimes
occurs that the existence of a physically based illness shows up in
processing. It is known that it is physical and that it must be
diagnosed and cured or treatment is indicated.
Such a person may have not been aware of it earlier due to the
fact it was suppressed mentally or the person had to be raised up
to pain on the tone scale and to an awareness of his physical body.
In such cases earlier medical exams never revealed it.
Some such cases are remarkable:
Due to running an early life incident a time a piece of lead was
stabbed into the forehead of a preclear was run, it had been there
for twenty years. It was then removed as a source of chronic
headaches.
A preclear spots a slipped disc in session, a disease or an organ
malfunctioning, etc. When taken for treatment tests or X-Rays
reveal their presence. In such cases what is wrong is known so then
one must guide the doctor to finding it.
In cases where the doctor is not familiar with the technology of
Dianetics this must be done with a great deal of tact.
The reverse in relations between the technologies also occurs,
and it's up to the Medical Officer to act when necessary in this
instance.
A person of higher case level sometimes will not respond to the
normal amount of anaesthetics or pn killers and some kinds just do
not work anymore. As getting a leg set without a pn killer is not
advised, be sure the anaesthetic used has taken effect and is
effective first. Usually with general anaesthetics; it takes more
to produce a result, so local is advised.
Response to treatment has been so speeded up, treatment no longer
necessary can be continued past that point. E.g.-Treated fractures
heal faster, infections respond faster, and internal disease,
clears up much earlier in those cases being processed along with
treatment. It is important the Medical Officer observes progress
and handles this as the doctor may not be familiar at all with
Dianetics. A fifteen day treatment usually produces a result on the
7th or 8th for example. 301
A course of medicine that is a curative treatment always works
when processing is used. There are no exceptions in the Flag
programmed cases.
If it is a medically curable illness and the person was not cured
the diagnosis was not correct. Retesting and examinations were
done, the proper treatment given and then a cure resulted. Such
cases are Permanently Cured and later on providing processing also
occurred there will be no re-occurrence of the symptoms,
The research cases on Flag where conditions both medical and
processing were controlled (even to the extent of never giving the
patient his medicine bottle but doling out his pills and seeing he
takes them as called for), became well.
There are thousands of cases which have become well when no
medical cure has been possible, but this is already known and
established Dianetic data.
What is new here is that medicine itself is made to work as per
its own technology with 100% results case after case.
If patient "A" has disease "B" then treatment "C" for that
disease, which should work, will work and it will work each time
without exception.
So much of a doctor's experience with failures, when he has known
his tech was in and yet the patient did not respond is a thing of
the past.
The C/S who knows his tech and who has good data coming to him
from the Medical Officer liaison can then know when to order a
certain action done. As medical treatment and processing both
affect the rate of response to the other, someone must be there in
the middle observing by exact records and charts and tests the
effects of both and that is the Medical Officer's job.
And in case after case you will discover that the correct
diagnosis and correct treatment backed with processing will just
simply "blow away" the illness as the preclear having been properly
indicated and looking at the right thing in session suddenly gets
well.
Sometimes just the correct diagnosis does it when the person is
of a higher level of processingi.e. "So that's what it is!" and
that's all brother-it's gone!
On the other hand if the person has something wrong with his body
and he knows it and it is mis-indicated (i.e. misdiagnosed or
improperly treated or he is told nothing is wrong when there is),
he can be held up in processing gains as there is a PTP, ARC Break
and a misunderstood sitting there every session.
How does one know the indication is correct? GIs or even VGIs
will occur on the proper indication no matter what it is or how
serious, and remain in under proper treatment and auditing-i.e. GIs
and VGIs after each session. It is known-It is being handled - It
is getting better-It is cured, brings and keeps in GIs.
I
The only other hang-up observed by a Medical Officer is
considerations about not contributing while recovering, and not
looking forward to recovery due to a return to something not wanted
when recovered.
These the Medical Officer must handle, if possible, as both slow
recovery rates.
I've not yet seen anyone not get well when both medical tech and
Dianetic tech
are in, in any case handled.
CPO Mary Robinson
Medical Specialist
Flag Medical Officer
for
W/O Susan Pomeroy
Flag D/4th Mate
for
Eris. Robin Lindsell
Flag 4th Mate
for
LRH:RL:SP:MCR:rr.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1970 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
302
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I OCTOBER 1970
Remimeo
C/S Hats
Qual S * Sec Hats
Medical Spec Chksht
HDC Chksht
C/S Chksht,
Health Series No. 3
MO Hats
MEDICAL OFFICER'S CODE
The following Code is practised on the ships of the Sea
Organization where prescribed medical treatment must be continued
at sea. On the Flag Ship there is a fully operational clinic and a
Medical Officer. It is presented here to provide a basis of
operation for the Qualifications Medical Liaison Officer and may be
of interest to the Dianetically trained Doctor.
I . I promise not to evaluate the physical symptoms of those on
medical lines but instead to listen and then provide whatever
information or direction is needed to result in a physical
improvement.
2. 1 promise not to invalidate the reality of those on medical
lines as to the state of their physical bodies but to keep them
producing and contributing to whatever extent they are
realistically able.
3. 1 promise to administer only standard or proven medical
treatment where indicated and not to deviate or experiment with
unproven treatments or medications nor will I allow anyone else to
do so.
4. 1 promise to keep all dental and medical appointments once
made and to see that those who need to see a specialist or dentist
see one.
5. 1 promise to see that those who are not getting proper food or
rest do so, so that they become eligible for auditing.
6. 1 promise to see that the data needed to give proper care to
those on medical lines is passed on or conveyed to whomever is
giving it in my absence.
7. 1 promise never to sympathize with those on medical lines but
to be effective.
8. 1 promise to complete all medical treatments started which are
producing improvement in physical conditions and not to change the
medication or treatment that is producing results for another.
9. 1 promise to refer anyone who by their actions are attempting
to prevent a cure or recovery to the MAA and to advise the Case
Supervisor.
10. 1 promise never to abandon or neglect those under my care.
11. 1 reserve the right to refuse care to anyone who does not
follow the directions given them to make them well or who
repeatedly fails to keep appointments involving a medical series
which must be given as scheduled to be effective.
12. 1 promise never to criticize or become angry with those on
medical lines.
13. 1 promise never to provide a pain killer to anyone I feel
would respond to an assist given by myself or another promptly.
14. 1 promise not to continue a treatment past the point it is no
longer needed or no longer effective.
15. 1 promise to grant beingness to those on medical lines.
16, 1 promise to provide a safe, clean and comfortable
environment for the unwell.
303
17. 1 promise to indicate to those on my lines which medications
and treatments are curative ones and which are only intended to
alleviate symptoms until they are Dianetically cured.
18. 1 promise not to enter comments, expressions or enturbulence
into the environment of those on medical lines that would cause
mystery, misunderstoods or fear of worsening.
19. 1 promise to encourage those on my lines who are responding
well to be as causative and knowledgeable about their physical
condition as is possible and never to present medicine as anything
more than a technology that can be studied and learned by anyone of
interest and ability.
20. 1 promise not to explain, justify or make excuses for any
clinical mistake whether real or imagined but to correct it
immediately.
21. 1 promise to estimate the current state of those on medical
lines with reality and not to diverge due to other determined
influence or false or alarming reports.
22. 1 promise to follow all standard CIS instructions exactly and
to obtain CIS permission before permitting the administration of
any narcotic or drug rendering a pc ineligible for auditing.
23. 1 promise to see that all dentists and medical specialists
used to treat a preclear are competent in their skill and to base
my decision on results only.
24. 1 promise to maintain high health standards in the
environment and to see those I am responsible for are protected
from the influence of poor health or safety standards.
25. 1 promise to use my knowledge of Dianctics and Scientology
in all that I do.
26.. 1 promise to keep excellent records and data on those on my
lines and to keep the CIS advised.
27. 1 promise to prevent extreme health conditions from occurring
by seeing that preventative or early care is given on time.
28. 1 promise to ensure anyone medically cured or under treatment
receives processing as this alone ensures the cure remains a
permanent one and shortens the time required for treatment.
CPO Mary Robinson Medical Specialist Flag Medical Officer for W/O
Susan Pomeroy Flag D/4th Mate for Ens. Robin Lindsell Flag 4th Mate
for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:RL:SP:MR:sb.rd Copyright
(c)
1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
304
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 NOVEMBER 1965
Remimeo
Students Qual Div
THE CRAMMING SECTION
The Cramming Section is a section of the Department of Review
(Div 5-Dept 14).
PURPOSE: HCO Pol Ltr 31 July 1965 "Purposes of the Qualifications
Division" states:
"The prime purpose of the Department of Review and all its
sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON CORRECT ANY NON-OPTIMUM RESULT OF THE ORGANIZATION
AND ALSO TO ADVISE WAYS AND MEANS BASED ON ACTUAL EXPERIENCE IN THE
DEPARTMENT TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST ANY CONTINUED POOR RESULT FROM ANY
TECHNICAL PERSONNEL OR THE FUNCTION OF THE ORGANIZATION."
More specifically, "The Cramming Section teaches students what
they have missed" (HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 Review).
WHO IS SENT TO CRAMMING? HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 "Review"
states:
"Any student failing to get 5 or more passes (usual expected
number is 10 passes per week on the Saint Hill Course) in two
weeks, theory and practical check sheets inclusive, must be ordered
by the (c) of T to the Review Cramming Section."
HCO Pol Ltr 14 Sept 65 "Classification Required before Moving to
Next Level" states:
"If a student flunks his classification written exam or the
examination of his auditing via his auditing reports, the student
is to review his theory, then his practical, as well as submit
further auditing evidence (auditor's reports) before
re-examination...
"The student is expected to complete the theory checksheet for
each level in two weeks. He is expected to complete the Practical
checksheet for each level in two weeks. Any student failing to do
this has a down statistic and is to be sent to Cramming. Any
student who flunks an examination is sent to Cramming. Any student
who fails to have the auditing requirement done by the time his
practical checksheet is done (and thus must review the entire
level) is sent to Cramming."
HCO Pol Ltr 14 October 1965 "Course Pattern" states:
"If the examination is not passed, the student remains in the
Qualifications Division in the Cramming Section at a charge of L2
per day until he is able to pass an Exam on the Level."
REVIEW AND ETHICS: HCO Pol Ltr 29 April 1965 Issue II states:
"A student who is disruptive of discipline and acts contrary to
the Ethics Codes may not be ordered to Review by the (c) of P, (c)
of T or Ethics personnel or other persons in an org.
"Tech and Qualifications personnel, particularly the Tech See and
Qual Sec and (c) of Tech Services, the (c) of P and (c) of T, (c)
of Exams and (c) of Review and (c) of Certs may order students or
pcs, to Review or to course or to HGC or anywhere in and around
these two Divisions without any Ethics action being implied. It is
just normal, done to get students and pcs on the road to higher
levels."
HCO Pol Ltr 28 April 1965 Issue III states:
"No (c) of P or Course Supervisor or Academy Instructor may
threaten a student who is disruptive of course discipline with
Review auditing or training. Such students may only be ordered to
Ethics."
305
TWIN CHECKING: When a student is sent to Cramming, his twin is
temporarily borrowed from course to see that the student goes
through his requirements in so far as theory and practical review
are concerned.
The twin is then sent back to course to complete his level as he
did not come to cramming for flunked examination or down
statistics. If it appears, however, that the twin is directly
responsible for the student having flunked and needs some review of
his coaching ability and/or theory and practical, the twin may be
kept in cramming for the completion of the level.
Whenever a student is sent to cramming directly from course (i.e.
for down statistics, failure to produce auditing requirements by
the time his practical is complete or specific point to be handled,
he should be routed (via Qual Interview and Invoice) with a slip
clearly specifying the reason for his being sent to Review.
SUMMARY: The Cramming Section teaches the students what they have
missed.
It trains them only to a specific result.
The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes relating to
this department (Review) (and therefore the Cramming Section) were
intended to assist and expedite the carrying out of its purpose.
Therefore no order, rule, regulation, policy or route may be used
to swerve it from its prime purpose of ensuring that the results of
Scientology are excellent and consistent.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1966
Remimeo
Qual Hats
Training Hats
Students
CRAMMING
STUDENTS WHO FLUNK
CLASSIFICATION FOR A LEVEL
After reviewing the theory and practical of a level, a student
who flunked his Classification for a level may request permission
to do the Dissemination Drill, if he or she has not acquired a
preclear.
When the student has done well on the Dissemination Drill, he or
she may request permission to go and use the Dissemination Drill in
the area with the purpose of obtaining a preclear to audit in order
to classify at the flunked level.
The Cramming Officer will expect the student to report at 9.30
the next morning with a written report on where the dissemination
took place and the results of the dissemination.
The purpose of Cramming is to get the students flowing through
the Course fast, so the emphasis here is simply to get a preclear
fast and classify fast, bearing in mind "The rapidity of particle
flow alone determines power."
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r.cden.rd Founder
Copyright g 1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
306
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MAY 1969
Remimeo
Franchise
CRAMMING SECTION - SERVICE TO TRAINED AUDITORS
The Cramming Section 'teaches students what they have missed'.
This includes Trained Auditors who wish to be brought up to date on
current technical developments.
A Field or Franchise Auditor wishing to up-date his technical
data may do so in the Cramming Section of any Org qualified to
teach his level of Training.
The Director of Exams may determine that the Auditor is missing
too much data, such as a whole course, to handle in Cramming and
route the Auditor to the Tech Division for retraining. Cramming
does not teach full Dianetic, Academy or SHSBC courses.
The line of keeping Tech in the area up -to date and standard is
indeed a Qual hat. It is also a source of steady Qual income.
"New" courses are of course taught in Tech.
Rodger Wright - Chairman
Ad Council WW
Jim Keely - Qual See WW
Bruce Glushakow - HCO Area See WW
AD COUNCIL WW
Edie Hoyseth - HCO Exec See WW
Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW
Tom Morgan - Public Exec See WW
Rodger Wright - LRH Comm WW
Leif Windle - Policy Review Section WW
LRH:RW.ei.rd Jane Kember - The Guardian WW
Copyright
G
1969 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
307
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 AUGUST 1959
CenO
B.SCN INTERNESHIPS
Jack Parkhouse in a despatch to L. Ron Hubbard suggests that the
B.Sen Interneship be restarted. Here is what Jack says:
"We would very much like to re-start B.Scn Interneships
again-this system, apart from turning out better auditors helps a
great deal in declaring larger units.
"We're aware of the shortcomings of the old method and would like
to propose this one:
I . Only good HPA students be accepted for an Interneship.
2. An Interne is not paid and makes no payment.
3. Whether he is a part-time or full time Interne he shall audit
not less than 500 hours for the HGC plus attending all conferences
and training periods.
4. If the Interne flubs cases we dispense with him no further
liability to ourselves and no future benefits to the Interne.
5. At the completion of a satisfactory Interneship the student is
ready and should be put on a regular B.Sen Course at a purely
nominal charge-say 10 gns.
"It costs us little to have a couple of extra students on a
course already set up-but those students will be able to use a
B.Scn and we will have had a great deal of really economical labour
from them."
Peter Hemery
HCO Communicator WW
PH:brb.rd Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
308
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MAY 1962
CenOCon
INTERNE HAT
WHAT IS EXPECTED OF INTERNES
I . That they make such changes in themselves as may be necessary
to deserve respect as Professional Scientologists.
2. That they become familiar with the administration of the
Organization according to Ron's policies.
3. That they learn, by experience, how the various Departments
function with particular reference to the inter-relationship of
functions.
4. That they satisfy the following Posts that they have indeed
made such progress: the 6 Department Heads, the Organization
Secretary (or Assoc Sec), the HCO, the Interne Administrator, and
finally, the HCO Board of Review.
5. That they thoroughly understand the Org Board and the OIC
Board, and their place in the running of a Central Organization.
1~
6. That they become acquainted with Department Heads and what
their various responsibilities are.
7. That they conduct themselves in a quiet, courteous manner when
being observed and
listened-to
in Reception by the Public and Preclears.
8. That while on Post they are to be dressed neatly and cleanly
to meet Public acceptance level.
9. That under no circumstances are they to try to wear the
Registrar's Hat, or any other hat than their own, or to interrupt
conversations Registrar is having with a Prospect.
10. That the cleanliness of the various buildings is also their
responsibility.
11. That learning the functions of Letter Registrar and Central
Files is an integral part of their training as Professional
Scientologists.
12. That they become familiar with HCO Policy Letter of Nov 15,
1960 "Modern Procurement Letters".
13. That to the best of their ability they live up to the Code of
a Scientologist, and, when auditing, the Auditor's Code.
14. That they understand "Dev-T" and its consequences, and be
familiar with the Bulletins concerning it, and apply them.
15. That they handle all problems with Scientology.
16. That they keep their withholds cleaned up.
17. That they keep their Technical ability up.
18. That IF IT ISN'T IN WRITING IT ISN'T SO.
309
19. That they learn the three basket system, the Comm Center
system, and the proper routing of dispatches.
20. That they learn proper phone procedure.
21. That they learn by observing and doing to communicate to the
general public, the Postman, tradesmen, and salesmen as well as
Students and Preclears, both in person and on the phone.
22. That they learn by asking questions, writing dispatches, and
getting them answered that there are no "secrets" in the Central
Org, with the exception of Preclear test and Prepcheck files.
23. THAT THEY DECIDE TO BE PROFESSIONAL SCIENTOLOGISTS.
INTERNE CHECK OUT LIST
I . Pattern of a Central Org, HCO Policy Letter of February 14,
1961.
2. How to Handle Work, HCO Bulletin of August 19, 1959.
3. How to do a Staff Job, HCO Policy Letter of April 11, 196 1.
4. Scientology Org Comm System, HCO Admin Letter of October 17,
1961. Learn
in essence.
5. Org Rudiments, HCO Policy Letter of December 11, 1961. Learn
first sentence verbatim, Rudiments I through VII in essence,
6. Types of Letters Established, HCO Policy Letter of February 4,
1961. Learn the rules governing mimeoing, including the color
scheme.
7. Help Me Put In The New Lines, HCO Policy Letter of January
10, 196 1.
8. Org Sec Hat, See ED No. 324 of LA, February 19, 1960.
9. Outflow, See ED No. 276 of LA, July 7, 1959.
10. Quality and Admin in Central Orgs, HCO Policy Letter of May
29, 196 1.
11. Classes of Auditors, HCO Policy Letter of November 29, 196 1.
12. City Offices, HCO Policy Letter of May 11, 196 1.
Issued by: Ken Salmen
HCO Area See LA
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Director
LRH.jw.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
310
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JUNE 1962
CenOCon
STAFF AND INTERNE AUDITORS
Interneship has been offered to graduating HPA and HCA students
for a 3 months period of work in the Central Organization.
This has been a requirement for certification.
In actual practice, some orgs because of low units and other
reasons do not hang on to professional staff Auditors but replace
them with Internes.
It has always expressly been forbidden to use non certified staff
auditors on HGC pcs. Unless an Auditor has his certificate in his
possession he or she cannot be used to Audit HGC pcs.
We are now operating with the fact of clearing all cases if the
Auditor is well trained. We are now moving toward clearing as an
ordinary result of being audited in an HGC. This fact can never
take place if staff Auditor procurement looks only toward the
Academy and Internes. Such a programme is technical suicide.
Further HGC results have been falling off to the degree that
routine procedures are not expressly followed and uncertified
Auditors have been used in HGC.
There is something wrong with an org that cannot keep its staff
auditors. Their own reality on results must be poor, their working
conditions bad and their future uncertain if staff Auditors are
continually lost by an organization.
An organization must follow this programme on staff Auditors:
I . See that they get adequate auditing toward clear along with
other staff auditing;
2. Use only certified Auditors on HGC and staff pcs;
3. Work toward a staff Auditor having his own personal office
with desk and proper furnishings;
4. Keep excess admin personnel to a minimum to keep units up;
5. Pay no interne fee or units and use no internes in the HGC;
6. Give staff Auditors good current training;
7. Prepare Auditors for posts on staff by using them only as
supernumerary personnel in Admin or the Academy to help
instructor's Admin or coaching individual students;
8. Take on an interne only if the person is willing to become a
staff Auditor and then fit that person to be one before auditing is
done by that person in the HGC;
9. Take Interneship only as free advanced training conditional to
taking a position on staff, not as a quick method of getting staff
auditors;
10. Get over the games condition with field Auditors and get
them back on staff;
11. Settle the org down as to personnel turnover;
12. Get income up by getting technical up. Do not have even one
poorly trained student or non-gain HGC pc walk out of the org.
The Interne programme except as above, is hereby cancelled in its
other aspects.
No Interne may be paid units for being an Interne. No staff
auditor may be employed unless actually certified.
A ninety day period of grace from the date of this policy letter
is allowed to get the whole of this into effect and not go back on
interneship arrangements made before this date. Act now to have
this programme in before ninety days.
LRH:dr.cden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright
(c)
1962
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
311
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I SEPTEMBER 1967
General Non-Remimeo SHSBC Students Internes Class VII SH Tech &
Qual Personnel RAP, Registration & Hats Personnel
INTERNE TRAINING PROGRAMME
This Policy clarifies the lines of the Interne Training
Programme. The necessity for this Policy grew out of a recent Comm
Ev on Internes and a Board of Investigation on the Interne
Programme.
NOMINATION OF INTERNES
We need a large supply of Qualified Class VII Auditors throughout
the world. To help build the number of Class VII Internes the
following procedure is to be followed.
When a student arrives at Saint Hill to do the Saint Hill Special
Briefing Course, he/she will be informed on Registering that on the
basis of course statistics and leadership potential he/she may be
nominated for the Class VII Interne Course. This is a privilege and
the nomination is not binding either way, but depends on the person
making excellent progress as a student.
After enough time has gone by to see how the student's progress
has been, he or she may be nominated by the (c) of T and the (c) of
P who form a nominating committee and the appropriate terminals are
notified (i.e. student's local org, Ad Council WW, Treasury Div SH,
Personnel Procurement Officer SH) so that steps can be taken early
to complete arrangements for the student to interne immediately
upon completion of the SHSBC, if the student continues to maintain
an excellent record.
INTERNE TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
The following are the requirements for starting the Class VII
Interne Course.
1. Complete Staff Status II checksheet and pass Staff Status 11
exam. If not completed before coming to Saint Hill, this can be
done after nomination with the Staff Training Officer SH.
2. Class VI (provisional) with an excellent record on the Saint
Hill Special Briefing Course, completing the course in less than 32
weeks of training time.
3. Signed a contract with an official Scientology Org for a
minimum of 2 1/2 years of service to that org to begin on
completion of the Interne Course.
4. Proper financial arrangements completed for payment of Course
fees.
Following are the only requirements to complete the course:
I . Star-Rate checkouts on Level VII Confidential materials and
theory checksheet as approved by Org Exec Sec WW, and Star-Rate
checkouts on lower level processes and their immediate technology
as required by HCO Policy Letter of March 8, 1966, "Urgent-High
Crime".
2. Audit the Power Processes in the Saint Hill HGC until such
time as the student has completed successfully three Power Process
preclears to Grade VA, consecutively and without flaw, having
audited each pc from the beginning of the Power Intensive directly
through V and VA without a goof or REVIEW ACTION.
312
If Ethics action is needed in order to handle some outness with
the pc this will not count against the student Interne's auditing
requirement provided the Interne is the one recommending the Ethics
action. Completing a case that someone else started is credited to
training and experience and does not count for these Auditing
requirements in the Saint Hill HGC. When the student has completed
the three consecutive cases in the HGC, he will be routed to the
Examiner in Qual who will give him/her a written Examination
consisting of questions directly relating to the auditing of the
Power Processes. The passing of this exam is 85% as per Policy and
graduates the Interne from this Section of Training. There is NO
other requirement for this section. The Exams must have the
approval of the D.O. Qual WW.
3. The Interne is then required to audit in the Dept of Review.
It will be required to complete in Review 80 Review cases, of which
6, at least, must be Power Process cases and each of the 80 cases
must be flawlessly handled. Flawless means the pc has paid cash in
full for the auditing. When this is done the Interne will be routed
to the Qual Examiner to take a written Exam. The passing of this
exam graduates the Interne from this Section of Training. There is
no other requirement here.
The exam must be approved by the D.O. Qual WW.
This exam will be based on the fact that an Interne on reaching
this stage is flawless on all lower grade auditing including
Rehabilitation Technology, Assessing, S and (c) Technology and See
Checking as a security action. For each Interne the Qual See is to
observe in the flawless handling of the 80 cases the Ratio of
Cash/Debit for Review Auditing.
4. During the period served in the HGC and/or Department of
Review, the student must have completed a minimum of 20 Security
Checks for HCO, done without error.
5. The next step is a period with the Case Supervisor learning
that post. When the Interne has supervised 6 Power Process cases
flawlessly, the Interne is routed to Qual Examiner, to take an exam
on Case Supervision as approved by D.O. Qual WW. On passing this
exam the Interne completes this section, there is NO other
requirement. The passing of the Exam graduates the Interne from
this Section of Training.
6. At this stage the Interne graduates from Part I of the Course,
and then goes full time on the completion of the Org Exec Course,
which has a separate checksheet.
The Internship is divided into two parts
1. Technology. Theory, Practical and Auditing which when
completed graduates the Interne with Prov Class VII.
2. Administration. The Org Exec Training Course to be done after
Part I.
An Interne is permitted while fulfilling the Technology parts of
the checksheet to do whatever he/she can do on the Org Exec Course
Checksheet but may not go full time on this part of the checksheet
until completing the Technology part. Upon completing both parts,
the Interne receives a Class VII Certificate (provisional if not
Clear).
INTERNE CONTRACT REGULATIONS
An Interne's contract with his org is a binding agreement between
the two parties. The org provides advanced training to the Interne
in return for the SERVICE of the Interne AFTER he or she is
trained. A trained staff member is much more valuable than an
untrained one and the org spends a huge amount of money to see that
an Interne is trained properly.
313
The only way an org can justify spending this money is that after
the Interne is trained and returns, the org will benefit because of
the bettered service that can be provided with a new, highly
trained staff member on post serving over a period of years.
In order to "buy out" his or her contract with the org, it would
cost the Interne many, many thousands of dollars or pounds, in fact
as much money and goodwill as the org would expect to receive
because of the Class VII's service over a period of
2 1/2
years minimum.
After signing a contract with an org, if the Interne wants to
change plans, he or she must first get a full release from the
contracted org. It is fully the responsibility of the individual
Interne to make arrangements that are wholly satisfactory with the
contracted org.
The contracted org has full power in law and, more important, in
Scientology Ethics to hold an Interne or any contracted staff
member to fulfill his or her contract. The org may get any
requirements it likes for release of contracts. It is primarily for
the benefit of the org and not for the benefit of the individual
that the Interne is being trained. After all, without the org, the
individual would never receive the training in the first place.
No org may even consider a contracted staff member of another org
for employment unless he or she has been fully released by the
contracted org FIRST. Nor may any other org or org staff member
enter into negotiations between a staff member and his or her
contracted org. The only exception is the promotion of a contracted
staff member to a Continental or WW Executive Division post, but in
this case the contracted org receives the benefit of this staff
member's service from higher up and the contracted org may receive
some compensation for the loss of the staff member from its direct
staff.
ORG CLAUSE-If another official Org than Saint Hill contracts with
a Class VII ex-Interne Saint Hill Staff Member the org may
reimburse Saint Hill its course fee and have the student at the end
of one year of service as a full staff member at Saint Hill, the
staff member consenting. Note that one year must be served at Saint
Hill and two and a half years with the Org.
Orgs may of course make their own arrangements with their own
staffs for Class VII training at the Org's expense. This may also
be done at the staff member's own expense if contracted to an Org
for
21/2
years after Class VII and Internship Graduation,
NOT OPEN TO PUBLIC-The Class VII Course, unlike the Class VI
Course, is not open to enrollment to non-org personnel.
FURTHER REGULATIONS OF INTERNE TRAINING
It is not permitted to interfere with the training of any student
while on the Internship. This means that an Interne, whether from
Saint Hill or any other Org, may not be transferred to any other
post in SH or any other Organization without the holding of a
Special Board of Investigation to be applied for by the HCO Area
See of Saint Hill, convened by the HCO Exec See SH and to consist
of 3 members chosen from the staff of World Wide Div 7. The
findings of this B of I will make recommendations to the HOD Exec
See SH who will be responsible to and only to his/her normal
Organizational Seniors for her decisions in the matter.
The Internship is set up to train students to audit the Power
Processes and not to establish an HGC for Saint Hill. The HGC is
entirely separate from the Internship but has the use of the
Internes for specific periods of the day to run Power Processes and
where necessary audit prior to Power Process auditing, as part of
the Interne Training programme.
The Class VII Interne Course is the highest level of Scientology
training available
314
at this time. A Hubbard Graduate Auditor is able to audit any and
all processes and procedures used today and to crack any and all
cases without fail. An Interne is a student and not a staff member
until he or she has successfully completed the course. Then he or
she is a most valuable staff member and therefore one of the most
valuable beings in the Universe.
The Class VII Interne Course must concentrate on Training the
Interne to this high level quickly and effectively. It is only
after the Interne graduates from both parts of the course that
he/she becomes fully useful to the org.
Because we must train a Class VII to audit Grade V, this is the
only place where a real bottleneck could develop in the Route to
Total Freedom. Therefore HCO must be extra alert to remedy any
hold-ups and protect this course from undermining by SPs.
Now, a Class VII will also be trained as an outstanding
Scientology Executive. With a full knowledge and ability in Admin
as well as Tech, this is the being we are now producing to lead our
orgs to clear the planet.
This one job done effectively may be the difference between
success and failure in our goal, so let's do it well and do it
quickly.
Org Exec See WW - Fred Hare
Exec Council WW - Fred Hare
Joan McNocher
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW
Copyright (c) 1967 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 AUGUST 1968
(Issued from Flag Order 1265)
Remimeo
SEA ORGANIZATION
SEA ORG INTERNES
Any Class VI who wishes to do so may interne for the Sea Org.
The requirements are the same as for any other Sea Org applicant.
A Sea Org Interne undergoes a brief period of deck and Seamanship
training prior to beginning Class VII.
From Class VII he may go on to Class VIII in the Sea Org and
eventually become a Tech Missionaire.
The contract is for One Billion Years.
Technically trained Sea Org personnel are vitally needed and are
granted special insignia, etc., once their Basic Seamanship is
complete.
LRH:NJ:tvd.js.rd W/O Nate Jessup
Copyright (c) 1968 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
315
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 NOVEMBER 1969
BPI
Auditors
INTERNESHIPS AND CASE SUPERVISORS
Due to the necessity for skilled case supervision in all orgs,
franchises and groups, the following Interneships are established
in Central Orgs, Saint Hill Orgs and Advanced Orgs.
CLASS VIII C/S INTERNESHIP
Requires an interneship in an Advanced Org after completion of
the Class VIII Course for a period of at least another six weeks.
During this time they do a daily training period, learn and do high
level auditing, study Case Supervision under an expert Class VIII
Case Supervisor, do actual Case Supervision and on successful
completion are granted their full Class VIII. No contract required.
S500 to individuals, S250 to contracted staff members of other
orgs.
(Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class VIII.)
CLASS VII C/S INTERNESHIP
Requires an Interneship in a Saint Hill org for a period of at
least six weeks. Studies and does Power processing, studies and
does Review Auditing, does the Org Exec Course. Studies and does
the C/Sing of Power and Review Auditing. A Class VII who then
studies Class VIII Interneships (or does a Class VII Interneship
after a Class VIII Interneship) becomes a POWER CLASS VIII. No
contract required. S500 to individuals, S250 for Class VI auditors
contracted to orgs.
(Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class VI.)
CLASS V INTERNESHIP
Requires an Interneship at a Central Organization under a Class
VIII auditor for a period of at least six weeks. Learns to audit
Triple Scientology grades, to do lower level Review Auditing, Class
0, 1, 11, 111 and IV Case Supervision and the setting up of a case
for triples with expert rudiment and Green Form handling. If also a
Dianetic Case Supervisor he obtains his full Class V on completion.
Learns Tech and Qual Tech Services and Admin. No contract required.
S250 for individuals, $125 for org contracted staff members.
(Prerequisite: HDG and Class IV Auditor and Grade IV Release.)
DIANETIC INTERNESHIP
Requires an Interneship at any official Scientology org which
teaches HDG. Interning for a period of at least 4 weeks. Studies
and practices triple flow Dianetic Auditing. Studies and learns to
Case Supervise Dianetic sessions. Learns the handling and direction
of other auditors. Studies Staff Status 11 to become familiar with
general Administration. $125 for individuals. S75 for staff
contracted to an official Scientology org.
(Prerequisite: HDG.)
HDG
Requires taking the Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Course. Qualifies a
person to teach the Hubbard Dianetic Counselor Course in orgs,
Franchises or groups and obtain certificates for his students from
an official org. Cost: According to existing prices.
(Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.)
NOTE: All these Interneships are taught in the Qualifications
Division of the org except HDG.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ei.rd Founder
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
(Note:
Per HCO PL 18 April 1970, Issue II, in the prerequisite
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
for Class VII Interneship "HDC" had been corrected to "HDG".)
316
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY 1970
Remimeo (Amends HCO P/L 13 Nov 1969 by adding Class 0, 1,
BPI
Auditors 11, 111, IV and VI CS Internships and HCO P/L 18 Apr
1970 Iss 11 which corrects HCO P/L 13 Nov 1969)
INTERNSHIPS AND CASE SUPERVISORS
Due to the necessity for skilled Case Supervision in all orgs,
franchises and groups, the following Internships are established in
Advanced Orgs, Saint Hills and Class IV Orgs respectively.
CLASS VIII CS INTERNSHIP
Class VIII CS-Requires an Internship in an Advanced Org after
completion of the Class VIII Course for a period of at least
another six weeks.
During this time the Interns do the Class VIII CS Internship
Checksheet. On completion of the checksheet the Interns do a daily
training period, learn and do high level auditing, study Case
Supervision under an expert Class VIII. Case Supervisors do actual
Case Supervision and on successful completion are granted a Hubbard
Scientist of Standard Tech Certificate. No Contract required.
(Prerequisite: HDG and Class VIII.)
CLASS VII CS INTERNSHIP
Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at
least six weeks. Studies and does Power Processing and audits
Dianetics, Progress and Advance Programs and Expanded Lower Grades.
Completes or does the Org Exec Course. Studies and does the CSing
of Power, Dianetics, Progress and Advance Programs and Expanded
Lower Grades.
No contract required. (Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class
VI.)
CLASS VI CS INTERNSHIP
Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at
least four weeks. Studies Progress and Advance Programs. Audits all
Class VI actions including Expanded Lower Grades in the HGC and as
a Review Auditor. Studies and does the CSing of Progress and
Advance Programs and Expanded Lower Grades.
This Internship consolidates SHSBC training through practical
application under a Class VIII.
No contract required. (Prerequisite: Provisional Class VI.)
CLASS V CS INTERNSHIP
Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at
least two weeks. Studies and does CSing of Progress and Advance
Programs and Class V actions under Class VIII supervision.
This Internship may be awarded if the Class V CS Checksheet is
done well.
No contract required. (Prerequisite: Class V Expanded Release.)
CLASS 0, 1, 11, 111 or IV CS INTERNSHIPS
Requires an Internship at a Central Organization for a period of
at least two
317
weeks for each level. Studies and does CSing of actions
applicable to the Classification attained.
Learns Tech and Qual Services and Admin.
These internships may be awarded if the applicable Class 0, 1,
11, 111 or IV Checksheets are done well.
No contract required. (Prerequisites:
Class 0 Grade 0 for Class 0 CS Internship
Class I Grade I for Class I CS Internship
Class 11 Grade 11 for Class 11 CS Internship
Class III Grade III for Class III CS Internship
Class IV Grade IV for Class IV CS Internship)
HDC CS INTERNSHIP
Requires an Internship at any official Scientology Org which
teaches HDG; Interning for a period of at least four weeks. Studies
and practises Dianetic Auditing. Studies and learns to Case
Supervise Dianetic sessions. Learns the handling and direction of
other auditors. Studies Staff Status 11 to become familiar with
general Administration.
(Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.)
HDG
Requires taking the Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Course. Qualifies a
person to teach the Hubbard Dianetic Counselor Course in orgs,
franchises or groups and obtain certificates for his students from
an official org. According to existing prices.
(Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.)
NOTE: All these Internships are taught in the Correction Division
of the org, except HDG.
INTERNSHIP PRICES
US, EUROPE,
DK, AFRICA UK, ANZO
CLASS VIII C/S INTERNSHIP $500 L200
CLASS VII C/S INTERNSHIP $500 f 200
CLASS VI C/S INTERNSHIP $250 f 100
CLASS V C/S INTERNSHIP S125 f50
CLASS 0 - IV INTERNSHIPS (per level) S50 L20
CLASS 0 - IV C/S INTERNSHIPS (package
rate for all 5 level Internships) S200 f80
HDC C/S INTERNSHIP $125 E50
DISCOUNTS
All Internships offer 50% discount to contracted staff of
official Scientology orgs.
D/CS-5
for
LRH:JF:rr.aap L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright
(c)
1970 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Amended by HCO P/L 6 November 1971 Issue II, Selling
Internships, page 325.1
318
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1970
Issue 11
Remimeo
HUBBARD SCIENTIST OF STANDARD TECH
Cancellation of conflicting
HCO Policy Letters
A HUBBARD SCIENTIST OF STANDARD TECH is a graduate of the Class
VIII Case Supervisor Internship.
The HSST checksheet is issued as a Confidential HCO Policy Letter
which contains all the requirements for the Class VIII CS
Internship.
The following conflicting HCO Policy Letters are cancelled:
HCO Policy Letter of 6 December, 1969 Issue III "The Case
Supervisor Checksheet" which gave training requirements which are
now revised as in HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1.970 "Confidential
Class VIII Case Supervision Internship Checksheet (Hubbard
Scientist of Standard Tech)".
HCO Policy Letter of 6 December, 1969 Issue IV "Confidential -The
Science of Case Supervision Standard Tech" which has been revised
and issued as HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 "Confidential Class
VIII Case Supervision Internship Checksheet (Hubbard Scientist of
Standard Tech)".
HCO Policy Letter of 9 December, 1969 Issue III "Class VIII
Retread" which gave training requirements, now improved by HCO
Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 "Confidential Class VIII Case
Supervision Internship Checkshect (Hubbard Scientist of Standard
Tech)" which replaces it. Policy on Retreads is contained in HCO
Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 Issue III "Tech Retreads and
Retraining".
D/CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JF:rr.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
319
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 FEBRUARY 1971
Issue 11
BPI
Remimeo
Qual Hats
Tech Hats
Registrar Hats
Treasury Hats
CLASS VII
Following the development of Class IX and Class X technology
aboard Flag, the sequence of techniques for the upper levels of
training has been established.
As each class, from ARC Straightwire, through Dianetics, Class 0
and up through Class VII to Class X addresses a specific area of
the Human Mind and of man's awareness, each Class must remain
distinct and separate in the training and application of its
techniques.
For this reason, the Class VII Internship, level of the precision
Power Processes, may not be by-passed as a level of training.
Additionally, the Power Processes, now more dynamic by expansion,
may not be taught as part of the Class VIII Course. Each of these
levels has its own distinct techniques and so must be separately
trained.
Following are the prerequisites for Class VII and above:
1. Class VII Internship: Taught at Saint Hills only in Division
V, Dept 13.
Prerequisites: Class VI, HDG.
a. The Power Processes of Class VII may be sold and run on Public
Preclears at Saint Hills only and by Class VII Interns or Class VII
graduates (who may also have a higher classification).
b. The Power Processes of Class VII may be run on qualified
contracted Org staff by contracted staff members who are full Class
VII's only and not by Class VIII's who have not done the Class VII
Internship at a Saint Hill.
C.
The Class VII Internship may be taken by contracted org and Sea
Org staff members.
(c) The Class VII Internship may be taken by non contracted to
staff Scientologists but only as follows:
L As a prerequisite to the Class VIII Course.
2. As a prerequisite to the Class IX Course by those Class VIII's
already graduated or those enrolled on the Class VIII Course prior
to the date of this policy letter.
e. The Power Processes may not be run by any person regardless of
Classification who is not a contracted org staff or Sea Org staff
member except while doing the Class VII Internship or additional
graduate auditing for Class VII Honors at a Saint Hill.
f. The Power Processes may not be run by any contracted org or
Sea Org staff member regardless of classification who is not
enrolled on or graduated from the Class VII Internship.
320
Il. Class VIII Course: Taught at Advanced Organizations only in
Division IV. Prerequisites: Class VI, Class VII, HDG. 111. Class IX
Course: Taught at Advanced Organizations only in Division IV.
Prerequisites: Class VII, Class VIII, HDG. IV. Class X Course: Will
be taught at Advanced Organizations only in Division IV.
Prerequisites: Class VII, Class VIII, Class IX, HDG. Note: All
above courses are taught at Flag to contracted Sea Org members who
qualify. The prerequisites as above apply. COURSE PRICES Class VII
Internship f 320 8 775 Class VIII L 625 $1,500 Class IX L 625
$1,500 Class X f, 625 $1,500 Class VIII, IX, X package f 1660
$3,825 (A saving of f 275 or $675.) Class VII Internship special
price for Class VIII's already graduated from or enrolled on the
Class VIII Course prior to this date: ~C 165 S 385 (A saving of f
155 or $390.00.) DISCOUNTS The usual 5% discount for Advanced
payments applies. A 50% discount applies for contracted staff of
Scientology Organizations. Lt. Cmdr. Joan Robertson Training and
Services Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JR:nt.rd Copyright (c)
1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 321 NOT HCO POLICY
LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19
JULY 1971 Remimeo CIS Series 52 INTERNES
The word INTERN or INTERNE means "An advanced graduate or a
recent graduate in a professional field who is getting practical
experience under the Supervision of an experienced worker".
An Interneship then is serving a period as an Interne, or an
activity offered by an org by which EXPERIENCE can be gained.
Interneships have been arranged this long while for every
auditing class.
The apprenticeship of an auditor is done as an org Interne.
C/Ses very often have Internes on their lines and sometimes have
trouble with getting them to audit.
The WHY of this is that the Interne seldom knows the definition
of the word "Interne" (which is as above). They sometimes think
they are still students. They do not know this fact:
A COURSE GRADUATE BECOMES AN AUDITOR BY AUDITING.
That means LOTS of auditing.
The failure of "auditors" is that they go from one level to the
next HDC to IV to VIII without ever becoming an auditor for that
Class.
Thus you can get a silly situation where a Class IX can't audit
or C/S well. Thus you get tech going out.
An HDC graduate who doesn't then audit under an experienced Case
Supervisor who knows and demands the standard actions rarely gets
to be an HDC AUDITOR. It takes tons of hours to make a real
Dianetic auditor who can toss off standard sessions and get his
routine miracles.
So if an HDC doesn't INTERNE, but simply goes on to the Academy
Courses or SHSBC he has skipped his apprenticeship as a Dianetic
Auditor.
If he gets his Class VI and never Internes but goes on to VIII -
well, we now have somebody who has long since lost touch with the
reality of why he is studying.
Therefore you CAN'T take a Class VI graduate who was never a
Dianetic Auditor and Interne him as a VI. He'll goof-goof-goof. So
you have to Interne him as an HDC.
WHEN he can turn out flawless Dianetic sessions on all kinds of
pcs, you can Interne him as a IV etc.
In other words you have to catch up all neglected
Apprenticeships.
I don't care if the guy is an VIII, if he wasn't ever a Dianetic
Auditor and a Class VI Auditor and isn't Interning as an VIII then
he is only a provisional.
Flubby auditors are the biggest time wasters a C/S has. If
auditors on his lines aren't good, he'll take forever to get his
C/S work done. And he won't get results.
The answer is, regardless of Class as a course graduate, a C/S
MUST INTERNE HIS AUDITORS FOR EACH INTERNESHIP MISSED ON THE WAY
UP.
The "ok to audit" system is used.
One takes any graduate and Internes him on the lowest Interneship
he has missed. He reviews his material, gets his drills checked,
gets his misunderstood words cleared 322
and gets an "ok to audit" for that level. If he goofs he is
crammed. And sometimes wholly retreaded. The "ok to audit
Dianetics" would be his first okay. This suspends if he has to
retread.
When he then has turned out pcs, pcs, pcs, pcs, 5, 6, 8, 10 hours
a day for weeks and weeks and is a total success as a Dianetic
Auditor, he can go on up.
At first as a Dianetic Interne he is part time studying
Dianetics. Then as he gets flawless and while he is getting
experience and practice on Dianetics, he can gradually phase over
into restudying his next Interneship, usually IV or VI.
Then one day he is word cleared, checked out on his drills, and
he qualifies for "ok to audit" for IV or VI.
Now it begins all over again. Flubs-Cramming, midnight oil, audit
audit cramming audit audit new word clear new drill work audit
audit audit audit 5, 6, 8, 10 hours a day. .
Now he is a IV or VI auditor.
His next real step is a VI or VII Interne, at an SH. If he has
been a good IV Interne Auditor his VI Interneship after his SHSBC
will be a VII Interneship. VII is an Interne activity.
When he's an Auditor that can do VI and Power, he is ready for
VIII and IX.
If he is going to be a good VIII-IX auditor he will Interne in an
AO or SH under an experienced C/S.
Now when he goes to his own org, you have a real honest to
goodness C/S. And as a C/S he must know how you use Interneships to
make auditors.
Wherever this function is neglected, you don't get auditors. You
get doubtful students and outtech.
On Flag C/Ses have to catch up every missed Interneship to make a
high volume high quality auditor.
The world renowned Superiority of Flag Auditors is built just
like I am telling you here.
There is no reason just that same quality can't be built in any
org.
One does it by the Interne method.
By using this method you get IN tech and high volume.
Any auditor in any org that is limping and fumbling simply has
never been properly Interned.
The way to remedy it is to set up a good Cramming that uses only
HCO Bs and has them available (and no verbal tradition), a Good
Word Clearer and a Qual "okay to audit" Interne system. The
Internes are a Section in Qual. They have a Course Supervisor. They
study and audit cram audit cram study audit, audit audit audit.
And one day you have IN tech and high volume high Class auditing
all over the place.
Otherwise you just have a bunch of students, in doubt, chewing on
their misunderstood words and failed tech.
There IS a right way to go about it.
It is by Interneship.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:nt.rd Founder
Copyright
a
1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
323
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 AUGUST 1971
Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Sec
INTERNE CHECKSHEETS
OKAYS TO AUDIT
(Refers to HCO P/L 6 August 1971 All Issues
All Interne Checksheets)
An OKAY TO AUDIT means two things. There are 2 "okays to audit".
One is OKAY TO AUDIT AS AN INTERNE. This means one has done the
checksheet to the satisfaction of the Interne Supervisor. One can
now audit for Interne qualification.
The other is OKAY TO AUDIT AS AN HGC AUDITOR. This means one has
done the Interne checksheet, has audited flublessly to many program
completions and is passed by the HGC CIS.
Any certificate requires that the Interne meet both these
requirements.
These TWO okays to audit are required for any graduate
certificate.
There is a LOT of auditing between these two "okays to audit".
Whether so expressed on the Checksheet or not the Case Supervisor
for whom the auditor did his Interne Auditing MUST SIGN on the
Supervisor Line above Examiner at the end of the checksheet,
attesting that this Interne has achieved and maintained flubless
auditing and has a permanent okay to audit in an HGC for that Class
for which the Checksheet is done.
"Supervisor" on that line must read "Case Supervisor".
So there is an Interne Supervisor okay to audit for that class
given on the checksheet. That says that he may audit now as an
Interne.
And then there is the Case Supervisor okay to audit for that
class of the checksheet for the HGC as an HGC auditor.
There are a lot of hours, and there can be a lot of Cramming, a
lot of re-study between the first and second okays to audit.
The checksheet is not complete until the Case Supervisor can
attest that this is a Flubless Auditor, truly skilled and able on
whom the Case Supervisor is glad to depend.
Rome wasn't built in a day, no auditor ever became a flubless
auditor in 3 sessions.
The requirements of the Case Supervisor in making the auditor
make auditing work may not be set aside or cancelled by any other
person. The Case Supervisor has the final word on whether a
certificate is issued, after how long and when.
LRH:sb.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright ( (c) 1971 Founder
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
324
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971
Remimeo
Issue II
Registrars
Dir Income
(Amends HCO PL 20 July 1970,
Interne Supers
"Internships and
Case Supervisors")
SELLING INTERNSHIPS
1. AUDITING INTERNSHIPS
Internships are sold to graduates of Technical courses who want
to get awarded Full Classification for their level of training.
Internships are paid courses.
The Interne does not get paid by the org where he is interning.
There are no professional discounts on Internships.
Contracted staff members of orgs who are interning at an AO or
Saint Hill get the usual 50% discount. They are not however paid
any wages or bonuses by the AO or Saint Hill. Living and travel
expenses of the student are paid by the org to which he is
contracted.
Auditor Internship prices are:
US - EU/AF UK/ANZO
In area orgs
Dianetics Internship $125. f 40.
Class IV Internship $250. L100.
At Saint Hills
SHSBC Internship $375. L150.
(Includes all oks to audit from
Dianetics up to and including Class VI)
Class VII Internship 9775. f 320.
In Advanced Orgs
Class VIII Internship $375. L150.
Class IX Internship $375. f 150.
Note that these prices are separate from and in addition to the
Course price, with the exception of the Class VII where the
Internship is the course. 2. CASE SUPER VISORIS INTERNSHIP
The purpose of the C/S Internship is to train a student to become
a specialist C/S.
The C/S Internships are also paid courses and follow the same
discount pattern
arrangements as the Auditor Internships.
Prices are:
Dianetics C/S Internship $125. f 50,
Class IV C/S Internship $250. L100.
Class VI C/S Internship $375. f 150,
Class VII C/S Internship 8375. f 150,
Class VIII and IX C/S Internship (HSST) $500. L200.
Registrars should be well aware of the benefits of these
internships so that they can be sold in volume and with reality.
They are a most rewarding activity both for the org and the
Interne.
Treasury Aide
LRH:LQ:mes.rd for
Copyright
(c)
1971
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
325
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971
Issue III
Remimeo
Qual Sees
Interne Supers
Registrars
C&A
INTERNESHIPS LINE-UP
AUDITOR INTERNESHIPS
All students graduating all technical courses are granted a
Provisional Classification Certificate. Full Permanent
Classification is awarded when the Graduate has completed a paid
Interneship in an Org for that level.
Internes train under the Interne Supervisor in Qual and do their
daily auditing Intensives in the HGC. The (c) of P is their
administrative senior while they are auditing in the HGC.
After a period of volume auditing and needed correction,
resulting in consistent well done auditing hours in the HGC, the
Case Supervisor writes to the Interne Super advising that the
Interne is now fully proficient in that level and is eligible for
full Classification.
The Auditor Interneships line-up is:
HSDC Interneship Class 0 to IV Interneship Class VI Interneship
(includes Interneships for Dianetics and O-IV) Class VII
Interneship Class VIII Interneship Class IX Interneship Class X, XI
and XII (when available).
An Auditor Interneship is run like this:
A. Prerequisite: Classification Cert for the Course.
B. Do OK to Audit Checksheet and get OK to Audit.
C~ Audit daily Intensives in the HGC, doing daily Cramming for
any and all nonstandard actions, as directed by the C/S and the
Cramming Officer.
D. Do daily TRs, training drills and study under the Interne
Super.
E. Listen to Class XII tape recorded sessions of the same level
then record own sessions and compare to the XII sessions.
F. Continue auditing in the HGC, improving auditing standard,
increasing number of hours on that level, until Case Supervisor
issues a C/S HGC OK to Audit and sends to Interne Super.
G. Interne Super puts student on Routing Form to route out of the
Interneship for permanent Classification.
H. Student is checked by PC Examiner for FN VGIs. (If no FN VGIs,
student is returned to the Interneship and Cramming is used to find
out what was missed, then back to Interneship to properly
complete.)
326
1. Student Examiner gives a five question Dangerous Auditor type
exam covering essential basics for the Classification and examines
three folders audited by the Interne in the HGC for flubless
auditing application at that level.
J. Certs and Awards issues full Classification Certificate for
that level.
Do not confuse the standard public paid Interneship training
line-up with the staff HGC Auditor OK to Audit system. This will
result in no paid Interneships and consequent loss of legitimate
income.
Any Interne who is found to be a Dangerous Auditor, totally
incompetent or who puts false reports about sessions into a pc
folder, should be ordered to retrain the Course and routed off the
Interneship and sent to the Registrar to sign up. They may return
to complete the Interneship when the retrain has been completed at
no extra charge if done within six months.
Any Auditor sent to an AO or SH for an auditing Interneship is
paid his wages by his org and the org pays for the Interneship at
50% discount, so long as the Interne has signed or renewed a 21/2
year contract from the date of completion of the course. HASes must
insist that this is done before sending an Auditor for an
Interneship.
As stated in HCO Bulletin 28 April 71 "Okays to Audit in HGCs" it
is a commendable for Franchises and Field Auditors to get Okays to
Audit in their nearest org, and the above programme must be
extended and offered to all Franchise and Field Auditors.
Old HPA/HCAs should be encouraged to do Academy 0 to IV Retread
at half price, then Interne full price to full Classification.
The benefits of Interneship training:
I . Auditor has all. auditing and C/Sing misapplications and
misunderstoods cleaned up on that level, under daily supervision.
(Internes C/S their own folders and then send to Org C/S who OK's
or not.)
2. Auditor gets loads of auditing experience through the volume
auditing produced on the Interneship.
3. Full org Cramming service.
4. Access to the Org Library.
5. Word Clearing facilities and utilization to the full.
6. Daily case supervision and training directions in auditing and
case supervising by the Org Case Supervisor.
7. Personal attention by Interne Supervisor plus daily training
and drilling, in addition to any Cramming actions done, to improve
auditing techniques and Auditor presence.
8. Electronic aids-can listen to flubless Cl XII tapes for the
level, record their own sessions and compare to the XII sessions.
9. The attainment of competent ability to audit at the level
trained and full Classification for that level.
LRH:JZ:nt.rd Qual Aide
Copyright (c) 1971 for
by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
{Amended by HCO P/L 1 August 1972R (revised 25 August 1972), Qual
Handling of Students and Internes on the Fast Flow System, in the
1972 Year Book.)
327
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Issue IV
Interne Super C/Ses Registrars CASE SUPERVISOR INTERNESHIPS Case
Supervisor Interneships are sold to those persons or orgs wanting
specialist trained Case Supervisors. The Case Supervisor
Interneships line-up is: Dianetics Case Supervisor Interneship
Class 0 to IV Case Supervisor Interneship, Class VI Case Supervisor
Interneship Class VII Case Supervisor Interneship Class VIII and IX
Case Supervisor Interneship. Do not under-rate the value of CIS
specialist training in Dianetics and 0 to IV. Benefits of Case
Supervisor Interneships: A. Learns the basic laws of the physical
universe. B. The full attainments of Dianetics and Scientology,
objective and subjective. C. How a C/S operates. D. CIS admin
actions and procedures. E. Re-studies certain basic books in more
detail for Knowledge to apply in C/Sing. F. The CIS Series. G. How
to Programme Cases for the level. H. How to do expert folder error
summaries. 1. How to repair a case for the level. J. How to
"trouble shoot" a case and find out what really needs to be done
for the level. K. How to train up good auditors. L. The attainment
of competent ability to CIS for the level. CIS Interneships
checksheets may vary but all will cover the above as applicable to
the level. It is realized that there may be some missing
checksheets for Interneships; but the criteria in sales must be
"Can the org deliver this service?" so the Registrar and sales
people must find out which checksheets, packs and Interneships are
available. As new checksheets arrive, the Interne Super must advise
Dissem Sec of this new service. Qual Aide for LRH:JZ:nt.rd L. RON
HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 328 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue V
Remimeo (c) of Ps Interne Supers Cramming Offs PCOS Registrars C&A
HGC AUDITORS AND HGC AUDITORS IN TRAINING
Auditors on staff go through the OK to Audit system, using
Interneship facilities, as needed, up to their highest level of
training.
They may be trained on new Rundowns and procedures in Cramming of
the Interneship and get an OK to Audit. (Includes word clearing,
star-rate, clay demos of key principles and auditing actions
drilled on a doll before OK to Audit.)
They also work for and get the second OK to Audit, as issued by
the Div IV C/S, which gives full HGC Auditor status for that level
or procedure.
HGC Auditors usually work and produce many more hours per level
than other Auditors, and therefore, when awarded full HGC Auditor
status are nominated the senior Auditors for that Class on the
continent. They may have "HGC Status" written on their Certificate
just underneath the Classification on their Certificate.
An HGC Auditor is designated In Training until he or she has
gained the full HGC OK to Audit from the Div IV C/S. At that time,
he or she becomes a full HGC Auditor.
HGC Auditors in full time study for their next level of training
in the org or getting an OK to Audit are on half pay. When they get
their first OK to Audit and return to the HGC, they return to full
pay and receive a nominal bonus for 25 hours of auditing in the
chair.
When the HGC Auditor gets his full HGC OK to Audit, he goes onto
the FULL bonus system and gets bonuses, as issued, for Well Done
Auditing Hours plus Completions. Thus the most experienced senior
Auditors are the highest paid Auditors in the org.
Any HGC Auditor with no OKays to Audit gets no bonus until
attained. Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd
Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 329
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Revised 18
February 1972 (Changes in this type style) INTERNESHIPS ELECTRONIC
ATTESTATION FORM In the interests of making flubless auditors, this
attestation form must be filled out and must accompany ANY FINAL OK
TO AUDIT FOR A CLASS. Auditor's name Date Interneship Class Org
Name I hereby attest that I have:
I . I attest I am fully familiar with and totally relaxed about
metering including False TA and including knowing it is charged and
handling it as per the False TA HCOBs or CIS Series 53, without
introducing arbitraries or flubs of any kind.
2. Made magnetic recording tapes of my own auditing of pcs at
this level.
3. That I have listened to and fully noted the rhythm, quality
and presence of LRH tapes for my Interne Class.
4. That I have compared how I sound auditing my present level and
how LRH tapes sound auditing this level, by listening to my session
tapes and his, playing one after the other.
5. That I have done TRs long and hard to get my auditing to sound
like LRH auditing for my class.
6. That I have made a new tape of my sessions after 5 above and
newly compared it to LRH tapes and that I am satisfied that my own
auditing sounds like LRH auditing. (If not, repeat 5 and 6 until
attestation can be made.)
7. 1 attest I am so familiar and relaxed about my auditing
presence that I can audit without strain or nerves. Add for SHs and
AOs:
S. I attest I have witnessed closed circuit TV and have observed
sessions accurately.
9. 1 attest I have appeared on closed circuit TV and have been
passed on by the auditors assembled as to TRs and presence and
metering. 330 Add for Flag in addition to I to 9 above: 10. 1
attest that my metering is flawless and that I know everything
there is to know about meter handling and care and every meter
manifestation there is. 11. 1 attest that no one could tell the
difference between my auditing presence and TRs and that of LRH for
my Class. All orgs: 12. 1 attest that my pcs, are delighted with my
auditing and their gains. I attest to the above in the full
understanding that should I ever be faulted in auditing presence,
TRs or metering by a qualified Inspector after signing this
checksheet, I will retrain fully from the beginning. Interne
Interne Supervisor Case Supervisor L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:nt.mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 331 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1972
Remimeo Tech & Qual Qual Internes interne Supers C/Ses INTERNESHIP
ERRORS FOUND
The following points when found to be out on an Interneship have
resulted in auditors not being made and progressing on up to the
next class.
When these points are in, then you make auditors, fact not
theory, as it actually happened this way. Before these points went
in, the C/S issued stacks of Cramming Orders; now it's 3 in a week.
(1) The Tech query line must be made known to exist and Internes
are allowed to use it. The line is from the Interne Supervisor,
Qual Sec, Continental Qual Aide to Flag, Qual Aide.
Interne confusions can be spotted by these terminals and often
can refer to the precise HCOB that handles the query. However, the
query line does exist and can be used.
(2) Checksheets must have recent issues added to the Master
checksheet. Missing data on a checksheet is not Keeping Scientology
Working.
(3) Use only LRH tapes to refer Internes to on TRs. LRH TR tapes
are actual auditing sessions recorded live on tape.
(4) When an Interneship has over 15 Internes on it, it's time to
have a 2nd Super-visor, so as to be able to supervise all practical
and keep track of each Interne at all times.
An Interneship Course Administrator should also be posted to keep
admin straight and tech packs made up, etc, just like a Course
Administrator in an Academy.
(5) Internes must understand exactly what a program is to be
trained on programming. Only in this way will Interne Auditors NOT
accept pcs, without a glance at the program or folder summary and
just grind away hopefully. Auditors also need to know "Know Before
You Go" (C/S Series 62), and "Auditors Rights" (C/S Series 1) which
have the basic data, besides Programming C/S Series HCOBs.
Interne Supervisors must ensure an Interne Auditor studies his
pc's folder before auditing, paying attention particularly to
Auditors Rights and Know Before You Go. It's only a five minute to
an hour job, not a day long job to do this as the points on the two
above HCOBs are being checked against the current C/S, folder
summary, program, etc.
Quote from LRH "It is the completed program that is the case
change result not the session."
(6) As it says in the C/S Series No. 21, the C/S is responsible
for the training of his auditors under him. Because the C/S has
internes on his lines and because any group of auditors can be
bettered, the training officer part of the C/S Hat is one which is
always worn. So as a C/S works with an auditor he trains him. One
goof in a session is met with an order to Cramming on the materials
flubbed. 332
After several cramming orders on the same action have been issued
on an auditor, it becomes a retread at that level. The auditor has
shown signs of not having a good grasp of what is being crammed
over and over, hence it's time to retread.
RETREAD means picking up the materials that the auditor is weak
on. It's a review course. But it does mean going through the pack
and the materials of the particular level being retreaded. It's
mostly a check of misunderstood words, Method 4 style Word
Clearing, on the different sections of the materials of the course,
emphasis being placed on what the auditor is weak on.
It can be bolstered to Method 4 on every HCOB as they go through
the materials.
Now if after a retread the auditor still is sent to Cramming on
what he just retreaded, he obviously is still weak on it, it
becomes retrain on that level.
RETRAIN is where the whole course and whole checksheet are done,
all the HCOBs, demos, drills, etc exactly as stated on the
checksheet. A key cramming question is "What situation did you run
into that you had to invent something to do something about it?"
This immediately will establish the missingness of the auditor's
data so it can be handled when found this way on a Cramming Order,
retread or retrain cycle.
(7) When it gets to a retrain you know the auditor was untrained
in the first place, as he never got a grasp of the materials. He
read the material but can't apply it. This brings about the retrain
as the original course taken by the auditor did not get him taught,
as there is no association between the materials, auditor and pc
with that auditor. The action of a session is "over here" away from
the materials so he can't get near to it to apply the materials.
ALL FAILED INTERNES WERE TRACED TO NOT BEING TRAINED IN THE FIRST
PLACE AS THE REAL WHY.
The first thing really, that a student has to find out about a
subject is that he doesn't know it. This may take a 10th of a
second followed by greedy study. And this may never occur until it
reaches the point of retrain-then it dawns he doesn't know when
faced with the Cramming Orders, the retread, more cramming, and now
a retrain.
All the above points were and are actual factual points relating
to the success of an Interneship. For any Interneship to be a
success these points need to be checked often to ensure they are IN
by C/Ses and Interne Supervisors,
Interne Supervisors, C/Ses and Internes are expected to get the
job done; each one has his part to do on these points. Everyone
expects it of you. You can do this sort of thing and clear the
planet.
T/Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JW:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
333
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1961
CenOCon
STAFF AUDITOR TRAINING
SEQUENCE OF STUDY
For an auditor wishing to obtain maximum results in using SOP
Goals for Clearing, and particularly for a staff auditor, the
following check-out should be used by HGC training officers, should
be an advanced course training stress list and should be used by
HCO for checking HGCs:
Name ...........................
Organization Area ..................
I . TRs 0 to 5.
0- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5
2. The Auditor's Code
3. The Code of a Scientologist
4. E-Meter Theory
5. E-Meter Practice
6. Rudiments
7. Definition of In Session
8. Examining Rudiments with an E-Meter
9. Model Session memorized for use
10. Rudiments Processes
11. Case Assessment Forms
12. Auditor's Report Forms
13. The Pre-Hav Scale
14. SOP Goals
15. Doing a Goals Assessment
16. Finding terminals for running the goal
17. Finding Terminal Level on Pre-Hav Scale
18. Developing Commands
19. Filling out (c) of P Check Types 1- 2- 3- 4
5 - 6 - 7 - 8
20. Meter action in running a terminal in SOP Goals and how long
to run
21. Reassessing for a new level for the same terminal- how long
to run
what is done then
334
22. Determining Complete flatness for a terminal on the Pre-Hav
Scale
23. Determining Complete flatness for a goal
24. Reassessing Goals
25. Use of Change Process
26. Use of Attention Process
27. Use of CCHs (when rather than how)
28. Use of Johannesburg Security Check
29. The reasons cases bog
30. Use of Formula IS
Use of Formula 16
31. Staff Auditor's Hat
32, (c) of P Checking Hat
33. Finding the Havingness Process
34. Balancing Havingness and Confront Processes
35. Finding the Confront Process
36. Using the Havingness and Confront Process while running
Pre-Hav Terminals
37. Developing Pre-Hav Commands
38. The CCHs 1- 2- 3- 4
39. The use of the CCHQ
40. The parts of the Human Mind
41. The State of Release
42. The State of Clear
43. The State of Theta Clear
44. Regulations governing Staff Auditors
45. Routing of Reports
46. Function of HGC Admin
47. Functions of the HGC
48. Functions of HCO
49. The Pattern of a Central Org
LRH:jl.rd
Copyright (c) 1961 L. RON HUB13ARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
335
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JANUARY 1962
HCO Secs
Org Secs
Ds of P
Tech Depts
EXAMINATION FOR HGC AUDITORS
ALL HGC Auditors are to be examined on the HCO Bulletin of
December 21, 196 1 -'Model Session Script Revised'.
This examination, which is to consist of a 100% check-out on the
actual Bulletin AND a practical test which must demonstrate that
the Auditor can really use the new Model Session, is to be passed
by ALL HGC Auditors within one week of the receipt of this Policy
Letter.
This Policy is laid down with the object of improving HGC
Auditors' ability to keep Rudiments IN.
Directors of Processing are required to report to HCO Technical
Secretary WW that this Policy has been complied with.
Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
on instructions from
Mary Sue Hubbard
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.cden Copyright
(c)
1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
336
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1965
Qual Sec Issue II
Tech Sec
Examiners AUDITOR ESTIMATION TEST
(c) of P References:
DofT HCO B 13 Sept 65: Out Tech
HGC Training Officers
Dir Review HCO B 21 Sept 65: Out Tech
Tape Lecture SH 10 July 63
Not Confidential "Auditing Skills for R 3R"
or Restricted Tape Lecture SH 21 Sept 65
"Out tech"
The following general test questions are used directly or to make
up tests for HGC auditor proficiency or for students or internes
seeking to qualify as HGC Auditors. It may be required of any HGC
en masse at any time to rate the Tech proficiency of that
Department. The test is verbal and accompanied by the auditor
having to demonstrate with the examiner marking this form or one
made from it.
Auditor's Name Date of Test
Location of Org Grade
E-Meter Review -
(a) Ability to see needle motion and read at meter distance
(b) Handling Tone Arm
Overcompensation Undercompensation
(c) Instant Read
(c) Cleaning Cleans
(e) Assessment
(f) Possibility of Missing Items on a List
(g) Rock Slam
(h) Floating Needle
(i) Auditor Action on seeing a floating needle
0) Dirty needle
(k) Cause of a Dirty Needle
(1) Setting up a Meter
2. Data Duplication Review
(a) Test on any recent HCO B
(b) Synthetic data duplication test
Repeating a sentence
Doing an action
(c) Demonstration of a fundamental auditing action
337
3. Pc In Session Review
(a) Bad Indicators
(b) Good Indicators
(c) Quality of needle of a recent pc
(c) Auditor's Code
4. Auditing Cycle Review (a) TR 0 (b) TR I (c) TR 2A. Premature
Acknowledgement B. Delayed Acknowledgment (c) TR 3 (e) TR 4 (f)
Drawing the Comm Cycle (g) Examples of a Comm Cycle
5. Repetitive Command Review
(a) Test of duplication
(b) When is a Process flat?
(c) Examples of flat processes
OBNOSIS
6. Knowledge of Suppressive Person Review
(a) Definition of SP
(b) Examples of SP
(c) Action for an SP
(c) Consequences of an SP's acts
7. Knowledge of Potential Trouble Sources
(a) Definition of PTS
(b) Behavior of a PTS
(c) Example of PTS
(c) Consequences of PTS
(e) Proper Auditor action on PTS
(f) Error that can be made in handling PTS
8. ARC Break Review
(a) Definition of an ARC Break
(b) Consequences of an ARC Break
(c) Meter Symptoms of approaching ARC Break
(c) Manifestations of an ARC Break
(e) Handling an ARC Break
(f) Demonstration of handling an ARC Break
338
9. Problem Review (a) Definition of a PTP (b) Example of a PTP
(c) Definition of a hidden standard (c) Definition of an overrun
(e) Demonstration of an overrun (f) Consequences of a PTP (g)
Assessment of PTPs (h) Handling a PTP A. Method B. Method
(i) Symptoms of overhandling a PTP
How is a Release State Rehabilitated?
10. O/W Review
(a) Definition of an overt
(b) Definition of a withhold
(c) Symptoms of an overt -
(c) Reaction of a pc with a withhold
(e) Cycle of a misunderstood word
(f) Handling withholds
(g) Example of a motivator
(h) Justifications
(i) Assessment of withholds
0)
Inadvertent withholds
(k) Withhold of nothing
(1) Consequences of missing withholds
(m) Withholdy pcs who ARC Break easily
(n) Action on pcs who don't give up w/hs
11. Continuous Overt Review
(a) What is "Case Gain"
(b) Who doesn't get case gain?
(c) Overruns and TA
(c) Detection of continuous overts
(e) Auditor Action when condition not relieved
(f) What process handles
(Mark each question 1.25 pts)
LRH:mI.rd Examiner
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
339
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 JANUARY 1969
SEA ORG
Remimeo
Tech Hats
AUDITORS AND TRAINING
No matter the level of training an auditor has obtained, whether
it be Class VIII or 0, it may slip unless it gets maintained.
The slips are always GROSS, and the GROSS SUDDEN outness is often
hidden behind a series of smaller seeming ones spread over a number
of pcs,
An auditor was found to have slipped on the Auditor's Code by
auditing a hungry pc, and careful examination of several other
folders audited by this auditor in the same period showed similar
other outnesses of a same GROSS nature. Obviously adherence to the
Auditor's Code suddenly slipped, and with it went this auditor's
TR's.
ONLY CONSTANT REFERENCE TO SOURCE WILL MAINTAIN 100% RESULTS!
Bit piece training is not sufficient. It is useless to correct
the auditor on his ADMIN when it is found that he forgets to write
"Ext" alongside the list when extending it. We find that the next
list is also goofed, and the auditor should have been retrained on
TR's 0 to 4.
For a small technical outness to occur, a BIG one has already
preceded it. And basically there are NO small outnesses
technically. They are always BIG.
The policy is hereby established and is to be strictly adhered
to, that ALL auditors, Qual and HGC alike, whether Class 0 or Class
VIII must train for a minimum of one hour daily. EVERY WORKING DAY.
They shall do drills and HCOB study.
This is a CORRECTIVE ACTION, and as such comes under the Qual
See.
The training programme embraces auditors, D/P, C/S, Tech See and
Qual Sec. A wise Org Exec Sec if technically trained should not lag
behind in this programme.
Lt. 0. J. Roos Flag C/S for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:OJR:sdp.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1969 by L.
Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
340
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 APRIL 1965 Gen Non Remimeo Sthil
Students Sthil Scn Staff TECHNICAL DIVISION 6 QUALIFICATIONS
DIVISION DEPT 20-DIV 7 REVIEW
The Department of Review is in the Qualifications Division. It is
Division 7, Department 20.
It has a Cramming Section which teaches students what they have
missed.
It has a Case Cracking Section which audits cases (students or
HGC pcs or other pcs in difficulty such as field auditor rejects)
to a result.
Review also has a Staff Training Section.
It also has a Staff Co-auditing Section.
Any student failing his classification examinations must be
ordered to the Review Cramming Section.
Any student failing to get 5 or more passes (usual expected
number is 10 passes per week on the Saint Hill Course) in two
weeks, theory and practical check sheets inclusive, must. be
ordered by the (c) of T to the Review Cramming Section.
Any student who becomes ARC Broken or whose case does not
progress must be ordered to the Case Cracking Section by the (c) of
T.
Any HGC pc who does not qualify for a grade certificate requested
is ordered to the Case Cracking Section.
All student blows are ordered to the Case Cracking Section.
All pc blows are ordered to the Case Cracking Section.
Students coming under Ethics may be ordered to Case Cracking
Section by a Court of Ethics but not by a (c) of T. This is done
either for one crime or five misdemeanors reported. The student may
have recourse.
In all other ordering of students or pcs, to Review than Ethics
matters, it is considered a normal training or auditing action
since the org is there to train or process only average or better
students or pcs and does not undertake to invest time, money and
staff on unusual cases and the ordering of the student is by the
(c) of T, the pc by the (c) of P or students or pcs by the Director
of Examinations, or in Ethics matters only by a Court of Ethics but
then to auditing only.
The entire purpose of the Department of Review is repair and
correction of auditing and training difficulties. It is quite fatal
to feed students or pcs, rejected by an Examiner of the Department
of Examinations, Qualifications Division, back into the Technical
Division until the matter is remedied by Review. Academies and HGCs
are assembly line actions and the introduction of the failed result
back into it until the failure is remedied in Review produces
chaos.
All Review Services are charged for.
There is an invoice unit between Examinations and Review. 341
An amount of money is deposited or an open invoice is signed by
the student or pc (unspecified amount).
No Review action or service may be given free of charge or less
than the fixed rates for the area. But cases can be handled on
credit. All cases are handled. None is rejected except Potential
Trouble Sources or a person it is unlawful to audit or train.
If a person sent to Review will not pay at all, resists even
credit, he or she is shifted at once to the next department
(Department of Certificates and Awards, Div 7 Dept 2 1 ) to their
Hardship Section where some charity arrangement may be made for low
level assists by volunteer students or freshly trained internes
wanting someone to practise on, not a Review action.
The Saint Hill Department of Review Professional Rates are:
Auditing per hour f 3.12.0 Training per day f 2 / day.
Public rates would be twice that as the Pro. Rate is half the
public rate.
If the Review fee is not paid by course end the grade or level
certificate or classification is not delivered to the student.
However if the student has proven credit a note may be signed or
the amount billed according to prevailing policy which may be set
from time to time.
Power processes are only run in the Review Case Cracking Section
and may not be taught in the Academy or employed in the HGC since
they apply only to the unusual case and while they also work on
average cases, the average case runs quite well if not better on
routine processes. The Power Processes require specially coached
and trained auditors.
Review is an extension of my own Case Cracker Hat and my own fast
instruction Hat.
Auditors meant for Review should be sent to Saint Hill as
Internes in the Review Department as it is quite unlike Academies
and HGCs. Its personnel is expected to audit or instruct, security
check or perform many non-standard actions and may have to do some
of each in any working day.
Review audits and trains only to a specific result. The training
or auditing ends the moment the required Result is achieved and
stabilized. Therefore no-one is ever signed up for X hours or Y
days. One is signed up only on an open signed invoice which is
followed later by a Review Time Sheet and second invoice giving the
exact amount owed calculated after the result.
Review auditing and training are not commonly available to the
public except via the Academy and HGC. But outside persons who have
to be examined for one or another reason may be shifted to Review
if they fail.
Review is the most versatile department in the organization with
the single exception of the Office of LRH. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Corrected by HCO P/L 29 April 1965 Issue III, Ethics-Review, page
345.1 342 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1965 Gen
Non-Remimeo Issue III All Orgs Sthil Staff Sthil Students POWER
PROCESSES
Only the HGC at Saint Hill and the Case Cracking Section of the
Department of Review may use the 3 new Power Levels I recently
developed until they have on staff Review Cl VI Personnel who have
interned at Saint Hill in the Saint Hill Dept of Review.
The processes require the most skilled and exact application and
have exact phenomena to be observed which becomes impossible to
supervise outside the above departments.
Only Class VI auditors may audit these processes first only at
Saint Hill and only under the supervision of Mary Sue Hubbard until
they have learned them perfectly.
Training on such processes can be undertaken only by Provisional
Class VI auditors after leaving the course, and only enrolled on
staff as Internes in the Department of Review or the HGC.
Orgs not having personnel so trained by Interneship may not use
these processes in their Review Departments.
The fact of having a Review personnel trained in Review at Saint
Hill does not permit an org to train new Review personnel in the
org. Anybody in an org's Review who will be using or supervising
the use of Power Processes must have been interned at Saint Hill.
Such training, however, gives no right to. train others.
Holding this policy firmly guarantees the full success
technically in all cases in any org in the world. Avoiding it in
any way jeopardizes that success. These power processes are simple.
But so is T.N.T.
The reason for this is that there is no adequate repair for
errors made in running these processes if their existing remedies
are also goofed.
The strongest, swiftest Ethics action must follow any slightest
violation of the above for these processes alone guarantee sweeping
success for Scientology on the roughest cases everywhere.
Any auditor who discovers that the pc he is auditing has been
illegally audited previously on a power process or any higher level
process for which the pc is not graded must report the matter at
once to the nearest HCO Ethics Section by collect wire or 'phone
call. R6 NEW STUDENTS
Before enrolment in the R6 unit of the SHSBC all students who
have not been run on the Power Processes and who have any slightest
difficulty with R6 EW must be ordered at once to the Review Case
Cracking Section for Power Processes.
Any student not showing adequate case gain on the course must be
ordered to the Review Case Cracking Section.
The Power Processes must not appear on any check sheet. TRUSTED
AUDITORS
I reserve my right to give a process to a trusted Class VI
auditor to run on one pc for testing. REVIEW, ORDERS TO
No (c) of T or Course Supervisor or Academy Instructor may
threaten a student who is disruptive of course discipline with
Review auditing or training.
Such students may only be ordered to Ethics.
Auditing may no longer be used as discipline by any Comm Ev or
Scientology Executive. 343
Students who obtain too few passes may be ordered to Review.
Students who are ARC Broken may be ordered to Review. REVIEW
EXPENSES
Any student ordered to the Review Cramming Section or Case
Cracking Section is ordered at his or her own expense at prevailing
Review rates.
Students who cannot pay and whose credit is compromised may be
ordered by Review to the Hardship Section where student auditors
who have failed in classification may be needful of pcs to catch up
on check sheets or get experience with processes. If no such
students are available the hardship case or backward student must
simply wait for one to show up if one does. PACE OF ORG
The organization is geared to the average case and study rate and
there is no reason why it should have to pay above its narrow
costing allowance for the student who is too bad off or the
preclear who cannot gain normally. PRECLEARS
When any HGC preclear does not buy enough auditing to attain a
case change, and if no result has been obtained, he or she may not
be dismissed from the org but must be passed to Review at the
preclear's own expense.
It is vital that an HGC pc buy enough auditing to obtain a proper
result for his case if it is worse than average. Otherwise the
matter passes from the preclear's hands and is taken over by
Review.
No "failed cases" may be dismissed from the org. ALL TO
QUALIFICATIONS
No student or pc may leave an org by any other exit than through
the Department of Examinations.
If students or pcs fail for any reason to be up to required
standards they are shunted by Examinations to Review.
. If the student or pc passes the Department of Examinations'
appraisal, he or she is sent to the Department of Certifications
for attestation of attainment and for logging out of the org.
Until so logged the student or pc has not technically left the
org.
Departure without logging is "Departure unauthorized" and is
treated as a "blow" and passes into the hands of Ethics at once.
ETHICS AND STUDENTS AND PCs
Students and pcs, shunted about from the Academy or HGC to
Examinations, Review and Certification or back again are not
considered transferred or subjected to discipline in the Ethics
meaning of these words and have therefore no recourse.
The entire object of an org is to produce a satisfactory auditor
or higher state of case in the pc and anything that impedes this
would be an arbitrary and unreasonable restraint upon an org and
its Technical and Qualification Divisions and their personnel.
A student or pc should signify an understanding of this on
enrolling in an org for training or scheduling processing. They are
buying progress in life and may not act to prevent its occurrence.
If they enter an org they are understood to consider improvement
desirable and therefore tacitly agree to be improved by the
technology furnished. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c)
1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 344 HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1965 Issue III [Excerpt] Remimeo ETHICS
REVIEW (Correction to HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 and additional
Ethics data)
As per HCO Pol Ltr of 28 April 1965, and others of later date,
orders to auditing or training may not be made as a sentence or
used in an Ethics Court or by a Comm Ev or any other reason.
Auditing and training are awards.
A student who is disruptive of discipline and acts contrary to
the Ethics Codes may not be ordered to Review by the (c) of P, (c)
of T or Ethics personnel or other persons in an org. ORDERING
STUDENTS & PCs
Tech and Qualifications personnel, particularly the Tech See and
Qual See and (c) of Estimations, the (c) of P and (c) of T, (c) of
Exams and (c) of Review and (c) of Certs may order students or pcs,
to Review or to course or to HGC or anywhere in and around these
two Divisions without any Ethics action being implied. It is just
normal, done to get students and pcs on the road to higher levels.
Ethics actions may only suspend training or deny auditing.
Therefore, a student ordered to Ethics for discipline who does
not then give adequate promise and example of good behaviour and
compliance must be thoroughly investigated even to his or her own
area and in the meanwhile may not be trained or processed.
The student, however, may not be dismissed or expelled unless
full Ethics actions and procedures have been undertaken.
All sentences carrying a denial of training or processing must
carry a means of the right to be trained or processed being
restored in a specified time or under specified conditions.
STUDENTS AND PCs & ETHICS
The routine action of Ethics is to request a reappraisal of
behaviour and a signed promise of good behaviour for a specified
time. If the student or pc refuses to so promise, then the next
action of Ethics is an investigation of the student's course or
pcs, processing behaviour. When then confronted with the data, if
the student still refuses to promise, Ethics undertakes a full
investigation in the student's or pc's own area. If the student or
pc still refuses to co-operate, the student goes before a Court of
Ethics which may pass sentence. RECOURSE
Only after sentence has been passed by a legal body such as a
Court of Ethics or Committee of Evidence or after an illegal
disciplinary action may a student or pc ask for a recourse.
Normally before asking for recourse a student or pc petitions the
Office of L. Ron Hubbard if unwilling to accept the discipline but
this must be done at once.
If the petition is unfavourably acted upon, the student or pc may
ask for recourse.
Recourse must be requested of the Convening Authority that had
local jurisdiction over the student or pc and may not be requested
of higher authority. A request to higher authority than the Ethics
activity that passed sentence is a petition, not recourse.
LRH:jw.ccfen.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron
Hubbard [Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter can be found
in ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Volume 1, pages 395-398.] 345 HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF 4 JULY 1965 Remimeo All Tech Hats Tech Div All
Qual Hats Qual Div Class VII Students PC ROUTING REVIEW CODE The
Code has four symbols REV! REV FL? DECLARE? ETH?
When the Case Supervisor sends (by marking the summary report in
the folder) a pc from the Tech Div to the Qual Div, the following
code is used. REV!
Means "This pc is in trouble! Please do a Review hard." Review
does HCO Pol Ltr 26 June 1965 Form with extreme care and handles
thoroughly all points uncovered. PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND
REVIEW AUDITOR. REV FL?
Means "Could you please find out if this process is flat for me?
And anything else you care to do, of course." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO
INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR. DECLARE?
Means "Pc has reached a grade or Release. Please look at pc and
if okay, pass on to Certs and Awards." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO
EXAMINER. IF PC LOOKS ALL RIGHT TO EXAMINER AND FOLDER IS OKAY
EXAMINER SENDS PC TO CERTS AND AWARDS WITH A CHIT. Review auditor
does not get on line at all. However if a casual glance tells the
Examiner this pc is not all right or if folder shows a mess, the
Examiner routes by a chit to invoice and Review. The pc, however,
is not returned to the HGC, but can, of course, in the case of a
grade, sign up for more. ETH?
Means "This pc may be an Ethics case, roller coasters or no case
gain." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR who does HCO
Pol Ltr 26 June 65 and returns pc to Examiner who may-or may
not-direct pc to Ethics depending on results of the Review.
AUDITOR'S PC
Note that an auditor may take his pc to Qual if the session won't
start or run. The route is not auditor to (c) of P to Review, but
the Auditor with the pc to Invoice to Review auditor. The pc's
auditor leaves the pc at invoice in Qual and reports then at once
to the (c) of P who must assign some work or send the auditor to
Dept of Schedules to pick up a low priority pc or even, on peak
loads, to the Director of Review to help out. The auditor must not
remain unassigned, even if he is put to Files. DEPT OF SCHEDS
HGC Admin (The Dept of Schedules, Tech Div) receives folders at
the end of the session or the day's auditing and gets them to the
Case Supervisor. When the Case Supervisor sends them back (before
the next session), HGC Admin then sees what should happen in the
folders and routes the pc promptly and as promptly handles any
auditor re-assignment. Pcs who are going to come back are promptly
reviewed and sent back and the auditor is not changed on them and
the auditor is temporarily assigned by HGC Admin to bridge the gap.
Pcs who are not going to come back are struck off the assignment
board and the auditor is instantly reassigned. If the next pc on
the list cannot instantly be found by HGC Admin then the next pc on
the list is grabbed.
The auditor, then, does not go to Qual with the pc. It is not the
auditor who 346
discovers the pc is destined, for Review. This is discovered by
HGC Admin before sessions normally begin for the day.
The whole interest here is economy of auditing time. Save all of
it you can in any way you can.
THE ASSIGNMENT BOARD
A large cellulose or soft board at least 3 ft by 5 high exists in
HGC Admin. Each Auditor's name is printed on a card and each pc's
name is put on a card.
There is a column for each session period if there are more than
one in the day. And one column for pcs who have been sent to
Review. The auditors' names are in the column on the left on green
cards and the pcs' are in the other columns on white cards.
HGC Admin assigns and routes by moving cards on the Assignment
Board.
There are three possible sessions, morning, afternoon and
evening. There is also the Review column, Thus one has 5 vertical
columns on the Assignment Board.
WAITING LIST BOARD
Any pc waiting list is posted, with the pc's name on a white
card, on another board in HGC Admin. It reads from left to right in
horizontal lines and the white card is removed to the Assignment
Board.
Students who are waiting for auditing are also put on the waiting
list board but their names are on a different (paler) shade of
green from that of auditors. These quite commonly are scheduled
half days so that one auditor is auditing two of them a day. The
student studies the other half of the day.
This can also be done (half day scheduling) with town pcs. Out of
town pcs are
always full day scheduled.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
[Excerpt] Tech Div Qual Div
REVIEW HOLDS
Review must NOT hold onto pcs. There
is
no 2nd HGC in Review. Review does the required actions and sends
pc back to HGC Admin.
There's no reason to start running intensives in Review. That's
for the HGC.
Check them, find what's wrong, send them back to HGC.
The Case Supervisor of course receives the folder from HGC Admin
before the next session.
But Review does not ask the Case Supervisor for further
directions. Review asks the Dir Review and the Dir Review asks the
Qual Sec if needed.
But there should be no question on a case. Review actions are
very pattern. They do a form. They put it in the folder and send
the folder and pc back to HGC Admin. HGC Admin then sends the
folder to the Case Supervisor who writes the Case Supervisor's
instructions in the folder for the HGC Auditor, who then goes on
with the intensive. If the intensive is considered over, by reason
of Release or Ethics action, HGC Admin tells the pc and does the
remaining necessary actions.
LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright
(c)
1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
[Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 9 July 1965, Qual Goofs,
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
A complete copy appears on page 142.1
347
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1965
Remimeo
Ali Staff
IMPORTANT
Ethics Hat
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Income Hats
POTENTIAL TROUBLE SOURCE ROUTING
The Ethics Officer, when receiving a person Who has 'roller
coastered (case improved then dropped), must route that person to
Review. Review only must locate the correct Suppressive Person,
repeat the correct SP, the right
SP.
Review then states:
I . Who the SP is (or who they are if more than one);
2. That good indicators came in and stayed in visibly when the SP
(or SPs) was found.
Review then sends the person to Ethics.
Ethics must require the person as per policy to handle or
disconnect.
If the person will not handle or disconnect, the person is sent
again to Review as the right SP has NOT been found.
Further UNTIL THE PERSON HAS PAID IN CASH FOR THE REVIEW SEARCH
AND DISCOVERY Ethics may not declare the person no longer PTS. (The
reason for this is that the person will not pay if the wrong
suppressive is found.) HGC Auditors, similarly must send a PTS to
Review not Ethics.
Supervisors must send any 'student PTS only to Review.
Review always sends to Ethics but ONLY when the right SP has been
found and indicated.
REVIEW AUDITOR
The Review Auditor uses "Search and Discovery" as will be covered
in an HCO B. If this is not to hand, simply find the right SP,
indicate it to, the person and watch the good indicators come in.
PTSs may not be handled in ANY other way.
The routing is not from Ethics to the Chaplain. Ethics does not
route to the Chaplain.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
348
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 JUNE 1962
CenOCon
ARC BREAK CLEAN-UP
PROGRAMME
The following programme for cleaning up ARC breaks, initiated by
Fred Fairchild, Tech Director in Washington D.C., should be used
also in other Orgs.
ARC Break Clean-Up Programme
PURPOSE:
To get the ARC breaks cleaned up with past students and
preclears; to invite further activity in Scientology on their part;
to get them paying on over-due bills.
ACTION.
Body Registrar contacts people who are not paying their bills and
are out of communication with the Org, and arranges for these
people to come in and get an ARC break check which would amount to
a missed withhold check.
The person would be asked by the auditor some such question as
"Do you have an ARC break with Scientology-the org, etc." or "Do
you have any disagreement with Scientology-the org, etc." This
would get a motivator, but it would put them in a hot area of
"overts". The auditor once he has located the area of ARC break,
then pulls the "overts", and who has missed them. (Failed to find
out about them.)
An auditor could be used for this if he doesn't have a pc, or in
case of a weekend, the auditor on a "free" week, can have a day of
that week off to make up for auditing on the weekend.
This is an experiment in which we hope to get ARC broken people
active in Scientology and paying on their bills.
We hope this to be successful enough to make it a whole programme
for the USA with all orgs, and field auditors.
At first we will only use it on the local people here, and if
successful, will expand from there.
It is planned that the ARC breaks can be cleaned up in from 2 to
5 hours.
L. RON HUBBARD
by Fred Fairchild Tech Director Washington D.C.
LRH:dr.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
349
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
ARC BREAK CLEANUP PROGRAMME
[Excerpt from EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE of 1 September 196 7
ED 4 73 WW 842 SH "WW Emergency Condition
"I
A general condition of EMERGENCY BY TREND is assigned WW on a
basis of leveling or dropping composite outer org graphs.
11. It also means local tech is out in outer orgs and the areas
are full of ARC Breaks not caught. In such a case I always order
orgs to pick up and smooth out AT ANY ORG EXPENSE every ARC broken
pc they can find in their files or areas as A SPECIAL PROGRAMME.
They put in an ARC Break Registrar who liaisons with accounts and
with Review and with CF searching for ARC Broken pcs, and students.
A special genned in full time auditor is put in Review and AT NO
CHARGE to pcs is kept busy on ARC Breaks only WITH IT BEING AN
ETHICS OFFENSE TO USE HIM OR THE ARC BREAK REGISTRAR FOR ANY OTHER
STUDENT PC OR DUTY. And you clean up the whole field from years and
years back. This ARC Break auditor cures the ARC Breaks with Level
III tech and sends the person to the usual registrar when done.
THIS is his stable datum: IF YOUR PC IS NOT SMILING AND HAPPY AT
THE END OF SESSION YOU ARE NOT AUDITING.
12. The ARC Break Registrar has a special dual stat-how many ARC
Broken pcs, have been found, in files, etc, how many contacted. The
ARC Br Auditor has a special dual stat-how many ARC Breaks (not
pcs, found, how many handled.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: Full text of ED 473 WW 842 SH is in Volume: 7, page 60.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1968
Issue 11
(Corrects HCO PL 2 November 1967 Dissem. Division and
HCO PL 2 November 1967 Qualifications Division)
Remimeo
ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS
ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS ARE RELOCATED IN QUAL
TO WORK AS A TEAM.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH.js.rd Copyright (c) 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
350
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JANUARY 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo
Org Exec Sec Hat
HCO Exec Sec Hat
HCO Area Sec Hat
Qual See Hat
Dir Review Hat
ARC Break Reg Hat
ARC Break Auditor Hat
ARC BREAK PROGRAM
An ARC broken field equals blocks to the expansion of Scientology
and decreased income for Orgs.
Therefore a Special Program for finding, contacting, handling and
getting ARC broken Scientologists back on the lines is vital.
The Program that handles this is the ARC Break Program, which
picks up and handles AT ANY ORG EXPENSE every ARC broken
Scientologist that can be found in the field AT NO CHARGE.
Under this Program a full time ARC Break Registrar and Auditor
are assigned to the Department of Review in the Qualifications
Division WITH IT BEING AN ETHICS OFFENSE TO USE THEM FOR ANY OTHER
STUDENT OR PC DUTY.
The ARC Break Registrar must employ every possible source of
information and spare no effort or expense to get ARC broken
Scientologists located, contacted and into session.
The ARC Break Auditor then, using Standard Tech, handles whatever
upset the person has, which is preventing him from continuing
processing or training to the point where he signs up for his next
service.
This Program is quite simple,. but extremely vital to the
expansion of Scientology and increased income.
So let's get all those who have reached but withdrawn because of
some upset with us rapidly back on The Road to Total Freedom.
Qual See WW - Jim Keely
HCO Area See WW - Bruce Glushakow
Ad Council WW - Rodger Wright
(Chairman)
LRH Comm WW - Rodger Wright
The Guardian WW - Jane Kember for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jsk.el.rd Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 9 August 1971, ARC Break Program, page
352.1
351
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 AUGUST 1971
Remimeo
Exec Hats
Dissem Hats
Qual Hats
ARC Break Reg Hat.
ARC Break Auditor Hat
ARC BREAK PROGRAM
(Cancels HCO PL 20 Jan 69 which had the ARC Break Registrar
incorrectly posted under the Qual Div, & omitted blown students.)
An ARC Broken field equals blocks to the expansion of Scientology
and decreased income for orgs.
Therefore a special Program for finding, contacting, handling and
getting ARC Broken Scientologists and blown students back on lines
is vital.
The Program that handles this is the ARC Break Program, which
picks up and handles at ORG EXPENSE every ARC Broken Scientologist
and blown student that can be found in the field. A Free
Revitalization Session is given each person at NO CHARGE.
Under this Program a full time ARC Break Registrar for Div 2,
Dept 6, and a full time ARC Break Auditor for the Qual Div are
assigned. During the Program it is an Ethics Offense to use them
for any other student or pc duty.
The ARC Break Reg must employ every possible source of
information and spare no effort or expense to get ARC Broken
Scientologists. and blown students located, contacted and turned
over to Qual for a session.
If a person does not or will not come to the org, the ARC Break
Auditor then goes to the person's home and politely 8C's the person
into receiving his Free Revitalization Session.
The ARC Break Auditor then, using Standard Tech, handles whatever
upset the person has which is preventing him from continuing
processing or training to the point where he signs up for his next
service or returns to completing the course he was on. To really
complete cleaning up blown students, they would need full Word
Clearing in Qual at own expense before being routed back on Course.
This Program is simple, but extremely vital to the expansion of
Scientology and increased income.
So let's get all those who have reached but withdrawn because of
some upset with us rapidly back on the Routing and Gradation Chart
and the Road to Total Freedom.
Dissem Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:RR:nt.rd Copyright
(c)
1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
352
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO
POLICY, LETTER OF 3 AUGUST 1960 (Re-issued from Sthil) CenOCon
SECURITY OF PERSONS LEAVING STAFFS Before a person may leave staff
and receive a final pay cheque, a security check must be made and
any overts and "withholds on the organization or personnel
discovered must be audited at organization expense. L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.gh.cden Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1960 CenOCon
SECURITY CHECKS A security check may be made on Any Academy
student, Central Org staff member or any Hubbard Guidance Center
preclear where there is a possibility of a threat to survival of a
Scientology, Organization.,,, A security check -is not a
punishment; it is actually "help" to the person being checked. A
security check may be requested by the Assoc See, Org See, HCO Exec
See, HCO Area See, HCO Board of Review, HCO WW and Exec Dir. Issued
by: Peter Hemery HCO Secretary WW for MARY SUE HUBBARD Deputy
Executive Director MSH-.js.rd Copyright 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 353 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JANUARY 1961 CenOCon
NEW SECURITY RULES
All Security Checks, to be valid, must be done on an HCO WW form
As all permanent staff members must pass a security check to
become so, the following constitutes a pass: No Lie Reactions
1. Lie Reaction must be unmistakable on E-Meter during first ten
test questions. If not present when subject responds "No" to all
ten statements (half of them untrue) and yet there is no registry
of the untruth on the meter to such things as "Are you sitting in a
chair?" then the lack of lie reaction flunks the subject so far as
a security check is concerned. Needle Fails To Clear
2. If falls, rock slams or theta bops do not clear out when the
question is carefully repeated and all efforts by the examiner fail
to clear them out, the subject is to be considered a security risk
and the test is flunked. Perversion
3. When the subject demonstrates current peculiar interests which
could be made the subject of blackmail by people antagonistic to
Scientology, the person is a security risk and the test is flunked.
Felonies
4. If the subject is shown to have committed crimes (felonies)
for which he could be
arrested in present time the subject should be flunked.
Unreadable Needle
5. If the E-Meter needle is too sticky or too wild to be. read
throughout the
interview, the subject should be flunked.
It should be noted that all but 3 (Perversions) and 4 (Felonies)
above can be cleaned up by processing. 3 (Perversions) could also
be cleaned up by processing and a change of activities. 4
(Felonies) could be cleaned up by processing and some social
adjustment with the persons offended against or the law. L. RON
HUBBARD LRH.js.cden Copyright 0 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED 354 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 MARCH 1961 CenOCon
SECURITY RULES (Cancels HCO Policy Letter of January 28 1961 "New
Security Rules")
Since a Security Check failure can compromise or injure a
person's position or economics, and because we are not moralists,
it is better to be more positive on the subject of a Security Check
failure, leaving no part of it up to judgement.
The question of what constitutes a Security Check failure has now
troubled enough people to make it necessary to lay down the
following policies.
A Security Check to be used for any organizational reason must be
made on an HCO WW form.
There are only three ways a Security Checker may flunk any
person. I . The Security Check may be considered flunked if there
is no needle response of any kind to any question with meter
sensitivity even at extreme high.
2. The Security Check may be considered flunked if any
compromising or important question still persists in getting a
consistent drop even after the Security Checker has done his best
to get the person being checked to clear it by answering
truthfully.
3. Refusal to be checked.
Lie reaction failure may no longer be considered a flunk.
Important questions always have enough charge on them to cause a
fall even on bad criminals and the fall will continue consistently
or sporadically if the person is still withholding information.
The question of something falling because of past life crimes is
ruled out if, when a question fails to clear, the Security Checker
adds "In this lifetime?" to or in the question and works on that
question continuing to use that added phrase. Falls by reason of
past lives tend to drop out and clear if this is done.
The task of the Security Checker is to carefully question and
clear if possible changes of meter needle behaviour caused by the
question.
The Lie Reaction questions were originally used in Scientology
only to study the needle pattern of the person being checked so
that changes in it could then be judged in their true light. Some
pcs, for instance, get a slight fall every time any question is
asked. Some get a fall only when there is heavy charge. Both can be
Security Checked by studying the common pattern of the needle
demonstrated in asking the Lie Reaction questions. The purpose of
the Lie Reaction questions is returned to the original intention.
A totally stuck needle can be freed by processing, or by getting
off withholds. If a person is flunked by reason of 1. above, they
require auditing before another check is taken, the auditing to be
taken at the responsibility of the person being checked. CHECK
SHEETS
All Security Check Sheets of persons Security Checked should be
forwarded to Saint Hill, complete with all markings and the reason
why the question would not at first clear, if important, or the
drop marked which would not clear and whether or not the person was
passed or failed. (c) of T FLUNKS
Nothing in this Policy Letter changes the responsibility of the
Director of Training in preventing Scientology from being taught to
persons who would use it in violation of the Code of a
Scientologist. LRH:iet.aap L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L.
Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 355 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27
DECEMBER 1961 CenOCon SEC CHECKS ON STAFF
Once a staff member has passed a Form 7A or 7B, no further use of
this form should be made on that staff member.
It is the responsibility of the (c) of P thereafter that staff
members continue to remain in good condition by reason of routine
staff clearing processing.
If any staff member fails thereafter in security, the (c) of P
should be placed on evening auditing on the Joburg, Form 6 and
other policy checks to get all the (c) of P's withholds off so the
(c) of P will not be diffident in keeping staff clearing going well
and getting off withholds on staff members. LRH:ph.rd L. RON
HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead,
Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 DECEMBER 1961 HCO Area Sees Org Sees
Ds of P PROCESSING (c) OF P
Effective immediately, please arrange for your Director of
Processing, and anyone subsequently appointed to this post, to be
processed on the last two pages of the 'Joburg' (Form 3) Processing
Check-starting with the question:- "Have you ever injured Dianetics
or Scientology?", also the whole of the Form 6 Processing Check,
AND the Executives' Security Check (HCO Information Letter of
November 22, 1961).
It is imperative that these Checks be completed on your Director
of Processing very soon, so please insist on the (c) of P taking
sufficient auditing time to thoroughly flatten them-starting NOW.
LRH:ew.cden Issued by Copyright (c) 1961 HCO Technical Secretary
WW by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD 356
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Gen Non Saint Hill Manor, East
Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1962 Qual
Hats Reissued on 7 June 1967 Tech Hats Level VI Students & Above
RESPONSIBILITY AGAIN
The common denominator of the Goals Problem Mass is "No
Responsibility". This is the end product that continues any circuit
or valence.
This is a deterioration of Pan Determinism over a game into "No
responsibility" as follows:
No Previous or Current Contact - No responsibility or liability.
Pan Determinism - Full responsibility for both sides of game.
Other Determinism - No responsibility for other side of game.
Self Determinism - Full responsibility for self, no responsibility
for other side of game. Valence (Circuit) - No responsibility for
the game, for either side of the game or for a former self.
The Goals Problem Mass is made up of past selves or "valences",
each one grouped and more or less in a group.
Therefore, the characteristic of the part (the valence) is the
characteristic of the whole, the collection of valences known as
the Goals Problem Mass.
The way a being is hung with persistent masses is the mechanism
of getting him to believe certain things are undesirable. These, he
cannot then have. He can only combat or ignore them. Either way,
they are riot as-ised. Thus they persist.
Only undesirable characteristics tend to persist. Therefore the
least desirable valences or traits of valences persist.
The way not to have is to ignore or combat or withdraw from.
These three, ignoring or combatting or withdrawing sum up to no
having. They also sum up to no responsibility for such things.
Thus we can define responsibility as the concept of being able to
care for, to reach or to be. To be responsible for something one
does not actually have to care for it, or reach it or be it. One
only needs to believe or know that he has the ability to care for
it, reach it or be it. "Care for it" is a broader concept than but
similar to start, change or stop it. It includes guard it, help it,
like it, be interested in it, etc.
When one has done these things, and then had failures through
overts and withholds, one cycles down through compulsive and
obsessive care, reach and be and inverts to withdraw from, combat
or ignore.
Along with ignore goes forgetting or occlusion. Thus a person has
occlusion on past valences and past lives go out of sight. These
return to memory only when one has regained the concept that they
can be reached, or that one dares be them again or that one can
care for them.
Herein is the cause and remedy of whole track occlusion.
There are many uses of these principles.
Sec Checking gets off the overts and withholds and opens the
gates.
All chronic somatics and behavior patterns are contained in
valences and are not traceable to the current life time since one
can reach present life, is caring for present life and is being
present life, so present life is an area of responsibility.
All real difficulty stems from no responsibility.
However, one can use these principles even on present life with
considerable gain. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:sf.jp.oden Founder Copyright
(-) 1967 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 357 HUBBARD
COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO
POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1962 HCO Sees Assoc Sees Tech Depts
URGENT SECURITY CHECKS
Effective immediately, all Security Security Checks, i.e. HCO WW
Forms 5A, 7A and 7B etc, when being used specifically as Security
Checks, must be done in Model Session form.
This is because it has been found that bad security risks have
been passed on these forms due to wildly out rudiments nulling the
needle. Conversely, good staff members have been flunked because
questions read on ARC Breaks etc, rather than on the question being
asked. Issued by: Mike Rigby Senior Instructor LRH:jw.pp.kd Saint
Hill Special Copyright (c) 1962 Briefing Course by L. Ron Hubbard
for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 27 FEBRUARY 1962 CenOCon CLEAN HANDS CLEARANCE CHECK
In order for an auditor who is regarded as a security risk to be
considered to have Clean Hands, it is necessary for him to receive
a Clean Hands Clearance Check from HCO.
The Clean Hands Clearance Check consists of that auditor having
the following rudiments put in very thoroughly by an HGC Class Il
Staff Auditor using prep-clearing techniques.
I . Auditor. Are you willing to talk tome about your
difficulties?
2. Withholds - Last two pages of Joburg Form 3 or all of Form 3A
(to be released soon); and all of an HCO WW Sec Form 6A. Plus
asking "Has a withhold been missed on you?" frequently as all such
persons specialise in getting them missed.
This will be checked out on completion by the HCO Area Secretary
for any questions on Form 3 or 3A and Form 6A which may be still
alive and for any missed or partial withholds.
If there are questions which are alive or if there are any missed
or partial withholds the person must go back to the HGC to have
them cleaned up before he is considered to have Clean Hands. If no
questions are alive and there are no missed or partial withholds,
then the person will be awarded a Clean Hands Seal on his
certificate and will be considered to be in good standing with HCO.
LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 358 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 OCTOBER 1962 CenOCon
SECURITY RISKS INFILTRATION
As the Organization rapidly expands so will it be a growing
temptation for anti-survival elements to gain entry and infiltrate,
and attempts to plant will be made.
To foil these, all staff members must be alert to attempts of
this nature and it is
their duty to inform ' the Technical Director, or above, of any
doubts they may have
and to see that the necessary action is taken.
The Technical Director, working in liaison with HCO, now becomes
in charge of Security in an Organization and the results of which
are to be notified to the Assoc/Org Secretary and HCO and, after
confirmation, thence to me.
Forms 7A and 7B for Staff, and Form SA for HPA/HCA Students, are
herewith supplemented by the Rock Slam Security Check and this is
to be carried out exactly in accordance with HCO Bulletin of
September 12, AD 1 2'~ To increase reality in some cases, it may be
necessary to substitute "Consider committing bad things to. . ."
rather than "Consider committing overts against. . " In very rare
cases it may be necessary to increase the number of buttons but
this is to be the exception rather than the rule. In the vast
majority of cases, just use the four questions only, as per this
bulletin.
This Security Check must be done with full auditor presence, be
done in Model Session and the beginning rudiments especially must
be properly in.
Those partaking in Staff Clearing Programmes can be given this
Check during one of their sessions by their usual auditor. In the
event of any doubt, the Technical Director may also make
arrangements for a further check to be done.
Those not partaking in any Staff Clearing Programme must be
checked by a skilled and reliable auditor under the direct
supervision of the Technical Director.
This Programme will simultaneously also handle picking up Missed
Withholds of old-time Scientologists returning to the Orgs of whom
we can expect a great number, the Security Check being given in
proper Model Session and the Missed Withholds being pulled in the
beginning rudiments.
When a Rock Slam is reported as a result of this Security Check,
a further check should be done to the satisfaction of HCO to
confirm the fact.
Action to be taken to handle a Rock Slammer:
1. If a Staff Member, suspend from any executive post and any
post which involves important action on the communication lines of
Scientology. Such a person may however still be used, at the
discretion of Assoc/Org Sec and HCO, in a subordinate position
under reliable supervision. He is to remain in this position until
his goal has been found, when the situation will again be reviewed.
2. A student on the HPA/HCA Course, (or any other Professional
Course) who is found to be a Rock Slammer should be suspended from
the Course and ordered to the HGC for Auditing.
3. HGC Preclears should be checked early on in their Intensives
to ascertain whether this condition exists.
4. In a Clearing Co-Audit, Rock Slammers should be segregated so
that they are auditing each other, as far as possible, so that they
do not hold back other members of the Co-Audit who are not Rock
Slammers.
Remember, that this Programme should not be regarded as just a
passing phase. It is to be instituted immediately and kept in force
in all Orgs throughout the world for our secure and speedy
expansion.
Insidious methods are used to infiltrate, and especially at times
when expansion is fast and it is thought that our security
arrangements are lax or apparently being relaxed owing to pressure
of work.
So, BE ALERT TO THIS AND DON'T MISS ANYONE OUT "BY MISTAKE".
LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1962 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED 359 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor,
East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 AUGUST 1968 BPI
Auditor SECURITY CHECKS ABOLISHED The practice of security checking
from security check lists like the "Joburg" has been abolished.
There are several reasons for this: 1. We have no interest in the
secrets and crimes of people and no use for them. 2. Security
checking is often done without regard to the point where the person
feels better and so became overrun. 3. Security checking is often
done in disregard of the state of a person's case. 4. Low level
cases do not react on actual crimes and so the "security" furnished
is often a false security. 5. There is public criticism of security
checking as a practice. 6. The existence of lists of crimes in
folders often makes it necessary to destroy the folders which may
contain other technical data which is constructive and valuable. 7.
If a person is a criminal or has overt acts which affect his case,
and speaks of them to an auditor of his own volition, the auditor
is bound by the Auditor's Code not to publish, use or reveal them.
Nothing in this policy letter alters standard grade processing or
rudiments. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH.js.cden Copyright (c) 1968 by
L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 360 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER
OF 30 JULY 1970 Remimeo HCO Secs I & R Hat Ethics Hat Tech C/S Qual
Personnel THE TECH AND ETHICS OF CONFESSIONALS (Compiled from a
briefing to 3rd Mate and 4th Mate Flag given by L. RON HUBBARD)
HCO is primarily interested in JUSTICE.
The method of Justice practised in the 17th and 18th Centuries
was to catch the offenders and hang them, thus keeping the
countryside "quiet".
Although useful as a method of quietening things down, however,
it doesn't do people any good to be hung! You will find the remedy
expressed in this rule:
WHEN YOU GIVE A CONFESSIONAL TO A PERSON WITHOUT FINDING THE
EARLIER BASIC, YOU HANG THEM.
If you can't chase back a Confessional to an F/N you are going to
get continuous Ethics trouble from that person from then on until
it is remedied.
When you give a guy a Confessional and it doesn't produce
anything and the needle is clean you should indicate that the
Confessional was unnecessary. You will probably get an F/N.
HCO's interest in someone is normally in what is going on, what
is he up to NOW. So one tends to omit to ask how come this guy has
been committing overts for the past two-and-a-half years-the same
ones-and it is still going-on? Back in that earlier zone is one
hell of an overt, continuous overts against Scientology or LRH. So
what is it? You should trace it back and you could find a dilly!
It's the EARLIEST item available on that chain that will get the
F/N. And remember that overts of Omission are always preceded by
overts of Commission. So you should ask yourself "How come all
these overts of omission?" There's an earlier overt of commission,
you can be sure.
This gives us another rule:
IF YOU CANNOT F/N A CONFESSIONAL, YOU HAVEN'T GOT IT.
Now it could be the buttons are out (invalidate, protest, action
unnecessary). Did you know you can beef up a TA (send it up high)
by doing an unnecessary action? It acts somewhat like forcing a
wrong item on a pc It puts him on a protest, a rejection and effort
to stop the action. That is where a lot of the unpopularity of
Confessionals stems from.
Of the rudiments ARC Break, problem, withhold, the Confessional
specializes in overts and withholds. So the full panorama of
Confessional buttons is Ruds plus False, Suppress, Invalidate,
Evaluate, Protest, Unnecessary. These buttons are of more interest
to Qual but are perfectly valid in an HCO Confessional. So if the
TA goes up during a Confessional you would check ruds or buttons.
IF YOU DON'T GET AN F/N ON A CONFESSIONAL YOU SHOULD HAVE A LINE
TO QUAL THAT CLEANS IT UP WITHIN 24 HOURS.
Every time the Ethics Officer can't fly a Confessional it has got
to be a 24 hour urgent review. The Confessional repair list
consists of the ruds and buttons,
361
HCO's Technical action should be "Why the hell doesn't this thing
fly?" There is earlier stuff on that chain, or there is other stuff
not yet found. That it flies (F/Ns) means he hasn't done that.
It can of course be an ARC Break needle-people ARC Break with the
physical universe, with fellow men, feel wronged in some way and
have to take it out on somebody, and so commit the overt. But the
somebody they attack is not the source of the upset. They
mis-identify the source. If their think was straight they would be
able to see what the score was and have no charge on it.
An overt therefore is preceded by an ARC Break, and you will find
an ARC Break is the result of a problem.
So each time you don't take a Confessional to FIN you run up
against this. This gives another way for them to get unpopular. But
if it didn't FIN, you also know it was necessary to give the person
a Confessional!
If you give a person a Confessional and you see a trail of
catastrophes in that person's wake afterwards you know it didn't
fly. Similarly a person who makes huge overts out of every little
action, which is in essence self-invalidation, has behind that
somewhere a huge overt-big enough to set the police of several
galaxies after them!
If it doesnt FIN you haven't got it!
The FIN has never been integrated into Confessional technology up
'til now. There hasn't been anything issued that says run a
Confessional to FIN and tells you what to do if it doesn't or won't
FIN.
THE E-METER AND THE CRIMINAL
The joker in all this is that the E-Meter reads on Reality. So
you can have a guy who reads on none of your questions, but you
find out the next day he had done exactly what you asked him. Yet
it didn't read! A real criminal just doesn't read on having killed
his grandmother in cold blood five minutes before the Confessional.
Even if he admits it it doesn't read! But a real criminal won't
clear and won't FIN. Occasionally they will RS.
You have to handle it on a gradient of reality. "Why wasn't that
an overt?" is one way you could try. He would at first be very
surprised at the very thought of it being an overt. But you could
get a stream of justifications off. Another way is to magnify the
overt. You can use that on a "no-overt" case.
The tech of it belongs more in the field of auditing. However HCO
should make an attempt to fly it. It doesn't matter how good or
bad. If there is any question on the FIN or if you can't take it to
FIN send it over to Qual to find the reason why.
Anytime a Confessional is done, some notification of the fact
must go into the pc folder otherwise the C/S can make an error in
C/Sing because of the omitted data. In fact, unless there is
criminal data in the Confessional the whole thing should be slid
into the folder.
HCO AND CASE GAIN
(See HCO P/L 20 July '70, Cases & Morale of Staff)
The percentile of people who have case gain will be proportional
to the level of morale in your org. So it is of interest to HCO to
ask the CIS how many no-case-gain cases he has (Pile 4) trace them
down and isolate them. The names of those not doing well (Piles 2
and 3) should also be known and the numbers so you can make sure
the greater percentage is getting good case gain.
HCO can get trouble stemming from lack of staff case progress.
For instance you find an Exec giving excuses for not doing his job.
It can be due to a no-case-gain under him enturbulating seniors and
associates. They in turn, not recognizing him as the source of the
enturbulation, buy the stops and the "can't be dones" and find some
other excuse as to why not to do their job. Recognize that when
someone dumps his hat on you he has overts, man!
362
An executive instead of reporting that people don't want to work
in his division should be asking "How come they don't want to work
in the division?"
Things will get better to the degree that such cases producing
stops and "cant's" have a line for them to be handled on.
HCO should turn over to the CIS a list of those who have received
Confessionals. The files of the Confessional are turned over and on
those that did not FIN, using the repair list, Qual gets it cleaned
up or otherwise.
Begin a campaign to get all these cases winning.
If there is any query as to which of the four categories of case
folders (per HCO P/L 20 July '70) a person belongs on, it goes on
the one lower. For instance a category (Pile 2) queried as to
status immediately becomes Pile 3.
Pile 4 cases go to HCO and are given Confessionals. If he gets an
FIN, okay. If he doesn't, then it is purely a Div I disciplinary
action-Non Enturbulation order or whatever.
Put up a notice where it can be seen to the effect that "Anyone
who feels bad after a Confessional or who feels they have been
falsely given a Confessional should turn in their names to the Qual
Examiner".
The Ethics Officer can "hot-up" his Confessional by putting in
some test buttons-overts, withholds, missed withholds. You could
even do a pre-assessment for the Confessional. It's all in what you
are looking for.
STATISTICS
HCO has its neck out to the degree that it does not have Stats.
Make sure there is someone in Dept 3 who can handle stats, collect
them, graph them and post them up. A person with bad or low stats
on post will always trace back to having committed an overt of some
kind or another.
AMNESTIES
In order to take advantage of an amnesty, the person accepting it
should make a written statement of the Crimes on which he is
accepting the amnesty.
STATUS OF REPAIR ACTION
A Confessional repair action is not classed as an auditing
session in that the data revealed in it is actionable and is turned
over to HCO. So before turning over to Qual a Confessional that
didn't FIN, tell the person "You have told me all you wish to. You
recognize that any further discoveries in this line will be
actionable."
Written into published form by 4th Mate Flag for L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:RL:rr.aap Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
363
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 NOVEMBER 1970
Remimeo HCO Hats Tech Hats
CONFESSIONALS
HCOs may not do Confessionals or "See Checks".
HCO may only do Meter Checks. This consists of putting the pc on
a meter and noting down the TA, state of needle and attitude of pc.
Where these reads are non optimum (no F/N VGI state of meter) the
pc may be sent to Qual for further check.
Too many cases, too many case programmes, have been fouled up by
non C/Sed See Checking or Confessionals in the past for the
practice to continue.
Real criminals may have bad meters but crimes are often so unreal
to them that they do not read (meters needle read only on things
within the reality or borderline reality of a person). This permits
unskilled See Checking or Confessional actions to pass right by the
culprit.
HCO should learn full investigatory procedure and should only do
metering to establish the pc's meter state, asking no questions.
HCO Investigatory Procedure P/Ls that MUST be known to HCO are:
HCO P/L May '65 - ETHICS OFFICER HAT
HCO P/L 19 Sept '70 - Data Series No. 16, INVESTIGATORY PROCEDURE
HCO, P/L 19 Sept '70 Issue 11 - Data Series No. 17, NARROWING THE
TARGET
TECH & QUAL
Asked to do "Confessionals" or "See Checks" Tech and Qual may do
them only as part of a C/S programme and only as a gradient in the
general action of improving the reality of the case.
An R/S still means crimes. All the other data is true and should
be known but POLYGRAPHS, LIE DETECTORS, METERS ONLY REGISTER AT THE
REALITY LEVEL OF THE BEING, and the reality level of a criminal is
too bad for reads to occur in a majority of cases. Thus the guilty
are falsely freed and the innocent are subjected to annoyance and
upset.
Overts, crimes, etc may come off first as a critical thought
under which lies a harmful (overt) act. On such gradients one
builds up reality and so releases overts.
No meter or See Check or Confessional is sufficiently valuable to
use in detection of crime. The state of the meter itself is of
value since it tells one whom to investigate.
Thus neither Tech nor Qual should assist investigations but
should work on the case against proper C/Ses to get off the overts
and withholds for the case benefit.
364
Overts disclosed in sessions may not be used for justice
purposes. Therefore only crimes discovered by routine investigation
are actionable.
It could be that a crime discovered by investigation is also
gotten off in session. That it was also gotten off in session does
not protect the person from discipline. That it was gotten off in
session is irrelevant and sessions are not part of justice
procedures.
SICKNESS
The broad general clues about suspects are:
The person with the worst meter (TA and needle state) is the most
suspect.
The person whose job product is itself an overt act is the most
likely to commit other crimes.
The person who is most crazy is the most likely to be the guilty
one.
The person who is chronically ill is a suspect.
These are true because the cause of insanity and sickness is
overts.
The person who acts most "PTS" is the one who has most harmed his
fellows.
The person with the worst stats is the most likely suspect.
Beyond these technical observations one cannot go in the field of
justice.
HCOs should learn Investigatory procedures when looking for
criminals. Confessionals and Sec Checks will fail them and they
also mess up cases. Investigatory procedures are quite good enough.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:sb.rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
365
CHRONOLOGICAL INDEX OF CONTENTS
1950
20 Nov. Instruction Protocol-Official
(reissued 2 Sept. 1970) Vol. 4-108
12 Dec. Certification Board-Duties & Responsibilities 115
1954
The Church of Scientology Creed 280
1955
7 Nov. Hubbard Communications Office
(Operational Bulletin) 165
1957
20 Mar. Staff Certificate Display 165
20 Mar. Ministerial Ordination 281
6 Apr. Membership Handling (excerpt) (HCOB) 205
11 Apr. Intensives for Staff see-212
28 Apr. HCO Board of Review-Goal 165
2 May Qualifications of a Permanent
Staff member see-239
3 May Ministerial Qualifications see-281
16 May Intensives for Staff 212
3 June Qualifications of a Permanent Staff Member
(Assoc Sec Directive) 239
11 June Staff Intensives (Assoc Sec Directive) 212
15 Aug. Ministerial Qualifications
(supersedes 3 May 1957) see-281
19 Aug. Release All Certificates 166
2 Sept. Field Certificates 166
5 Sept. Validation of Staff 240
16 Sept. HGC Policy Vol. 4-498
19 Nov. HCO-Final Authority on Certificates (HCOB) 166
1958
28 Mar. Only Org Offices can Certify Clears (HCOB) 167
12 June Ministerial Qualifications (second revision) 281
30 June Procedure for Certifying Clears (HCOB)
(revision of HCOB 28 May 1958) 168
30 June Clear Bracelet Procedure
(revision of 25 Feb. 1958) 169
9 July Staff Clearing HICOB) 213
1 Oct, HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 116
27 Oct, Staff Member Processing 213
17 Nov. Clear Bracelets (HCOB) 170
25 Nov. HCO Board of Review-Fimetion and Practice 117
1959
28 Feb. HCO Board of Review Ditties 119
10 Mar. Permanent Staff Members 240
20 Mar. Certificates Handling 170
24 Apr. Final HPA Exam-HCO Board of Review 121
2 July Staff Auditing Requirement Vol. 0-120
22 July Processing of Staff Members 213
29 July Sending Certificates by Mail 171
28 Aug. BScn Interneships 308
31 Aug. Certifications 171
27 Nov. Purpose-HCO ])card of Review (excerpt) 114
27 Nov. HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 164
31 Dec. Routing of Certificates for Sterling Areas 172
1960
18 Jan. Qualifications of Permanent Staff Members 241
22 Feb. HPA Qualifications 172
25 Apr. Important Certification Change 173
29 Apr. Certification Change 173
3 May Keeping Memberships in Force 206
18 May Certifications 174
23 May Cancellation of Certificates Vol. 1-366
2 June Requirements for Staff Posts 241
7 June Staff Auditing 213
7 July Training Applicants Vol. 2-318, Vol. 4- 132
28 July International Membership Privileges Vol. 2-195
3 Aug. Security of Persons Leaving Staffs 353
11 Oct, Case Assessments for Students 123
7 Nov. HCO Area Secretary Hat Addition Vol. 1- 31
23 Nov. Reality Test for Students see- 128
26 Nov. Permanent Staff Member Requirements 242
13 Dec. Security Checks 353
21 Dec. Staff Clearing-New Policy 214
1961
28 Jan. New Security Rules 354
12 Feb. Certificates and Awards-ReAsed List 175
13 Feb. Permanent Staff Requirement Changes
(modifies 26 Nov. 1960) 243
17 Feb. Staff Post Qualifications
Permanent Executives to be Approved see-244
22 Feb. Permanent Staff Exam 124
26 Feb. Qualification of Executives 243
13 Mar. Staff Auditor Training Vol. 1- 114
22 Mar. Staff Members Ordered to Processing 215
25 Mar. Security Rules (cancels 28 Jan. 1961) 355
CHRONOLOGICAL INDEX OF CONTENTS
1961 (cont.)
28 Mar. Personnel Policies-Staff Post Qualifications
Permanent Executives to be Approved
(modifies 17 Feb. 1961) 244
2 Apr. Staff AuditorTraining-Sequence of Study 334
7 Apr. Examinations of Academy Students
to be done by Director of Processing 126
9 Apr. Staff Intensives (modified) 216
16 May HPA/HCA Requirement 176
22 July Executives' Pay 247
19 Sept. Reality Test for Students
(cancels 23 Nov. 1960) 128
20 Sept. Training Policy 128
3 Oct. Auditing Schedules 217
6 Oct. Staff Clearing 218
23 Oct. Pay of Executives (modifies 22 July 1961) 247
2 Nov. Allowed Processes from Courses 129
2 Nov. Training Quality (reissued 3 Mar. 1967) 129
14 Nov. Stabilization of Clean 176
21 Nov. Training Course Requirements Vol. 4-306
27 Dec. Processing D of I 356
27 Dec. Sec Checks on Staff 356
1962
3 Jan. Upgrading of Auditors Vol. 4-308
5 Jan. Examination for HGC Auditors 336
7 Jan. HCO Board of Review-Class I I Awards 130
17 Jan. Responsibility Again (reissued 7 June 1967) 357
22 Jan. Security Checks 358
22 Jan. Crash Programme Vol. 4- 26
23 Jan.Permanent Executives (amends 17 Feb. 1961) 247
27 Feb. Clean Hands Clearance Check 358
17 May Staff Staff Auditor's Hat 219
21 May Permanent Staff 248
21 May Tape Examinations Vol. 4-158
29 May Interne Hat-What is Expected of Internee 309
5 June Permanent Staff Privilege 206,248
6 June ARC Break Cleanup Programme 349
29 June Staff and I Interne Auditors 311
30 July Certification and Validation
Requirements Vol. 4-326
31 July Oral Examination for HPA/HCA 131
10 Sept. Staff Clearing Program 221
12 Sept. Goal Processing-Importance of 224
13 Sept. Certificate Application Form 177
28 Sept. Saint Hill Briefing Course
Terminations Vol. 4-414
2 Oct. Termination & Classification Vol. 4-415
12 Oct. HPA/HCA Written Examination Vol. 4-334
19 Oct. Preparation of HPA/HCA Certificates 179
29 Oct. Religion 282
30 Oct. Security Risks Infiltration 359
4 Dec. R2-12 Validation 179
1963
13 Feb. Academy Taught Processes Vol. 4-339
14 Feb. How to Examine
Theory Examinations Vol. 4-163
30 Apr. The Saint Hill Staff Co-Audit 225
17 June Staff Clearing Program
(amends 10 Sept. 1962) 226
5 July Sales of Lifetime Memberships or Shares 207
9 July HPA/HCA Certificate Check Sheet Vol. 4-342
12 Aug. Certificates and Awards ISO
22 Aug. ARC Break Assessments on Staff 228
8 Oct. New Saint Hill Certificates
and Course Changes Vol. 4-434
26 Nov. Certificate and Classification Changes
Everyone Classified Vol. 4-360
4 Dec. Org Staff W/H Checks 228
11 Dec. Classification for Everyone
(amends 26 Nov. 1963) Vol. 4-364
13 Dec. Co-Audit 229
1964
5 Feb. Founding Scientologist Certificate Vol. 2-264
21 Feb. Issuing of Certificates 183
21 Feb. Staff Regulations
Auditing Venus Job Vol. 0- 43
19 Mar. Staff Regulations-Staff Intensives, 230
16 June Personnel Records-Admin Carte
(modifies 12 Aug. 1963) 184
1 July Certification and Classification 186
10 Aug Good Workers Vol, 0- 44
5 Sept. Examinations 131
16 Sept. Terminations Vol. 4-447
18 Sept. Final Classification on Termination
from Saint Hill Vol. 4-447
23 Sept. Policies: Dissemination and
Programmes Vol. 2-4 1, Vol. 4- 40
13 Nov. Provisional Class VI Classification
(cancels IS Sept. 1964) Vol. 4-449
31 Dec. Certificates 187
366
1965
circa '65 Qualifications Division 5 Org; Board Outline 3
7 Feb. Keeping Scientology Working
(reissued IS June 1970 & 28 Jan. 1973) 43
14 Feb. Safeguarding Technology
(reissued 7 June 1967) 48
5 Mar. Certificates and Awards
New Status of Honorary Awards 188
16 Mar. Further Material on Study
Examinations see- 133
29 Mar. Administration-Flows and Expansion
The Fast Flow System 78
2 Apr. Meter Checks 140
2 Apr. Star-Rate Checkouts for Process
(modifies 27 Feb. 1965) Vol. 4-453
7 Apr. Book Auditor 190
8 Apr. HCO, Org Executive and Divisional Secretaries,
Justice on, and Auditing of Vol. 1-565
9 Apr. Correction to Policy Letters on
Certification and Awards 191
12 Apr. Classification Pan Marks 131
16 Apr. Drills, Allowed Vol. 4-188
19 Apr. Training and Processing Regulations
Technical Discipline
Students' Questions Vol, 1-388, Vol. a- 65
21 Apr. Basic Certificates - Uncertified Personnel 192
21 Apr. Membership-Attestations 207
23 Apr. Clarification
Auditing of Org Executives Vol. 1-566
24 Apr. Review 341
28 Apr. Routing (excerpt) 141
28 Apr. Power Processes 343
28 Apr. Technical Personnel Vol. 4- 67
29 Apr. Bonuses 231
29 Apr. Ethics-Review (excerpt)
(correction to 24 Apr. 1965) 345
4 May Release Award-Saint Hill 80
13 May SHSBC Unit-Graduation Vol. 4-457
16 May Academy Courses - General Remarks
Zero Courses
Hubbard Recognized Scientologist Vol. 4-347
17 May Academy Processing Vol. 4-224
27 May Processing Vol. 4-570
17 June Scientology Pins
(amends & cancels 12 Apr. 1965) Vol. 2-381
1 July Comm Cycle Additives Vol. 1-426
1 July Ethics Chits Vol. 4- 69
4 July Pc Routing-Review Code 346
7 July Releases, Policy on Vol. 4- 71
9 July Qual Goofs 142
10 July Lines and Terminals-Routing Vol. 0- 113
11 July Assignment of Tech Personnel
(amends & cancels 5 July 1965) Vol. 4- 70
12 July Release Policies
Starting the Pc Vol. 2-326, Vol. 4-572
19 July Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4-574
26 July Release Declaration Restrictions
Healing Amendments 193
30 July Preclear Routing
to Ethics Vol. 1-427, Vol. 4-606
31 July Purposes of the Qualifications Division 1
2 Aug. Chaplain 283
5 Aug. Release Check Outs 143
6 Aug. Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58
7 Aug. Floating Needle on Former Releases 145
9 Aug. Release Check Outs
(addendum to 5 Aug. 1965) 145
17 Aug. Certification of Franchise Students 193
23 Aug. Crediting of Auditor in Release Log Book 194
23 Aug. Classification at Upper Levels
Temporary measure Vol. 4-392
24 Aug. Pcs Released Routing Vol. 4-606
Sept. Membership Policies 208
Sept. Current Policy-Franchise Vol. 3-253
21 Sept. Auditor Estimation Test 337
24 Sept. Free Release Check Vol. 2-275
30 Sept. Statistics for Divisions
(excerpt: Qual Division 5) 2
14 Oct. Potential Trouble Source Routing 348
14 Oct. Course Pattern
(amends 27 Feb. 1965) Vol. 4-464
19 Oct. Release Declarations 146
22 Oct, Requirements for Student Classification 146
27 Oct. Grade Award Insignia 194
0 Nov. The Cramming Section 305
3 Nov. Release Pins 195
30 Nov. The Promotional Actions of an organization
(excerpt: Qualifications Division 5) 4
10 Dec. Membership Billing (Sec ED 147 INT) 209
13 Dec. Numbering of Certificates 196
15 Dec. Additions to "The Promotional Action,
of a. Organization" seeing, 205
28 Dec. Met Allowed Vol. 4- 77
30 Dec. ITS Auditing
and Routing Vol. 1-439, Vol. 4-578
1966
4 Jan. Personnel Staff Status 249
13 Jan. Regulations for Auditing of Staff & Students 233
17 Jan. Uncrossed Certificates-HAS, MBAs HQS 197
19 Jan. Chaplain, Transfer of 283
1 Feb. HGCCum
Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63
1 Feb. Staff Auditor and Supervisor Procurement 65
10 Feb. Tech Recovery 66
10 Feb. Bonuses for Service Delivery Vol. 3-204
10 Feb. Check Sheets, Course Vol. 4-466
14 Feb. Doctor Title Abolished Vol. 2-119
7 Mar. HGC Cum (Continued) 69
7 Mar. Star Rates on Tech and Qual Staff 70
8 Mar. High Crime 71
29 Apr. Policy Check Outs and Meter 252
9 May Bonuses Adjusted
(correction to 10 Feb. 1966) Vol. 3-206
29 June Keep Academy Check Sheets Up-to-Date 132
20 July Staff Status see-253
21 July Tech vs Qual 82
1 Aug. Sign Ups and Discounts 198
1 Aug. Refund Addition-Membirship Refunds
(adds to 31 July 1966) Vol. 3-347
5 Aug. Chaplain's Court-Civil Hearings 284
6 Aug. Declare, Multiple 83
16 Aug. Release Grades 199
22 Aug. Addendum to HCO Pol Ltr of 20 July 1966
"Staff status" 254
6 Oct. Cramming-Students Who Flunk
Classification for a Level 306
12 Oct. Examinations Vol. 4-198
17 Oct. Bonuses Vol. 3-209
7 Nov. Clear Check-outs in Continental Orgs 147
15 Nov. Routing of Chaplain's Court Orders 286
21 Nov. Addendum to HCO PC of 17 October 1966
"Bonuses" Vol. 3-211
1967
1 Feb. Student Auditing of Preclear
(replaces 29 Oct. 1965) 132
3 Mar. Training Quality (reissue of 2 Nov. 196 1) 129
21 Mar. Org Exec Course Vol. 0- 3
7 June Safeguarding Technology
(reissue of 14 Feb. 1965) 48
7 June Responsibility Again (reissue of 17 Jan. 1962) 357
1 Sept. ARC Break Cleanup Programme
(excerpt from ED 473 WW 842 SH) 350
6 Sept. Clear Check Outs see-148
1 Sept. Interne Training Programme 312
13 Sept. Further Material on Study-Examinations
(reissue of 16 Mar. 1965) 133
13 Sept. Clear Check Outs (amends 6 Sept. 1967) 148
15 Sept. Release and Clear Check Outs 149
15 Sept. Examiner Bonuses 151
20 Sept. Confidential Data Vol. 4-90
22 Sept. Solo Auditing Folders 135
22 Sept. Ministerial Qualifications
(reissue of 12 June 1958) see-281
22 Sept. Routing Form Attestations Vol. 1-62
25 Sept. Grades Above Clear 153
8 Oct. Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks HICOB) 152 20 Oct. The Lines of
the Qualifications Division
The Interview Invoice Section 102
2 Nov. Qualifications Division, Depts. of Examinations,
Review and Certifications and Awards 5
2 Nov. Chaplain's Section (excerpt) 7, 287
8 Nov. Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks 154
28 Dec. Qual Senior Datum 73
1968
9 Jan. Cancellation of HCO PL of 12 Sept. 1967
and HCO PL of 13 Sept. 1967 154
11 Jan. Speed of Service (ED 805 INT) 84
6 Feb. Organization-The Flaw 79
7 Feb. Fast Flow and Ethics 84
24 Feb. Fast Flow for SHSBC Students' Preclears
(amends 30 Dec. 1966) 85
2 Mar. Qual Sec Must Be Clear
(modifies 15 Sept. 1967) 74
11 Mar. False Attestation 85
13 Mar. Statistics 75
14 Mar. Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
Fast Flow (reissued 8 May 1968) 86
19 Mar. Staff Status (20 July 1966 amended) 253
8 May Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
Fast Flow (reissue of 14 Mar. 1968) 86
15 May Additions to HCO PL 14 March 1968,
reissued 8 May 1968, "Policies Governing
the Qualifications Division" 91
31 May Scientology Technology 49
17 June ARC Break Registrars and Auditors
(corrects 2 Nov. 1967) 7,350
1 Aug. Cancel Attestation on UK and US SHSBC...
(LRH ED 29WW 16SH I EU I US) 92
26 Aug. Security Checks Abolished 360
367
1968 (cont.)
27 Aug. Sea Org Internes 315
2 Sept. Chaplain 287
7 Sept. Review Complete-Pc Attestations 92
18 Sept. Examiner's Form see-163
30 Sept. Examiner's Form (Revised) see-163
13 Oct. Examiner 155
14 Oct. The Auditor's Code AD 18 Vol. 4-111
19 Oct. Course Completion
Student Indicators Vol. 4-202
29 Oct. Star for Clan Vill C/S Qual 7
2 Nov. Auditor's Code-Add to
Pol Ltr 14 October AD IS see Vol. 4-112
21 Nov. Senior Policy 49
2 Dec. Examinations 135
9 Dec. Qual Has No Backlog (LRH ED 61 INT
issued as HCO PL 4 Oct. 1970) 75
11 Dec. Examiner (addendum to 13 Oct. 1968) 155
13 Dec. Cancellation (of 14 Mar. 1968) 93
1969
5 Jan. Staff Status Two (modifies 4 Jan. 1966) 255
12 Jan. Auditors and Training 340
13 Jan. Standard Examinations 136
17 Jan. Pc Attestations 93
20 Jan. ARC Break Program 351
20 Jan. Classification see-200
20 Jan. A Vital Target-Trained Auditor Programme
(LRH ED 81 INT) Vol. 4- 93
20 Jan. Attestation Reinstated (LRH ED 82 INT
issued as HCO PL 3 Sept. 1969) 95
28 Jan. Addition to HCO Pol Ltr of 14 March 1968
Policies Governing the Qualifications Division
Fast Flow 94
5 Feb. Press Policy-Code of a Scientologist Vol. 0- 25
12 Feb. Religion 288
13 Feb. Ethics Protection Conditions - Blue Star,
Gwen Star, Gold Star Vol. 0-248, Vol. 1-492
6 Mar. Scientology is a Religion 289
4 Apr. Scientology Marriage Ceremonies 291
24 Apr. A Scientology Church Register 291
5 May Dianetic Course Examinations 137
5 May Auditor's Code and Dianetics Vol. 4-234
8 May Fast Flow by Attestation Vol. 4-237
9 May Examiner's Form (30 Sept. 1968 revised) see- 163
13 May Cramming Section
Service to Trained Auditors 307
20 May Keeping Dianetics Working in an Area (HCOB) 50
24 June Dianetics-Pre-Aurfiting Examination 138
11 July Dianetics Auditing Completion Certificate 199
22 July Fast Flow Training (cancels 28 Jan. 1969) 94
3 Sept. Attestation Reinstated (LRH ED 82 INT
issued as a Policy Letter) 95
7 Sept. Classification (20 Jan. 1969
amended & reissued) 200
21 Sept. Staff Training Officer 237
13 Nov. Interneships and Case Supervisors 316
15 Nov. Rights and Duties 76
18 Nov. Dianetics-Right to Audit 201
18 Nov. Dianetics - Right to Teach 202
1970
26 Jan. Examiner and Floating Needle
(revises 13 Oct. 1968 & I I Dec. 1968) 156
26 Jan. Examiner's Form
(replaces & revises 9 May 1969) see- 163
26 Jan. Scientology Prayer 292
23 Feb. Ethics
Quality of Service Vol. 1-506, Vol. 4-100
28 Mar. R6EW and Clear
(cancels & replaces 28 Jan. 1970) 157
29 Mar. Qual Sears Revised (excerpt)
(amends 30 Sept. 1965) 8
6 Apr. Scientology Release Attestation Form 96
11 Apr. Review Complete? 158
16 Apr. Monte 293
18 Apr. Correction to HCO P/L 13 Nov. 1969 see-316
25 Apr. Guarantee of Service Delivery . 203
10 May Single Declare (cancels 6 Aug. 1966) 98
21 May Fast Flow Grades Cancelled
(LRH ED 103 INT) 99
23 May Cancellation of Policies Governing the
Qualifications Division-Fast Flow 101
30 May Cutatives 52
3 June Orders to Divisions for Immediate Compliance
(excerpt: Division V) (LRH ED 107 INT) 9
8 June Student Auditing Vol. 4-227
15 June Keeping Scientology Working
(reissue of 7 Feb. 1965) (winced 28 Jan. 1973) 43
17 June OIC Change-Cable Change (excerpt)
(cancels 29 Mar. 1970, amends 30 Sept. 1965) 10
17 June Technical Degrades 54
25 June Expanded Lower Grades
Chart of Abilities Gained and
Inabilities Lost (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) see- 159
1970 (cont.)
25 June Expanded Lower Grades-Chart of Abilities
Gained and Inabilities Lost (revised & reissued
17 July 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159
15 July Reorganization of the Correction Division I I
17 July Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities
Gained and Inabilities Lost (revision & reissue
of 25 June 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159
20 July Cases and Morale of Staff 234
20 July Internships and Case Supervisors
(amends 13 Nov. 1969 &IS Apr. 1970) 317
22 July Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech 319
30 July The Tech and Ethics of Confessionals 361
8 Aug. Reorganization of the Correction Division
(amends 15 July 1970) 14
2 Sept. Instruction Protocol-Official
(reissue of 20 Nov. 1950) Vol. 4- 108
8 Sept. Examiner's 24 Hour Rule 161
22 Sept. Ideal Scenes and Statistics for
Correction Division Five 18
3 Oct. Medicine and Dianetics 298
3 Oct. The Role of the Medical Officer 300
4 Oct. Qual Has No Backlog (originally issued
as LRH ED 61 INT, 9 Dec. 1968) 75
11 Oct. Medical Officer's Code 303
27 Oct. A Book: "The Background to the Religion of
Scientology and Ceremonies of the Church of
Scientology of California World Wide" 294
15 No, Confessionals 364
1971
13 Jan. Exam 24 Hour Rule (additional information) 162
13 Jan. Attestation at Certs & Awards 204
5 Feb. Ong Gross Divisional Statistics Revised
(excerpt: Qual Division 5) (amends 30 Sept.
1965, 17 June 1970 & 22 Sept. 1970) 22
7 Feb. FEBC Org Board Division 5 23
17 Feb. Clan VII 320
5 Mar. The Fantastic New HGC Line (HCOB) Vol. 4-581 6 Mar. Line
Design-HGC Lines, An Example Vol. 4-585
8 Mar. Examiner's Form (replaces & revises
9 May 1969 & 26 Jan. 1970) 163
12 Apr. Ordination Ceremony 29S
4 June Prayer Day Ordination Ceremony 296
19 July Internes (HCOB) 322
2 Aug. Additional Qual Stat 28
2 Aug. Study Time 256
9 Aug. ARC Break Program (cancel, 20 Jan. 1969) 352
14 Aug. Die V Mini Qual Org Board
(revised 5 Sept. 1971 & 19 Nov. 197 1) 29
24 Aug. Interne Checksheets - Okays to Audit 324
2 Oct. Divisional Summary for Division V
Correction Division (FDD 18 Qual Intl 30
23 Oct. Personnel Programming Rules (HCOB) 259
23 Oct. Personnel Programming Technology (HOOD) 262
23 Oct. Personnel Programming White Form (HCOB) 264
23 Oct. Master Personnel Programming
Tally Sheet (HCOB) 268
23 Oct. Personnel Programmer Ethics Intervention
Rights (HCOB) 272
23 Oct. Individual Staff Study Orders (HCOB) 273
26 Oct. Tech Downgrades 56
6 Nov. Selling Internships (amends 20 July 1970) 325
6 Nov. Interneships Line-Up-Auditor Interneships 326
6 Nov. Case Supervisor Interneships 328
6 Nov. HGC Auditors and HOC Auditors in Training 329
8 Nov. Interneships
Electronic Attestation Form see-330
21 Nov. Scientology Courses Examination Policy
(addition to 8 Mar. 1966) 139
7 Dec. Correction Division-Purposes, Ideal Scenes,
Products, Statistics (cancels 22 Sept. 1970,
15 July 1970 & 8 An& 1970) 35
14 Dec. The Linn of the Correction Division
Qual Interview and Invoice Lines
and Beatings (amends 20 Nov. 1967) 106
14 Dec. Qual Student Lines 107
14 Dec. Qual Preclear Lines 109
14 Dec. Qual Staff Service Lines III
14 Dec. Qual Technical Lines 112
14 Dec. Qual Interview and Invoice Officer Lines
Administration 113
1972
13 Jan. Tips on Personnel Programming (HCOB) 274
13 Jan. Inter-Dependent Halting and
Programming Functions 276
14 Jan. Management Cycle (24 June 1970 revised) 277
14 Jan. The "OK To Be A - - " System 278
22 Jan. Personnel Programming 258
5 Feb. Div V Mini Qual Org Board
(revision of 14 Aug. 1971 & 19 Nov. 1971) 42
16 Feb. The Purpose of the Department
of Personnel Enhancement 210
18 Feb. Interneships-Electronic Attestation Form
(revises 8 Nov, 197 1) 330
22 Feb. Interneship Errors Found 332
368
HUBBARD SCIENTOLOGY ORGANIZATIONS
THE CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
ADVANCED ORGANIZATIONS
Church of Scientology of California
Advanced Organization
of LOS Angeles
916 South Westlake Street
Los Angeles, California 90006
Church of Scientology
Advanced Organization United Kingdom
Saint Hill Manor
East Grinstead, Sussex, England
Church of Scientology
Advanced Organization Denmark
Jernbanegade 6
1608 Copenhagen V
Denmark
HUBBARD COLLEGES OF SCIENTOLOGY
Church of Scientology of California
American Saint Hill Organization
2723 West Temple Street
Los Angeles, California 90026
Church of Scientology
Hubbard College of Scientology
Saint Hill Manor
East Grinstead, Sussex, England
Church of Scientology
Saint Hill Denmark
Jernbanegade 6
1608 Copenhagen V
Denmark
CONTINENTAL AND AREA ORGANIZATIONS
UNITED STATES
PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION
Church of Scientology of California
Publications Organization
C/O ASHO
2723 West Temple Street
Los Angeles, California 90926
CELEBRITY CENTRES
Church of Scientology of California
Celebrity Centre
1661 North La Brea Avenue
Hollywood, California 90026
Church of Scientology
Celebrity Centre New York
65 East 82nd Street
New York, New York 10028
LOCAL CHURCHES
WASHINGTON, D.C.
Founding Church of Scientology
2125 S Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20008
AUSTIN
Church of Scientology
2504 Rio Grande
Austin, Texas 78705
HAWAII
Church of Scientology
143 Nenue Street
Honolulu, Hawaii 96821
SAN DIEGO
Church of Scientology
926 "C" Street
San Diego, California 92102
SAN FRANCISCO
Church of Scientology of California
414 Mason Street
San Francisco, California 94102
LAS VEGAS
Church of Scientology
2108 Industrial Road
Las Vegas, Nevada 89102
LOS ANGELES
Church of Scientology of California
2005 West 9th Street
Los Angeles, California 90006
PORTLAND
Church of Scientology
1607 N.E. 41st Street
Portland, Oregon 97232
SEATTLE
Church of Scientology
1531 4th Avenue
Seattle, Washington 98101
ST. LOUIS
Church of Scientology
3730 Lindell Boulevard
St. Louis, Missouri 63108
TWIN CITIES
Church of Scientology
730 Hennepin Avenue
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403
BOSTON
Church of Scientology
448 Beacon Street
Boston, Massachusetts 02115
BUFFALO
Church of Scientology
1116 Elmwood Avenue
Buffalo, New York 14222
DETROIT
Church of Scientology
19 Clifford Street
Detroit, Michigan 48226
MIAMI
Church of Scientology
1235 Brickell Avenue
Miami, Florida 33131
NEW YORK
Church of Scientology of New York
25-30 West 74th Street
New York, New York 10023
PHILADELPHIA
Church of Scientology
8 West Lancaster Avenue
Ardmore, Pennsylvania 19003
SACRAMENTO
Church of Scientology of California
819 19th Street
Sacramento, California 95814
CHICAGO
Church of Scientology
1555 Maple Street
Evanston, Illinois 60201
CANADA
TORONTO
Church of Scientology
124 Avenue Road
Toronto 180, Ontario
VANCOUVER
Church of Scientology
4857 Main Street
Vancouver 10.
British Columbia
OTTAWA
Church of Scientology
292 Somerset Street, West
Ottawa
MONTREAL
Church of Scientology
1168 St. Catherine Street, W.101
Montreal, Quebec H2Y 1B5
UNITED KINGDOM
LOCAL CHURCHES
Saint Hill Foundation
Saint Hill Manor
East Grinstead, Sussex
PLYMOUTH
Hubbard Scientology Organization
39, Portland Square
Sherwell
Plymouth, Devon
MANCHESTER
Hubbard Scientology Organization
43 Faulkner Street
Manchester
LONDON
Hubbard Scientology Organization
68, Tottenham Court Road
London W.1.
SCOTLAND
HAPI
Fleet House
20 South Bridge
Edinburgh Scotland
AUSTRALIA/NEW ZEALAND
ADELAIDE
Church of the New Faith
57 Pulteney Street
Fullarton, Adelaide 5000
South Australia
MELBOURNE
Church of the New Faith
724 Inkerman Road
North Caulfield 3161
Melbourne, Victoria, Australia
PERTH
Church of the New Faith
Pastoral House
St. George's Terrace
Perth 5000
Western Australia
SYDNEY
Church of the New Faith
1 Lee Street
Sydney 2000
New South Wales Australia
AUCKLAND
Church of Scientology
New Imperial Buildings
44 Queen Street
Auckland, New Zealand
EUROPE
PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION
Church of Scientology
Publications Organization
C/O SH Denmark
Jernbanegade 6
1608 Copenhagen V
Denmark
LOCAL CHURCHES
COPENHAGEN
Church of Scientology
Hovedvagispade 6
1103 Copenhagen K
Denmark
Church of Scientology
Frederiksborgvej 5
2400 Copenhagen V
Denmark
PARIS
Church of Scientology
12, rue de la Montagne Ste Genevieve
75005 Paris, France
VIENNA
Scientology-Osterreich
A-1070 Wien
Marlahilferstrasse 88A/Stg. 3/1/9
Vienna, Austria
BRUSSELS
Church of Scientology
45A, Rue de l'Ecuyer
1000 Brussels, Belgium
AMSTERDAM
Church of Scientology
Singel 261
Amsterdam, Netherlands
BERLIN
Church of Scientology
1000 Berlin 12
Giesebrechstrasse 10
Berlin, Germany
MUNICH
Church of Scientology
8000 Munich 2
Lindwurmstrasse 29
West Germany
GOTEBORG
Church of Scientology
Magasinsgatan 12
S-411 18 Goteborg, Sweden
STOCKHOLM
Scientology Kyrkan
Kammakaregatan 46
S-111 60 Stockholm, Sweden
MALMO
Church of Scientology
Skomakaregatan 12
S-211 34 Malmo, Sweden
AFRICA
JOHANNESBURG
Church of Scientology
99 Polly Street
Johannesburg, South Africa
CAPE TOWN
Church of Scientology
3rd Floor, Garmour House
127 Plein Street
Cape Town, South Africa
PORT ELIZABETH
Church of Scientology
2 St Christopher's
27 Westbourne Road
Port Elizabeth, South Africa 6001
DURBAN
Church of Scientology
57 College Lane
Durban, South Africa
PRETORIA
Church of Scientology
224 Central House
Cnr Central & Pretorious Streets
Pretoria, South Africa
BULAWAYO
Church of Scientology
508 Kirrie Bldgs.
Abercorn Street
Bulawayo Rhodesia
[end]